TR8138 JV DD G002 TS SE 000001 Technical Specifications D01V01a

INTERIM
REPORT
XXX
XXX
VARIATION ORDER NO.01

GROUP 0: GAZARIA-UTTAR
MATLAB BRIDGE
FEASIBILITY STUDY FOR
CONSTRUCTION OF BRIDGES
OVER THE RIVER MEGHNA
ON SHARIATPUR-CHANDPUR
ROAD & GAZARIA-
MUNSHIGANJ ROAD AND
PREPARATION OF MASTER
PLAN FOR BANGLADESH
BRIDGE AUTHORITY
April 2022
Government of the People’s Republic of Bangladesh

Ministry of Road Transport & Bridges
Bridges Division
Bangladesh Bridge Authority (BBA)
FEASIBILITY STUDY FOR CONSTRUCTION OF BRIDGES OVER THE
RIVER MEGHNA ON SHARIATPUR-CHANDPUR ROAD & GAZARIA-
MUNSHIGANJ ROAD AND PREPARATION OF MASTER PLAN FOR
BANGLADESH BRIDGE AUTHORITY
Quality Control sheet

Document Technical Specification for Works - Matlab
Project TR8138-Master Plan BBA. Variation Order No.1. Group 0. Gazaria-Uttar Matlab Bridge
Code 679955359.docx
Authors: Signed:
Date:
Verified Signed:
Date:
Recipient Bangladesh Bridge Authority (BBA)
Notes Document created by the Joint Venture formed by TYPSA-DOHWA-NIPPON KOEI-DDC-

BCL-DEVCON
Master Plan Project. Phase 2: Feasibility Study 679955359.docx

Group 0. Gazaria – Uttar Matlab Bridge Página 0 de 394
Contents
Technical Specification for Works - Structures............................................................................................................................... 23
PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION.................................................................................................................................................. 23
0. GENERAL.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
0.1. Scope and General Information......................................................................................................................................... 25
0.1.1.Location and description of the Project......................................................................................................................... 25
0.1.2.Extent of the Works.................................................................................................................................................................. 25
0.1.3.Drawings...................................................................................................................................................................................... 26
0.1.4.Information provided.............................................................................................................................................................. 26
0.2. Site Areas, Access and Use.................................................................................................................................................. 31
0.2.1.Boundaries of the Site............................................................................................................................................................ 31
0.2.2.Adjoining sites............................................................................................................................................................................ 32
0.2.3.Contractor’s Working Areas................................................................................................................................................. 33
0.2.4.Possession................................................................................................................................................................................... 33
0.2.5.Access............................................................................................................................................................................................ 33
0.2.6.Security.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 34
0.2.7.Cleanliness and reinstatement.......................................................................................................................................... 34
0.2.8.Disposal and pollution........................................................................................................................................................... 35
0.2.9.Health and Safety on Site..................................................................................................................................................... 35
0.2.10. Temporary Works........................................................................................................................................................... 36
0.2.11. Works off Site.................................................................................................................................................................... 37
0.2.12. Notice to Mariners & Civil Aviation Authority..................................................................................................... 37
0.2.13. Contractor’s Programme and Method Statements........................................................................................ 37
0.2.14. Environment...................................................................................................................................................................... 39
0.3. General and Sundry obligations........................................................................................................................................ 41
0.3.1.Surveys and setting out......................................................................................................................................................... 41
0.3.2.Sign Boards................................................................................................................................................................................. 42
0.3.3.Progress Photographs and Video Record.................................................................................................................... 42
0.3.4.Water Level Gauges and Meteorological Station..................................................................................................... 42
0.3.5.Working Drawings................................................................................................................................................................... 43

0.3.6.Environmental Obligations.................................................................................................................................................. 43
0.4. Special Requirements............................................................................................................................................................. 52
0.4.1.Safety of Navigation................................................................................................................................................................ 52
0.4.2.Visiting Dignitaries, Seminars, Training, Educational and other Brochures................................................53
0.4.3.Operation and Maintenance Manual............................................................................................................................. 53
0.5. Programme and Progress Reports and Returns........................................................................................................ 54
0.5.1.General.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 54
0.5.2.Progress Meetings................................................................................................................................................................... 55
0.5.3.Daily Records and Weekly Returns.................................................................................................................................. 55
0.5.4.Monthly Returns........................................................................................................................................................................ 55
0.5.5.Submission of Returns '......................................................................................................................................................... 56
0.6. Quality Assurance, Standards and Materials Testing.............................................................................................. 56
0.6.1.Quality Assurance.................................................................................................................................................................... 56
0.6.2.Procedures.................................................................................................................................................................................. 56
0.6.3.Tests and Inspection Records............................................................................................................................................ 56
0.6.4.Contractor’s Testing and Inspection............................................................................................................................... 57
0.6.5.Engineer’s Testing and Inspection................................................................................................................................... 57
0.6.6.Notice of Works Off Site........................................................................................................................................................ 57
0.6.7.Standards..................................................................................................................................................................................... 58
0.6.8.Proprietary Products............................................................................................................................................................... 59
0.6.9.Materials to be New................................................................................................................................................................ 59
0.6.10. Orders for Materials....................................................................................................................................................... 59
0.6.11. Samples............................................................................................................................................................................... 59
0.6.12. Certificates.......................................................................................................................................................................... 59
0.7. Engineer’s and Employer’s Requirements.................................................................................................................... 59
0.7.1.General.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 59
0.7.2.Attendance.................................................................................................................................................................................. 60
0.7.3.Consumables............................................................................................................................................................................. 61
0.7.4.Removal of Facilities on Completion.............................................................................................................................. 61
0.7.5.Communications, Internet and IT Services.................................................................................................................. 61
0.7.6.Electricity Supply....................................................................................................................................................................... 61

0.7.7.Water Supply.............................................................................................................................................................................. 62
0.8. Engineer’s and Employer’s Site Office............................................................................................................................ 62
0.8.1.General.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 62
0.8.2.Prefabricated Office Accommodation............................................................................................................................ 62
0.8.3.General Requirements........................................................................................................................................................... 64
0.8.4.Personnel...................................................................................................................................................................................... 65
0.9. Engineer’s Laboratory............................................................................................................................................................. 65
0.9.1.General.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 65
0.9.2.Prefabricated Laboratories.................................................................................................................................................. 66
0.9.3.Building and Utilities............................................................................................................................................................... 66
0.9.4.Equipment.................................................................................................................................................................................... 67
0.9.5.Approval of Laboratory.......................................................................................................................................................... 67
0.9.6.Maintenance of Engineer’s Laboratories...................................................................................................................... 68
0.9.7.Personnel...................................................................................................................................................................................... 68
0.10. Engineer’s and Employer’s Accommodation.................................................................................................... 69
0.10.1. General................................................................................................................................................................................. 69
0.10.2. Prefabricated Residential Accommodation....................................................................................................... 69
0.10.3. Personnel............................................................................................................................................................................ 71
0.10.4. Meals for Residents of Engineer’s and Employer’s Accommodation....................................................71
0.11. Communications and IT Facilities.......................................................................................................................... 72
0.12. Engineer’s and Employer’s Transport................................................................................................................... 73
0.12.1. General................................................................................................................................................................................. 73
0.12.2. Vehicles................................................................................................................................................................................ 74
0.12.3. Boats..................................................................................................................................................................................... 75
0.12.4. Berthing Facilities for Boats....................................................................................................................................... 76
0.13. Survey Equipment Supplied to the Engineer and Employer.....................................................................76
0.13.1. General................................................................................................................................................................................. 76
0.13.2. Survey Equipment.......................................................................................................................................................... 77
0.13.3. GPS Reference Station................................................................................................................................................. 79
0.13.4. Software.............................................................................................................................................................................. 79
0.13.5. Personnel............................................................................................................................................................................ 80

0.13.6. Training................................................................................................................................................................................ 80
0.14. Removal and/or relocation of Existing Utilities................................................................................................. 80
0.15. Provisional Visitor Centre............................................................................................................................................ 80
1. SITE CLEARANCE................................................................................................................................................................................... 85
1.1. General........................................................................................................................................................................................... 85
1.2. Topsoil............................................................................................................................................................................................ 85
1.3. Dust and Drainage Control................................................................................................................................................... 85
2. EARTHWORKS......................................................................................................................................................................................... 86
2.1. Glossary of Terms..................................................................................................................................................................... 86
2.1.1.Areas of Fill.................................................................................................................................................................................. 86
2.1.2.Earthworks final surface........................................................................................................................................................ 86
2.1.3.Earthworks material................................................................................................................................................................ 86
2.1.4.Formation..................................................................................................................................................................................... 86
2.1.5.Intermediate areas of fill........................................................................................................................................................ 86
2.1.6.Public fill........................................................................................................................................................................................ 86
2.2. Materials........................................................................................................................................................................................ 86
2.2.1.Fill material.................................................................................................................................................................................. 86
2.3. Submissions................................................................................................................................................................................ 88
2.3.1.Particulars of Earthworks...................................................................................................................................................... 88
2.3.2.Particulars of Blasting............................................................................................................................................................. 88
2.4. General Earthworks Requirements.................................................................................................................................. 89
2.4.1.Ownership of earthworks Material................................................................................................................................... 89
2.4.2.Temporary Works for earthworks..................................................................................................................................... 89
2.4.3.Handling and storage of earthworks material............................................................................................................ 89
2.4.4.Protection from water and weather................................................................................................................................. 89
2.4.5.Earthworks material allowed to become unsuitable or to deteriorate...........................................................90
2.4.6.Additional excavation and stabilisation......................................................................................................................... 90
2.4.7.Removal of earthworks material....................................................................................................................................... 90
2.5. Excavation.................................................................................................................................................................................... 90
2.5.1.Disposal of excavated material......................................................................................................................................... 90
2.5.2.Use of excavated material................................................................................................................................................... 91

2.5.3.Obstructions................................................................................................................................................................................ 91
2.5.4.Excavation.................................................................................................................................................................................... 91
2.5.5.Excavation adjacent to structures and utilities.......................................................................................................... 91
2.5.6.Excavations for structures, pits and trenches............................................................................................................. 91
2.6. Blasting Trials.............................................................................................................................................................................. 92
2.6.1.Blasting trials.............................................................................................................................................................................. 92
2.6.2.Controlled blasting trials....................................................................................................................................................... 92
2.6.3.Results of blasting trials......................................................................................................................................................... 92
2.6.4.Commencement of blasting............................................................................................................................................... 92
2.6.5.Changes In blasting procedure......................................................................................................................................... 92
2.7. Blasting.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 93
2.7.1.Statutory requirements for blasting................................................................................................................................. 93
2.7.2.Recording vibrations due to blasting.............................................................................................................................. 93
2.7.3.Preparatory work for blasting............................................................................................................................................. 93
2.7.4.Notification of blasting........................................................................................................................................................... 93
2.7.5.Storage of explosives............................................................................................................................................................. 94
2.7.6.Restrictions on blasting times............................................................................................................................................ 94
2.7.7.Blasting.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 94
2.7.8.Controlled Blasting.................................................................................................................................................................. 95
2.8. Deposition of Fill Material...................................................................................................................................................... 96
2.8.1.Types of fill material................................................................................................................................................................. 96
2.8.2.Sources of fill material............................................................................................................................................................ 96
2.8.3.Surface preparation for fill material................................................................................................................................. 96
2.8.4.Commencement of deposition of fill material............................................................................................................ 96
2.8.5.Haulage of fill material........................................................................................................................................................... 96
2.8.6.Deposition of fill material...................................................................................................................................................... 96
2.8.7.Overfilling...................................................................................................................................................................................... 97
2.8.8.Deposition of fill material adjacent to structures and utilities.............................................................................97
2.8.9.Deposition of rockfill material............................................................................................................................................. 97
2.8.10. Deposition of fill material in excavation for structures, pits and trenches...........................................97
2.9. Compaction of Fill Material.................................................................................................................................................. 98

2.9.1.Compaction of fill material................................................................................................................................................... 98
2.9.2.Moisture content of fill material......................................................................................................................................... 98
2.9.3.Compaction of fill material adjacent to structures and utilities..........................................................................98
2.9.4.Compaction of rock fill material........................................................................................................................................ 98
2.9.5.Compaction of general fill material with a large portion of coarse material...............................................99
2.10. Completion of Earthworks Surfaces................................................................................................................... 100
2.10.1. Completion of earthworks final surfaces.......................................................................................................... 100
2.10.2. Completion of formations......................................................................................................................................... 100
2.10.3. Protection of earthworks final surfaces and formations............................................................................100
2.11. Intermediate Areas of Fill.......................................................................................................................................... 101
2.11.1. Deposition of fill material in intermediate areas of fill.................................................................................101
2.11.2. Compaction of fill material in intermediate areas of fill.............................................................................101
2.12. Tolerances....................................................................................................................................................................... 101
2.12.1. Tolerances: earthworks final surfaces and formations..............................................................................101
2.13. Testing: Fill Material - General Requirements................................................................................................. 102
2.13.1. Batch: fill material......................................................................................................................................................... 102
2.13.2. Samples: fill material................................................................................................................................................... 102
2.14. Testing............................................................................................................................................................................... 102
2.14.1. Testing Requirements................................................................................................................................................ 102
3. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURE.................................................................................................................. 103
3.1. Description................................................................................................................................................................................. 103
3.2. Construction Operations..................................................................................................................................................... 103
3.2.1.Setting Out................................................................................................................................................................................. 103
3.2.2.Excavation................................................................................................................................................................................. 103
3.2.3.Dewatering Protection......................................................................................................................................................... 103
3.2.4.Preparation of Foundation................................................................................................................................................. 104
3.2.5.Slips and Bows....................................................................................................................................................................... 105
3.2.6.Public Safety............................................................................................................................................................................. 105
3.2.7.Backfilling for Structures..................................................................................................................................................... 105
3.2.8.Disposal of Excavated Materials.................................................................................................................................... 106
3.2.9.Measurement........................................................................................................................................................................... 106

3.2.10. Payment............................................................................................................................................................................ 106
4. GEOTECHNICAL WORKS................................................................................................................................................................. 107
4.1. General Requirements......................................................................................................................................................... 107
4.1.1.General Requirements......................................................................................................................................................... 107
4.1.2.Site clearance.......................................................................................................................................................................... 107
4.1.3.Earthworks................................................................................................................................................................................ 107
4.1.4.Concrete..................................................................................................................................................................................... 107
4.2. Ground Investigation Glossary of Terms..................................................................................................................... 107
4.2.1.Block sample........................................................................................................................................................................... 107
4.2.2.Bulk sample.............................................................................................................................................................................. 107
4.2.3.Inspection pit............................................................................................................................................................................ 107
4.2.4.Jar sample................................................................................................................................................................................. 107
4.2.5.Mazier sample......................................................................................................................................................................... 108
4.2.6.Sample........................................................................................................................................................................................ 108
4.2.7.Slope surface stripping....................................................................................................................................................... 108
4.2.8.Trial pit......................................................................................................................................................................................... 108
4.2.9.U 100 and U 76 samples.................................................................................................................................................... 108
4.2.10. Undisturbed soil sample........................................................................................................................................... 108
4.3. Submissions.............................................................................................................................................................................. 108
4.3.1.Particulars of ground investigation................................................................................................................................ 108
4.4. Inspection Pits, and Trial Pits............................................................................................................................................ 109
4.4.1.Inspection pits......................................................................................................................................................................... 109
4.4.2.Trial pits....................................................................................................................................................................................... 109
4.4.3.Records of inspection pits................................................................................................................................................. 109
4.4.4.Records of trial pits................................................................................................................................................................ 109
4.5. Drilling for Ground Investigation...................................................................................................................................... 110
4.5.1.Drilling rigs for ground investigation............................................................................................................................. 110
4.5.2.Drilling equipment for ground investigation............................................................................................................. 110
4.5.3.Drilling for ground investigation...................................................................................................................................... 111
4.5.4.Sampling from drillholes.................................................................................................................................................... 112
4.5.5.Filling drillholes........................................................................................................................................................................ 112

4.5.6.Records of drillholes............................................................................................................................................................. 112
4.6. Sampling for Ground Investigation................................................................................................................................ 112
4.6.1.Sampling equipment for ground investigation........................................................................................................ 112
4.6.2.Sampling for ground investigation................................................................................................................................ 114
4.6.3.Storage and delivery of samples for ground investigation................................................................................114
4.6.4.Bulk samples............................................................................................................................................................................ 115
4.6.5.Mazier samples....................................................................................................................................................................... 115
4.6.6.U 100/76 [Shelby Tube samples..................................................................................................................................... 115
4.6.7.Block samples......................................................................................................................................................................... 115
4.7. ln-Situ Testing........................................................................................................................................................................... 115
4.7.1.Standard penetration tests................................................................................................................................................ 115
4.7.2.ln-situ density test.................................................................................................................................................................. 116
4.7.3.Flat Plate Dilatometer Tests (Marchetti Dilatometer Test, DMT)....................................................................116
4.7.4.High pressure dilatometer (HPD) test.......................................................................................................................... 117
4.7.5.Self Boring Pressuremeter Tests.................................................................................................................................... 119
4.7.6.Pressuremeter Tests............................................................................................................................................................. 125
4.7.7.Field Vane Shear Tests........................................................................................................................................................ 126
4.7.8.Piezocone Penetration Tests............................................................................................................................................ 127
4.7.9.Rising and Falling Head Permeability Tests............................................................................................................. 129
4.7.10. Constant Head Permeability Tests...................................................................................................................... 130
4.7.11. Records of In-situ testing.......................................................................................................................................... 130
4.8. Reports for Ground Investigation.................................................................................................................................... 130
4.8.1.Reports for ground investigation.................................................................................................................................... 130
4.9. Laboratory Testing................................................................................................................................................................. 131
4.9.1.General........................................................................................................................................................................................ 131
4.9.2.Requirements on Accreditation from Internationally Recognised Accrediting Organisation...........131
4.9.3.Tests............................................................................................................................................................................................. 131
4.9.4.Laboratory test results......................................................................................................................................................... 133
4.9.5.Laboratory report.................................................................................................................................................................... 134
4.10. Grouting for Geotechnical Works Glossary of Terms.................................................................................134
4.10.1. Ground............................................................................................................................................................................... 134

4.10.2. Grout................................................................................................................................................................................... 134
4.10.3. Grouting............................................................................................................................................................................ 134
4.10.4. Grouting stage............................................................................................................................................................... 134
4.10.5. Lugeon............................................................................................................................................................................... 134
4.11. Materials........................................................................................................................................................................... 134
4.11.1. Materials for Grout....................................................................................................................................................... 134
4.11.2. Grout for geotechnical works................................................................................................................................. 134
4.11.3. Standpipes....................................................................................................................................................................... 135
4.11.4. Particulars of grouting for geotechnical works.............................................................................................. 135
4.11.5. Trials for grouting......................................................................................................................................................... 135
4.12. Drilling for Grouting for Geotechnical Works.................................................................................................. 135
4.12.1. Drilling for grouting for geotechnical works.................................................................................................... 135
4.12.2. Standpipes and capping pipes............................................................................................................................. 136
4.13. Grouting for Geotechnical Works......................................................................................................................... 136
4.13.1. Monitoring of grouting operations....................................................................................................................... 136
4.13.2. Grouting equipment.................................................................................................................................................... 137
4.13.3. Mixing grout.................................................................................................................................................................... 137
4.13.4. Grouting for geotechnical works........................................................................................................................... 138
4.13.5. Loss or leakage of grout........................................................................................................................................... 138
4.13.6. Making good drillholes used for Grouting [MD23] ]SDS24]....................................................................138
4.13.7. Records of grouting for geotechnical works................................................................................................... 139
4.14. Testing : Grout — General Requirements......................................................................................................... 139
4.14.1. Batch: grout for geotechnical works................................................................................................................... 139
4.15. Testing : Grout - Bleeding......................................................................................................................................... 140
4.15.1. Samples: bleeding of grout..................................................................................................................................... 140
4.15.2. Testing: bleeding of grout......................................................................................................................................... 140
4.15.3. Non-compliance: bleeding of grout.................................................................................................................... 140
4.16. Testing : Grout — Flow Cone Efflux Time......................................................................................................... 140
4.16.1. Samples: flow cone efflux time of grout............................................................................................................ 140
4.16.2. Testing: flow cone efflux time of grout............................................................................................................... 140
4.16.3. Non-compliance: flow cone efflux time of grout........................................................................................... 140

4.17. Testing : Grout — Crushing Strength.................................................................................................................. 141
4.17.1. Samples: crushing strength of grout................................................................................................................... 141
4.17.2. Testing: crushing strength of grout...................................................................................................................... 141
4.17.3. Non-compliance: crushing strength of grout................................................................................................. 141
4.18. Testing : Packer Tests on Drillholes for Grouting and Grouted Drillholes.........................................141
4.18.1. Testing: Packer tests................................................................................................................................................... 141
4.18.2. Compliance criteria: Packer tests......................................................................................................................... 142
4.18.3. Non-compliance: Packer test on drillholes for grouting............................................................................142
4.18.4. Non-compliance: Packer test on grouted and regrouted drillholes....................................................142
4.19. Groundwater Drainage and Control : Glossary of Terms..........................................................................142
4.19.1. Caisson drain.................................................................................................................................................................. 142
4.19.2. Geotextile filter............................................................................................................................................................... 142
4.19.3. Filter pipe.......................................................................................................................................................................... 142
4.19.4. Granular filter.................................................................................................................................................................. 142
4.19.5. Prefabricated band drain.......................................................................................................................................... 143
4.19.6. Raking drain.................................................................................................................................................................... 143
4.19.7. Relief drain....................................................................................................................................................................... 143
4.19.8. Trench drain.................................................................................................................................................................... 143
4.20. Groundwater Drainage and Control : Materials............................................................................................143
4.20.1. Granular filter material................................................................................................................................................ 143
4.20.2. Geotextile filter............................................................................................................................................................... 143
4.20.3. Filter pipes........................................................................................................................................................................ 143
4.20.4. Raking drains.................................................................................................................................................................. 144
4.20.5. Fill material for trench drains.................................................................................................................................. 144
4.20.6. Caisson liners................................................................................................................................................................. 145
4.20.7. Prefabricated band drains....................................................................................................................................... 145
4.21. Groundwater Drainage and Control : Submissions....................................................................................145
4.21.1. Particulars of granular filters................................................................................................................................... 145
4.21.2. Particulars of geotextile filter................................................................................................................................... 146
4.21.3. Particulars of trench.................................................................................................................................................... 146
4.21.4. Particulars of raking drains...................................................................................................................................... 146

4.21.5. Particulars of relief drains......................................................................................................................................... 147
4.21.6. Particulars of caisson drains................................................................................................................................... 147
4.21.7. Particulars of prefabricated band drains.......................................................................................................... 147
4.21.8. Particulars of filter pipes............................................................................................................................................ 147
4.21.9. Particulars of groundwater control, drawdown and monitoring...........................................................148
4.21.10. Samples of materials.................................................................................................................................................. 148
4.22. Groundwater Drainage and Control : Handling, Delivery and Storage of Materials...................148
4.22.1. Handling and storage of granular filter material........................................................................................... 148
4.22.2. Delivery and storage of geotextile filter.............................................................................................................. 148
4.22.3. Storage of filter pipes.................................................................................................................................................. 149
4.22.4. Delivery and storage of prefabricated band drains.....................................................................................149
4.23. Granular Filters.............................................................................................................................................................. 149
4.23.1. Mixing granular filter material................................................................................................................................. 149
4.23.2. Deposition and compaction of granular filter material..............................................................................149
4.24. Geotextile Filter.............................................................................................................................................................. 149
4.24.1. Damage to geotextile filter....................................................................................................................................... 149
4.24.2. Laying geotextile filter................................................................................................................................................. 150
4.24.3. Protection of geotextile filter.................................................................................................................................... 150
4.24.4. Records of geotextile filter........................................................................................................................................ 150
4.25. Raking Drains................................................................................................................................................................. 150
4.25.1. Installation of raking drains..................................................................................................................................... 150
4.25.2. Drilling for raking drains............................................................................................................................................ 151
4.25.3. Records of drillholes for raking drains................................................................................................................ 151
4.26. Trench Drains................................................................................................................................................................. 151
4.26.1. Excavation for trench drains................................................................................................................................... 151
4.26.2. Geotextile filter surround for trench drains....................................................................................................... 151
4.26.3. Bed for trench drains.................................................................................................................................................. 152
4.26.4. Deposition and compaction of fill material for trench drains..................................................................152
4.27. Relief Drains.................................................................................................................................................................... 152
4.27.1. Trials for relief drains................................................................................................................................................... 152
4.27.2. Fixing relief drains........................................................................................................................................................ 152

4.28. Caisson Drains............................................................................................................................................................... 152
4.28.1. Construction of caisson drains.............................................................................................................................. 152
4.28.2. Discharge of water from caisson drains........................................................................................................... 153
4.28.3. Records of caisson drains........................................................................................................................................ 153
4.29. Groundwater Control and Drawdown................................................................................................................ 153
4.29.1. Drawdown of groundwater table......................................................................................................................... 153
4.29.2. Dewatering...................................................................................................................................................................... 153
4.29.3. Groundwater recharge.............................................................................................................................................. 154
4.29.4. Monitoring of groundwater control and drawdown....................................................................................154
4.29.5. Records of settlement, groundwater control and drawdown.................................................................155
4.30. Testing : Granular Filter Material........................................................................................................................... 155
4.30.1. Batch: granular filter material................................................................................................................................. 155
4.30.2. Samples: granular filter material........................................................................................................................... 155
4.30.3. Testing: granular filter material.............................................................................................................................. 155
4.30.4. Non-compliance: granular filter material.......................................................................................................... 155
4.31. Testing: Fill Material for Trench Drains.............................................................................................................. 156
4.31.1. Batch: fill material for trench drains..................................................................................................................... 156
4.31.2. Samples: fill material for trench drains.............................................................................................................. 156
4.31.3. Testing: fill material for trench drains.................................................................................................................. 156
4.32. Geotechnical Instrumentation: Glossary of Terms.......................................................................................156
4.32.1. Datum station................................................................................................................................................................. 156
4.32.2. Geotechnical instrumentation................................................................................................................................ 156
4.32.3. Monitoring mark............................................................................................................................................................ 157
4.32.4. Reference point............................................................................................................................................................. 157
4.32.5. Survey station................................................................................................................................................................. 157
4.33. Geotechnical Instrumentation : Submissions................................................................................................. 157
4.33.1. Particulars of geotechnical Instrumentation................................................................................................... 157
4.34. General Geotechnical Instrumentation Requirements..............................................................................157
4.34.1. Instruments for geotechnical instrumentation............................................................................................... 157
4.34.2. Location and arrangement of instruments...................................................................................................... 158
4.34.3. Installation of instruments........................................................................................................................................ 158

4.34.4. Tubes and cables for instruments....................................................................................................................... 159
4.34.5. Supply and Maintenance of instruments.......................................................................................................... 159
4.34.6. Records of geotechnical instrumentation........................................................................................................ 160
4.35. Monitoring and Recording....................................................................................................................................... 160
4.35.1. Recording readings..................................................................................................................................................... 160
4.36. Settlement Markers and Settlement Plates..................................................................................................... 161
4.36.1. Settlement Markers..................................................................................................................................................... 161
4.36.2. Installation of settlement plates............................................................................................................................. 161
4.37. Tiltmeter System........................................................................................................................................................... 162
4.37.1. Installation of tiltmeter system............................................................................................................................... 162
4.38. Telltales............................................................................................................................................................................. 162
4.38.1. Installation of telltales................................................................................................................................................. 162
4.39. Standpipe Piezometers............................................................................................................................................. 162
4.39.1. Standpipe piezometers............................................................................................................................................. 162
4.39.2. Installation of standpipe piezometers................................................................................................................ 162
4.39.3. Piezometers in Drillholes.......................................................................................................................................... 163
4.39.4. Automatic Groundwater Monitoring Devices................................................................................................. 164
4.39.5. Inclinometers in Ground and inside Piles......................................................................................................... 165
4.39.6. Vibration Monitoring of Ground and Structures............................................................................................ 166
5. PILING WORKS...................................................................................................................................................................................... 171
5.1.2.Programme of Ground Investigation, Trial piles and Working piles construction..................................171
5.2. Cast-in-situ Piling.................................................................................................................................................................... 175
5.2.1.Construction............................................................................................................................................................................. 175
5.2.2.Load test on cast-in-situ piles.......................................................................................................................................... 188
5.3. Tubular steel piling................................................................................................................................................................. 198
5.3.1.Construction............................................................................................................................................................................. 198
5.3.2.Fabrication................................................................................................................................................................................ 200
5.3.3.Corrosion/Abrasion protection of steel piles............................................................................................................ 201
5.3.4.Marking, handling and storage....................................................................................................................................... 202

5.3.5.Pile driving................................................................................................................................................................................. 203
5.3.6.Plugging piles with concrete............................................................................................................................................ 209
5.3.7.Grouting of pile/sleeve connections............................................................................................................................. 212
5.3.8.Sand filing.................................................................................................................................................................................. 212
5.3.9.Preliminary trial piling – Tubular piles.......................................................................................................................... 213
6. STRUCTURAL STEEL & COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION.................................................................................................. 247
6.1. General requirements........................................................................................................................................................... 247
6.2. Record of material source and “as-built” drawings................................................................................................ 248
6.3. Requirements for supply and delivery.......................................................................................................................... 249
6.4. Requirements for workmanship...................................................................................................................................... 249
6.5. Preparation of edges, ends and surfaces................................................................................................................... 250
6.6. Bolts, nuts and washers...................................................................................................................................................... 250
6.7. Holes for bolts.......................................................................................................................................................................... 251
6.8. Welding....................................................................................................................................................................................... 251
6.9. Bending and pressing.......................................................................................................................................................... 252
6.10. Handling, transport and erection.......................................................................................................................... 252
6.10.1. Contractor’s erection method................................................................................................................................. 253
6.10.2. Marking for erection.................................................................................................................................................... 253
6.10.3. Supports, anchors and bearings.......................................................................................................................... 253
6.10.4. Handling and storage................................................................................................................................................ 254
6.11. Surface treatment........................................................................................................................................................ 254
6.12. Geometrical tolerances............................................................................................................................................. 256
6.13. Inspection, testing and correction........................................................................................................................ 256
6.13.1. General.............................................................................................................................................................................. 256
6.13.2. Welds.................................................................................................................................................................................. 257
6.13.3. Mechanical fastening................................................................................................................................................. 258
6.14. Mortar filling / bedding of bases........................................................................................................................... 258
7. PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION................................................................................................. 260
7.2. Surface preparation............................................................................................................................................................... 260
7.2.1.Dry abrasive blast cleaning of new steelwork......................................................................................................... 260

7.2.2.Cleaning of sound, previously painted steelwork for remedial work............................................................261
7.2.3.Preparation of previously painted steelwork showing breakdown or corrosion....................................261
7.2.4.Preparation of hot dip galvanising for painting....................................................................................................... 262
7.3. Priming......................................................................................................................................................................................... 262
7.3.1.Priming of blast cleaned steel......................................................................................................................................... 262
7.4. Protection of joints.................................................................................................................................................................. 262
7.4.1.High strength friction grip (HSFG) bolted joints...................................................................................................... 262
7.4.2.Non friction grip bolted joints........................................................................................................................................... 263
7.4.3.Welded joints........................................................................................................................................................................... 263
7.5. Application................................................................................................................................................................................. 263
7.5.1.Sequence and order of work........................................................................................................................................... 263
7.5.2.Application of paint............................................................................................................................................................... 264
7.5.3.Application of paint by brush............................................................................................................................................ 264
7.5.4.Application of paint by roller............................................................................................................................................. 265
7.5.5.Application of paint by spray............................................................................................................................................ 265
7.5.6.Scaffolding and access...................................................................................................................................................... 265
7.5.7.Ambient conditions............................................................................................................................................................... 265
7.6. Handling of coated items................................................................................................................................................... 265
7.6.1.Transport.................................................................................................................................................................................... 265
7.6.2.Repair of damage to coatings......................................................................................................................................... 266
7.6.3.Storage........................................................................................................................................................................................ 266
7.6.4.Surface in contact with concrete................................................................................................................................... 266
7.7. Materials...................................................................................................................................................................................... 266
7.7.1.Paint.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 266
7.7.2.Data sheets............................................................................................................................................................................... 267
7.7.3.Containers................................................................................................................................................................................. 268
7.7.4.Galvanized Coatings............................................................................................................................................................. 268
7.8. Coating Inspection................................................................................................................................................................. 269
7.8.1.General........................................................................................................................................................................................ 269
7.8.2.Surface condition................................................................................................................................................................... 269
7.8.3.Abrasive...................................................................................................................................................................................... 270

7.8.4.Paint.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 270
7.8.5.Application................................................................................................................................................................................. 270
7.8.6.Access for inspection........................................................................................................................................................... 271
7.8.7.Approval of work.................................................................................................................................................................... 271
7.8.8.Equipment................................................................................................................................................................................. 271
7.8.9.Programme and records.................................................................................................................................................... 272
7.9. Coating Schedule................................................................................................................................................................... 272
7.9.1.System-1..................................................................................................................................................................................... 272
7.9.2.System-2 Interior of Box Girders..................................................................................................................................... 273
7.9.3.System-3 Steel parapets and fencing, refuge outstands and power supply masts..............................273
7.9.4.System-4 for all small fixings and fasteners.............................................................................................................. 273
7.10. Warranties........................................................................................................................................................................ 273
7.10.1. Preliminary Stage......................................................................................................................................................... 273
7.10.2. Warranty period............................................................................................................................................................. 273
7.10.3. Warranty Criteria........................................................................................................................................................... 273
7.10.4. Guarantee........................................................................................................................................................................ 274
8. CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES................................................................................................................................................... 275
8.1. General requirements........................................................................................................................................................... 275
8.2. Ground conditions.................................................................................................................................................................. 275
8.3. Schedule for the Specification of Designed Concrete.........................................................................................275
8.4. Impregnation Schedule....................................................................................................................................................... 279
8.4.2.Structural concrete element receiving surface protection systems.............................................................279
8.4.3.Supply, storage and disposal of surface protection system.............................................................................279
8.4.4.Surface protection................................................................................................................................................................. 280
8.4.5.Hydrophobic impregnation............................................................................................................................................... 280
8.4.6.Anti-carbonation coatings................................................................................................................................................. 280
8.5. Surface finishes....................................................................................................................................................................... 280
8.6. Buried concrete....................................................................................................................................................................... 280
8.7. Materials...................................................................................................................................................................................... 281
8.7.1.Cement........................................................................................................................................................................................ 281

8.7.2.Water............................................................................................................................................................................................ 281
8.7.3.Admixtures................................................................................................................................................................................ 282
8.7.4.Aggregates................................................................................................................................................................................ 282
8.8. Testing of materials............................................................................................................................................................... 282
8.8.1.General........................................................................................................................................................................................ 282
8.8.2.Trial Mixes.................................................................................................................................................................................. 288
8.9. Concrete – General................................................................................................................................................................ 288
8.10. Construction Methods................................................................................................................................................ 289
8.10.1. General.............................................................................................................................................................................. 289
8.10.2. Care and storage of concrete materials........................................................................................................... 289
8.10.3. Preparation before casting...................................................................................................................................... 290
8.10.4. Measuring materials................................................................................................................................................... 290
8.10.5. Mixing concrete............................................................................................................................................................. 291
8.10.6. Handling and placing concrete............................................................................................................................. 294
8.10.7. Perforations and embedment of special devices......................................................................................... 297
8.10.8. Construction joints....................................................................................................................................................... 297
8.10.9. Curing concrete............................................................................................................................................................. 298
8.10.10. Repair of Concrete....................................................................................................................................................... 301
8.10.11. Placing concrete under water................................................................................................................................ 301
8.10.12. Factory made precast concrete elements....................................................................................................... 302
8.10.13. Loading............................................................................................................................................................................. 302
8.10.14. Cleaning up..................................................................................................................................................................... 302
8.10.15. Standard of Acceptance........................................................................................................................................... 303
8.10.16. Tolerances for Concrete Construction............................................................................................................... 303
9. STEEL REINFORCEMENT FOR STRUCTURES...................................................................................................................... 305
9.1. Materials...................................................................................................................................................................................... 305
9.1.1.Bar reinforcement and fabric reinforcement............................................................................................................ 305
9.1.2.Epoxy coatings to reinforcement................................................................................................................................... 305
9.1.3.Hop dip Galvanizing to reinforcement......................................................................................................................... 305
9.1.4.Reinforcement connectors................................................................................................................................................ 306
9.1.5.Cover spacers.......................................................................................................................................................................... 306

9.1.6.Chairs, supports and spacers.......................................................................................................................................... 307
9.1.7.Tying wire................................................................................................................................................................................... 307
9.1.8.Tying devices and clips....................................................................................................................................................... 307
9.2. Submission................................................................................................................................................................................ 307
9.2.1.Particulars of bar reinforcement and fabric reinforcement...............................................................................307
9.2.2.Particulars of epoxy coatings to reinforcement...................................................................................................... 309
9.2.3.Particulars of galvanized coatings to reinforcement............................................................................................ 310
9.2.4.Particulars of reinforcement connectors.................................................................................................................... 310
9.2.5.Bending schedules............................................................................................................................................................... 310
9.2.6.Samples of materials........................................................................................................................................................... 310
9.3. Handling and Storage of Materials................................................................................................................................ 311
9.3.1.Handling of reinforcement................................................................................................................................................ 311
9.3.2.Storage of reinforcement................................................................................................................................................... 311
9.4. Cutting and Bending Reinforcement............................................................................................................................ 311
9.4.1.Cutting and bending reinforcement............................................................................................................................. 311
9.5. Surface Condition of Reinforcement............................................................................................................................. 312
9.5.1.Surface condition of reinforcement.............................................................................................................................. 312
9.5.2.Repairs to epoxy coating and galvanized coatings.............................................................................................. 312
9.6. Fixing Reinforcement............................................................................................................................................................ 312
9.6.1.Fixing reinforcement............................................................................................................................................................. 312
9.6.2.Fixing reinforcement connectors................................................................................................................................... 313
9.6.3.Welding of reinforcement.................................................................................................................................................. 313
9.6.4.Exposed reinforcement....................................................................................................................................................... 313
9.6.5.Access over reinforcement............................................................................................................................................... 313
9.7. Tolerances................................................................................................................................................................................. 313
9.7.1.Tolerances: reinforcement................................................................................................................................................. 313
9.8. Inspection of Reinforcement............................................................................................................................................. 314
9.8.1.Inspection of reinforcement.............................................................................................................................................. 314
9.9. Testing : Reinforcement....................................................................................................................................................... 314
9.9.1.Batch: reinforcement............................................................................................................................................................ 314
9.9.2.Samples: reinforcement..................................................................................................................................................... 314

9.9.3.Testing: Reinforcement:...................................................................................................................................................... 317
9.9.4.Compliance criteria: epoxy coatings to reinforcement:....................................................................................... 317
9.9.5.Compliance criteria: reinforcement connectors for tension joints:................................................................318
9.9.6.Non-compliance: characteristic strength................................................................................................................... 319
9.9.7.Non-compliance: elongation, tensile strength, bending, rebending. unit mass, weld shear strength
319
9.9.8.Non-compliance: thickness, adhesion and continuity of epoxy coatings..................................................320
9.9.9.Non-compliance: weight and uniformity of galvanized coatings...................................................................320
9.9.10. Non-compliance: permanent elongation of reinforcement connectors...........................................320
10. PRESTRESSING FOR STRUCTURES.......................................................................................................................................... 322
11. CABLE-STAYS........................................................................................................................................................................................ 323
11.1. Scope................................................................................................................................................................................. 323
11.2. Free length....................................................................................................................................................................... 323
11.2.1. General.............................................................................................................................................................................. 323
11.2.2. Strand................................................................................................................................................................................. 324
11.2.3. Internal Corrosion Barrier Enhancement by Galvanic Coating..............................................................324
11.2.4. External Corrosion Barrier........................................................................................................................................ 325
11.2.5. Outer Stay Pipe.............................................................................................................................................................. 327
11.3. Anchorage....................................................................................................................................................................... 332
11.3.1. General.............................................................................................................................................................................. 332
11.3.2. Requirements for Cable Stay Anchorages....................................................................................................... 332
11.4. Qualification and testing........................................................................................................................................... 335
11.4.1. Strand................................................................................................................................................................................. 335
11.4.2. HDPE Coating and Stay Pipe................................................................................................................................. 336
11.4.3. Fully Assembled Stay Cable.................................................................................................................................... 337
11.5. Installation........................................................................................................................................................................ 341
11.5.1. Handling........................................................................................................................................................................... 342
11.5.2. Stay Pipe Assembly..................................................................................................................................................... 342
11.5.3. Strand-by-Strand Erection....................................................................................................................................... 342
11.5.4. Stressing........................................................................................................................................................................... 342
11.5.5. Corrosion Protection During Erection................................................................................................................ 343

11.5.6. Finishing............................................................................................................................................................................ 343
11.6. Maintenance and replacement............................................................................................................................. 343
11.6.1. Inspections...................................................................................................................................................................... 343
11.6.2. Monitoring........................................................................................................................................................................ 344
11.6.3. Maintenance Procedures......................................................................................................................................... 344
11.7. AERODYNAMIC REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................................................ 344
11.7.1. Outer Casing Profile.................................................................................................................................................... 344
11.7.2. Stay Cable Damping................................................................................................................................................... 345
11.8. References....................................................................................................................................................................... 345
12. FORMWORK AND FINISHES TO CONCRETE........................................................................................................................ 347
12.1. Materials........................................................................................................................................................................... 347
12.1.1. Formwork......................................................................................................................................................................... 348
12.1.2. Formwork Class of finish.......................................................................................................................................... 348
12.1.3. Release agents.............................................................................................................................................................. 348
12.1.4. Formwork ties................................................................................................................................................................. 349
12.1.5. Cement mortar for concrete surfaces................................................................................................................ 349
12.1.6. Surface retarders.......................................................................................................................................................... 349
12.1.7. Abrasives.......................................................................................................................................................................... 350
12.2. Finishes............................................................................................................................................................................. 350
12.3. Submissions................................................................................................................................................................... 350
12.4. Trial panels...................................................................................................................................................................... 351
12.4.1. General.............................................................................................................................................................................. 351
12.4.2. Non-compliance: trial panels................................................................................................................................. 352
12.4.3. Commencement of formwork and concreting.............................................................................................. 352
12.4.4. Changes in materials and methods of construction...................................................................................352
12.5. Storage of Materials.................................................................................................................................................... 352
12.5.1. Storage of formwork................................................................................................................................................... 352
12.5.2. Storage of release agents and surface retarders......................................................................................... 352
12.6. Design and Construction of Falsework and Formwork.............................................................................352
12.6.1. Design and construction of falsework and formwork................................................................................352
12.6.2. Construction of formwork......................................................................................................................................... 353

12.6.3. Construction of formwork for Class F2, F3, F4 and F5 finishes..............................................................353
12.6.4. Construction of formwork for Class F4 and F5 finishes.............................................................................354
12.6.5. Built-in components.................................................................................................................................................... 354
12.7. Application of Release Agents............................................................................................................................... 354
12.7.1. Application of release agents................................................................................................................................. 354
12.8. Inspection of Formwork and Reinforcement..................................................................................................355
12.8.1. Inspection of formwork and reinforcement..................................................................................................... 355
12.9. Removal of Falsework and Formwork............................................................................................................... 355
12.9.1. Times for removal of falsework and formwork.............................................................................................. 355
12.9.2. Removal of falsework and formwork.................................................................................................................. 355
12.10. Unformed Finishes....................................................................................................................................................... 356
12.10.1. Unformed finishes........................................................................................................................................................ 356
12.11. Treated Finishes............................................................................................................................................................ 356
12.11.1. Treated finishes............................................................................................................................................................. 356
12.11.2. Class T1 finish................................................................................................................................................................ 356
12.11.3. Class T2 and T3 finishes........................................................................................................................................... 357
12.11.4. Class T4 finish................................................................................................................................................................ 357
12.11.5. Class T5 and T6 finishes........................................................................................................................................... 357
12.12. Compliance of Finishes............................................................................................................................................. 357
12.12.1. Inspection of finishes.................................................................................................................................................. 357
12.12.2. Compliance of finishes.............................................................................................................................................. 357
12.13. Work on Concrete Surfaces.................................................................................................................................... 358
12.13.1. Remedial and repair work on concrete surfaces.........................................................................................358
12.13.2. Filling blowholes and formwork tie holes......................................................................................................... 358
12.13.3. Spatterdash..................................................................................................................................................................... 358
12.14. Protection of Finishes................................................................................................................................................. 358
12.14.1. Protection of finishes.................................................................................................................................................. 358
13. CANTILEVER FORM TRAVELLER.................................................................................................................................................. 360
14. METHOD FOR PRECAST CONCRETE SEGMENTAL WORK........................................................................................... 361
15. METHOD FOR INSITU CONCRETE SEGMENTAL WORK................................................................................................. 369
16. BRIDGE BEARINGS............................................................................................................................................................................. 370

17. SEISMIC ISOLATION DEVICES...................................................................................................................................................... 371
18. EXPANSION AND FILLER JOINTS............................................................................................................................................... 372
19. DECK AND BURIED STRUCTURE WATERPROOFING....................................................................................................... 373
20. DECK SURFACING.............................................................................................................................................................................. 374
21. ACCESS EQUIPMENT........................................................................................................................................................................ 375
22. RIVER WORKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE BRIDGE................................................................................................................ 376
23. HANDRAILING, LADDERS, STAIRS AND FLOORING.......................................................................................................... 377
24. GUIDELINES FOR SAFETY IN CONSTRUCTION PRESTRESSED CONCRETE......................................................378
25. CONCRETE PARAPET........................................................................................................................................................................ 379
26. FILL BEHIND STRUCTURES AND BEDDING IN FOUNDATIONS OF BOX CULVERTS......................................380
27. RAIN WATER PIPES AND WEEP HOLES.................................................................................................................................. 381
28. ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING........................................................................................................................................................... 382
29. ROADWAY LIGHTING......................................................................................................................................................................... 383
30. ROAD MARKINGS................................................................................................................................................................................ 384
31. TRAFFIC SIGNS..................................................................................................................................................................................... 385
Annexure 1: xxxxx........................................................................................................................................................................................ 388
Annexure 2: yyyyy........................................................................................................................................................................................ 389
List of Figures
Figure 1 Dhonogoda river bathymetry and current Alignment options for Feasibility Study. Layout...........Error!
Bookmark not defined.
List of Tables
Table 1 Classification of Standard High Water Level from BIWTA............................Error! Bookmark not defined.

Technical Specification for Works -

Structures
PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION
(i) The Specification is the ‘Specification for Highway Works’ current at the Contract Date, published by
TSO (formerly HMSO) as Volume 1 of the Manual of Contract Documents for Highway Works.
(ii) As with the DMRB documents, all requirements contained in MCHW documents shall be
considered to have the status of Standards.
(iii) Any variation or waiving of a requirement contained within an MCHW document shall be
considered as a Departure from Standard. All Departures from Standard shall be dealt with on a
contract specific basis.
(iv) Where a Clause in the Specification relates to goods, works or materials which are not required for
the Works, it shall be deemed not to apply.
(v) Other than where references to the Overseeing Organisation are made in the context of the
Overseeing Organisation granting statutory or type approvals, the roles and functions of the
Overseeing Organisation shall be undertaken by the Project Manager.
Where the Specification requires the provision of documentation to the Overseeing Organisation for
statutory or type approval such documentation shall be provided to the Project Manager.
(vi) If the Specification is used in conjunction with a Contract under which the Contractor is responsible
for the design of any part of the Permanent Works, the delegation of the roles and functions of the
Overseeing Organisation as stated in paragraph 3 above shall be further amended as follows:
a. If any agreement, consent or approval required to be obtained from the Overseeing
Organisation impacts on the health and safety of the general public, the environment or
any property or equipment not owned or operated by the Contractor, such agreement,
consent, approval shall be obtained from the Project Manager;
b. Where the Specification provides for the Overseeing Organisation to require a test, waive
the requirement for a test or alter testing frequency, the party to whom the Overseeing
Organisation's roles and functions have been ascribed by paragraph 12 above shall
exercise such decisions in accordance with the Secretary of State's requirements stated
in the Contract.
(vii) Where Standards and other documents are incorporated into the Contract by reference the
respective edition used shall be that which is current on the Contract Reference Document Date
unless otherwise stated in the Specification.

0. GENERAL
0.1. Scope and General Information
0.1.1. Location and description of the Project
The Works to be constructed under this Contract form part of the Uttar-Matlab Bridge Project in the
People's Republic of Bangladesh.
The current connection between Matlab Uttar and Gazaria is established through Ferry crossings for goods
vehicle at one location and several formal and informal boat crossings at several locations. This adversely
affects the trade, economic as well as social life in the area. The subject study is to develop a direct road
connectivity between Matlab Uttar and Gazaria by way of building a long bridge across the braided
channels of Dhonogoda river.
The Uttar-Matlab Bridge Project comprises a new fixed crossing of the Dhonagoda River in Bangladesh. It
will consist of a new bridge approximately X.XXkm long across the Dhonagoda River; approach viaducts;
major river training works; approximately X.XXkm of approach roads; and bridge end facilities, including toll
plazas, service areas and offices. The main bridge is to carry a 4-lane highway, pedestrian footpath and
other facilities including gas and telecommunication services.
The Project will be divided into XX separate construction contracts and will together comprise:
0.1.2.Extent of the Works
The scope of Works covered under this Contact (Contract Ref.) comprises two main components: a cable-
stayed bridge across the Dhonogoda River with a total span of 800m; a balanced cantilever bridge with a
total span of XXm; and XXm of approach viaducts.
Cable-stayed bridge
XX
Balanced cantilever bridge
XX
Approach viaducts
XX
In addition the contract includes:
 Provision of Employer’s and Engineer’s facilities and other requirements;

 All protective and temporary works and other consequential work required for carrying out the
foregoing; and

 Such further work as the Engineer may direct to execute and complete the Works and remedy any
defects.
0.1.3.Drawings
The Drawings (Section VI — Works Requirements of the Tender Documents) contain details of the Works to
be carried out under this Contract.
0.1.4.Information provided
The following information is provided for the guidance of the Contractor and is given in good faith. No
warranty is given by the Employer or the Engineer as to accuracy or relevance of the information.
0.1.4.1. Locally produced materials
Cement
Most of the major international cement manufacturer's are represented in Bangladesh so providing a wide
choice of suppliers. They are represented by the Bangladesh Cement Manufacturer's Association, c/o
Bashundhara Group, Sena Kalyan Bhaban, 195 Motijheel, Dhaka.
Aggregates
Bangladesh's largest hard rock quarry is an underground hard rock mine operated by the Maddhapara
Granite Mining Company Limited (www.mgmcl.org.bd/) - a company of Petrobangla under the Ministry of
Power, Energy & Mineral Resources, situated in Dinajpur District in the north of Bangladesh. It is currently
producing about 1.000 t/day of mixed rock sizes from crushed rock to boulders over 400 mm with the
capacity to produce up to 3.600 t/day of crushed rock. Contact details for the company are available from
the website.
Bricks
Bricks are readily available in Bangladesh. The quality varies greatly due to differences the source of the
base material, the means used to heat the kilns, and the quality controls (or lack of) established by the
different operators. The best quality bricks generally come from gas fired kiln where the temperatures are
controlled and generally the quality of the base material is better as it has to be brought to the factory. Other
kilns use a variety of material (coal, wood) for heating and the base material is usually from sources nearby.
These produce second and third rate quality bricks and a single firing can produce a range of bricks from
under to over burnt.
Geotextiles
There are two firms in Bangladesh that are actively supplying geotextile material for use in the water sector
and also export products. B.J. Geo-Textile Ltd. and Dird Felt Ltd. produce Non-Woven Needle Punch
Geotextile in various thicknesses made of Polyester/PP.

0.1.4.2. Meteorological Data
The Contractor is referred to the Bangladesh Meteorological Department (www.bmd.gov.bd) for

meteorological data. However, some preliminary data is presented below.
Bangladesh has a tropical monsoon climate which can be characterized into three seasons:
 Pre-monsoon from mid April to mid June

 Monsoon from mid June to mid October
 Dry from mid October to mid April
The principal features of the climate are summarized below:
1. Rainfall: The average annual rainfall in central Bangladesh is about 1900 mm.
2. Temperature: The maximum summer temperatures at the site normally reach 45°C. April is the
hottest month. January is the coolest month, when the average temperature is 16 - 20°C during the
day and around 10°C at night.
3. Humidity: Relative humidity varies in the pre-monsoon and monsoon months from about 80% to
95%. reducing to about 70% in the dry season.
4. Wind: Bangladesh experiences light winds for much of the time, but severe storms occasionally
occur. These arise from two principal sources. namely:
a. The "nor-wester" thunderstorm squalls which mainly occur in March and April, and are
often accompanied by violent hailstonns, and occasional tornados; and
b. Tropical cyclones which arise in the Bay of Bengal chiefly during April-May and October-
November. Cyclones are associated with very high winds which often generate an
accompanying storm surge. The destructive effect of these storms is largely confined to the
coastal areas bordering the Bay of Bengal as their intensity is rapidly dissipated once they
make landfall.
0.1.4.3. Hydrological Data
Bangladesh Water Development Board (BWDB) measures daily discharge and maintains a water level
gauging station at Mawa (gauge 93.5L), on the North bank of the Padma River about 1.3 km upstream of
the bridge alignment. Records of daily water levels are available from 1968 onwards. It has therefore been
possible to obtain a reasonably reliable estimate of the flow and water level for various return periods, as
summarized in Table 0-1 below. Local levels at the site will differ due to local influences and the general
river slope between the stations and the Work Site.
The flow of the Padma is characterized by the seasonal snow melt in the Himalayas and monsoon rainfall
in the catchment area of both the Brahmaputra / Jamuna and Ganges Rivers. In an average year the river
starts rising at the end of April from the lower levels of 2.0 to 2.5 m PWD, to the higher levels of 5.5 to 6.5 m
PWD, which are reached in July-August. During the high water period, which lasts up to the end of
September. several peaks in discharge and water level may occur. At the end of September or early

October, the river gradually recedes to the lower levels again, which are reached in December. During low
stages, the river's discharge at Mawa may be as low as 3,300m3/s.
The Contractor should familiarize himself with water level changes and expected trends, published daily
(www.ffwc.gov.bd) by the Flood Forecasting and Warning Centre, BWDB, and by regularly recording his
own water levels.
Table 0.1 Water Level at Mawa (1968 — 2003)1
5-YEAR RETURN PERIOD WATER LEVELS
Month Min. WL Max. WL Min. WL Max. WL YEARS OF DATA
Table 0- 1 Water Level at XXX
5-Year return period Water levels

Month Min. WL Max. WL
Min. WL Max. WL Years of Data
Apr. 1.06 3.22 1.61 2.83 32
May 1.59 4.58 2.37 3.90 31
Jun. 2.13 5.71 3.54 5.28 33
Jul. 4.20 6.84 4.96 6.22 32
Aug. 4.44 6.91 5.51 6.40 31
Sept. 4.23 7.14 5.27 6.29 31
Oct. 2.74 6.11 3.88 5.62 32
Nov. 1.72 4.58 2.58 4.12 32
Dec. 1.22 3.04 1.79 2.79 33
Jan. 0.71 2.55 1.35 2.19 33
Feb. 0.73 2.28 1.18 2.01 33
Mar. 0.66 2.69 1.21 2.19 32

Analysis of the monthly water level records has also been carried out, because an understanding of the
seasonal water level variations will be important when programming construction activities. Figure 0-1 and
Figure 0-2 following summarize the results.
Figure 0- 1 Hydrograph at Mawa Based on Daily Water Level from 1968 to 2003
Figure 0- 2 Duration curve at Mawa based on Measured Daily Water Level from 1968 to 2003

0.1.4.4. Flow velocities and tides
At the Padma Bridge site, surface velocities vary significantly across the channel and by season. Values in
the order of 4 m/s were observed within the main flow channel during ADCP measurement in 2009 and
2010 at near bank full stage. In the channel along the right (south) bank, surface velocities of 1.5 m/s were
observed during the peak discharge. Velocities along the banks will depend on in channel sand bar and
char development. and changes in channel alignment.
Flow velocities have been recorded by BWDB at their stage measurement stations. Out of 251 velocity
observations at Mawa 77 (63.35%) are between 2.5 to 3.0 m/s, 51 (20.32%) are between 3.0 to 3.5 m/s. 30
(11.95%) are between 3.5 to 4.0 m/s and 1 (0.4%) is above 4.0 m/s.
The site is under a mild tidal influence; the tidal range generally varies from 0 to 40 cm but can extend up to
80 cm. The flow angle and velocity often varies and is not uniform over time. This may affect the movement
of transporting vessels.
0.1.4.5. Navigability of Dhonagoda River
Information on navigable channels of the Padma and other major rivers is available from the Bangladesh
Inland Water Transport Authority (BIWTA – www.biwta.gov.bd) of the Government of Bangladesh. River
Notice No.54/2010 (Aricha Branch, Aricha) issued by BIWTA on 18 April 2010 describes the navigable routes
and their condition. This Notice confirms that the year-round draft available on Mawa - Janjira, Mawa -
Aricha and Banghabari - Paturia routes are 2.25m, 2.50m and 2.50m respectively. The condition of
navigation channels leading to ports and connecting to railway stations is also available from BIWTA.
This information notwithstanding it is the responsibility of the Contractor to confirm this information if
relevant to his planning or methodology. At present, the BIWTA classifies the Padma to be impassable
between Aricha and Paksey during the dry season.
0.1.4.6. Seismology
he region in which the Project is situated is seismically active, as the Indian Subcontinent tectonic plate
collides with the Asian mainland plate. There are six active tectonic blocks that could affect the bridge
location:
 Bogra Fault Zone

 Jamuna Fault Zone
 Sylhet Fault Zone
 Shillong Plateau Fault Zone
 Meghlaya Plateau Fault Zone
 Main Boundary Fault Zone
This seismicity and soil characteristics in the top 20m of the ground in the area makes it sensitive to
liquefaction.

0.1.4.7. Units, coordinates and Datum
All measurements are provided in metres unless otherwise indicated. The UTM (Universal Transverse
Mercator) coordinate system using the WGS84 datum has been used to establish horizontal positioning.
The site is within UTM Zone 46. Elevations, unless otherwise indicated, are referenced to the Public Works
Datum (PWD).
In Bangladesh, there are two primary vertical datum utilized; SOB and PWD. The SOB datum is the official
vertical datum for Bangladesh and is based on mean sea level (MSL) established in the early 1900’s during
British governance. PWD originated from the time when Bangladesh was East Pakistan and is based on
Pakistan's vertical datum which was transferred across the sub-continent. There is a 0.46 metre difference
between the two vertical datum with the SOB zero below that of the PWD. The project has used the PWD
datum as this is the reference for the majority of infrastructure work in the country that has relevance to
water level.
For the survey and measurement activities near Mawa, three SOB control points near the project were
utilized to establish horizontal positioning and elevations. Horizontal positioning has been referenced to
SOB monument # 3354 which is located about 5.5 km north-west of Mawa. This monument was utilized for
establishing horizontal control as it has published values. Two SOB monuments, one on each side of the
river, have been utilized to establish elevations. SOB monument #1007, located adjacent to the proposed
bridge alignment approximately 200m inland from the left (north) bank was the reference for works
conducted on the north side of the river. SOB monument #164 which is approximately 2.5km along the
highway on the south side of the river was used for elevation reference for activities on the south side of the
river and the large Char.
A limited network of semi-permanent bench marks was established by the project to use as local survey
control. These consist of a 15m long steel pile with the top 1m above ground. 150mm and 200mm piles
were used on the north and south banks respectively. The first 0.75m of the pile above the ground is
encased in concrete. The reference point is a small hole in the top plate. These benchmarks are mostly
located within the land acquisition areas.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to verify the coordinates of these or any other bench marks to be
used in the setting out and monitoring of the construction. Distances presented based on the UTM WGSB4
coordinate system are not necessarily exactly equivalent to ground distances. The Contractor will be
responsible for establishing the appropriate horizontal scaling factor.
0.2. Site Areas, Access and Use
0.2.1.Boundaries of the Site
The Site comprises the areas of land allocated to Contract No.PMB/MB/01 as shown on Drawing
No.6007044—DRG-1C-00- GE0101. This land has been acquired by the Employer and shall be made
available to the Contractor for the execution of the Works free of charge. This includes two areas of land

developed by the Employer, one on each side of the river, which will be made available to the Contractor
for the duration of the Contract for his temporary use to provide space for storage, offices. workshops,
prefabrication facilities and the like. Advance preparation works have been carried out by the Employer for
these two areas of land, one adjacent to the North (Mawa) riverbank and one adjacent to the South
(Janjira) riverbank. These advance preparation works include filling of the sites (Mawa and Janjira) and
provision of temporary riverbank protection works (on the Mawa site).
“As Built" Drawings showing the extent and nature of these advance preparation works are included in
these Bidding Documents. Note that finished levels of filling at the time of handover of these areas to the
Contractor may vary compared with the indicative “as built" levels (due to settlement/consolidation effects).
The Contractor shall allow for such changes in his lump sum prices for final development of these sites to
match his detailed layout and development requirements. The Contractor is responsible for verifying the
suitability of these areas particularly with reference to the quality and density of the fill materials used and
the effectiveness of the river protection works that have been provided. It is anticipated that additional filling
and riverbank protection works will be required to suit the purposes of the Contractor and to ensure
adequate security/integrity of the sites during the Contract. Such works shall be allowed for by the
Contractor in the relevant lump sum site development items in the Bill of Quantities.
Other than these areas the Contractor shall make his own arrangements, obtain any necessary permission
and be solely responsible for paying any costs. charges or compensation for the use of any additional areas
outside the boundaries of the Site which he may need in connection with the execution of the Works.
0.2.2.Adjoining sites
Drawing No.6007044-DRG-1C-00-GE0101 also shows areas of adjoining land which have been allocated to
the other contracts (River Training Works, Janjira and Mawa Approach Roads and Bridge End Facilities,
and Service Area No.2, Toll Plazas) to be carried out concurrently with this Contract. The Contractor shall
permit the personnel. workmen, materials. vehicles. plant and equipment of the contractors for adjoining
contracts access and movement over and through the Site without charge or hindrance for purposes in
connection with the execution of their works.
The contractor for the River Training Works Contract will require access to the abutments and initial piers at
each end. in order to construct ground treatment works and that portion of the river training works. Access
shall be allowed to him after completion of the abutments and piers. The interfaces and schedules shall be
coordinated between the two contractors. as directed by the Engineer.
The contractors for the two approach road contracts (PMB/AR-01 & PMB/AR/02) will require access to
complete the earthworks and pavement construction at the tie in to the approach road viaducts. Details of
the proposed construction staging layout are shown on Drawing Nos.60097044-DRG-1C-03-TWOOO1 to
TWOOO4.

0.2.3.Contractor’s Working Areas
As noted above, part of the Site will be available to the Contractor for his temporary use to provide space for
storage. offices. Workshops, prefabrication facilities and the like. For any land beyond that shown as the
Site on Drawing No.6007044-DRG-1C-00— GE0101 required by the Contractor for working areas. disposal of
surplus spoil or the like. the Contractor shall make his own arrangements, obtain any necessary permission
and be solely responsible for paying any costs. charges or compensation in connection therewith.
There shall be no charges associated with use of the riverbed as part of the Contractor's Working Area
provided no privately owned land is occupied. However, Contractor's activities in the riverbed will be
subject to the requirements of Sub-Clause 0.4.1.
The Contractor shall provide, erect, construct. and equip and remove on completion all offices,
accommodation, workshops. stores. berthing loading and unloading facilities, weigh bridges, prefabrication
and other areas for his staff and construction equipment required by him directly or indirectly for the
execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of any defects therein.
The Contractor shall submit for the prior approval of the Engineer his proposals for the layout of his working
area and facilities. It is intended that such approvals will be given promptly provided there are no significant
aspects which are not acceptable to the Engineer.
Upon completion of the Works the Contractor shall clear away all surplus materials. construction
equipment or any debris and temporary works of every kind from the Site and reinstate the areas to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
0.2.4.Possession
The Contractor will be given possession of the Site allocated for his temporary use and the execution of the
Works in accordance with the provisions of Clause 2.1 of the Conditions of Contract.
0.2.5.Access
The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for providing all access to the Site for his personnel, materials,
vehicles, plant and equipment and for all other requirements of the Works, whether such access is via the
River or via the existing road or rail network.
The Contractor shall abide by all limitations. laws and regulations relating to the use of, public
transportation routes and waterways. and shall be responsible for any damage or disruption caused by his
misuse of them. The Contractor may improve and/or widen existing roads, repair or strengthen existing
bridges or culverts, and widen and/or widen existing waterway routes to meet his haulage requirements,
provided that such work be so scheduled and conducted as to minimize disturbance to other users, and
subject to the approval of the Engineer and any Statutory Authorities having jurisdiction.

Should the Contractor require any other form or route of access not provided for by the Contract, he shall
make his own arrangements, obtain any necessary permission, and be solely responsible for payment of
any costs, charges or compensation in connection therewith.
0.2.6.Security
The Contractor's responsibility for the security and safe working environment of the Site under the
provisions of Clause 4.22 of the Conditions of Contract commences from the time possession is given to
him by the Employer. As soon as possible after possession has been given, the boundary of the Site shall
be marked out, and the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, his proposals for maintaining
the boundary and the security within.
The Contractor’s proposals shall include a security control system which shall consist of sufficient
equipment and personnel to prevent unauthorized access 24 hours per day, 7 days per week and which
can meet the prevailing circumstances to ensure the safety and security of persons and property on the
Site. The security control system shall include, inter alia, outside lighting of all buildings and other facilities
to be provided for the Engineer and the Employer as well as street-lighting and lighting of fencing and gates
erected as part of the Contractor’s security control system.
The Contractor shall erect and maintain at his own expense suitable and approved temporary fencing and
gates to enclose areas of the Works to be carried out and other areas of land as may be necessary to
implement his obligations under the Contract to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Trespassing between the
local settlement and the construction yards should be restricted by applying all possible means including
the use of a high noise barrier that could serve both purposes.
All authorized persons, as defined in Clause 0.2.9 of this Specification, shall be registered by the Engineer,
and this register shall be provided to and maintained by the Contractor. In this respect the Contractor is
encouraged to give preference to the employment of project affected persons (with ID cards) and other
local resident in offering unskilled and semiskilled employment and the supply of local goods and services.
The Contractor is to include details of the employment of project affected persons in the monthly progress
report.
0.2.7.Cleanliness and reinstatement
The Contractor's attention is drawn to his obligations under the provisions of Clause 4.23 of the Conditions
of Contract, and shall throughout the period of construction of the Works maintain the whole of the area of
his operations in a clean, tidy and safe condition by arranging his materials and construction equipment in
an orderly manner. All rubbish, waste material, debris and the like shall be systematically cleared from the
working areas and removed directly off the Site for disposal in authorized tips or other proper disposal
facilities.
The Contractor shall immediately upon completion of any work and following the approval of the Engineer
in accordance with the provisions of Clause 7.3 of the Conditions of Contract, fill up all holes and trenches
which may have been made or dug, level any mounds made and clear away all rubbish which may have

been occasioned or made in the course of the execution of the Works. These requirements are in addition
to the Contractor's obligations under Clause 4.18 of the Conditions of Contract.
0.2.8.Disposal and pollution
The Contractor shall not dispose of any waste, rubbish or offensive matter in any place not approved by the
Engineer or Statutory Authorities having jurisdiction.
The Contractor shall not discharge into any watercourse oil, solids, noxious, floating materials or untreated
waterborne effluent, and take reasonable precautions to prevent their accidental spillage, contact with soil
or discharge into water course. The Contractor shall strictly follow ECP 1: Waste Management in all
worksites.
The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to keep public or private roads clear of any spillage or
droppings from his vehicles. Any spillage or droppings which occur shall be cleared without delay to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
0.2.9.Health and Safety on Site
The Contractor shall make itself familiar with the ‘Public Health Action Plan" prepared by the Employer for
the Uttar-Matlab Bridge Project and implement all recommendations found therein for safeguarding the
health of the workers and Project affected persons living in the immediate vicinity.
With reference to Conditions of Contract Sub-Clause 6.7, the Contractor is to ensure sufficient screening on
health issues in the recruitment of workers. Precautionary measures are to be taken against spreading of
communicable diseases through information campaigns and orientation aimed at both the Contractors
employees and local residents. The Contractor shall strictly follow ECP 19: Worker's Health and Safety in all
worksites.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of adequate sanitary facilities for all of his employees
at all construction and camp sites, and shall provide details of sanitary arrangements for the Engineer's
approval.
The Contractor shall provide onsite within 90 days of commencement two suitably equipped and serviced
Medical Clinics with nominal floor area of 100 square metres for emergency medical treatment of
authorised persons. Authorised persons are those approved by the Engineer as the registered personnel
from the Contractor, Engineer and Employer involved in the works of this Contract. Each Medical Clinic
shall be capable of accommodating and treating on a short term basis up to four patients at any given time.
Each facility shall be staffed on a rostered full-time basis by two tertiary qualified medical personnel.
At least one of the medical personnel shall be stationed and capable of supplying first aid treatment at the
Site prior to the commencement of any construction or investigation activities (surveys, site visits etc) at the
Site by the Contractor or Contractor’s representatives.

A suitable ambulance vehicle shall also be provided full-time on site and a planned system for removal to
hospital of authorised persons requiring further treatment shall be provided by the Contractor to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. This ambulance vehicle shall not be used for any other purpose, unless prior
authorization is given by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps, including training and safety drills, to ensure that the safety
of all persons on the Site, whether in his employment or not, is properly maintained. Appropriate protective
clothing and equipment will be provide and maintain for the work to be done and its proper use ensured.
Where required, safety nets, belts, harnesses and lines, shall be provided.
Where work is in, over or near water, life preserving and rescue boats shall be provided. All personnel
working over water shall be required to wear life preservers. The Contractor shall provide and maintain in
prominent and well marked positions all necessary first-aid equipment, medical supplies and other safety
facilities. A sufficient number of trained personnel will be required to be available at all times to render first
aid.
The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps including training and drills to ensure the safety of all project
related personnel on the Site at all times promote the merits of safety awareness. The Contractor shall
employ at least one full time Safety Inspector/Specialist (with qualifications, experience and English
language proficiency acceptable to the Engineer) responsible for supervising the Contractor's compliance
with domestic and international safety standards and regulations. This Safety Inspector/Specialist shall
have at least 10 years experience in management of construction safety issues in the similar nature project.
The Safety Inspector/Specialist shall be on site at the commencement of the Works construction activities.
The Safety Inspector/Specialist shall have primary responsibility for preparing and implementing a Safety
Plan which is to be submitted to the Engineer within 30 days of the Commencement Date, for his review
and acceptance. The Safety Inspector/Specialist shall also have primary responsibility for preparing
subsequent monthly incident reports that are to be submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor. The Safety
Plan and monthly reports shall be written in English in formats acceptable to the Engineer. The Safety Plan
shall address the following issues:
 The Contractor's organizational structure through which all construction safety issues will be
implemented and managed.
 Health and safety risks on the Site.
 Relevant legal, contractual and other requirements
 Appropriate controls and measures to reduce safety risks to an acceptable level.
 Requirements for monitoring, recording, communication and reporting
 Specific induction and training needs for Contractor's personnel working on the Site.
The Contractor shall report to the Engineer promptly and in writing particulars of any accidents or unusual
or unforeseen occurrences on the Site, whether likely to affect progress of the work or not.

0.2.10. Temporary Works
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, specification, execution and subsequent removal of all
Temporary Works necessary for the completion of the Works. Temporary Works shall be designed by the
Contractor in accordance with the standards described elsewhere in this Specification or as agreed with
the Engineer.
Before the Contractor starts construction on any part of the Temporary Works, he shall furnish to the
Engineer complete drawings and, if so required, calculations relating to stability, strength and deflections of
that part of the Temporary Works. Where the Temporary Works have direct contact with any part of the
Permanent Works, the drawings and calculations shall clearly indicate the relationship, illustrate erection
sequences and show any loadings or stresses applied to or from the Permanent Works.
Calculations shall be submitted on size A4 paper, and in electronic format, and shall be clearly and neatly
set out in the English language. All calculations shall be in SI units. All pages shall be uniquely numbered,
dated and titled. Pages may be in manuscript provided this is clear and legible. Script shall be such that
clear photocopies can be reproduced.
The required submission of drawings and/or calculations shall be made to the Engineer at a reasonable
period before the Contractor intends to commence any fabrication or installation of Temporary Works. The
Contractor shall make due allowance in his programme for submission of Temporary Works proposals,
review by the Engineer and amendment, resubmission and further review by the Engineer as may be
necessary until the consent of the Engineer to the proposals is obtained.
The furnishing of any drawings and calculations of the Temporary Works to the Engineer shall not relieve
the Contractor of any liability or obligation under the Contract in respect of such Temporary Works.
0.2.11. Works off Site
The Contractor shall give adequate written notice to the Engineer of the preparation or manufacture at a
place not on the Site of the Permanent Works of any preconstructed units or parts of units to be used in the
Works, all in accordance with the provisions of Clause 0.6 of this Specification.
0.2.12. Notice to Mariners & Civil Aviation Authority
The Contractor shall arrange for the publication of all “Notices to Mariners" which may be required in
respect of the Works. The Contractor shall also liaise with the Civil Aviation Authority concerning any
structure or equipment item higher than 50m above river level. (Le. above SLWL +1 .2m PWD).
0.2.13. Contractor’s Programme and Method Statements
The Contractor's Programme shall include a detailed Gantt chart of all project tasks with their start and
completion dates, plus all resource requirements. The Programme should identify tasks that are on the
critical path, risks involved in the construction process, and possible remedial measures to reduce risks.

The Method Statements must explain how the Contractor intends to carry out the Work under the particular
site conditions.
The Contractor's Programme and Method Statements must take account of the continually changing
configuration of the channels and chars in the river and the seasonal flooding of the river.
The Contractor shall explain his proposed construction methodology for completion of the Works, taking
into account water levels, availability of workspace, intended equipment, workforce, time resources, etc.
The Method Statements shall consist of at least 10 pages of descriptive text and computations, and shall
cover as a minimum the following aspect of the work:
1. Site and Installations

a. Location and Size of work areaa
b. Location and size of offices, labour sheds, and stores
c. Levels of the area with respect to-the water levels in the river
2. Planning
a. A detailed Programme showing all activities and their interdependencies
b. Preparation of drawings related to the Temporary Works
3. Equipment
a. Type and purpose
b. Number and capacity, and expected downtimes
c. Age and operational status
d. Current location and owner
4. Main Bridge - River Spans
a. 'Trial' piles (driven raking steel piles)
b. ‘Test' piles (driven raking steel piles)
c. Production piles (driven raking steel piles)
d. Pile caps
e. Pier columns
k. Bearings and movement joints installation
I. Upper deck construction (precasting, erection. prestressing, completion insitu)
m. Lower deck construction
5. Main Bridge – Balanced cantilever
6. Main Bridge - Viaducts (Road and Rail)

a. ‘Test / trial' piles (vertical bored piles)
b. Production piles
c. Pile caps
d. Pier columns / abutments
e. Headstocks
f. Superstructure (precasting, erection, completion insitu)
g. Bearings and movement joints installation

7. General
a. Survey and geometry control
b. Concrete production
c. Utilities (telecommunications, power, gas, water, waste, etc.)
d. Navigation management on river
e. Riverbed dredging to assist movement of construction vessels
f. Asphaltic concrete wearing course
g. Road furniture (parapets. railing, barriers, road marking, signs, etc.)
h. Sources of materials M
7. Quality Plan Outline
a. Responsibilities
b. Outline of inspection and test plans
c. Laboratory test facilities on Site
d. Laboratory test facilities off Site
e. Specialist testing providers
f. Communication processes — RFls, NCRs, CA
g. Audit
h. Reporting
8. Safety Plan Outline
a. Responsibilities
b. Worker induction and training
c. Emergency action plan
d. First aid facilities
9. Environmental Management Plan outline
a. Responsibilities
b. Outline of the ‘Construction Environmental Action Plan' (CEAP) based on EMP and Environmental
Code of Practices (ECPs)
The geotechnical investigation to be carried out by the Contractor, as described in 4. of this Technical
Specification, is to be programmed to enable the information to be available in sufficient time that the final
decision on pile length can be made by the Engineer and advised to the Contractor before completion of
the fabrication of the piles (if applicable) and mobilization of piling plant has taken place.
The topographic survey of the Site required in terms of Clause 0.3.1 shall be programmed to enable the
information to be available in sufficient time for the Engineer to undertake any necessary revisions to the
design.
The submission of detailed drawings and calculations to the Engineer and subsequent comment on or
approval of these details by the Engineer as per those specification requirements shall not relieve the
Contractor of any of his responsibilities under the Contract.

0.2.14. Environment
The Contractor shall document and operate an environmental management system (EMS) complying with
the relevant requirements of ISO 14001:2004. The EMS document shall be submitted to the Engineer within
30 days after the Commencement Date, for his review and acceptance.
The Contractor shall work in strict compliance with the principles of the Environmental Management Plan
for the Project. No part of the work shall be started before the required Contractor's environmental and
safety inspectors/specialists are present at the site. No part of the work shall be started, or if defects are
found later. continued or restarted before complying with all conditions of this Environmental Management
Plan.
The Contractor shall remedy any damages resulting from non-compliance of any stipulation in the
Environmental Management Plan at his own cost. All work shall be stopped until compliance is assured.
If the Contractor is not able or unwilling to start remedial work within five working days after detection of
any defect or omission, the Engineer can order remedial works through third parties. The cost for third-party
services are to be borne by the Contractor and shall be deducted from payments due to him.
0.2.14.1.Environmental Inspector / Specialist
The Contractor shall employ one full time Environmental Inspector/Specialist (with qualifications,
experience and English language proficiency acceptable to the Engineer) for supervising compliance with
the Environmental Management Plan. He shall keep one set of current environmental standards and
regulations at the site, available for consultation at all times.
The Inspector/Specialist shall have primary responsibility for preparing and implementing an
Environmental Management Plan, which is to be submitted to the Engineer within 30 days of the
Commencement Date, for his review and acceptance. The Environmental Inspector/Specialist shall also
have primary responsibility for preparing subsequent monthly environmental reports that are to be
submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor. The Environmental Management Plan and monthly reports
shall be written in English in formats acceptable to the Engineer.
0.2.14.2.Air and Noise
The Contractor shall regularly spray water on dry surfaces to control any dust problems. The Contractor
shall regulate vehicle emissions and noise in accordance with current legislation of Bangladesh. The
Contractor shall avoid unnecessary noise, especially at night.
0.2.14.3.Land Use
Prior to construction, the Contractor shall remove, and store all topsoil at the construction site. After
construction completion, the Contractor shall restore the top soil and surface vegetation in his work areas
to the level found before starting the work.

0.2.14.4.Pollution
The Contractor shall prevent spills of oil and lubricants from vehicles, engines, etc. Used engine oil must be
disposed of in an environmentally acceptable manner, in accordance with the current legislation of
Bangladesh.
“Spill Kits" will be maintained at all locations where hydraulic (oil rams) equipment is active, at fuelling sites
(on water or land), and at vehicle maintenance facilities. All hydraulic / heavy equipment and service
vehicles will be equipped with portable spill kits.
0.3. General and Sundry obligations
0.3.1.Surveys and setting out
Survey reference points have been established on the Site and the positions, co-ordinates and levels are
shown on the Drawings, as described in Clause 0.1.4.5. In addition to the Contractor's obligations under
Clause 4.7 of the Conditions of Contract, and within 4 weeks of the Commencement Date of Works, the
Contractor shall:
1. Verify with the Engineer the co-ordinates and levels of survey reference points and shall repair or
reinstate in positions approved by the Engineer any survey reference points which have been
damaged or misplaced, and establish new reference points as required in positions approved by
the Engineer.
2. Establish a works control traverse incorporating the above reference points with the establishment
of secondary control points. This traverse shall indicate position and elevation and be installed and
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to commencement of any permanent works. Following
approval of this works control traverse the Contractor shall check and verify the continued accuracy
of this traverse on a monthly basis, immediately reinstating any misplaced ground markers.
3. Before commencing any part of the Works the Contractor shall, together with the Engineer, prepare
a survey and take levels of the site of the Works both above and below water level, and shall agree
all records of the survey and particulars upon which any measurements of the Works will be based.
Failing such survey or agreement of records being prepared and signed jointly, the records of a
survey by the Engineer shall be final and binding on the Contractor. The survey shall include, inter
alia, cross sections of both river banks at a minimum of 50m intervals 500m upstream and
downstream.
It is envisioned that the Contractor will establish either permanent RTK GPS base stations on each bank or
a virtual Reference Station Network (both systems with continuous data recording for post process) for use
by the Contractor and monitoring activities by the Engineer where RTK or conventional GPS are deployed.
Alternative methods that allow for expedient and accurate position measurements and the collection of
topographic data can be suggested by the Contractor. which may be accepted by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall give the Engineer not less than 24 hours notice in writing of his intention to set out or
give levels for any part of the Works so that arrangements can be made for checking the work.
Work shall be suspended for such time as is necessary for checking lines and levels on any part of the
Works. The Contractor shall at his own expense provide all assistance which the Engineer require for
checking the setting out.
The Contractor shall also cooperate and cooperate with the other contractors appointed by Employer on
the joint use of the survey reference points.
The Contractor shall provide, for the Engineer's sole use, in connection with all contracts under this Project,
the instruments scheduled in Section 0.13.2 within 45 days of the Commencement Date. He shall maintain
them in good condition at all times until completion of the Works, when he shall remove them from the Site.
The survey equipment shall remain the property of the Contractor at the end of the Contract. The Contractor
shall also make available poles, pegs, stagings, moulds, templates or profiles required by the Engineer for
checking or measurement of the Works including leaving in position without obstruction to sighting any
poles, pegs, templates or profiles used in the setting out of the Works.
0.3.2.Sign Boards
The Contractor shall supply, erect, (within 45 days of the Commencement Date), maintain and remove on
completion notice boards at each public entrance to the Site, giving brief details of the Project in English
and Bengali, including but not limited to, the name of the Contract (for all Contracts let under the Project),
the names of the Employer, Funding Agency(ies), Contractor(s) and the Engineer. The wording, colours and
style of the signs and size of lettering and the like shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
0.3.3.Progress Photographs and Video Record
The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer a soft copy of a photographic record, taken by an appropriately
skilled and experienced photographer acceptable to the Engineer, before the start of the Works and
monthly thereafter showing the progress of the Works and also such particular sections of the Works, Site,
Plant or Materials as the Engineer may direct. Each photograph shall be referenced with the date of
exposure and an identification or reference number. to be cross referenced to a spreadsheet / database
providing a brief description of the view and any other details the Engineer deems necessary. All
photographs will be georeferenced with this information either embedded in the EXIF header or included in
the spreadsheet / database. This information shall be submitted to the Engineer within 5 days of the end of
each month.
The Contractor shall also supply a soft copy on DVD on an approved video system of a video record of the
Site. This shall be of approximately 30 minutes duration with suitable recorded commentary / subtitles
taken by an approved experienced photographer before the start of the Works and at monthly intervals
thereafter. all to the direction of the Engineer. Refer also to Clause 0.5.4.

The copyright of such photographs and video and all rights of reproduction shall be reserved exclusively to
the Employer. No other photographs and video will be allowed to be taken without prior permission
obtained from the Employer in writing.
0.3.4.Water Level Gauges and Meteorological Station
The Contractor shall supply, install and maintain for the duration of the Contract two water level gauging
stations at locations to be determined by the Engineer, including all necessary support structures required
in flowing water up to six metres deep. Each gauge will consist of non-erodible gauge plates (max. length 7
meters) and standard centimetre marks, and a retrievable pressure transducer with datalogger for
continuous recording of water levels. Software for accessing and analysis of the transducer records is to be
supplied to the Engineer.
In addition, the Contractor shall supply, install, operate and maintain for the duration of the Contract an
automatic weather station equipped with a datalogger to record rainfall, evaporation, wind velocity and
direction, sunshine, humidity and temperature recorder at a location to be confirmed by the Engineer .
0.3.5.Working Drawings
The Contractor shall submit working drawings for the prior approval of the Engineer in hardcopy and
electronic copy. Such working drawings shall include bar bending schedules and such detail drawings as
are required for all permanent and temporary works as deemed necessary by the Engineer. No part of the
Works shall be constructed until the relevant working drawings are approved by the Engineer.
Drawings shall be prepared in metric units, with English text and to ISO A1 size unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer, and shall be accurate to scale and fully dimensioned. The style and presentation shall be
standardized.
Each working drawing shall have assigned to it a unique number and title. All issues of revisions of any
working drawing shall be identified by a sequential revision letter or number, the date of revision and brief
descriptions of the revisions. All copies of drawings issued shall be clearly marked with the status of the
drawings, showing whether it has been issued for information, comment, approval, construction or other
purpose.
The Contractor shall maintain a comprehensive register of working drawings listing all relevant information
including numbers, titles, date of issue, to whom issued, number of copies, status of issue, date of approval,
rejection, receipt of comments, date when superseded, remarks etc. Copies of the register shall be issued
to the Engineer as directed.
Where errors or omissions are found on any approved working drawing, approval of that drawing shall be
withdrawn. The drawing shall without delay be withdrawn from circulation, amended and resubmitted for
the approval of the Engineer. Construction shall proceed only in accordance with the revised working
drawings when approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall on each submission of drawings to the Engineer provide four paper copies plus one
soft copy (electronic copies in both PDF and AutoCAD formats).
0.3.6.Environmental Obligations
The Contractor’s attention is drawn to his obligations under the provisions of Clause 4.18 of the Conditions
of Contract. In addition, the Contractor shall make itself familiar with the Environmental Action Plan (EAP)
prepared by the Employer for the Padma Multipurpose Bridge Project and implement all recommendations
found therein for safeguarding the environment. Specific reference is made to:
 Volume 2: EIA, Table 8-1: Environmental Management Plan (EMP)

 Volume 2: ElA, Table 8-2: Environmental Monitoring Plan during Construction and Operation; and
 Volume 2: ElA, Annex 8-1: Environmental Codes of Practice
The EMP presented in Table 8-1 identifies high and medium ranked impacts and risks. It is divided into
three sections, pre-construction, construction, and O/M which are further divided into Project activity to
address activity wise impacts. Each impact in the EMP is addressed by the following steps:
 Activity
 Impact
 Mitigation/Compensation measures
 Budget
 Implementation agency
 Supervision Agency
Table 8-2: Environmental Monitoring Plan during Construction and Operation provides details of the
environmental monitoring program that is to be implemented, managed and paid for by the Contractor
during the preconstruction and construction phases of the Contract. The following are considered in the
monitoring plan:
 Parameter/Indicator
 Location of Monitoring
 Means of Monitoring
 Frequency
 Implementation Agency
 Supervision Agency
The Environmental Codes of Practice (ECP) address less significant environmental impacts and all general
construction related impacts of the proposed project implementation The ECPs will provide guidelines for
best operating practices and environmental management guidelines to be followed by the Contractor for
sustainable management of all environmental Issues. The list of ECPs prepared for the PMBP and included
in Annex 8-1: Environmental Codes of Practice is given below:
 ECP 1: Waste Management

 ECP 2: Fuels and Hazardous Goods Management

 ECP 3: Water Resources Management
 ECP 4: Drainage Management
 ECP 5: Soil Quality Management
 ECP 6: Erosion and Sediment Control
 ECP 7: Top Soil Management
 ECP 8: Topography and Landscaping
 ECP 9: Borrow Areas Development & Operation
 ECP 10: Air Quality Management
 ECP 11: Noise and Vibration Management
 ECP 12: Protection of Flora
 ECP 13: Protection of Fauna
 ECP 14: Protection of Fisheries
 ECP 15: Road Transport and Road Traffic Management
 ECP 16: River Transport Management
 ECP 17: Construction Camp Management
 ECP 18: Cultural and Religious Issues
 ECP 19: Workers Health and Safety
The Contractor shall also prepare a ‘Construction Environmental Action Plan' (CEAP) demonstrating the
manner in which he will comply with the requirements of the ECPs and the mitigation measures in the
Environmental Action Plan. The CEAP will form part of the contract documents and will be used as
monitoring tool for compliance. The Contractor must have at least one Environmental Inspector/Specialist
and one Occupational, Health and Safety (OH) Inspector/Specialist, on Site full- time, who will be working
in close coordination with the Engineer’s lead Environmental Specialist and PIU. In addition, each monthly
environmental report (which shall include a description of environmental monitoring activities, measured
parameter results, details of any incidents and remedial actions taken, etc) shall be submitted at the same
time as the monthly interim payment application, for review and acceptance by the Engineer, based on
advice from the lead Environmental Specialist.
The following are a few of the major impacts identified in the Table 8-1: EMP, the general and minor
environmental impacts are covered in the ECPs:
Environmenta Mitigation / Compensation

Project Activities Responsibility
l Impacts Measures
Large quantities of Exploration of Environmental permits of suppliers Included in civil
material import illegal source from relevant authorities works contract
Local turbidity Dredging takes place below the Included in civil
Dredging for access / at cutter heads surrounding riverbed works contract
transit channel and Loss of wildlife
Establishment of a Visitor Centre (Vol Included in civil
barge movement and aquatic
2 EIA: Section 8.9.4.3). works contract
habitat

Mobilization of  Implement ECP 15 on Road

equipment and Transport and Road Safety
Materials by road Management.
 Ensure that all construction
vehicles observe speed limits on the
Road Safety construction sites and on public
Included in civil
and traffic roads.
works contract
management  Provide adequate signage,
barriers, and flag persons for traffic
control.
 Fit audible warning devices in all
vehicles to alert during reversing.
 Maintain all existing roads in

traffic worthy condition ensuring
maintenance of uninterrupted
movement of traffic.
 Temporary bypasses to be
constructed and maintained
Damage of (including dust control) during the
local roads construction period particularly at
due to bridge crossings. Included in civil
movement of  Form a grievance redress works contract
heavy axle committee in association with
loads affected population before starting
the civil work and advance notice
must be given to the community
about the construction schedule.
 Repair the damaged local roads
to their original condition after
project completion.
Dust and  Implement ECP 10 on ‘Air Quality Included in civil
emissions from Management’ works contract
construction  Each vehicle related to the
vehicles and construction has to have valid
equipment ‘Emission Permit for motor vehicle’
may cause during construction.
health
 Vehicular traffic through
problems or
communities will be avoided as far
accidents and
as possible. Vehicle speeds will be
injuries to
kept low if they should pass through
construction
communities.
workers and

nearby  Cover haul vehicles carrying

community dusty materials.
 Watering of the un paved roads.
Mobilization of  Affecting  Minimum dredging of Charland
equipment and Charland flora and minimum disturbance to
materials through river and avian habitat.
fauna.  Impement ECPs 12 and 13 on
 Dredging to Protection of Flora and Fauna.
increase  Movement of barges should be Included in civil
navigation works contract
within the designated project areas.
depth,
 Disposal of materials in
access/trans it
accordance with the dredge
channels, and
material management plan
equipment
manoeuvring.
Operations at  Implement ECP 10 on ‘Air Quality
Construction Yards Management’.
and Construction Sites  Water to be sprayed during the
construction phase in all mixing
areas where dry materials are
handled and / or crushed.
Air pollution Temporary access roads to
from material aggregates sites must be included
Included in civil
storage sites in the dust suppression program. A
works contract
and mixing water spraying schedule will be
sites prepared by the contractor and will
serve as the basis of a dust control
program. The Project authorities will
regularly monitor this schedule.
 Materials to be covered in
vehicles going to and from the
construction sites to reduce spills.
Noise  Implement ECP 11 on ‘Noise and Included in civil
pollution from Vibration Management’ works contract
operation of  Provide temporary noise barriers
construction near the sensitive sites.
yard and  Vehicles and equipment to be
construction fitted with the silencer and
activities maintained accordingly.
 Use of vehicles machineries and
equipment that are of good quality
and generates noise as per their
specifications.

 Implement ECP 2 on ‘Fuels and

Hazardous Goods Management’
 Contractor to develop and
undertake construction waste
management strategy for both
hazardous and non-hazardous
wastes separately.
 Contractor to confine the
contaminants immediately after
Pollution risk such accidental spillage.
from fuel and  Contractor to collect
other contaminated soils, treat and Included in civil
hazardous dispose them in environment works contract
material friendly manner.
storage sites  All areas intended for storage of
hazardous materials to be
quarantined and provided with
adequate facilities to combat
emergency situations complying all
the applicable statutory stipulation.
 Train the personnel in-charge of
these sites to control access to
these areas and entry to be allowed
only under authorization.
Air and noise  Routine maintenance and
pollution from regular inspection of these
Operation of generators. Included in civil
generators for  Use of canopy for diesel / gas works contract
electricity generators for noise control /
generation reduction.
 Implement ECP 3 on ‘Water
Resources Management’.
 Discharge sediment laden
construction water into settling
Surface water lagoons or tanks prior to final Included in civil
pollution discharge. works contract
 Discharge alkaline water from
the concrete works that consists of
fine particles into settling lagoons
prior to final discharge.
Solid Waste,  Implement ECP 1 on ‘Waste Included in civil
excess Management? works contract

 Develop appropriate
construction waste management
strategy along with its strict
adaptation.
materials
 Install proper waste disposal
facilities.
 Organize proper collection and
transportation of wastes.
 Implement ECP 19 on Workers
Health and Safety.
 Ensure construction related
Occupational
safety measures as an integral part Included in civil
health and
of the construction works. works contract
safety issues
 Provision of adequate on site
First Aid Boxes and treatment
facilities.
Construction of Underwater  Use vibratory hammer. Under Included in civil
substructure (pile noise impacts those conditions where impact works contract
driving and on fisheries hammers are required for reasons
concreting) and other of seismic stability or substrate type,
aquatic life it is recommended that the pile be
driven as deep as possible with a
vibratory hammer prior to the use of
the impact hammer.
 Monitor sound levels during pile
driving to ensure that they do not
exceed the NOAA or any other
international recognized criteria.
 Implement measures to to
attenuate the sound when sound
pressure levels exceed the NOAA or
any other international recognized
criteria. Methods to reduce the
sound pressure levels include. but
are not limited to:
- Installation of underwater
enclosures to minimize sound.
- Surround the pile with an air
bubble curtain system or air-
filled coffer dam.
- Use a smaller hammer to reduce
the sound pressure. The sound

produced in pile driving has a

direct relationship to the force
used to drive the pile. A smaller
hammer will have less force on
the pile therefore, producing
less sound.
 Use a hydraulic hammer if
impact driving cannot be avoided.
The force of the hammer blow can
be controlled with hydraulic
hammers, and reducing the impact
force will reduce the intensity of the
resulting sound.
 A construction window is
proposed for piling schedule to
reduce the impact on Hilsa
migration. Sincejuvenile Hilsa
migration in the bridge site
predominantly takes place during
March-May through two deep
channels (>7m) located on Mawa
Impact on the
side, it is recommended that no
annual Part of civil works
piling activity will be taken up during
juvenile Hilsa contract and wild
March to May in deep channels. It is
migration and life monitoring
also recommended that contractor
other fish budget
has to conduct bathymetric surveys
species
every year immediately after the
monsoon season to locate these
deep channels and revise the piling
schedule accordingly.
 Hilsa migration as per the
schedule of ecological survey to
confirm the actual depth of
migration at bridge site.
Impact on Restrict piling during dolphin Part of civil works
dolphin and breeding period (April-July) in contract
other aquatic channels with >7m water column.
life. During other season, an exclusion
zone of 500m radius should be
monitored for at least 30 minute
before the start of piling. If dolphins
are observed in the exclusion zone,

piling works should be delayed until

they have left the area. If dolphins
enter the exclusion zone after piling
has commenced. piling works
should cease until they have left. It is
also recommended that adoption of
a ‘soft start’; using a low energy start
to the operations would give
dolphins an opportunity to leave the
area. In addition, the following
mitigations measures are proposed:
 Gradually ramp up the sound
levels to scare the dolphins away
before piling proper commences.
 Use pingers upstream and
downstream to chase away
dolphins.
 Monitor area for dolphins to
ensure they are well away from the
piling site — scare them away if
they are two close to the site using
pingers
 Limit the construction activity
within the designated areas.
 Check the site for turtle or gharial
trapped in, or in danger from civil
Impact on
works and use a qualified person to Part of civil works
turtle and
relocate the animal. contract
gharial habitat
 Monitor area to ensure they are
well away from the piling site –
scare them away if they are too
close to the site using pingers
Impact of air  Acoustic enclosure should be
noise levels placed to cover the hammer and
on the exposed pile to reduce the air Included in civil
endangered noise. The air noise levels can be works contract
and migratory reduced to about 60 dB with these
birds measures.
Vegetation  Avoid to damage vegetation in Included in civil
clearing on the Charland. works contract
the Char  Implement ECPs 12 and 13 on
located along ‘Protection of Flora and Fauna’

the alignment
 Unused concrete should not be Included in civil
Risk of water disposed into the river water. works contract
contamination  Unused concrete should be
with concrete collected properly and disposed in
the designated waste dumping site.
 Implement ECP 19 on ‘Workers
Health and Safety’.
 Provision of adequate lighting
along the bridge alignment and in
the area particularly where
Occupational construction works will take place.
Included in civil
Health and  Proper safety training for all
works contract
Safety participating in the construction
works and distribution of PPE (such
as helmets, masks, safety shoes
and goggles, rain coats, ear plugs,
Construction of
etc.) to the construction labourers,
superstructure
engineers.
 Proper safety training for all
participating in the welding works
and distribution of personal
Air pollution protective equipment (such as Included in civil
from welding helmets, masks, safety shoes and works contract
goggles, rain coats, ear plugs, etc.)
to the construction labourers and
engineers.
Movement of  Movement of barges only within Included in civil
barges in river the designated areas in the river. works contract
0.4. Special Requirements
0.4.1.Safety of Navigation
The Contractor shall comply with all orders and directions given to him from time to time by the Engineer in
respect of the safety of navigation and with requirements for marking, watching and lighting any structure,
craft or equipment which may be used in the construction of the Works.
The Contractor shall not lay down or provide permanent moorings for his floating plant. The Contractor’s
temporary moorings shall be positioned and installed to the approval of the Engineer and the Bangladesh
Inland Waterway Transportation Authority (BIWTA) of the Government of Bangladesh. Prior notification of
their installation shall be given officially to BlWTA.

The Contractor shall without delay raise and remove or recover any material. construction equipment
(floating or otherwise) or vessel belonging to or hired by him which may be sunk stranded or gone adrift in
the course of execution and completion of the Works or remedying of defects herein, or otherwise deal with
the same as the Engineer may direct. Until there is no further threat to navigation the Contractor shall set up
and maintain whatever markers, buoys and lights are deemed necessary by the Engineer or any Statutory
Authority having jurisdiction.
Whether or not such materials. construction equipment or vessels which may be sunk stranded or gone
adrift are insured or have been declared an actual or constructive total loss shall not absolve the Contractor
from his obligations under this Clause.
If the Contractor is unable or unwilling at once to fulfil his obligations under this Clause the Employer shall
be entitled to employ and pay other persons to carry out such work as the Engineer may consider urgently
necessary. The costs so incurred shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer in accordance
with the relevant provisions of Clause 7.6 of the Conditions of Contract.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions and measures to avoid interruption of the existing ferry
service between Mawa on the North Bank and Janjira on the South Bank during construction of Temporary
Works and Permanent Works. The Contractor shall keep the ferry operations staff appraised of his
operations and moves of equipment which might affect the ferry route and safety.
0.4.2.Visiting Dignitaries, Seminars, Training, Educational and other Brochures
The Contractor is required to assist and cooperate with the Engineer in the training of selected Employer's
personnel to enable them to operate and maintain the Works during and after the Defects Notification
Period. This training will be to a programme approved by the Employer and include instruction during the
contract period in matters associated with the construction. and imparting a thorough understanding of all
elements of the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Furthermore the Contractor will be required to assist with visits of dignitaries and other matters such as
seminars. educational presentations, production of brochures etc.
0.4.3.Operation and Maintenance Manual
The Contractor shall forward to the Engineer ten (10 No.) hard copies of an Operation and Maintenance
Manual in English and Bengali languages. plus one soft copy in both PDF and MSWORD format on DVD.
Drafts of the Manual shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval not less than 12 weeks before the date
fixed for commissioning or handover of completed Works. Any modifications to the form or extent of the
contents required by the Engineer shall be incorporated in the final issue of the Manual.
The Manual shall contain. but not be limited to, the following:

 A folio of record drawings showing all details “as built" for the whole of the Works; these shall be
submitted in the form of ten (10 No.) hard copies plus one soft copy in both PDF and AutoCAD
format on DVD;
 Operating instructions applicable to any items of mechanical or electrical equipment or appliances
handed over to the Employer in accordance with the Contract;
 A schedule for inspection and monitoring of all component parts susceptible to wear and tear,
damage or weathering and deterioration with time;
 A schedule of routine and periodic maintenance activities appropriate for the climate, the
anticipated level of use or exposure and the availability of skilled labour;
 Instructions and procedures for the correction of faults or foreseeable accidental damage;
 Specifications for materials and workmanship for all predictable routine and periodic maintenance
or repair activities; including original brochures of all manufactured materials in the permanent
works; and
 Lists of tools, instruments and equipment necessary for all inspection, operation and maintenance
activities.
0.5. Programme and Progress Reports and Returns
0.5.1.General
On a regular basis, as specified below, the Contractor must update his Programme (work schedule) and
prepare a progress report quantifying the activities performed during the period, outlining any constraints to
progress and suggesting possible remedial actions.
The programme required by Clause 8. 3 of the Conditions of Contract shall be in the form of both a Gantt
chart and network diagram. They shall cover all the main items of work showing their inter-relation with.
and interdependence on, other items of work, and be laid out in a format which, will permit progress of the
various items to be marked up on them throughout the execution of the Works. They shall be produced as
a result of a critical path analysis in a form (based on a standard project management computer software
package approved by the Engineer such as Primavera) capable of being updated, showing all requisite
operations, earliest and latest start and completion dates, durations, float and critical activities, and shall be
submitted with the programme.
The programme shall include, inter alia:
 The dates by which the Contractor requires any information from the Engineer;
 The dates by which the Contractor requires instructions from the Engineer to carry out work
described in the Contract as Provisional Sums;
 The dates and periods during which the Contractor will require access to sites allocated to other
contracts in the execution of his Works; and
 The dates and periods for the preparation of working drawings and review of these by the Engineer.

The method statements required in accordance with Clause 8.3 of the Conditions of Contract shall include
a list of major items of construction equipment to be used, their deployment in relation to the programme,
methods of movement of materials, Temporary Works and other like matters as detailed in Clause 0.2.13.
0n the last day of each week the Contractor shall issue to the Engineer details of his intended programme
of work for the week ahead.
0.5.2.Progress Meetings
Meetings between the Engineer and the Contractor will be held at intervals as required by the Engineer, but
not exceeding one month, to discuss the progress of the Works and any problems which may have arisen.
The Contractor shall give to the Engineer at these meetings details of his progress to date in relation to the
programme.
0.5.3.Daily Records and Weekly Returns
0.5.3.1. Daily Records
The Contractor shall record daily plant labour and work undertaken for each operation on site and agree
these records with the Engineer or his representative. These records shall be kept in a ledger by area / work
supervision and signed by respective Contractor / Consultant representatives on a daily basis.
0.5.3.2. Weekly Returns
At weekly intervals the Contractor shall, in accordance with his obligations under Clause 6.10 of the
Conditions of Contract, supply to the Engineer returns of labour, materials and Contractor’s Equipment and,
in addition, a schedule of the main work items in each section of the Works showing quantitative progress
during the previous week and cumulative progress to date.
0.5.4.Monthly Returns
At monthly intervals, and not later than the first week in every month, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer progress report documentation for the previous month which shall include, but not be limited to
the following:
 a programme marked up with any agreed amendments and showing the actual percentage
completion of each of the main items of work, in such a way that comparison can be made with
the scheduled percentage completion of each item;
 weather and other conditions, including daily temperature range, humidity, rainfall, wind speed and
direction, river levels etc.;
 summary of staff and labour employed on the Site;
 schedule of Contractor's Equipment on Site with dates of arrival and departure as appropriate;
 schedule of principal material items with dates of placing orders, progress of manufacture, dates of
delivery to Site etc.;
 record of Site safety;

 a list of any constraints to progress. and suggestions on possible remedial actions; and
 photographs and video record as described in Clause 0.3.3.
0.5.5.Submission of Returns '
All reports, statements, returns, diagrams or drawings etc. except for working drawings for approval under
Clause 0.3.5, which the Contractor is required to submit to the Engineer during the progress of the Works,
shall be furnished in quadruplicate (4 No. copies) plus 2 No. electronic copies unless otherwise directed.
0.6. Quality Assurance, Standards and Materials Testing
0.6.1.Quality Assurance
The Contractor shall document and operate a Quality System generally complying with the ISO 9001:2015
or an equivalent guideline approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall prepare a Quality Plan for the Works. The plan shall be submitted for the approval of
the Engineer within 4 weeks of the Commencement Date.
The Quality Plan shall be reviewed, updated and resubmitted for approval as necessary throughout the
contract period.
The Quality Plan shall specifically address the procedures for maintaining the project quality requirements
with respect to the use of subcontractors, vendors and suppliers. The requirements for quality surveillance
shall reflect the criticality of the item or material concerned. The criteria for assessment of criticality shall be
approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer and shall provide all necessary access to works and
records to enable the Engineer to assess the Contractor‘s Quality System and to audit the implementation
of the Quality Plan and associated procedures.
0.6.2.Procedures
The Contractor shall not commence any item of Permanent Works until he has submitted to the Engineer a
written statement of his proposed procedure for his own inspections of that item, recording such inspection
and obtaining the Engineer's written approval thereof. Each detailed procedure shall be formulated
following detailed discussions with the Engineer. Every such statement shall identify the individuals on the
Contractor's or Sub-Contractor's staff or Engineer's staff who are responsible for inspecting the
workmanship and/or testing the materials for the item in question, the place of inspection, the stages at
which inspections and tests are to be made, the detailed aspects to be verified or measured in each
inspection. Each inspection shall be recorded.

0.6.3.Tests and Inspection Records
The record shall identify the Contractor's and Engineer's staff involved, the place, the date and time when
the inspection was completed, the section of the Works and the materials tested or inspected, and its state
of completion. Reference shall be made to the relevant working drawings and the specific aspects or
properties which were checked or measured shall be recorded.
One copy of each record of inspection shall be submitted to the Engineer. The records of inspections and
tests shall be stored in an orderly fashion on the Site by the Contractor until the issue of the Defects Liability
Certificate for the whole of the Works, or such earlier time as the Engineer may instruct, and the Engineer
shall have the right to access to them at all times.
After the issue of the Defects Liability Certificate for the whole of the Works, or such earlier time as the
Engineer may instruct, the Contractor shall, as instructed by the Engineer, either dispose of the records or
deliver them as directed.
0.6.4.Contractor’s Testing and Inspection
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all specified testing (in the laboratory, in the field and
off site) and inspections of materials and workmanship are carried out. No work shall be covered up
without the written approval of the Engineer. All items of work concealed in the finished work shall be
inspected by the Contractor and Engineer immediately before they are covered up. Inspection and testing
shall be recorded according to the procedure specified in Clause 0.6.3.
It is intended that the majority of the laboratory testing required will be undertaken in the Engineer's
Laboratory described in Clause 0.9. Some specialist testing is to be arranged by the Contractor and carried
out in suitable laboratories off-site. Off site testing may be necessary during the review of materials
submitted by the Contractor for approval. in these cases the costs of such tests are to be borne by the
Contractor. Field sampling and testing will be carried out by suitably qualified and experienced Contractor's
staff under the oversight of Engineer's staff.
It is expected that the Contractor's Materials Engineer will be responsible for liaising and coordinating with
the Engineer's Laboratory, the Engineer's field sampling / testing staff and off-site laboratories to ensure all
sampling, specified tests and inspections are carried out in a timely manner.
0.6.5.Engineer’s Testing and Inspection
In addition to the Contractor’s testing and inspection described in Clause 0.6.4, the Contractor shall afford
and facilitate access at all times for the Engineer's inspection and testing of materials and workmanship.
The Contractor shall provide means of access and assistance as may reasonably be required by the
Engineer. For all items of work the Contractor shall give adequate notice in writing to the Engineer that the
item in question is complete and is ready for inspection, and shall not cover it by subsequent work until the
Engineer has confirmed in writing that it has been inspected and is approved. No inspection or approval by
the Engineer shall relieve the Contractor of any of his duties and obligations under the Contract.

0.6.6.Notice of Works Off Site
The Contractor shall give adequate written notice to the Engineer of the preparation or manufacture at a
place not on the Site of any pre-constructed units or parts of units or materials to be used in the Works.
Such notice shall state the place and time of the preparation or manufacture, quarrying or extraction, and
be given sufficiently in advance as to enable the Engineer to make arrangements which he may deem
necessary for inspection before the start and at any stage of the work. and not only when the units or parts
are completed. Where it is deemed necessary for the Engineer's staff to attend any offsite inspections, all
reasonable direct costs (relating to travel, accommodation. and meals) shall be borne by the Contractor.
Works off Site shall not commence without the prior approval of the Engineer.
Any units or parts which are prepared or manufactured without such prior notice having been given to the
Engineer may be rejected if the Engineer considers that his inspection was necessary during the progress
of the preparation or manufacture.
0.6.7.Standards
Except where otherwise specified or authorized by the Engineer all materials and workmanship shall
conform to the following specifications:
Specification Section 5 — Earthworks. All materials and workmanship shall conform to the latest edition of
the relevant Standard Specifications of the American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials. Inc. (hereinafter abbreviated to AASHTO) or of the American Society for Testing Materials
(hereinafter abbreviated to ASTM) current at the date of Invitation to Tender.
Specification Sections 6 to 16, 18 and 24 to 26 relating to the structure of the main bridge refer to Eurocodes
and United Kingdom National Annexes. Standards which are considered to be equivalent, shall not apply
unless approved by the Engineer. The Engineer shall not be bound to give or withhold his approval until the
Contractor has provided him with a copy of the relevant standard for information. If approval is given. the
Contractor shall provide copies of the document for use by the Engineer as stated below.
Specification Section 27 — Architectural Lighting. All materials and workmanship shall conform to the latest
edition of the relevant British Standard Specifications current at the date of Invitation to Tender.
Where reference is made to any of the above Standard Specifications in imperial units. the nearest unit of
imperial dimension to the metric dimension quoted in the Drawing or Specification shall apply.
Materials meeting other internationally accepted equal or better standards may be accepted subject to
review by the Engineer. Any such alternative standard proposed by the Contractor shall be submitted in the
English language for approval by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer five (5 No.) hardcopy sets plus one (1 No.) digital (PDF) copy of
each of the standards, codes and references to be used in the Contract within 45 days of the
Commencement Date of the Works and in addition he shall supply five (5 No.) hardcopy sets plus one (1

No.) digital (PDF) copy of any other standard or code subsequently specified or alternatively proposed, in
both hard and soft copy. One set of these documents is for the Engineer, one set for the Employer and one
set for each of the Engineer's Laboratories. All standards shall be in English. On completion of the Contract
all standards, codes and references so provided shall become the property of the Employer.
0.6.8.Proprietary Products
Where a proprietary or brand name or the name of a supplier or manufacturer is indicated on the Drawings
or in the Specification this is in respect of items which are not otherwise adequately described by
Eurocodes or equivalent recognized standards. Alternative items based on recognized national standards
of the country of origin may be accepted provided that documented proof in the English language is
submitted to the Engineer for his approval sufficiently in advance and showing that the alternative
proposed is of equal or higher quality and performance than the specified item.
0.6.9.Materials to be New
All materials used in the Permanent Works shall be new unless otherwise specified or agreed by the
Engineer in writing. No materials to be incorporated in the Permanent Works shall have previously been
used in the Temporary Works unless otherwise specified or agreed by the Engineer in writing.
0.6.10. Orders for Materials
Before orders are placed for any materials of any description to be used in the Permanent Works the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the names and addresses of the manufacturers or suppliers
proposed, together with details of their QA systems. Following approval by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall submit to him copies of all orders placed for such materials.
0.6.11. Samples
In accordance with the provisions of Clause 7.2 of the Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall as
directed by the Engineer supply samples of materials to be incorporated in the Works. The samples
required for approval shall be submitted by the Contractor in labelled boxes suitable for storage, and in
sufficient time for testing, due allowance being made for the fact that if samples are rejected, further
samples and testing will be required. Approved samples will be kept by the Engineer who will reject any
materials not corresponding in character and quality with the approved samples.
0.6.12. Certificates
All manufacturer's certificates of test, proof sheets, mill sheets etc., showing that the materials have been
tested in accordance with the requirements of the relevant European Standards (EN) or other approved
standard or this Specification, shall be supplied in the English language by the Contractor to the Engineer
free of charge.

0.7. Engineer’s and Employer’s Requirements
0.7.1.General
Through separate contracts under this Project the Employer is constructing permanent office and
residential accommodation at Service Area 2 and temporary office, residential and laboratory
accommodation at Service Areas 1 and 3 as shown on Drawing No.6009744-DRG-1C-GE0101 to be made
available to the Employer and Engineer for the duration of the Project. As this accommodation will not be
completed until later in the Project, the Contractor shall provide prefabricated office, residential and
laboratory accommodation, as described in detail in this Section of the Specification, until such time as the
permanent and temporary accommodation can be occupied. All of this prefabricated accommodation,
including office, laboratory and residential, will be required for the duration of the contract, there being
insufficient permanent and temporary accommodation being constructed at the three Service Areas for the
Employer's and Engineer’s staff.
Therefore, once the permanent and temporary accommodation at the Service Areas is ready to be
occupied some of the prefabricated accommodation will need to be relocated from the Contractor's
construction yards to a location in or adjacent to one of the Service Areas. The prefabricated
accommodation therefore needs to be a form of construction that will allow this to be done with minimum
disruption. The BoQ includes for the relocation and reestablishment of the prefabricated accommodation.
The Contractor shall equip, install and maintain until the issuance of the Taking-Over Certificate, as
specified below, the prefabricated office, laboratory and accommodation facilities. and permanent office,
laboratory and accommodation facilities constructed at Service Area 2 including access roads and hard-
standings thereto, furniture, equipment and services for the sole use of the Engineer and Employer and
their respective staff as detailed and specified in this Section of the Specification.
In addition the Contractor shall provide, install and maintain until the issuance of the Taking-Over
Certificate, as specified below, vehicles, vessels, berthing and other facilities and equipment for the sole use
of the Engineer and Employer and their respective staff as detailed and specified in this Section of the
Specification.
All the requirements of the Engineer and Employer shall be provided by the Contractor in a timely manner
to a programme agreed and approved by the Engineer. In this respect the Contractor shall submit detailed
proposals for the provision of all requirements as an annex to the Programme to be submitted under
Clause 8.3 of the Conditions of Contract.
The Contractor shall note that the Engineer's and Employer's requirements set out in detail in this Section
will be used by the Engineer and Employer in the supervision and administration of this Contract and the
other contracts described in Clause 0.1.1 also.

0.7.2.Attendance
The Contractor shall provide qualified laboratory technicians, drivers, labourers, chainmen, boatmen and
crew, clerical staff, watchmen and office cleaning labour and other attendants, for the sole direction of the
Engineer and Employer and their respective staff as scheduled in this Section of the Specification. The
Contractor shall supply capable personnel equal to the tasks required, maintain continuity of staff, and
provide such overtime as may be required by the Engineer on the Site until the issuance of the Taking-Over
Certificate. Some of these staff must have an acceptable proficiency in the English language.
0.7.3.Consumables
All buildings provided by the Contractor are to be properly maintained and regularly cleaned. All
consumables required for this purpose are to be provided by the Contractor until issuance of the Taking-
Over Certificate.
All vehicles and vessels shall be properly licensed, insured and maintained in good running order at all
times. Replacement transport shall be provided at any time the original transport is unavailable for 12
consecutive hours or more. All fuel, oils, tires, spare parts and other consumables, including specialty
consumables (such as proprietary batteries, chart paper, specialty lubricants etc.), will be supplied by the
Contractor until the issuance of the Taking-Over Certificate unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
0.7.4.Removal of Facilities on Completion
The Contractor shall obtain permission from the Engineer before the removal or demolition of any buildings,
installations, furnishings, fittings or anything provided, installed or constructed under the provisions of this
Section of the Specification.
Upon completion of the Works the Contractor shall remove and clear away from the Site all temporary
buildings, installations, furnishings, fittings, everything provided, installed or constructed under the
provisions of this Section of the Specification, unless othenivise stated in the Contract or directed by the
Engineer.
0.7.5.Communications, Internet and IT Services
The Contractor shall provide and maintain until the issuance of the Taking-Over Certificate communications
and internet facilities for the sole use of the Engineer and Employer and their respective staff as specified in
Clause 0.11 unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
0.7.6.Electricity Supply
The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply of electricity to all works, accommodation, offices,
laboratories and services provided under this Contract. Standby generating capacity sufficient to enable
normal operation of the Engineer’s Office, Engineer's Laboratory, and Engineer’s Accommodation is to be
provided if normal electricity is to be supplied by the Power Board.

In designing and installing the electricity distribution system for the accommodation and Offices for the
Employer and Engineer, the Contractor shall take into account the permanent nature of some of these
buildings.
When so directed the Contractor shall hand over the aforementioned distribution system into the charge of
the Employer after the issuance of the Taking-Over Certificate.
Except where separate provision for payment for electrical works is made in the Bill of Quantities, the cost
of all other electricity requirements shall be deemed to be included in the other rates and prices in the
Contract.
The electricity supply and distribution system for accommodation, recreational and information facilities,
offices and laboratories for the use of Engineer and Employer shall be uninterrupted (with standby
generating capacity provided, if necessary) and shall include street-lighting and security lighting as
specified in Clause 0.2.6 of this Specification.
0.7.7.Water Supply
The Contractor shall be responsible for water supply to all places of work, accommodation, offices.
laboratories and services provided under this Contract.
Drinking water supply to the office, laboratory and accommodation as detailed in this Section shall be by
means of water obtained from deep tube wells and of a quality (obtained through chemical or other
treatment, if required, without cost to the Employer) to the World Health Organization Standards.
When so directed the Contractor shall hand over the water supply system to the Employer after the
issuance of the Taking-Over Certificate.
Except where separate provision for payment for water supply and distribution is made in the Bill of
Quantities, the cost of all other water supply and distribution as required under the Contract shall be
deemed to be included in the rates and prices in the Contract. The cost for water supply shall include the
cost of delivery and consumption of water.
0.8. Engineer’s and Employer’s Site Office
0.8.1.General
As noted in Clause 0.7.1, the Employer, through separate contracts under this Project, is constructing
permanent and temporary office accommodation at Service Areas 1, 2 and 3 which will be utilised by the
Employer and Engineer for the duration of the Project. As this accommodation will not be completed until
later in the Project the Contractor shall provide prefabricated offices, as described in detail in this Section of
the Specification, until such time as the permanent accommodation is ready to be occupied.

0.8.2.Prefabricated Office Accommodation
The prefabricated offices for the Employer and the Engineer shall be a single-storied structures, each
nominally 1,000m2, similar to the arrangement for temporary offices shown on Drawing No. 60097044- DRG-
1C-04-OBA901. comprising 15 single offices, 2 No. 150m2 open-plan offices, conference room, photocopy /
print room, file storage room, toilets, kitchen and dining facilities and general storage space. They shall be
located within the Contractor’s Construction Yards on the reclaimed land on the north (Mawa) and on the
south (Janjira) sides of the river at locations to be agreed with the Engineer and will include the
construction of suitable access roads and hard-standings thereto. The buildings shall be prefabricated
structures meeting internationally recognised quality standards that are capable of being relocated at least
once, as noted in Clause 0.7.1. The requirements for the prefabricated offices as stated below apply to the
offices irrespective of location.
They shall be completed with insulated roofs and exterior walls. Minimum headroom or ceiling height shall
be 3.0m.
All doors and door frames shall be lockable from both sides. Windows shall be glazed with tinted glass or
with plain glass and roller blinds and shall be lockable from inside only. All window openings shall be
provided with insect screens and be burglar proofed with metal grills.
Each room or area shall be entirely air conditioned, with the exception of corridors, toilet rooms, pantries
and stores.
All lighting in the prefabricated offices shall be recessed or surface mounted fluorescent lights with
detachable diffusers or CFL. Each room or area shall be equipped with electrical outlets set in the walls at
600mm above the floor and spaced at approximately 2 metre centres.
The offices shall be equipped with kitchens and male and female toilet rooms. Each toilet room shall be
equipped with a toilet (pedestal type), wash basin with hot/cold water, hot water heater, wall mirror and
240/110V shaving socket. shower unit complete with shower curtain and duckboards, wall hooks for
clothing etc. The Contractor shall supply. and keep replenished at all times. all necessary toilet supplies.
Each kitchen shall be equipped with a gas cooker (4 rings plus oven), gas cylinders, refrigerator, water filter.
hot and cold water, electric kettle, cooking equipment. crockery and cutlery. all of the type and in the
quantity approved by the Engineer.
All waste water shall be disposed underground by a system of septic tanks and leach fields or pits. The
Contractor shall submit full details of the proposed system for the approval of the Engineer before work
commences.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit within 30 days of the Commencement Date for the Engineer's
approval working drawings of the prefabricated offices including the site layout. drainage details. car
parking, access. front and side elevations. floor plans. details of construction and finishes and all other data
as required for the completion of the office in accordance with this Specification. The Engineer's review and

comments / approval is expected to be communicated to the Contractor within 10 days of receipt of the
detailed documentation.
The Contractor shall complete the Employer's and Engineer's prefabricated offices to the satisfaction of the
Engineer within 60 days of the Engineer's approval of working drawings. For every day of delay in achieving
this completion date for the Employer's and Engineer's offices a penalty of BDT 100,000 per day shall be
applied and shall be deducted from monies due to the Contractor.
As with the permanent offices. the Contractor shall furnish. equip. service and maintain the Engineer's and
Employer‘s prefabricated offices as specified in this Clause 0.8.
0.8.3.General Requirements
The Employer's and Engineer's offices. both prefabricated (as described above) and permanent (at Service
Area 2). shall be equipped with desks, tables, chairs, stools, files, drawing racks, storage cabinets, book
shelves, bulletin boards, and other furnishings as listed in Appendix 1. All furnishings shall be to western
European standards. In addition the Contractor shall also supply and maintain all of the equipment.
including communications and IT hardware and software. listed in Appendix 1. All furniture and equipment
supplied shall become the property of the Employer at the end of the Contract.
The Contractor shall also supply and maintain all of the survey equipment described in Clause 0.13 for the
exclusive use of the Engineer. the Employer. and their staff at all times for activities and work in connection
with all of the contracts under this Project. This will remain the property of the Contractor at the end of the
Contract.
The offices shall be supplied with all necessary consumables including stationery. standard forms. headed
paper. all printing and photocopying supplies. pens. pencils. colour crayons. felt tip pens. erasers. etc.. all of
the type. size and in the quantities specified and approved by the Engineer. All such supplies shall be kept
replenished to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
All furniture and equipment, including computers. printers, photocopiers, plan printers, calculators,
surveying equipment, shall be new when supplied unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer, and shall be
fully maintained and promptly repaired as necessary by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Before any item is removed for maintenance or repair for a period of more than 12 hours, a similar
approved item shall be provided as a temporary replacement unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
In addition to IT and communications hardware the Contractor shall also supply, install, operate and
maintain all computer and communication software systems required for the Project. The Contractor shall
have sufficient qualified and experienced IT staff on hand to provide support and maintenance for the IT
and communications systems on a full-time 24/7 basis.
The offices, both prefabricated and permanent, shall be provided with electric lighting and power and with
communications / internet access for use by the Engineer. Each room or area shall be entirely air
conditioned, with the exception of corridors, toilet rooms, pantries and stores. The Contractor shall be

responsible for and pay all charges. fees or other expenses for providing and maintaining the Engineer's
office, all electric, gas and water services telephone service and other utilities during the period of
construction of the Works and beyond until the issuance of the Taking- Over Certificate.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the site grading required for the office areas (both prefabricated and
permanent) specified in Clause 0.8.1, including access to the project by means of all-weather roads and for
covered parking areas adjacent to the facility. The office areas shall be graded and properly drained so that
there are no depressed areas where water will collect.
The Contractor shall provide security for the Employer's and Engineer's offices (both prefabricated and
permanent) 24 hours per day, 7 days per week and such security shall be subject to approval of the
Engineer. The Contractor shall also provide for the offices a janitor/tea-boy for the exclusive use of the office
for both normal working hours and all other times as the Engineer may direct.
The Contractor shall include for maintenance and servicing of the Employer's and Engineer's offices (both
prefabricated and permanent) which shall include, but not by way of limitation, daily dusting, cleaning and
janitorial work; window washing and wet floor mopping; as necessary mechanical, air-conditioning,
heating, electrical and plumbing systems maintenance, providing potable drinking water and beverages
and all toilet supplies; disposal of all waste; maintenance of interior and exterior of the buildings, ground
and paved areas, and including any repairs thereto. Maintenance shall also include providing water, gas,
electricity and communications / internet services, subject to Clause 0.7 and any other maintenance or
services as specified herein or as further directed by the Engineer. Maintenance work by the Contractor
shall be generally scheduled outside the normal working hours of the Engineer and as directed by the
Engineer.
0.8.4.Personnel
For the Engineer's and Employer's offices the Contractor shall provide the following personnel:
 watchmen;
 cleaners;
 cooks;
 gardeners; and
 office assistants (peons)
to carry out duties exclusively for and as directed by, the Engineer. Allowance shall be made for personnel
to work shifts up to 12 hours per day, seven days per week, where necessary.
In addition, the Contractor shall provide the services of suitably qualified and experienced drivers for the
Employer's and Engineer's Vehicles. Some of the drivers will require a good understanding of the English
language. In addition the Contractor shall provide qualified and experienced boatmen for the Employer's
and Engineer’s boats.

Refer also to Articles 0.9.7 and 0.10.3 for additional personnel to be provided by Contractor for Engineer's
Laboratory and Engineer's Accommodation.
0.9. Engineer’s Laboratory
0.9.1.General
As noted in Clause 0.7.1, the Employer, through separate contracts under this Project, is constructing
temporary laboratories at Service Areas 1 and 3 which will be utilised by the Employer and Engineer for the
duration of the Project. As these laboratories will not be completed until later in the Project the Contractor
shall provide prefabricated laboratory facilities, as described in detail in this Section of the Specification,
until such time as the temporary laboratories are ready to be occupied.
It is intended that two (2 Nos.) prefabricated laboratories will be required and will be located within the
Contractor's construction yards on the Mawa and Janjira banks of the river. The prefabricated laboratory to
be initially located within the Contractor's construction yard on the south (Janjira) bank of the river, will then
be relocated to Service Area No.2 when these facilities are completed, where it will remain and be used for
the duration of the Project.
The Contractor will be responsible for the provision, installation and maintenance of laboratory furnishings,
equipment and built-in fittings to the Engineer's prefabricated laboratories at each location.
0.9.2.Prefabricated Laboratories
The prefabricated laboratories for the Employer and the Engineer shall be single-storied structureI located
within the Contractor's Camp at locations to be agreed with the Engineer and will include the construction
of suitable access roads and hard-standings thereto. The buildings shall be prefabricated structures
meeting internationally recognised quality standards. They shall be completed with insulated roofs and
exterior walls. Minimum headroom or ceiling height shall be 3.0m.
The requirements of Clause 0.8.2 in respect of the prefabricated site office shall also apply to the
prefabricated laboratories where applicable.
approval working drawings of the prefabricated laboratory buildings including the site layout, front and side
elevation, floor plan with dimensions, details of construction and finishes and all other data as required for
the completion of the laboratories in accordance with this Specification. The Engineer's review and
comments / approval are expected to be communicated to the Contractor within 10 days of receipt of the
detailed documentation.
0.9.3.Building and Utilities
The prefabricated laboratories shall be similar to the arrangement for temporary laboratory shown on
Drawing No.60097044-DRG-1C-04-LAA901 and shall include:

 4 Nos. air conditioned offices - 20m2 each

 Air-conditioned laboratories - 2 No. 30 m2 each
 Air conditioned laboratory - 1 No. 150 m2
 General working/storage area - 200 m2
 Pantry, store
 Toilets facilities
The prefabricated laboratories shall additionally have an extra set of double doors to the general/working
area (min. 2m wide) together with covered parking for 4 vehicles. They shall be provided with two large
capacity extractor fans to be wall mounted as directed by the Engineer.
The prefabricated laboratories, shall be provided with +240V 50Hz electricity supply of adequate capacity
and with sufficient outlets to accommodate the required testing equipment. Lighting shall be to the
approval of the Engineer. In addition to the water supply to the kitchen and toilets the laboratory and
general working/storage area shall be provided with a potable water supply and drainage system. The
flooring throughout shall be rigid and able to support heavy test equipment without vibration. Compaction
pedestals to meet the requirements of standard tests shall also be provided in locations approved by the
Engineer. Fixed shelving, benches and storage cupboards shall be supplied as scheduled. These shall be
of the following minimum standard:
Work benches 900mm high 750mm deep of planed softwood and 19mm ply and top surface finished in
approved plastic laminate or tin sheet, supplied with 500mm deep shelf under.
Cupboards either 900mm high, 400mm deep constructed 600mm above work benches or 900mm high,
750mm deep constructed beneath work benches. All cupboards of planed softwood carcassing, faced with
plywood and fitted with doors.
Sinks ‘Belfast’ pattern with cold tap wall mounted above sink supplied mounted at 900mm height, together
with plumbed-in waste outlet.
0.9.4.Equipment
Each Engineer's laboratory shall be supplied with the furniture, equipment and supplies detailed in
Appendix 2. The equipment shall be of the highest quality and the Contractor shall submit a list of the
proposed brand names, model numbers and data sheets for the Engineer’s approval, within 30 days of the
Commencement Date. All equipment shall remain the property of the Employer at the end of the contract.
The Contractor shall bear all costs pertaining to obtaining specimens of materials, mixes etc. and the
provision of necessary equipment and plant for obtaining these specimens, mixes and samples and
transporting them to the laboratory or other locations as designated by the Engineer.
No separate payment will be made for such costs which shall be considered incidental to the provision of
this site laboratory.

0.9.5.Approval of Laboratory
The Contractor shall complete the Engineer's prefabricated laboratories to the satisfaction of the Engineer
within 90 days of the Engineer’s approval of working drawings given under Clause 0.9.2.
Prior to acceptance of the prefabricated laboratory buildings and of the equipment, the Engineer shall
inspect the said buildings and equipment for compliance with this Specification.
The Contractor shall order all the required equipment for the Site Laboratories within 10 days of the issue of
the Engineer's approval given under Clause 0.9.4 and shall provide documentary evidence of having placed
the necessary orders.
If the Contractor fails to complete the laboratories within the specified period, the Engineer reserves the
right to delay approval for commencement of the permanent works in the Contract and / or carry out any
sampling and laboratory testing in any other laboratory with any fees and charges to be deducted from any
amounts due to the Contractor.
0.9.6.Maintenance of Engineer’s Laboratories
The Contractor shall at all times be responsible for maintaining the buildings, utilities and all testing
equipment in an acceptable condition for use. The Contractor shall provide replacement equipment where
required by the Engineer whilst equipment is being repaired. Disposable supplies and consumables,
reagents, etc. associated with laboratory operations and testing shall at all times be kept replenished so as
to prevent testing delays.
The Contractor shall also include for routine maintenance of the facility which shall include, but not be
limited to: daily dusting, cleaning and janitorial work; window washing and wet floor mopping; necessary
maintenance and repair to mechanical, air-conditioning, heating, electrical and plumbing systems;
providing potable water and toilet supplies; disposal of all wastes; maintenance of interior and exterior of
building, grounds and paved areas, including any repairs thereto. Maintenance shall also include providing
water, gas, electricity, and local telephone services, and any other maintenance or service as specified
herein or as further directed by the Engineer. Maintenance work by the Contractor shall be generally
scheduled outside of the normal working hours of the Engineer and as directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for and pay all charges, fees or other expenses for maintaining water,
gas, electricity and telephone services, and other utilities for the whole of the construction period for the
Works until the issue of Taking-Over Certificate.
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall, upon completion of the Works, remove and
clear away the prefabricated laboratory buildings from the Site and reinstate the areas to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
The laboratory equipment shall be handed over to the Employer after being completely refurbished.

0.9.7.Personnel
The Contractor shall employ a suitably qualified and experienced Materials Engineer proficient in spoken
and written English throughout the Contract to take primary responsibility for formulation and
implementation of the Contractor's Quality Plan described in Clause 0.6.1. He shall be responsible for
liaising and coordinating with the Engineer's laboratories, Engineer’s field sampling/ testing staff and off-site
laboratories to ensure all sampling, specified tests and inspections applicable to the Main Bridge Contract
(PMB/MB/O1) are carried out in a timely manner.
The Contractor shall provide a total of 9 No. suitably experienced and capable laboratory technicians and 6
No. labourers to assist the Engineer with the taking of samples and testing. Allowance shall be made for
personnel to work shifts up to 12 hours per day, seven days, per week. Some of these staff must have an
acceptable proficiency in the English language.
0.10. Engineer’s and Employer’s Accommodation
0.10.1. General
As noted in Clause 0 7. 1, the Employer, through separate contracts under this Project, is constructing
temporary and permanent residential accommodation at Service Areas 1, 2 and 3 which will be utilised by
the Employer and Engineer for the duration of the Project. As this accommodation will not be completed
until later in the Project the Contractor shall provide prefabricated accommodation, as described in detail in
this Section of the Specification, until such time as the temporary and permanent residential
accommodation is ready to be occupied. All of this prefabricated residential accommodation will be
required for the duration of the contract, there being insufficient temporary and permanent accommodation
being constructed at the three Service Areas for the Employer's and Engineer’s staff. Therefore, once the
temporary and permanent accommodation at the Service Areas is ready to be occupied, this prefabricated
accommodation will need to be relocated from the Contractor’s construction yards and re-established in or
adjacent to one of the Service Areas. It therefore needs to be a form of construction that will allow this to be
done with minimum disruption.
0.10.2. Prefabricated Residential Accommodation
The Contractor shall provide, equip, service and maintain furnished and equipped prefabricated
accommodation for the sole use of the Engineer, the Employer, and their families during their duties in
connection with all contracts under this Project, until the permanent residential accommodation is made
available. The requirements of Clause 0.8.2 in respect of the Engineer's office insofar as applicable shall
also apply to the Engineer's and Employer's residential accommodation.
approval working drawings of each of the prefabricated accommodation unit types including the site
layouts. front and side elevations, floor plans with dimensions, details of construction and finishes and all
other data as required for the completion of the accommodation unit types in accordance with the

Specification. The Engineer’s review and comments / approval are expected to be communicated to the
Contractor within 15 days of receipt of the detailed documentation.
The prefabricated residential accommodation shall initially be located in the Contractor’s camps on the
Mawa and Janjira banks of the river, or such other location as agreed by the Engineer. The area containing
the accommodation shall be brought up to a general formation level of +7.5 m PWD by suitably compacted
fill. Once the temporary and permanent housing units are completed at Service Areas 1, 2 and 3, some of
the prefabricated residential accommodation is to be relocated in or adjacent to these Service Areas or as
instructed by the Engineer.
The categories of accommodation and the minimum floor areas of each unit type shall be as indicated
below.
 3 bed units - each unit nominally 160m2 similar to arrangement for permanent 3-bed house shown
on Drawing No.60097044-DRG-1C-04-3BA901. These units will be to the highest standard suitable
for senior foreign and senior local professional staff.
 Engineers’ Mess — each unit containing 20 bed / bathroom units each of 45m2, and shared
recreation, dining, kitchen facilities similar to arrangement for permanent Engineer's mess shown
on Drawing Nos.60097044-DRG-1C-04-EMA901 & 902.
 Dormitory Quarters — dormitory unit providing 20 double-occupancy rooms each of 50m2. with
shared bathroom / recreation / dining / kitchen facilities as shown on Drawing No.60097044-DRG-
1C-04-DOA901.
The accommodation units shall be prefabricated and shall be completed with insulated roofs and exterior
walls. Minimum headroom or ceiling height shall be 2.8 m.
Accommodation shall be provided with all the necessary hard furnishings including refrigerators, freezers.
electric or gas hob units with ovens, washing machines, installation for hot and cold water, washing
facilities and sanitary fittings. Kitchens shall include appropriate fully fitted units to a specific standard
The living accommodation shall: be fully air-conditioned together with ceiling fans (3-Bed House and
Engineer's Mess) or provided with ceiling fans in each room (Dormitory Units), fully lined and adequately
sound proof; be provided with adequate dust, sand and insect proof and screened doors and windows;
and include all necessary features to maintain a 25°C temperature differential against ambient air
temperature in hot weather (in air conditioned rooms) and a minimum internal room temperature of 200C
In cold weather, in all rooms.
The Contractor shall provide (prefabricated housing only) and maintain (both prefabricated and permanent
housing in Service Area 2) efficient water and electricity supplies, and a piped sewage/waste water
disposal and treatment system to all living accommodation. to the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary security safeguards including; perimeter high security fencing,
external lighting and watchmen, to the approval of the Engineer. Guard posts will be provided at changes in

direction of the high security fence. At places designated by the Engineer the perimeter fence shall be 2.0
metre high brick or other wall.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate all-weather access roads and shall construct paved,
covered parking areas adjacent to the accommodation, to the approval of the Engineer. Other areas
without buildings shall be topsoiled, grassed, and planted as directed by the Engineer. Access roads and all
areas will be adequately drained in order to avoid surface water pending. Street and area lighting shall be
installed to the approval of the Engineer. Commercial areas and recreation areas shall be grassed, planted,
and equipped to the approval of the Engineer.
One of the Engineers' Mess blocks and 10 No. of the three bedroom units shall be completed and furnished
within 60 days of the Engineer's approval of working drawings given under Clause 0.10.2. The remaining
prefabricated accommodation shall be completed within 120 days thereafter. For every day of delay in
achieving these completion dates, a penalty of BDT 100,000 per day shall be applied and shall be deducted
from monies due to the Contractor.
If directed, the Contractor shall, upon completion of the Works, remove and clear away all prefabricated
residential accommodation units from the Site and reinstate the area to the satisfaction of the Engineer. In
any event all accommodation furnishings provided under the Contract shall remain the property of the
Employer at the end of the Contract.
0.10.3. Personnel
The Contractor shall provide the following personnel:
 watchmen (on shift basis to cover 24 hrs per day);

 cleaners;
 suitably skilled and experienced cooks; and
 gardeners;
to work in the accommodation of the Engineer all as directed by the Engineer. Some of these staff must
have acceptable proficiency in the English language.
0.10.4. Meals for Residents of Engineer’s and Employer’s Accommodation
The Contractor shall provide all basic daily meals required by staff and dependents of the Engineer and
Employer who are officially resident in the Engineer's accommodation, both prefabricated and permanent,
throughout the Contract period. The cost of food itself shall be met by residents under suitable
arrangements approved by the Engineer.
Generally, the standard 3 meals per day (breakfast, lunch and dinner) are to be provided in appropriate
quantity and to an acceptable standard. Daily mealtimes are to follow a timetable suited to the majority of
residents and as approved by the Engineer.

The style, nature, and standard of meals provided shall be suitable for the 3 main groups of residents,
namely:
 residents of the “Engineer‘s Quarters" comprising senior local and foreign professional staff of the
Engineer with some family dependants. Average number of people expected to be on site during
the Contract period is 160 No. adults, and 80 No. children. It is intended that a restaurant / dining /
recreation facility will be established in one of the “Engineer's Quarters" buildings at each of the
prefabricated residential accommodation sites, each staffed by two suitable cooks and two
assistants.
 residents of “Engineer's Mess" , comprising senior local technical and administrative support staff of
the Engineer. Average number of people expected to be on site during the Contract period is 60 No.
adults. There is one kitchen/dining room facility for each block of 16 / 20 No. bedroom / bathroom
units at each of the prefabricated residential accommodation sites. One cook and one assistant are
required for each of the blocks.
 residents of the “Dormitory Quarters", comprising junior local technical and administrative support
staff of the Engineer. Average number of residents expected to be on site during the contract period
is 100 No. adults. There is one kitchen/dining room facility for this group of 20 double-occupancy
rooms at each prefabricated residential accommodation sites. Two cooks and two assistants are
required for each kitchen / dining room facility.
Payment for provision of this meals service will be based on the number of kitchen / dining facilities
operational each month during the Contract.
0.11. Communications and IT Facilities
In addition to the IT and communications hardware required for Contract No. PMB/MB/01 the Contractor
shall also supply, install, operate and maintain all communication and software systems required for
communications and data transfer linking together all five contracts under this Project, including links to
prefabricated temporary and permanent accommodation in Service Areas 1. 2 and 3 and, as required, the
Contractor's construction yards. The internal IT and communications facilities, including hardware and
software, in Service Areas 1 and 3 will be supplied. installed and maintained by others.
The Contractor shall provide within 90 days of the Commencement Date and maintain until the issuance of
the Taking-Over Certificate the following IT and communications facilities for the Employer’s and Engineer's
exclusive use:
 IT and communications network connecting all the Employer’s and Engineer's Offices
(prefabricated. temporary and permanent, including Service Areas 1, 2 and 3 — reference Clause
0.7.1 ) facilitated via a high capacity microwave link or other approved system that will support:
o High speed data transfer (minimum 1.0 Gb/s)
o Communications, both voice and video
o Internet access through a managed Firewall

 The system shall be reliable and robust, capable of continuous 24/7 operation including during
power outages and extreme weather conditions
 Local Area Network (LAN) at each of the prefabricated accommodation areas and Service Area 2
connecting to all of the Engineer's and Employer's offices and Engineer's Quarters; the latter may
be provided via fibre optic or wireless networks from the site office. LAN connections within Service
Areas 1 and 3 will be provided by others.
 Dedicated central data server with sufficient data storage for duration of Project and suitable disk
redundancy technology incorporating a data system backup facility and UPS, supporting a local
area network (1Gb/sec transfer) for up to 300 users to be co-located with the Firewall and Internet
connection as well as other shared resources in a secure, air conditioned server room with UPS
power supplies.
 Mobile phones, including handsets, chargers, SIM cards and accessories.
 Separate PABX telephone system supporting internal, local and international call access for each of
prefabricated accommodation areas and Service Areas 1, 2 and 3 with a minimum of two outside
lines per Service Area / compound to include at least one extension for each of the Engineer’s and
Employer’s offices, one extension to each of Engineers Quarters, and interconnectivity between the
three Service Areas and the Contractor’s Camp(s). PABX equipment and connections within
Service Areas 1 and 3 will be provided by others.
 Computer hardware and software as detailed in Appendix 1.
 Suitably qualified and experienced IT Support Staff capable of maintaining and managing the
proposed IT and communications environment on a full-time 24/7 basis
The Contractor may propose an alternative integrated IT and communications system to that described
above that meets the performance criteria. This alternative(s) is to be presented as part of the First Stage
Technical proposal.
Within 15 days of the Commencement Date the Contractor shall provide:
 20 No. mobile phones, including handsets, chargers and SIM cards.

 2 No. Type B computers
 5 No. Type C computers
 2 No. A3 / A4 black and white laser printers
The Employer and Engineer shall be allowed free use of the communications facilities provided under this
Contract except that they shall be required to reimburse the Contractor directly for the cost of
allinternational telephone calls. The cost to be charged to the Engineer through the contract for
international telephone calls shall be calculated on the basis of the corresponding billing for call charges
plus 2½ percent. The Contractor shall arrange for the provision of itemised bills.

0.12. Engineer’s and Employer’s Transport
0.12.1. General
The Contractor shall provide vehicles, launches and boats as listed below, for the duration of the Contract
until the issue of the Taking-Over Certificate, for the exclusive and personal use of the Engineer, the
Employer, and their staff at all times for activities and work in connection with all of the contracts under this
Project. Upon completion of the Works the vehicles and launches shall become the property of the
Employer. The Contractor shall fully service and repair the vehicles and launches as instructed by the
Engineer immediately prior to handover to the Employer. The work boats shall remain the property of the
Contractor and shall be removed by the Contractor from the Site with bathymetric survey equipment.
Vehicles
8 seater LWB 4WD Station Wagon (Toyota Land Cruiser 200 VX automatic, 4.5l turbo diesel, or equivalent
approved vehicle)
7 seater LWB 4WD Station Wagon (Toyota Land Cruiser Prado GX, automatic, 3.0l turbo diesel, or
equivalent approved vehicle)
5 seater 4WD Double Cab Pickup (Toyota Hilux 4WD, manual, 2.5l turbo diesel, with canopy, or equivalent
approved vehicle)
12 seater Minibus (Toyota Hi-Ace, 3.0l diesel. or equivalent approved vehicle)
26 seater Minibus (Toyota Coaster. manual, 3.7l diesel, or equivalent approved vehicle)
Boats
VVIP Launch
14m launch
6m work boat
0.12.2. Vehicles
The makes and models of vehicles to be supplied shall be to the approval of the Engineer. The vehicles
shall be suitable for Bangladesh conditions with a proven record of reliability and there must be an existing
servicing / spare parts network available in Bangladesh.
All vehicles shall have factory installed air conditioning (dual units and coolbox facilities for 4wd station
wagons, jeeps and minibuses) and shall be fitted with seat belts for both the driver and passengers, and
shall be provided with first aid kit and fire extinguisher.

The Contractor shall provide. without charge to the Employer, all the necessary oil, fuel and maintenance,
as well as paying the costs of all toll charges, insurance and all taxes. The vehicles shall be fully insured by
the Contractor for use on the public highway by any driver at anytime, anywhere in Bangladesh.
The Contractor shall issue to the Engineer at the time of providing each vehicle a copy of the insurance
certificate noting full details of the insurance cover, and shall provide evidence prior to or on each
insurance renewal date that the insurance has been renewed in accordance with this Specification.
The Contractor shall undertake, without charge to the Employer, all daily and routine maintenance, and all
overhauls and repairs from whatever cause as may become necessary. During these events a similar
vehicle shall be made available as a replacement.
The Contractor shall provide 5 No. 7 seater 4WD Station Wagon, 2 No. 12 seater minibuses, and 30 No. 5
seater 4WD double cab pickups, within 30 days of the Commencement Date, for use by the Engineer's and
Employer's staff. The dates on which all other vehicles shall be provided shall be as directed by the
Engineer.
The vehicles shall be new when supplied and shall not be removed from the Site other than with the prior
approval or upon the request of the Engineer.
The vehicles shall not bear any name, logo or advertising material.
The minibuses can be presumed to be restricted primarily to paved roads travel.
All 4 wheel drive vehicles shall be provided with a 50mm towing ball and equipped with a plastic 5 litre
insulated cooled water container.
All vehicles shall be maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's routine maintenance and service
requirements. Vehicles off the road for maintenance or repair for a period greater than 12 hours shall be
temporarily replaced with a substitute vehicle of similar performance and rating.
0.12.3. Boats
All boats shall be supplied within 120 days of Commencement Date, as new and to a type and manufacture
as approved by the Engineer. The boats shall be of three types, WIP launch, passenger launches and work
boats, as described below.
The Contractor shall provide 1 No. 14m passenger launch and 2 No. 6m work boats within 30 days of the
Commencement Date, for use by the Engineer's and Employer's staff. The dates on which all other boats
shall be provided shall be as directed by the Engineer.
The VVP Launch shall be a craft of not less than 20m length with an enclosed cabin and saloon with
comfortable seating capacity for 25 persons. it shall be air-conditioned throughout and shall include
bathroom and toilet facilities and a galley suitable for preparing light meals. At all times the launch shall
carry life rafts for a minimum of 30 persons together with 36 life jackets. The VVIP launch shall have inboard

diesel engines of minimum total 600 horsepower and shall have a cruising speed of 25 knots (maximum
speed 30 knots). The VVIP launch shall be provided with a trained crew and shall be fuelled and maintained
at the Site until the issue of the Defects Liability Certificate. The VVIP launch shall be provided with a radio
transceiver to operate within the system provided by Clause 0.11 and shall be fully equipped for safe river
navigation. The WIP launch shall be for the exclusive use of the Employer.
The passenger launches shall be craft of not less than 14m length with an enclosed cabin at deck level with
seating capacity for 20 persons. At all times the launches shall carry life rafts for a minimum of 24 persons
together with 30 life jackets. The launches shall have an inboard petrol or diesel engine and shall have a
cruising speed of at least 20 knots. The launches shall be provided with a trained crew and shall be fuelled
and maintained at the Site until the issue of the Defects Liability Certificate. The launches shall be provided
with a radio transceiver to operate within the system provided by Clause 0.11 and shall be fully equipped for
safe river navigation. The launches shall be for the exclusive use of the Engineer and Employer.
The work boats shall be light speedy small craft of nominal 5m length with a capacity for 6 passengers.
They shall be to a type approved by the Engineer. The craft may be fixed hull with a cabin shelter and
inboard engine or large inflatable with rigid floor and outboard motor, and they shall have a cruising speed
of at least 25 knots when fully laden. Exact requirements shall be as ordered by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall be required to supply fuel and maintain these light craft and provide the crew until the
issue of the Taking - Over Certificate, without charge to the Employer. Each craft shall be supplied with
sufficient life jackets for all persons that can safely be carried. The work boats shall be for the exclusive use
of the Engineer and Employer.
The Contractor shall provide boatmen to operate the launches and the work boats until the issue of the
Taking-Over Certificate. Allowance shall be made for personnel to work shifts up to 12 hours per day.
0.12.4. Berthing Facilities for Boats
The Contractor shall construct suitable berthing facilities for the boats on both sides of the river. providing
secure mooring and safe boarding facilities at all normal river levels expected during each year. The
locations of the berthing facilities shall be to the approval of relevant river authorities and the Engineer, and
all-weather vehicle access and parking areas shall be provided close to the facilities together with onshore
weatherproof shelters for waiting passengers. The berthing facilities shall be dismantled at the end of the
Contract by the Contractor unless instructed otherwise by the Engineer.
In addition to the launches and work boats provided to the Employer under this Contract, as detailed in
Section 0.12.1 above. the Contractor shall also provide sufficient berthing facilities on both side of the river
for the use of the Bangladesh Bridge Authority and Construction Supervision Consultant working on
Contract Nos. AR-O1, AR—02 and SA-02. It is estimated that berthing facilities for the following launches
and work boats will be required:
Bangladesh Bridge Authority
a. 5.5m x 2.2m 2 Nos.

b. 12m x 4m 1 No.
c. 8.9m x 2.45m 2 Nos.
d. 9m x 3m 1 No.
Construction Supervision Consultants
a. 20.12m x 7.31m 4 Nos.

b. 19.51m x 6.40m 2 Nos.
c. 24.40m x 6.70m 1 No.
d. 5.5m x 2.2m 4 Nos.
e. 8.9m x 2.45m 2 Nos.
f. 12m x 4m 1 No.
0.13. Survey Equipment Supplied to the Engineer and Employer
0.13.1. General
The Contractor shall provide survey equipment and software as listed below, for the duration of the
Contract until the issue of the Taking-Over Certificate. The survey equipment is for the exclusive use by the
Engineer, the Employer, and their staff at all times for activities and work in connection with all of the
contracts under this Project. Either RTK base stations will be established near both banks of the river or a
Virtual Reference Station (VRS) Network will be established covering the entire works area.
The Contractor will be responsible for the supply, maintenance and replacement of consumables
associated with the operation of the equipment during the Works. Upon completion of the Works the
equipment shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor will provide the Engineer's and
Employer's staff with instruction and training on the use of the equipment.
0.13.2. Survey Equipment
The survey equipment is to be made available to the Engineer for design compliance checking. An
equipment manufacturer has been specified in order to define the standard required. Equipment
alternatives which are at least equivalent may be approved by the Engineer. It is recommended that the
equipment and processing software supplied to the Engineer be from the same manufacturer as that being
used by the Contractor. This will allow for easier exchange and integration of data between the parties.
Schedule of Land Survey Equipment to be Supplied by Contractor
1 Total Stations Quantity

5 No.
Sokkia SET250RX Total Station with internal Bluetooth modem, complete with:
Carrying Case
All computer/ data logger interface cables
4GB SD or SDHC memory card

1 Additional Detachable Battery BDC46B

External Battery BDC60
Manufacturers Battery Chargers for BDC46B and BDCGO
Surveyors' Grade Wood Tripod (Flat Head) PFW1, each with 15 No.
Tri-Brach and tri-brach adapter

SHCZSOO Handheld Controller complete with
5 No.
Rechargeable batteries, charges. cables, and operational software and
programs
Spectrum Survey Field Software
Complete Controller Bracket/pole clamp and cradle
Prisms - Complete set including AP prisms, prism holder, target plate, tribrach,
tribrach adapter, and protective carrying case
APS12 - Single Prism Set
12 No.
APSS4 - Triple Prism Set
5 No.
AP891 - Nine Prism Set 2 No.
12 ft Prism Pole (Dual Gradations) 2 No
Total Station survey data processing - Sokkia Spectrum Survey Suite
4 No.
2 General Survey Equipment
Sokkia Electronic Digital Theodolite DT5200 2 No.
Sokkia Optical Theodolite TM20E 4 No.
Sokkia automatic level C300 7 No.
Sokkia automatic level C410 5 No.

6 No.
Sokkia Tripods PFW1
12 No.
Sokkia Tripods PSA1
13 No.
Levelling Rods, 4 m Metric E Aluminium
2 No.
Digital Planimeter, Sokkia KP 90N
4 No.
Digital Measuring Wheel,
3 Communication Devices
Pair of Motorola PR860 Sets with optional carry case, and hands free 13 No.
headset
4 Miscellaneous Items
30 m Steel Tape 55 No.
100 m fibreglass Tape 12 No.
5 m Pocket Tape 90 No.
3 m Pocket Tape 90 No.
Ranging Rod As
Survey Pins Req'd

Optical Square As
Dumpy Hammer (4Ibs) Req'd
Sledge Hammer (7|bs) 9 No.
Portable “surveying" safety sign 24 No.
Survey marking materials (including pegs, steel rods, aerosol paint, etc.) 12 No.
Survey Umbrella 24 No.
Torch (9 volt rechargeable) As
Plumb bobs and lines Req’d
String Chalk Lines 19 No.
Safety/Survey Vests 19 No.
40 No.
As
Req’d
55 No.
5 GPS
Trimble R8 GNSS Base Receiver with internal radio 410-470 MHz
Transmit 2 No.
Upgrade, and GSM/GPRS options, 6Ah Battery and Download Kit, Base
Accessory Kit 2 No.
Pacific Crest PDL UHF Base Radio System with antenna and mounting 5 No.
brackets
Trimble R8 GNSS Rover with internal radio and GSM/GPRS options.
general purpose battery cable, Null Modem Cable with RS232 connectors, 1.5m
Cable with Lemo/R8232 connectors, TM3 radio Antenna Kit, Rover Antenna, and 2m
Carbon Fibre Range Pole with Bipod 5 No
Trimble TSC2 Data Logger with Trimble Survey Controller and Survey 4 No
ProSoftware, and range pole mounting bracket.

Trimble Business Centre Survey Processing Software 4
0.13.3. GPS Reference Station
The Contractor shall establish and maintain a system, for the duration of the Work until the Completion
Certificate is issued or as otherwise determined by the Engineer, to provide GPS correction data for real
time and post-processing applications. This can consist of either RTK base stations established near both
banks of the river or a VRS network that encloses the entire work area. The system shall be used by the
Engineer for Monitoring surveys and can be the same used by the Contractor. At the completion of the
project, the system shall become the property of the Contractor.
The system will consist of, but not limited to, GPS antennas, receivers, computers and software, and data
transmission facilities. Data for post-processing will be made available to the Engineer via the internet. The

Contractor will ensure that the system operates continuously for the duration of the Works. The Contractor
will arrange for the upgrading of all software and licences for the duration of the Works. To de fine the
standard of equipment required, the system will consist of equipment and software equivalent to:
1. Zephyr Geodetic 2 Antenna
2. Trimble Net9 GNSS Reference Receiver
3. GPSBase or RTKNet software
0.13.4. Software
The Contractor shall provide the following software for the exclusive use of the Engineer and the Employer.
The software licences are to be in the name of the Employer. The Contractor will arrange for the updating of
all the software (for equipment in the Tables above and those listed below) as necessary during the
Contract period.
1 Additional Software (Latest Versions with copy protection) Quantity
- Autodesk Civil 3D 2 No.
0.13.5. Personnel
The Contractor shall provide the following personnel:
 Survey assistants;
 Field assistants; and
 Labourers.
to work with and under the direction of the Engineer’s surveyors. Some of these staff must have acceptable
proficiency in the English language.
0.13.6. Training
The Contractor shall provide "on the job" and secondary training of the Engineer's and Employer's
personnel in the use of all equipment supplied.
0.14. Removal and/or relocation of Existing Utilities
Some areas of the Site have existing utilities (power, telephone, water, etc) that require removal and/or
relocation to allow the Works to proceed.
The Contractor shall be responsible for:
- Identifying and confirming the locations of all remaining utilities that require removal and/or relocation.
- Making all necessary arrangements with the relevant utility owner for removal and/or relocation of the
utility in a timely manner to suit the Works Programme accepted by the Engineer pursuant to Sub-

clause 8.3, General Conditions of Contract. Such arrangements shall be made with the utility owner at a
sufficiently early stage to ensure that necessary removal and/or relocation works are able to be
completed without delaying or disrupting the Contractor's activities.
The Employer and the Engineer shall assist the Contractor. as and when requested, to make necessary
arrangements with the utility owner.
A provisional Sum item is included in the Bill of Quantities to cover the costs of the utility owner in
undertaking utility removal and/or relocation works. Any proposed costs require the approval of the
Engineer before agreement is finalised with the utility owner.
0.15. Provisional Visitor Centre
The scope of works in this contract provisionally includes construction of a Visitor Centre in a location yet to
be confirmed (one possible location is in the Mawa Construction Yard, with the facility constructed near the
end of the construction period for the main bridge and viaducts works). The Employer will decide the
location of the Visitor centre facility and then the Engineer will advise the Contractor the relevant details.
Provisionally, the related works will include:
- Detailed design and preparation of construction drawings

- Submission of a price by the Contractor for construction
- Construction of the facility for an agreed price, if so decided by the Employer
These provisional works are covered by separate provisional items in the Bill of Quantities.

Appendix 1 – Furniture and Equipment for Employer’s & Engineer’s Offices

Appendix 2 - Furniture and Equipment for Laboratory

Appendix 3 – List of Standards

1. SITE CLEARANCE
1.1. General
The Works will occupy areas that have previously contained housing, small communities and agriculture
lands. Some areas adjacent to housing contain relatively dense vegetation and planted trees. The present
occupants within the Site will be relocated prior to the Contractor’s arrival and it is expected that most of the
existing housing and salvageable trees will be removed during that relocation process.
Prior to the excavation of areas that will be occupied by the above water portion of the Works; the land will
have to be cleared by the Contractor of any remaining trees, roots, possible remnants of housing, debris
and other unsuitable material. The Contractor shall identify a location for the disposal of these materials in
compliance with the Environmental Management Plan (EMP). If there are no suitable locations within the
Site, the Contractor shall arrange lands for this purpose at his own expense.
Removal and/or relocation of any remaining utilities (power, telephone, water, etc) shall be arranged as
described in Section 0.16.
1.2. Topsoil
“Topsoil" shall mean the top layer of soil that can support vegetation. including turf. Areas of the Site
required for construction of permanent works and temporary works (including but not limited to: access
tracks, stack-yards, construction facilities, etc) shall have any topsoil stripped and temporarily stockpiled on
Site in locations proposed by the Contractor and accepted by the Engineer. Temporarily stockpiled topsoil
shall be re-used in the Works for stabilisation and final reinstatement of selected areas. Temporary
stockpiles of topsoil shall be suitably maintained and protected from erosion by rainfall and wind by
establishment of dense grass cover or other means to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.3. Dust and Drainage Control
The Contractor shall clear the Site for the Works in a systematic phased manner to suit his Works
Programme. Measures will be required to effectively avoid/mitigate dust generation and to manage
drainage to ensure compliance with the EMP.

2. EARTHWORKS
2.1. Glossary of Terms
2.1.1.Areas of Fill
Areas of fill are areas within the Site, including areas in embankments, platforms and slopes and in
excavations for structures, pits and trenches, in which fill material is deposited and compacted as part of
the permanent work.
2.1.2.Earthworks final surface
Earthworks final surface is the surface to which the work included in Section 5 is finished.
2.1.3.Earthworks material
Earthworks material may consist of soil, rock, crushed concrete or crushed inert demolition material which
is on or below the Site at the commencement of the Contract, or which is imported to the Site to carry out
the Works.
2.1.4.Formation
Formation is that part of the earthworks final surface on which a pavement, structure or utility, is
constructed, or on which the blinding or bedding for a pavement, structure or utility is placed.
2.1.5.Intermediate areas of fill
Intermediate areas of fill are areas of fill which are stated in the Contract as such. and in which fill material
is deposited and compacted directly into shallow water or onto naturally occurring soft ground.
2.1.6.Public fill
Public fill shall mean the inert material arising from construction and demolition activities such as site
clearance, excavation, construction. refurbishment, renovation, demolition and roadworks. Public fill
comprises material including stone, rock, masonry, brick, concrete, soil and other inert material. There is no
size limitation on the public fill. and a small amount of timber mixed with otherwise suitable material is
permissible. The public fill may also consist of wet soil.
2.2. Materials
2.2.1.Fill material
1) Fill material shall consist of naturally occurring or processed material which at the time of deposition is
capable of being compacted in accordance with the specified requirements to form stable areas of fill.
2) Fill material, other than public fill, shall not contain any of the following:

(a) material susceptible to volume change, including marine mud, soil with a liquid limit exceeding
65% or a plasticity index exceeding 35%, swelling clays and collapsible soils,
(b) peat, vegetation, timber, organic, soluble or perishable material.
(c) dangerous or toxic material or material susceptible to combustion, and
(d) metal, rubber, plastic or synthetic material.
(3) The different types of fill material shall have the particle size distributions within the ranges stated in
Table 5.1.
(4) Special fill material shall consist of material which has a liquid limit not exceeding 45%, a plasticity index
not exceeding 20% and a coefficient of uniformity exceeding 50.
(5) Granular fill material shall consist of clean, hard, durable material.
(6) Rock fill material shall consist of pieces of hard, durable rock of which in the opinion of the Engineer not
more than 30% by mass is discoloured or shows other evidence of decomposition. Crushed rock or
crushed concrete may be permitted subject to approval by the Engineer.
(7) The soluble sulphate content of fill material placed within 500 mm of concrete, cement bound material
or cementitious material shall not exceed 1.9 grams of sulphate, expressed as SO3, per litre.
(8) The total sulphate content, expressed as SO3, of fill material placed within 500 mm of metalwork shall
not exceed 0.5% by mass.
(9) The use of public fill as fill material for earthwork may be permitted and the size limitation, transportation,
stockpiling, deposit, spreading, compaction and any particular requirements of such material shall be as
stated in the Contract.
(10) Well-graded material shall consist of material which has a coefficient of uniformity exceeding 10.
(11) Uniform-graded material shall consist of material which has a coefficient of uniformity of 10 or less.
Table 2- 2 – Particle size distributions of fill material
Percentage by mass passing

Type of fill material Size BS test sieve
400 mm 200 mm 75 mm 20 mm 600 μm 63 μm
Fine fill material - - 100 - - -
General fill material - 100 75-100 - - -
Special fill material - - 100 - - 0-45
Granular fill material - - 100 - 0-5 -
Rock fill material
- 100 20-75 0-50 - -
(Grade 200)
Rock fill material 100 20-75 10-30 0-25 - -

(Grade 400)
2.3. Submissions
2.3.1.Particulars of Earthworks
(1) The following particulars of the proposed materials and methods of construction for earthworks shall be
submitted to the Engineer:
(a) details of Constructional Plant and haulage vehicles,

(b) methods of excavation and of deposition and compaction of fill material,
(c) use of different types of excavated material and sources of imported fill material,
(d) arrangements for stockpiling excavated material and fill material and for disposing of
earthworks material,
(e) methods of controlling the moisture content of fill material,
(f) methods of controlling surface water and groundwater and of protecting earthworks and
earthworks material from damage due to water and from weather conditions which may affect the
earthworks or earthworks material,
(9) methods of monitoring groundwater levels, and
(h) methods of monitoring the ground and structures for movements.
(2) The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 14 days before the relevant work starts.
2.3.2.Particulars of Blasting
(1) The following particulars of the proposed blasting procedures shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a) any conditions or restrictions imposed by the Engineer, 1 fitting copies of applications, licences,
permits and correspondence,
(b) names. qualifications and experience of the persons responsible for the design and supervision
of blasting operations.
(c) location. diameter. inclination and depth of holes to be charged with explosive.
(d) type and total mass of explosive to be used and its mass and distribution in each hole,
(e) dimensions of stemming and decking.
(f) initiation sequence. delay periods and mass of explosive per delay.
(g) burden and bench height.
(h) ratio of diameter of explosive to diameter of hole.
(i) arrangements for and methods of instrumentation and monitoring the effects of blasting,
(j) details of velocity seismographs. including manufacturer's literature.
(k) method of controlled blasting,
(I) details of blasting trials. and
(m) protective measures.

(2) The particulars. other than particulars relating to blasting trials. shall be submitted to the Engineer at
least 48 hours before the relevant blasting starts. Particulars relating to blasting trials shall be submitted to
the Engineer at least 14 days before the blasting trials are carried out.
2.4. General Earthworks Requirements
2.4.1.Ownership of earthworks Material
(1) Earthworks material within the Site at the commencement of the Contract shall remain the property of
the Employer except as stated in Clause 2.4.1.(2).
(2) Earthworks material which is required to be disposed of by the Contractor shall become the property of
the Contractor when it is removed from the Site and shall be disposed of in tips provided by the Contractor.
unless otherwise stated in the Contract.
2.4.2.Temporary Works for earthworks
The design of Temporary Works associated with earthworks, including temporary slopes. stockpiles and
drainage. shall be such that the risk of failure is not more than that which would be adopted if the
Temporary Works were to be permanent. Allowance may be made in the design of the Temporary Works
for the shorter design life and for the risk to persons and property and the surface water and groundwater
conditions which are likely to occur during construction.
2.4.3.Handling and storage of earthworks material
(1) Earthworks material shall not be handled or stored in a manner which will result in segregation.
deterioration, erosion or instability of the material.
(2) Different types of earthworks material shall be kept separate from each other. Earthworks material
which is suitable for use as fill material shall be maintained in a suitable condition and shall not be
contaminated.
2.4.4.Protection from water and weather
(1) Earthworks after site clearance, excavation or filling and earthworks material after excavation shall be
kept free from water and shall be protected from damage due to water and from exposure to weather
conditions which may affect the earthworks or earthworks material. The measures to be taken shall include
the following:
(a) Protection of exposed surfaces from water and the weather.
(b) Surfaces shall be maintained in a stable condition and shall be formed to falls to shed water
and to prevent ponding.
(c) The area of exposed surfaces shall be kept to a minimum.
(2) Excavations for structures. pits and trenches shall not be carried out on or adjacent to slopes unless
measures are taken to drain the excavation and to prevent water from the excavation entering the slope.

2.4.5.Earthworks material allowed to become unsuitable or to deteriorate
(1) Earthworks material which has been used, or is required for use. in the permanent work and which is
allowed to become unsuitable such that in the opinion of the Engineer it no longer complies with the
specified requirements for that type of material shall be replaced or dealt with by methods agreed by the
Engineer.
(2) Earthworks material which is not stated in the Contract to be excavated and which the Contractor
causes or allows to deteriorate such that in the opinion of the Engineer the permanent work will be affected
shall be replaced or dealt with by methods agreed by the Engineer.
(3) Material provided to replace earthworks material which has been allowed to become unsuitable or
which the Contractor causes or allows to deteriorate shall be an equivalent material approved by the
Engineer. The replacement material shall have the same volume after compaction as the material replaced.
(4) The material which is to be replaced shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
2.4.6.Additional excavation and stabilisation
(1) Earthworks material which is not stated in the Contract to be excavated but which in the opinion of the
Engineer has inadequate strength, durability or stability shall be dealt with by additional excavation or filling
as stated in Clause 2.4.6.(2) or by stabilisation as stated in Clause 2.5.6.(3) or by other methods instructed by
the Engineer.
(2) Additional excavation shall be carried out and the resulting voids shall be dealt with as follows:
(a) General fill material, fine fill material or special fill material shall be deposited and compacted
below areas of fill and below formations other than in rock.
(b) Grade 10 concrete shall be placed and compacted below formations in rock.
(c) Granular fill material shall be deposited below standing water.
(3) Stabilisation shall be carried out using rock fill material (Grade 400) deposited directly into the original
unstable material and compacted to form a stable foundation on which to construct the subsequent work.
2.4.7.Removal of earthworks material
Earthworks material which is required for use in the permanent work as fill material shall not be removed
from the Site unless permitted by the Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer before any
earthworks material is removed from the Site.

2.5. Excavation
2.5.1.Disposal of excavated material
(1) Excavated material which in the opinion of the Engineer cannot be selected, processed or mixed in a
practical manner to make it suitable for use in the permanent work as fill material shall be disposed of by
the Contractor unless otherwise stated in the Contract.
(2) Excavated material which is surplus to the requirements of the permanent work shall be disposed of by
the Contractor unless otherwise stated in the Contract.
2.5.2.Use of excavated material
(1) Excavated material required for use in the permanent work which is capable of being selected,
processed and mixed to make it suitable for use as fill material shall not be used for any other purposes
unless permitted by the Engineer.
(2) Excavated material which is required for use in the permanent work as fill material and which
theEngineer permits to be removed from the Site or used for other purposes shall be replaced by an
equivalent material approved by the Engineer. The replacement material shall have the same volume after
compaction as the material replaced.
2.5.3.Obstructions
(1) The Contractor shall inform the Engineer without delay of the nature and location of any unforeseen
obstruction encountered during excavation.
(2) Boulders which intersect the earthworks final surface or formation shall be dealt with as excavation
proceeds by methods agreed by the Engineer. Boulders shall not be left protruding unless permitted by the
Engineer.
2.5.4.Excavation
(1) Temporary supports or other methods shall be used to maintain excavations in a stable condition and to
prevent settlement of structures or utilities due to excavation or dewatering.
(2) Constructional Plant or other vehicles shall not be operated or parked adjacent to excavations and
earthworks material or other materials shall not be placed adjacent to excavations unless this has been
allowed for in the design of the Temporary Works for the support of the excavation.
2.5.5.Excavation adjacent to structures and utilities
(1) Excavations shall be carried out by hand adjacent to utilities that are known, proven or suspected to
exist.
(2) Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer excavations next to structures shall be carried out by hand.

2.5.6.Excavations for structures, pits and trenches
(1) Excavations for structures, pits and trenches shall be the minimum size necessary to construct the
permanent work. The sides of excavations shall be vertical unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
(2) The length of trench excavation left open at any one time shall not exceed that agreed by the Engineer.
(3) Unless permitted by the Engineer, trenches for utilities in areas of fill shall not be excavated until the fill
material has been deposited and compacted up to the earthworks final surface or formation or up to 1 m
above the top of the utility, whichever is lower.
2.6. Blasting Trials
2.6.1.Blasting trials
(1) Blasting trials shall be carried out for each proposed blasting procedure to demonstrate that:
(a) the procedure is safe,

(b) the resulting ground vibrations at locations stated in the Contract or instructed by the Engineer
can be satisfactorily predicted, recorded and are within acceptable limits, and shall not adversely
affect the safety and stability of adjoining structures, installations, slopes, and land, and
(c) the specified tolerances for earthworks final surfaces and formations can be achieved.
(2) Blasting trials shall be completed at least 7 days before the related blasting starts.
(3) Blasting trials shall be carried out in accordance with the trial procedure submitted to and agreed by the
Engineer. The location and size of blasting trials shall be as agreed by the Engineer.
2.6.2.Controlled blasting trials
Blasting trials for pre-splitting and other methods of controlled blasting shall be carried out to form a face at
least 6 m wide by 6 m high. The blasting trials shall be carried out on rock which has similar properties to
that of the earthworks final surface and which is at least 6 m away from the earthworks final surface.
2.6.3.Results of blasting trials
If in the opinion of the Engineer any aspect of the proposed blasting procedure as demonstrated by
blasting trials is unsatisfactory, particulars of proposed changes to the procedure shall be submitted to the
Engineer. Further blasting trials shall be carried out until the procedure is satisfactory.
2.6.4.Commencement of blasting
Blasting shall not proceed until in the opinion of the Engineer the procedure as demonstrated. by the
relevant blasting trials is satisfactory.

2.6.5.Changes In blasting procedure
Unless permitted by the Engineer, the satisfactory blasting procedure shall not be changed. Further blasting
trials shall be carried out to demonstrate proposed changes to the procedure unless otherwise permitted
by the Engineer.
2.7. Blasting
2.7.1.Statutory requirements for blasting
Blasting operations and the supply, transportation, storage, use and disposal of explosives shall be in
accordance with conditions and restrictions imposed by the relevant Bangladesh Government authorities
and the Engineer. The Contractor shall make all arrangements with and obtain all licences and permits
from the relevant Bangladesh G0vernment Authority with the assistance of the Employer in connection with
blasting operations.
2.7.2.Recording vibrations due to blasting
(1) Measurements of vibrations due to blasting shall be taken at locations stated in the Contract or
instructed by the Engineer at all times when blasting is carried out. Records of the vibrations shall be kept
by the Contractor on the Site and a copy provided for the Engineer. Arrangements for installing instruments
and taking measurements both inside and outside the Site shall be made by the Contractor.
(2) Vibrations due to blasting shall be measured in terms of peak particle velocity, peak particle
acceleration and vibrational amplitude. The peak values shall be taken as the maximum resultant
calculated by vector summation of the three components of velocity and amplitude respectively, measured
as instantaneously as the resolution of the recording instrument permits.
(3) Measurements shall be made with velocity seismographs of a type agreed by the Engineer.
Seismographs shall be capable of:
(a) recording vibrations in terms of peak particle velocity and vibrational amplitude over a frequency
of 0 — 200 Hz in three mutually perpendicular directions, and
(b) producing a permanent record of vibrations by tracing an ultraviolet light beam on sensitised
paper. or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
(4) The accuracy of seismographs shall be checked before blasting trials are carried out and at regular
intervals agreed by the Engineer.
2.7.3.Preparatory work for blasting
Before assessments of blasting safety precautions are made. all vegetation. overburden and soft or loose
material shall be removed to expose the rock which is to be blasted.

2.7.4.Notification of blasting
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer by not later than noon of the previous day of his intention to bring
any explosives to the Site or to carry out any blasting.
2.7.5.Storage of explosives
Explosives and detonators shall not be stored on the Site overnight unless permitted by the Engineer.
Explosives and detonators which are not used by the end of each day shall be disposed of as stipulated by
the Engineer.
2.7.6.Restrictions on blasting times
Blasting shall not be carried out at the following times:
(a) on General Holidays,

(b) before 8:30 am. or after 5:30 pm. on any day,
(c) unless permitted by the Engineer. when thunderstorm are predicted, and
(d) unless permitted by the Engineer. when strong wind signals are predicted.
2.7.7.Blasting
(1) Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, screens and other protective covers shall be erected to
prevent the projection of flying fragments of material resulting from blasting. The screens shall be
constructed using wire mesh securely supported on steel frames; the nominal diameter of the wire shall be
at least 3.5 mm and the wire mesh size shall not exceed 25 mm.
(2) Unless permitted by the Engineer, plaster blasting shall not be used.
(3) Unless otherwise permitted by the Commissioner of Mines blast holes shall be stemmed and decked
using free-flowing granular material. Charges shall be covered with thick gunny sacking and 2 m by 2 m
squares of steel fabric reinforcement weighed down with filled sandbags. Surface detonating cords. knots,
detonating relay conductors and initiating detonators shall be covered with a 300 mm thickness of sand or
soil.
(4) Unless permitted by the Engineer electrical detonators shall not be used within 60 m of overhead power
lines. The use of electrical detonators in the vicinity of static or mobile radio transmitters shall comply with
BS PD CLC/TR 50426 (formerly BS 6657).
(5) Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer delay blasting with millisecond delays shall be used for all
blasting, except as stated in Clause 2.7.8.(3).
(6) Unless permitted by the Engineer blasting shall not be carried out within a distance of:
(a) 60 m from water retaining structures or water tunnels, and

(b) 6 m from water mains or other water supply structures or installations.

(7) Unless permitted by the Engineer the vibrations at structures and installations due to blasting measured
in terms of peak particle velocity and vibrational amplitude shall not exceed the values stated in Table 2 -3.
(8) Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the vibration at adjoining slopes and land due to blasting
measured in terms of peak particle acceleration and peak particle velocity shall not exceed the values
stated in the Contract.
Table 2- 3 – Restrictions on peak particle velocity and vibrational amplitude
Type of structure or installation Peak particle velocity (mm/s) Vibrational amplitude (mm)
Water retaining structures
13 0.1
Water tunnels
Water mains
25 0.2
Other structures and pipes
2.7.8.Controlled Blasting
(1) Earthworks final surfaces which are to be formed by blasting and which slope at a gradient exceeding 2
vertical to 1 horizontal and exceed 3m in height shall be formed by pre-splitting. Other methods of
controlled blasting shall not be used unless permitted by the Engineer.
(2) Pre-splitting and other methods of controlled blasting shall be carried out in such a manner that the rock
mass is cleanly split on the required plane to within the specified tolerances and such that rock outside the
earthworks final surface is not shattered or loosened.
(3) Faces formed by pre-splitting or other methods of controlled blasting shall not exceed 15 m in height in
any one blasting operation unless permitted by the Engineer.
(4) If an earthworks final surface is to be formed by pre-splitting or other methods of controlled blasting:
(a) other blast holes shall be located at a sufficient distance from the earthworks final surface to
avoid damaging the surface, and
(b) the row of blast holes nearest to that surface shall be parallel to the row of pre-splitting holes.
(5) Pre-splitting shall consist of a single row of holes drilled at the appropriate inclination along the line of
the earthworks final surface. The holes shall be loaded with explosives not exceeding half the diameter of
the hole. The explosives shall be detonated simultaneously or with the minimum amount of delay
necessary to reduce ground vibrations.
(6) Holes for pre-splitting shall be at least 50 mm diameter and the ratio of the distance between the centre
of the holes and the diameter of the hole shall not exceed 10. The holes shall be within a distance of 0.015
times the length of the hole from their designed position.
(7) Holes for pre-splitting shall not be drilled into the sub-grade below berm levels. Rock which remains in
position on berms after blasting shall be removed by methods other than blasting.

2.8. Deposition of Fill Material
2.8.1.Types of fill material
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, areas of fill shall be formed of general fill material.
2.8.2.Sources of fill material
Fill material shall be obtained from excavation within the Site. If there is insufficient fill material of the
required types within the Site, imported fill material shall be provided by the Contractor from sources
outside the Site.
2.8.3.Surface preparation for fill material
Except as stated in Clause 2.11.1., surfaces on which fill material is to be deposited shall be prepared after
site clearance in accordance with the following requirements:
(a) Topsoil, grass, and other organic matter shall be removed.

(b) Soft spots, boulders and other materials which in the opinion of the Engineer are unsuitable or
unstable shall be removed.
(c) Watercourses shall be diverted as stated in the Contract.
(d) Benches shall be cut and sub-soil drainage systems installed as stated in the Contract.
(e) Voids shall be dealt with as stated in the Contract or instructed by the Engineer.
(f) Surfaces other than rock shall be scarified to a depth of 200 mm and compacted to the same
standard as the fill material which is to be deposited.
2.8.4.Commencement of deposition of fill material
The permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before deposition of fill material starts in any area of fill.
2.8.5.Haulage of fill material
Haulage of fill material to an area of fill shall proceed only when the compaction plant operating at the area
to be filled is sufficient to achieve the specified requirements for relative compaction of the fill material.
2.8.6.Deposition of fill material
(1) Fill material obtained from excavations within the Site shall be deposited in its final location as soon as
practicable after it has been excavated.
(2) Fill material shall be deposited in layers of a thickness appropriate to the compaction method to be
used.
(3) Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, layers of fill material shall be horizontal, except for any
gradient required for drainage, and the thickness of each layer shall be uniform over the area to be filled.

(4) Except in excavations for structures, pits and trenches, if the difference in level between adjacent areas
to be filled exceeds 1 m the edge of the higher area shall be benched before fill material Is placed against it.
(5) The construction of the Works shall be controlled in such a manner that any compaction of. the fill
material resulting from the passage of Constructional Plant or haulage vehicles is uniform.
(6) Except as stated in Clause 2.11.1., fill material shall not be deposited by end-tipping, by pushing loose
material down slope faces or by other methods which may result in segregation or inadequate compaction
of the fill material.
2.8.7.Overfilling
In areas of fill formed of fill material other than rock fill material, earthworks final surfaces sloping at a
gradient exceeding 1 vertical to 3 horizontal shall be formed by overfilling and cutting back after
compaction. Over-filling shall extend beyond the earthworks final surface by a horizontal distance of 0.5 m
or three times the thickness of the compacted layer, whichever is greater.
2.8.8.Deposition of fill material adjacent to structures and utilities
(1) Except as stated in Clause 2.8.8.(4), fill material deposited within 0.5m of a structure or utility shall be fine
fill material unless otherwise stated in the Contract. In addition, the material may contain up to 5% by
weight of fresh, slightly decomposed or moderately decomposed rock fragments of up to 200 mm provided
that these do not cause any damage to structures, nor do they interfere with the compaction requirements.
(2) Fill material shall not be deposited adjacent to or above structures or utilities until the construction of the
structure or utility is sufficiently advanced to accept the imposed forces without disturbance or damage.
(3) Fill material shall be deposited evenly on all sides of structures and utilities and in such a manner that
the structure or utility is not disturbed or damaged.
(4) Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, fill material around water, sewage and drainage pipes which
are constructed as part of the permanent work shall be special fill material. They shall be deposited in
layers not exceeding 100 mm thick to a level of 300 mm above the top of the pipe. The fill material shall be
deposited in such a manner that the layer on one side of the pipe is not more than 100 mm higher than the
layer on the other side.
2.8.9.Deposition of rockfill material
(1) The final compacted thickness of each layer of rock fill material shall exceed 1.5 times and shall not
exceed twice the nominal Grade size of the rock fill material.
(2) The surface voids of each layer of rock fill material shall be filled with fragments of rock before the next
layer is deposited. The final surface of rock fill material shall also be blinded with fine fill material.

2.8.10. Deposition of fill material in excavation for structures, pits and trenches
lf sheet piling, timbering or other temporary supports to excavations for structures, pits and trenches are not
to be left in place, the sheet piling, timbering or supports shall be removed as deposition of fill material
proceeds. The supports shall be removed in such a manner that the stability of the adjacent ground is
maintained and the compacted fill material is not disturbed.
2.9. Compaction of Fill Material
2.9.1.Compaction of fill material
(1) Fill material in areas of fill shall be compacted in layers to a stable condition as soon as practicable after
deposition and in a manner appropriate to the location and to the material to be compacted.
(2) The permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before the next layer is deposited on each layer of
compacted fill material.
(3) Except as stated in Clauses 2.9.3.(2), 2.9.5.(1), 2.10.2.(2) and 2.11.2., fill material shall be compacted to
obtain a relative compaction of at least 95% throughout unless otherwise stated in the Contract.
2.9.2.Moisture content of fill material
Fill material other than rock fill material and material as stated in Clause 2.9.5.(1) shall be at optimum
moisture content during compaction. The tolerance on the optimum moisture content percentage shall be
±3%, provided that the fill material is still capable of being compacted in accordance with the specified
requirements to form stable areas of fill. All necessary measures shall be taken to achieve and maintain the
specified moisture content.
2.9.3.Compaction of fill material adjacent to structures and utilities
(1) Fill material shall be compacted in such a manner that structures or utilities are not disturbed or
damaged.
(2) Fill material around water, sewage and drainage pipes which are constructed as part of the permanent
work shall be compacted by hand-rammers or manually operated power equipment. Fill material within
300 mm above the top of sewage and drainage pipes shall be compacted to obtain a relative compaction
of at least 85% throughout.
2.9.4.Compaction of rock fill material
(1) Every layer of rock fill material shall be compacted by at least eight passes of a vibrating roller or by
other equivalent compaction method approved by the Engineer. The final surface of rock fill material shall
be compacted by at least two additional passes of a vibrating roller or by other equivalent compaction
method approved by the Engineer.

(2) Vibratory rollers used for the compaction of rock fill material shall have a static load per 100 mm width of
roll of at least 2 kN for layers with a compacted thickness not exceeding 500 mm and at least 4 kN for layers
with a compacted thickness exceeding 500mm.
2.9.5.Compaction of general fill material with a large portion of coarse material
(1) For general fill material of which less than 90% passing a 20 mm BS test sieve, it will be difficult to permit
determination of the moisture content and maximum dry density according to this Section. This type of
material shall be compacted to the requirements of Clauses 2.9.5.(2), 2.9.5.(3) and 2.9.5.(4).
(2) Spread and level each horizontal layer of general fill material with a thickness not less than 1.5 times of
the maximum size of the general fill material and not exceeding the maximum depth of compacted layer in
accordance with Table 2 -4. if this criterion is not met due to the presence of over-sized coarse material in
the general fill, the over-sized coarse material shall be removed or broken down to sizes acceptable to the
Engineer. Each layer shall be systematically compacted by a vibratory roller with the stipulated minimum
number of passes corresponding to the minimum static load per 100 mm width of the roller.
(3) The number of passes of the roller shall only be counted when the roller is travelled on the material to
be compacted at a speed of not more than 2 km per hour with full vibration. The plant other than vibratory
roller to carry out material spreading or to provide some preliminary compaction only to assist the use of
heavier plant shall be disregarded in counting the number of passes.
(4) Variation from the method or the use of plant different from that specified in this Section will be
permitted only if the Contractor demonstrates at site trials that equivalent compaction is achieved by the
alternative method or plant. The procedure to be adopted for these site trials shall be agreed with and
(5) Without prejudice to the provision of the Conditions of Contract and in order that the Engineer may take
proper provision for the supervision of compaction in the permanent work, the Contractor shall, not less
than 24 hours before he proposes to carry out compaction processes, apply in writing to the Engineer for
permission to do so.
(6) When materials of widely divergent grading are used in embankments and fill areas, they shall be
spread and compacted in separate clearly defined areas.
(7) If more than one class of material is being used in such a way that in the opinion of the Engineer it is not
practicable to define the areas in which each class occurs, compaction plant shall be operated as if only
the material which requires the greatest compactive effort is being compacted.
Table 2- 4 – Compaction requirement for general fill material with a large portion of coarse material
Force per 100

Well-graded material Uniform-graded material
mm width
(kN) Maximum depth of Minimum no. of Maximum depth of Minimum no. of
compacted layer passes compacted layer passes

(mm) (mm)
0.25 – 0.45 150 16
0.46 – 0.70 150 12
0.71 – 1.25 125 12 150 10
1.26 – 1.75 150 8 200 10
1.76 – 2.30 150 4 225 10
2.31 – 2.80 175 4 250 10
2.81 – 3.50 200 4 275 8
3.51 – 4.20 225 4 300 8
4.21 – 4.90 250 4 300 8
2.10. Completion of Earthworks Surfaces
2.10.1. Completion of earthworks final surfaces
(1) Earthworks final surfaces shall be completed to a stable condition as soon as practicable after
excavation or after deposition and compaction of fill material has been completed. The subsequent
permanent work or surface protection shall be carried out as soon as practicable after the earthworks final
surface has been completed.
(2) Earthworks final surfaces shall be completed to smooth alignments without abrupt irregularities unless
otherwise stated in the Contract.
2.10.2. Completion of formations
(1) Formations above structures or utilities shall be completed after construction of the structure or utility.
(2) Except in excavations in rock and in areas of fill formed of rock fill material or fill material as stated in
Clause 2.9.5.(1), formations shall be compacted to obtain a relative compaction of at least 98% to a depth of
200mm below the formation.
(3) Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, proof rolling shall be carried out on formations. The
formation shall be rolled in the presence of the Engineer by at least two passes of a non-vibrating rubber
tyred roller. The roller shall have a static load per 100 mm width of roll of at least 4 kN and shall travel at a
speed not exceeding 2 km/h. Any defect in the formation which is revealed during proof rolling by
deformation of the formation which in the opinion of the Engineer is excessive shall be made good as
(4) After all other formation work and testing have been completed and damage caused by testing
reinstated, formations for pavements shall be rolled with one pass of a smooth steel-wheeled non-vibrating
roller. The roller shall have a load per 100 mm width of roll of at least 2 kN.
(5) Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer formations which will not be immediately covered by the
subsequent permanent work shall be protected by methods agreed by the Engineer.

2.10.3. Protection of earthworks final surfaces and formations
(1) Earthworks final surfaces and formations shall be maintained in a stable condition and shall be
protected from damage due to water or other causes and from exposure to conditions which may
adversely affect the surface.
(2) Formations shall not be used by Constructional Plant or vehicles other than those which in the opinion
of the Engineer are essential to construct the subsequent work.
2.11. Intermediate Areas of Fill
2.11.1. Deposition of fill material in intermediate areas of fill
Fill material may be deposited in intermediate areas of fill by end-tipping or by pushing into position until, in
the opinion of the Engineer. it is sufficient to form a stable foundation on which to construct the subsequent
work.
2.11.2. Compaction of fill material in intermediate areas of fill
Fill material in intermediate areas of fill up to the level stated in Clause 2.11.1. shall be compacted to a
degree which in the opinion of the Engineer is practicable. Except as stated in Clause 2.9.5.(1), fill material
above the level stated in Clause 2.11.1. shall be compacted to obtain a relative compaction of at least:
(a) 90% throughout,

(b) 95% within 1.5 m of earthworks final surfaces and formations, and
(c) 98% within 200 mm of formations.
2.12. Tolerances
2.12.1. Tolerances: earthworks final surfaces and formations
(1) Earthworks final surfaces and formations shall be within the tolerances stated in Table 2 -5 of the
specified lines and levels. The tolerances for formations do not apply for pipes or preformed structures
which require to be supported over their complete length or area.
(2) In excavation, a positive tolerance refers to insufficient excavation and a negative tolerance refers to
excess excavation. In areas of fill, a positive tolerance refers to excess fill material and a negative tolerance
refers to insufficient fill material.
Table 2- 5 – Tolerances for earthworks final surfaces and formations
Type of surface Tolerance (mm)

Method of forming surface
+ -
Excavation except in rock 0 25
Formations for structures and
Excavation in rock 0 150
utilities
Deposition and compaction of fill material 0 25
Formations for pavements, Excavation except in rock 0 50

including carriageways, footways, Excavation in rock 0 150

cycletracks, paved areas, aircraft Deposition and compaction of fill material
0 50
pavements and railway trackbeds.
Earthworks final surfaces other Excavation except in rock 0 100
than formations, with a gradient not Excavation in rock 0 200
exceeding 1 vertical to 10 horizontal Deposition and compaction of fill material 0 100
Excavation except in rock 100 100
Other earthworks final surfaces Excavation in rock 100 200
Deposition and compaction of fill material 100 100
2.13. Testing: Fill Material - General Requirements
2.13.1. Batch: fill material
A batch of fill material is any quantity of fill material of the same type and which in the opinion of the
Engineer has similar properties throughout. For the purpose of testing for moisture content and relative
compaction a batch shall. in addition to the above, be fill material which is deposited in a single layer in any
area of fill presented by the Contractor for testing on one occasion.
2.13.2. Samples: fill material
(1) Each sample of fill material shall consist of at least four increments taken from different parts of the
batch. The increments shall be combined and thoroughly mixed and shall then be divided by quartering or
by using a riffle box to obtain specimens of an appropriate size to carry out the individual tests.
(2) The size of samples of fill material other than rock fill material shall be in accordance with AASHTO
requirements.
2.14. Testing
2.14.1. Testing Requirements
Testing shall be carried out as specified below and results reported to the Engineer regularly to
demonstrate the compliance of the completed works with the requirements of this Specification. The
frequency of testing shall be as required by the Engineer and shall be not less than that indicated below:
Description Test Frequency


3. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURE
3.1. Description
Excavation for structures shall consist of removal of materials for the construction of foundation for bridges,
culverts, retaining walls head walls, cut off walls, pipe culverts and other similar structures in accordance
with the requirements of these specifications and the lines and dimensions shown on the Drawings or as
indicated by the Engineer. The work shall include construction of the necessary cofferdams and cribs and
their subsequent removal; all necessary sheeting, shoring, bracing, driving and pumping, the removal of all
longs, stumps, grubs, and other deleterious mater and obstructions necessary for placing the foundations,
trimming bottoms of excavations, back filling, and clearing up the site and the disposal of all surplus
materials. Excavation due to dismantling and cleaning of existing structure shall be excluded from this
work.
3.2. Construction Operations
3.2.1. Setting Out
The Contractor shall clear the site in compliance with the requirements of clearing and grubbing laid down
to the limits of foundation as specified. After clearing, the Contractor shall set out true lines, curves, grades,
slopes, and section as shown in Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide labour, survey instruments and materials such as strings, pegs, nails,
bamboos, stones, lime, mortar, concrete, etc., required in connection with setting out of works and the
establishment of bench marks, other marks and stakes shall be maintained by the Contractor correctly in
position for a period as long as the Engineer may require for the work.
3.2.2. Excavation
Excavation shall be taken to the width of the lowest step of the footing and the sides shall be left plumb
where the nature of soil allows it. Where the nature of soil or the depth of the trench does not permit vertical
sides, the Contractor at his own expense shall put up necessary shoring, strutting and planking or cut
slopes to a safer angle or both with due regard to the safety of personnel and Works and to the satisfaction
of the Engineer. Excavation over increased width shall be 0.5 m in both side of Permanent Works and
cutting of slope shall be 1.5 H: 1.0 V. When depth of excavation above 3.00m, 0.70 m width beam shall be
considered at a depth 3.00 m from ground level. The depth to which the excavation is to be carried out shall
be as shown on the drawings, unless the type of material encountered is such as to require changes, in
which case the depth shall be as ordered by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions and safety measures a required during excavation.

3.2.3. Dewatering Protection
Where water is met within excavation due to stream flow, seepage, springs, rain or other reasons, the
Contractor shall take adequate measures such as bailing, pumping, constructing diversion channels,
drainage channels, bunds, cofferdams and other necessary works to keep the foundation trenches dry
when so required and to protect the green concrete/masonry against damage by erosion or sudden rising
of water level. The methods to be adopted in this regard and other details thereof shall be left to the choice
of the Contractor but subject to approval of the Engineer. Approval of the Engineer shall, however, not
relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of adequacy of dewatering and protection arrangements and for
the quality and safety of the Works.
Where cofferdams are required, these shall be carried to adequate depths and heights, be safely designed
and constructed and be made as watertight as is necessary for facilitating construction to be carried out
inside them. The interior dimensions of the cofferdams shall be such as to give sufficient clearance for the
construction and inspection and to permit installation of pumping machinery, etc., inside the enclosed area.
Pumping from the interior of any foundation enclosure shall be done in such a manner as to preclude the
possibility of the movement of water through any fresh concrete. No pumping shall be permitted during the
placing of concrete or for any period of at least 24 hours thereafter, unless it is done from a suitable pump
separated from the concrete work by a watertight wall or other similar means.
At the discretion of the Contractor, cement grouting or other approved methods may be used to prevent or
reduce seepage and to protect the excavated area.
The Contractor shall take all precautions in diverting channels and in discharging the drained water as not
to cause damage to the works, crops or any other property.
In the presence of groundwater, the Contractor shall undertake the excavation works with adequate
temporary dewatering measures. This shall ensure that the working area remains ‘dry’, i.e. without resulting
in saturation of the material that is to be excavated, leading to loss of strength to the foundation layer or
affecting the stability of slopes and excavations.
No separate payment shall be made to the Contractor for this work. It will be deemed that any cost of this
work is included in the primary work items.
3.2.4. Preparation of Foundation
The Geotechnical Engineer shall inspect the founding strata and the results of testing undertaken by the
Contractor as described below, in order to confirm the ground conditions are as assumed in design.
The formation shall be investigated by the Contractor, using the approved methods described below, for
the presence and extent of any ‘soft spots’ (i.e. strength below that required by the design). Such ‘soft spots’
shall be removed and backfilled in accordance with Clause 604 of Specification for Highways Works (SHW)
and as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. For small areas and depths, blinding concrete class ST1

shall be used. For more extensive areas and depths, backfill shall be Class 6N. The founding level of all
foundations and the depth or extent of excavation of inadequate founding strata (“soft spots”) shall be
subject to the inspection and acceptance of the Geotechnical Engineer.
The bottom of the foundation shall be levelled both longitudinally and transversely or stepped as shown in
the Drawings or directed by the Engineer. Before footing is laid, the surface shall be slightly watered and
rammed. In the event of excavation having been made deeper than that shown on the Drawings or as
otherwise ordered by the Engineer, the extra depth shall be made up with concrete or masonry of the
foundation grade, subject to the Engineer’s approval, at the cost of the Contractor. Ordinary filling shall not
be used for the purpose to bring the foundation to level.
Where blinding concrete is required, the formation shall be blinded as soon as possible after excavation is
complete (allowing for the inspections and investigations described).
When rock or other hard strata is encountered, it shall be free of all soft and loose material, cleaned and cut
to a firm surface either level, stepped or serrated as directed by the Engineer. All seams shall be cleaned
out and filled with cement mortar or grout to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
When foundation piles are used, the excavation of each pit shall be substantially completed before
beginning pile-driving operations therein. After pile driving operations in a given pit are completed, all loose
and displaced materials therein shall be removed to the elevation of the bottom of the footings.
3.2.5.Slips and Bows
If there are any slips or bows in the excavation, these shall be removed by the Contractor at its own cost.
3.2.6.Public Safety
Near towns, villages and all frequented places, trenches and foundation pits shall be securely fenced,
provided with proper caution signs and marked with red lights at night to avoid accidents. The Contractor
shall take adequate protective measures to see that the excavation operations do not affect or damage
adjoining structures.
3.2.7. Backfilling for Structures
Backfilling shall be done with approved material after concrete is fully set and carried out in such a way as
not to cause undue thrust on any part of the structure. All space between foundation concrete and the sides
of the excavation shall be refilled to the original surface, only selected granular materials that will produce a
stable, dense, backfill shall be used for structures.
Selected backfill Class 6N fill, in accordance with Table 6/1 of Specification for Highways Works (SHW),
shall be used as fill to structures unless otherwise stated on the Drawings. Unless described in this
document, the grading requirements for each class of fill are given in Table 6/2 of the SHW Series 600.

No cast-in-place concrete structure shall be subjected to pressures from backfill until 3 days after expiration
of the period designated for removal of forms in accordance with EN 13670. Backfill shall be deposited on
both sides, where required, to approximately the same elevation at the same time. Care shall be taken to
prevent any wedging action against the structure. Slopes bounding the excavation shall be stepped to
prevent such wedge action.
Materials shall be placed in layers and compacted in accordance with series 608, 610 & 612 of SHW.
3.2.8.Disposal of Excavated Materials
Refer to GEO Specifications.
3.2.9. Measurement
3.2.10. Payment

4. GEOTECHNICAL WORKS
4.1. General Requirements
4.1.1.General Requirements
The works and materials specified in Clauses 4.1.2. to 4.1.4. shall comply with the sections stated, unless
otherwise stated in this Section. The ground investigation works shall generally be carried out as per the BS
5930:2015. when other standards or guidelines have not been stipulated. The laboratory tests shall be
carried out as per the BS1377 Parts 1 to 9, when other standards or guidelines have not been stipulated.
Tests not covered by the British Standards shall be covered by the ASTM Standards, or other relevant
publications sited in the specifications or the associated Appendices. Reference is also made to the
Government of the Special Administrative Region of Hong Kong General Specifications for Civil Engineering
Works.
4.1.2.Site clearance
Site clearance shall comply with Section 1..
4.1.3.Earthworks
Earthworks shall comply with Section 2..
4.1.4.Concrete
Concrete shall comply with Section 8..
4.2. Ground Investigation Glossary of Terms
4.2.1.Block sample
Block sample is an undisturbed sample recovered by in-situ hand trimming of a block of material from the
surrounding soil.
4.2.2.Bulk sample
Bulk sample is a sample of at least 10 kg mass which is representative of the grading of the material at the
point of sampling.
4.2.3.Inspection pit
Inspection pit is a pit for locating and identifying underground utilities and structures.
4.2.4.Jar sample
Jar sample is a disturbed sample of at least 0.7 kg mass contained in a transparent airtight jar which has a
screw cap with an airtight sealing ring.

4.2.5.Mazier sample
Mazier sample is an undisturbed sample recovered by rotary drilling using a Mazier triple tube core barrel
which has inner tubes protruding proud of the outer tube to protect the material being sampled from
disturbance.
4.2.6.Sample
Sample is any quantity of material obtained from the ground for the purposes of inspection, logging or
testing.
4.2.7.Slope surface stripping
Slope surface stripping is the removal of surface protection and vegetation from existing slopes to expose
underlying soil or rock for inspection.
4.2.8.Trial pit
Trial pit is a pit for inspecting and logging the ground and in which to carry out in-situ testing and sampling.
4.2.9.U 100 and U 76 samples
U 100 and U 76 samples are undisturbed samples recovered by advancing a thin-walled tube with a cutting
edge into the soil.
4.2.10. Undisturbed soil sample
Undisturbed soil sample is a sample complying with Class 1 or Class 2 of BS 5930 or ASTM Book of
Standards.
4.3. Submissions
4.3.1.Particulars of ground investigation
(1) The following particulars of proposed materials and methods for marine / land ground investigation
shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a) details of drilling and in—situ testing equipment,

(b) details of sampling equipment, and
(c) details of filter materials and till materials for drilling and testing,
(2) The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 7 days before the relevant work
starts.

4.4. Inspection Pits, and Trial Pits
4.4.1.Inspection pits
Inspection pits shall be formed by manual methods [MD1][SDS2], unless agreed otherwise by the Engineer.
The purpose of the inspection pits is to identify any buried services or other obstruction present below
ground at the locations where drilling or probing is to be carried out.
(1) inspection pits shall not be less than 0.25 m2 in plan and not less than 1.5 m deep, unless otherwise
(2) Small disturbed samples shall be taken every 0.5 m in all Common Ground layers encountered in the
inspection pit for logging purposes, commencing at ground level or below any concrete or road surfacing
layers.
4.4.2.Trial pits
The purpose of carrying out trial pits is to log the side of the trial pit for geotechnical and engineering
geological investigation purposes.
(1) The plan dimensions at the bottom of a trial pit shall be at least 1.5 m x1.5 m; the sides of trial pits shall
be vertical.
(2) The sides of trial pits shall be trimmed by manual methods to remove all disturbed material. Supports to
the sides of trial pits shall be such that the cut surface is clearly visible throughout the height of each face.
(3) The permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before fill material is deposited in trial pits.
4.4.3.Records of inspection pits
Records of inspection pits shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site and a report shall be submitted to the
Engineer within 3 days after each inspection pit has been excavated. The report shall contain details of the
positions, depths and dimensions of all utilities and structures encountered in each inspection pit. A log of
the inspection pit and its four faces shall also be prepared.
4.4.4.Records of trial pits
(1) Each trial pit shall be photographed as soon as excavation is complete. The full face of each of the sides
and the bottom of the trial pit shall be photographed individually. One copy of specimen prints of 127mm x
76 mm size, plus soft copies on digital format, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before fill
material is deposited in the trial pit. The photographs shall contain the following information:
(a) number of trial pit and site reference,

(b) measuring scale bar, and
(c) a suitable colour comparison chart placed alongside the trial pit face.

(2) Records of trial pits shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site and a report shall be submitted to the
Engineer within 7 days after each trial pit has been excavated. The report shall contain the following:
(a) details shown, and in the format shown as Appendix 6.1

(b) details of depths and rate of groundwater seepage,
(c) details of water levels, including dates and details of fluctuation,
(d) four sets of photographs or composite photographs in hard copy plus soft copies on digital
format as stated in Clause 4.4.4.(1); the photograph of each face shall occupy the full height of an
A4 size page.
4.5. Drilling for Ground Investigation
4.5.1.Drilling rigs for ground investigation
(1) Drilling rigs for ground investigation shall be the hydraulic feed type and shall have a rating of at least
26.5 kW to drive a rotary tool tipped with diamonds or tungsten carbide. Drilling rings shall be capable of
drilling in the specified sizes and to 130m depths below the existing river bed in marine drillholes and up to
80m[MD3] [SDS4] in land drillholes, or as to achieve the drilling requirements specified in the drawings,
whichever is deeper, without excessive vibration.
(2) The weight of each rig shall be such that a force of 12 kN can be applied to the drilling bit without
movement of the rig.
(3) Drilling rigs shall be capable of providing stable drill-string rotation at speeds of between 50 r/min and
1250 r/min and have a ram stroke length of at least 600 mm. The rigs shall be fitted with a tachometer and
a hydraulic feed pressure gauge, both of appropriate scales, and a device for measuring the rate of
penetration of the drill strings.
(4) Triplex or similar type pumps shall be used when the flushing medium is water; the pumps shall be
equipped with a gear box and shall be capable of delivering up to 2 I/s. The pumps shall incorporate a
surge bottle to reduce fluctuations in water pressure and the suction hose shall be fitted with a suitable
filter. The pumps shall have a by-pass system allowing full control of water flow at all pump delivery rates.
4.5.2.Drilling equipment for ground investigation
(1) The core barrels, drill rods and drill bits of drilling equipment for marine and land ground investigation
shall be of a type appropriate to the purpose of the drilling and sampling. Accessories and spare parts shall
be compatible with the equipment in use and with each other. Spare drill bits shall be available for use
during drilling.
(2) The size of casings shall be appropriate to the drilling, coring, sampling, testing and other installation
requirements.

(3) Core barrels for sampling soil shall be equipped with a sediment catcher tube. The tube shall have the
same external diameter as the core barrel and shall be approximately 0.75m long.
(4) Casings shall be used to stabilize caving ground. The size of casing and drill rod in use shall be
appropriate to the size of core barrel in use. Casings and drill rods shall be straight and in good condition
and shall be clean at the time of drilling and free from scale, dirt and other loose material.
(5) Only regular lengths of casings and drill rods shall be used and imperial and metric lengths shall not be
mixed.
(6) Short lengths of drill rods shall be used to enable continuous coring to be carried out in such a manner
that each core run can be completed within one ram stroke.
(7) Short lengths of casing not exceeding the ram stroke length shall be used to enable casings to be
advanced after each core run where necessary.
(8) Core barrels and drill rods shall be stored on steel frame trestles.
4.5.3.Drilling for ground investigation
(1) Drillholes for marine and land ground investigation shall be sunk by rotary methods. The methods and
equipment used shall be such that:
(a) the overall hole alignment is within 2% for vertical drillholes and is within 5% of the specified
alignment for non-vertical drillholes,
(b) the soil encountered and the levels at which changes in ground conditions occur can be
accurately identified,
(c) the specified sampling requirements can be achieved,
(d) in-situ tests can be carried out and field installations can be incorporated at any depth in the
drillhole, and
(e) consistency of measurement and minimal disturbance of the ground is achieved.
(2) Casings shall be advanced concurrently with the removal of material in such a manner that loss of
ground is avoided.
(3) Larger casings shall be set concentric with drillholes which are being reamed.
(4) The flushing medium for drilling shall be clean water; other substances or materials shall not be
introduced into drillholes unless permitted by the Engineer. The flushing medium for drilling shall be passed
through a sedimentation basin and shall either be reused or be discharged to surface drains or natural
stream courses. Measures shall be taken to prevent flushing mediums seeping through the ground.
(5) The flushing medium for drilling shall not be discharged to stream courses which are used as a supply
of drinking water.

4.5.4.Sampling from drillholes
(1) Jar samples from drillholes shall be taken from the cutting shoe of each undisturbed sample, from any
anomalous material, from each standard penetration test and at other locations as instructed by the
Engineer.
(2) All loose material and material disturbed by drilling or in-situ tests shall be removed from the sides and
bottom of the drillhole before each undisturbed sample is taken.
4.5.5.Filling drillholes
(1) Granular fill material of a type agreed by the Engineer, or 4:1 cement bentonite [MD5][SDS6] grout
where instructed by the Engineer. shall be deposited in drillholes for ground investigation and compacted
to the same relative compaction as the surrounding ground. The casing shall be gradually withdrawn; the
fill material shall be kept above the bottom of the casing during withdrawal. Subsequent depressions in the
ground surface shall be filled and reinstated. The drillhole position shall be marked with a metal marker and
flag or a 300 mm x 300 mm x 150 mm thick concrete block; the hole number shall be inscribed on the
surface and highlighted in red paint.
(2) The permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before fill material is deposited in drillholes and before
the casing is withdrawn. The ground surface around drillholes shall be reinstated as soon as practicable
after the fill material has deposited and compacted in each drillhole.
4.5.6.Records of drillholes
(1) Records of drillholes for ground investigation shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site and two copies
of a preliminary drillhole log, stamped PRELIMINARY, shall be submitted to the Engineer within 3 days after
completion of each drillhole. Drillhole logs shall be comprehensive and shall in general be in accordance
with BS 5930:2015, or be in a form similar to that shown in Appendix 6.2 or with any other system agreed by
the Engineer.
(2) Drillhole logs shall be drawn to a constant vertical scale of 1:50 unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer
and shall contain the following details:
(a) information shown and in the format as Appendix 6.2,

(b) reduced levels of observation well bases, piezometer tips. and sand filter layers.
(c) details of utilities identified in the inspection pit excavated at the drillhole location.
4.6. Sampling for Ground Investigation
4.6.1.Sampling equipment for ground investigation
Sampling equipment and containers for ground investigation shall comply with the requirements of BS
1377, BS 5930, ASTM Book of Standards and the following:

(a) For general purpose open tube samples and thin-walled samples, the sample tube and cutting shoe
shall be free from rust, pitting, burring or any other defect. The use of oil inside the sampler shall be limited
to the minimum practical. Each sample tube shall have a unique reference number and the word ‘TOP'
engraved on its exterior at one end. The sample tube shall be driven with the end marked ‘TOP' uppermost.
The dimensions, construction and condition of each sample tube, cutting shoe and adaptor head shall be
approved by the Engineer prior to sampling. The adaptor head shall be fitted with a ball valve to permit the
exit of air or water during driving and to assist in retaining the sample during withdrawal, and it shall have
an allowance for over-driving. In soil of low cohesion such as silts and silty fine sands the sampler shall be
equipped with a basket core retainer to enhance core recovery.
(b) U100, U76 and U40 thin-walled samplers shall be approved 102 mm (for U100), 78 mm (for U76) and 42
mm (for U40) diameter open drive sample tubes made from thin-walled seamless cadmium plated or
stainless steel not less than 450mm (for U100), 350 mm (for U76) and 200 mm (for U40) in length fitted with
a cutting shoe tapered at an angle not exceeding 20.
(c) Piston samplers shall be a thin-walled fixed piston sampler to the approval of the Engineer. The piston
sampler shall be capable of operating to a depth of at least 20 m below ground level with no lateral
movement during the actual sampling operation. The design and maintenance of the sampler shall be
such that a partial vacuum is formed over the retained sample in the tube. The minimum recovered sample
length shall be 900mm. The thin-walled tube shall have an external diameter of 75mm or 100 mm as
instructed by the Engineer. The area ratio of the sampler shall not exceed 10%.
(d) Mazier samplers shall be a Mazier triple-tube core barrel fitted with a detachable rigid PVC inner tube. 2
mm thick, 74 mm internal diameter by 1000 mm long having a detachable projecting cutting shoe which
perforates the soil and insulates the core sample from the drilling fluid. The internal diameter of the
projecting shoe should not differ by more than 2 mm. The dimensions of the sampler shall not differ by
more than $0.50 mm from those shown in Table 6.1 unless approved by the Engineer. A basket core
retainer shall be fitted at the bottom of the PVC inner tube to assist in recovery of the core. The length of the
sample recovered shall not be less than 750 mm. A triple-tube core barrel of alternative design may be
submitted for the Engineer's approval.
(e) Split spoon samplers for the standard penetration test shall be provided with a thin smooth stainless
steel or similar approved liner of 35 mm internal diameter.
Table 4- 6 – Dimensions of Mazier Core Barrel Sampler
Item Dimension (mm)

Inner Barrel Cutting Shoe ID 72.0
OD 77.2
Core bit OD 101.1
Liner tube ID 74.0
Inner tube barrel ID 78.0
OD 88.5
Outer tube barrel OD 98.5

4.6.2.Sampling for ground investigation
(1) A reference number including the borehole/pit number shall be assigned to each soil sample taken
from a drillhole or trial pit. The number shall be unique for that drillhole or trial pit and shall be in the order of
depth below ground level.
(2) The visible ends of each undisturbed sample shall be trimmed of any disturbed material immediately
after recovery from the ground. The sides of the tube or box shall be cleaned and the ends of the sample
shall be coated with three successive thin films of just-molten microcrystalline wax. A metal foil disc or plate
shall be added and followed by more molten wax to give a total thickness of at least 20 mm. Any space
remaining in the ends of the sample tube or box shall be solidly filled with damp sawdust and the ends of
the sample tube shall be covered with tight fitting rubber caps.
(3) Each sample shall be identified by a label. The label shall be written with permanent ink and protected
from moisture, damage and loss. The minimum labelling requirements shall be as follows:
(a) All labels shall contain the following information:
 name of contract,
 name or reference number of the site,
 reference number, location and angle of borehole.,
 reference number of sample,
 date of sampling,
 brief description of the sample,
 depth of the top and the bottom of the sample below ground level,
 location and orientation of the sample if taken from a trial pit.
(b) For jar samples, a stick-on label covered with a transparent plastic cover shall be secured with adhesive
tapes to the body of the jar.
(c) For undisturbed and bulk samples. a permanent or stick-on label covered with a transparent plastic
sheet shall be secured with adhesive tape to the body of the container. An additional label giving the
sample reference number and depth of sample shall be sealed in with the sample.
(d) For core samples stored in core boxes. 3 stapled card, stick-on label or permanent ink shall be used
externally on the front of the box and repeated inside. The hole reference number shall be written in
permanent ink or paint on each end of the core box.
4.6.3.Storage and delivery of samples for ground investigation
(1) Samples for ground investigation shall be delivered to, and stored at, a core store at a location agreed
by the Engineer. Samples shall be delivered to the testing laboratory at a time agreed by the Engineer.

(2) Undisturbed soil samples shall be stored and delivered in a wooden crate of appropriate dimensions.
The samples shall be kept in an upright position with a separate compartment for each sample. The
compartment shall be properly padded and the lower end of the sample shall be placed in the bottom of
the compartment.
(3) The samples shall not be disturbed during transportation. handling and storage.
4.6.4.Bulk samples
Bulk samples shall be obtained from undisturbed ground. Each bulk sample shall be sealed into a metal or
plastic container immediately after it has been taken.
4.6.5.Mazier samples
Mazier samples shall be taken by a Mazier sampler or an equivalent triple tube core barrel approved by the
Engineer and in accordance with Clause 4.6.1..
4.6.6.U 100/76 [Shelby Tube samples
(1) Sample tubes shall be advanced by jacking action unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. The jack
shall be arranged to align with the sampler. Measures shall be taken to prevent lateral movement during
the sampling operation.
(2) Each U 100 and Shelby Tube sample shall contain at least 300 mm net length of undisturbed material
and each U 76 sample shall contain at least 200 mm net length of undisturbed sample.
4.6.7.Block samples
(1) Block samples shall be taken from the sides or bottom of trial pits at locations and orientations
(2) Each block sample shall be at least 230 mm x 230 mm x 230 mm and shall be excavated, trimmed, cut,
wrapped, waxed and packed in metal or wooden boxes in accordance with the procedure stated in Part A
of Des. E-2 of the United States Bureau of Reclamation Earth Manual.
4.7. ln-Situ Testing
4.7.1.Standard penetration tests
(1) The apparatus and procedure for standard penetration tests shall comply with BS 1377, test 19. The
drive hammer shall be a type incorporating an automatic trip mechanism to ensure free fall. The 60° solid
core shoe shall be used in soil containing coarse gravel.
(2) A thin smooth stainless steel or aluminium liner of 35 mm internal diameter shall be fitted in the split-
spoon sampler during the standard penetration test. After the sampler has been withdrawn from the
drillhole, the liner and the retained soil shall be treated in the same manner as an undisturbed sample.

(3) Standard penetration tests shall be carried out below the level of the casing. The base of the drillhole
shall be fully cleaned before the test starts. Jar samples shall be taken from the split-barrel shoe after each
test.
(4) The number of blows of the drive hammer required to achieve each 75 mm of shoe penetration until a
total penetration of 450 mm has been achieved shall be recorded. The N-value shall be recorded as the
sum of the number of blows of the drive hammer required to achieve the last 300 mm of shoe penetration.
The number of blows recorded for the initial 150mm of shoe penetration shall not be included in the N-
value calculation. if any increment of 75 mm of shoe penetration is not achieved after 100 blows of the drive
hammer, the number of blows and the penetration achieved shall be recorded and the test shall be
terminated.
4.7.2.ln-situ density test
(1) ln-situ density tests shall be carried out by the sand replacement method in accordance with BS 5930 or
by other methods permitted by the Engineer.
(2) A jar sample shall be taken at each location where an in-situ density test is carried out.
4.7.3.Flat Plate Dilatometer Tests (Marchetti Dilatometer Test, DMT)
The Flat Plate Dilatometer Tests (Marchetti Dilatometer Tests), DMT. shall be carried out at selected depth
intervals in selected drillholes down the drillhole, as instructed [MD7][SDS8] by the [SDS9][CJT10] Engineer,
as per the specifications and procedure detailed in ASTM standard 6635- 01(Reapproved 2007).
The dilatometer shall be pushed with force or by driving in dense soils from the base of a drillhole to take
the DMT to the required test depth. The pushing force or the blow count shall be recorded with the
penetration depth achieved until the test depth is reached. Pressure dissipation tests shall be carried out as
instructed during penetration following the procedure detailed in the ASTM Standard. Any test depth shall
not be less than 0.5 m from the bottom of the drillhole, in order to ensure that the soil tested is not affected
by the drilling.
Testing of the ground by inflating the attached membrane shall be carried out at specified depths to
determine the DMT parameters AB, ED, Gm, ID and KB. A total number of 3 such tests shall be carried at
depth intervals of 0.3m to obtain the parameters at any given test depth. Therefore, if the specified test
depth is down. in meters, the tests shall be carried out at (dew-0.3) m. dDMT m, and (dow+ 0.3) m depths.
At least two dissipation tests shall be carried out while penetrating between these tests depths.
The total of 2 dissipation tests, and the three inflation tests to determine the DMT parameters shall be
considered as one single test in the Bill of Quantities [MD11] for costing purposes. Penetration from the
base of the drillhole to the test depth will also be considered as part of the cost of a single DMT test.
The Contractor shall provide the correlation parameters and factors to determine the soil characteristics
and the intrinsic soil parameters from the DMT parameters. The Contractor shall also to carry out these

assessments and characterize the results obtained from the DMT and include them in the factual test result
sheets and the reports submitted.
The apparatus shall be regularly calibrated as stipulated in the ASTM procedures to ensure quality of
results obtained.
4.7.4.High pressure dilatometer (HPD) test
The pressuremeter shall be a cylindrical device designed to apply uniform pressure to the walls of the
borehole by means of a flexible membrane. The length to diameter ratio of the membrane shall be greater
than five. The vertical axis of the pressuremeter shall be straight to within 1mm per metre over the length of
the major diameter. Displacement shall be measured directly at the mid-point of the membrane at three or
more equidistant points around the circumference by displacement transducers mounted within the
instrument. The sensitivity to external pressure of the displacement transducers shall not be greater than
4mm per GPa. The total pressure shall be measured by a transducer within the instrument and shall have a
working range less than or equal to the maximum capacity of the instrument.
The output from the transducers shall be read to within 0.05% of the output over the full working range. The
data for each transducer shall be tabulated and presented as a graph of measured displacement against
corresponding output. Regression analysis shall be used to determine the correlation between output and
displacement or pressure and the coefficient shall be expressed to at least three significant figures. The
coefficient of determination (r 2) for each calibration shall be greater than 0.95. The correlation coefficient for
each calibration shall be within 5% of the mean correlation given in the register. Calibrations which do not
meet these criteria will not be acceptable without the approval of the Engineer.
The resolution of the transducers mounted within an instrument shall be to within 0.05% of their full working
range. The data acquisition system used with the instrument shall be capable of recording the transducer
outputs to that resolution.
The pressuremeter shall have a maximum pressure capacity of 30MPa and a displacement measuring
system capable of measuring an increase in the diameter of at least 20% of the original diameter of the
instrument.
The hole shall be advanced to a test position using boring and drilling equipment and techniques and,
where necessary, a flushing medium. Particular boring, drilling and sampling requirements shall be stated
in Appendix 6.15. Provision shall be made during construction of the borehole for supporting the sides of
the borehole by a temporary casing, in which case it shall not extend beyond the base of the hole.
Drilling to form a test pocket below the base of a hole for the insertion of the high pressure dilatometer shall
be carried out using equipment, techniques and a flushing medium consistent with achieving minimum
pocket disturbance. Any particular test pocket sampling requirements shall be notified by the Engineer.
The test pocket diameter shall not be less than the deflated instrument diameter and the ratio of the test
pocket diameter to the deflated instrument diameter shall be no greater than 1.1. Test pockets with a ratio

of pocket diameter to deflated instrument diameter greater than 1.1 will not normally be acceptable unless
the Engineer is satisfied that ratio less than 1.1 is impracticable under the prevailing ground conditions. The
length of the test pocket shall not be less than 2m.
In cases where the ratio of the test pocket diameter to the deflated instrument diameter exceeds 1.1, the
Contractor shall discuss with the Engineer any changes to the equipment, techniques and flushing medium
necessary to achieve an acceptable pocket diameter.
If the orientation of the instrument is to be recorded prior to commencement of insertion into the borehole
and before it is removed there from it shall be stated in the field report.
The instrument shall be inserted in the test pocket within 60 minutes of completion of construction of test
pockets to depths of 30m. For pockets in excess of 30m deep additional time shall be allowed following
discussions with the Contractor. The instrument shall be at least 0.2m below the top and 0.2m above the
base of the test pocket.
(1) All information shall be presented on A4 paper with all graphical plots presented at a scale which
sensibly fills the entire A4 page size. Prior to commencing work on site:
(a) Full details of the pressuremeter and testing equipment;

(b) Details of the proposed drilling equipment and flushing medium to be used for pre-drilling holes;
(c) Description of the methods of carrying out all the drilling operations for forming a test pocket;
(d) Details of the experience of the proposed operator and Supervising Engineer;
(2) The following information shall be submitted for each test within one working day of the completion of
that test:
(a) Contract name and number, borehole number, depth of the top and bottom of the test pocket,
depth of the displacement measurement axes;
(b) Names of drilling and testing personnel;
(c) Details of equipment used;
(d) Details of boring, drilling, (and self-drilling if applicable). Including date and time of start and
finish of all drilling, description and estimate of any drilling fluid returns and depth and size of casing
used, if any;
(e) The output from the transducers recorded prior to and during installation and on removal from
the borehole (High pressure dilatometer only);
(f) Tabulated output for the transducers, time of start and finish of test and rates of stress and/or
strain on magnetic media in ASCII comma separated value format for the test;
(9) The calibrations coefficients used to convert the test data to engineering units;
(h) Tabulated calibrated data on magnetic media in ASCII comma separated value form for the test;
(i) A plot of total pressure against cavity strain in % for each opposing pair of displacement
transducers (high pressure dilatometer only);

(j) A plot of total pressure against displacement in mm for each displacement transducer. A plot of
total pressure against rate of change of cavity strain (creep) for each opposing pair of transducers
(high pressure dilatometer only);
(k) A plot of total pressure against cavity strain in % for the initial stage of the test, i.e. up to about
1% cavity strain. for each displacement transducer (self-boring pressuremeters);
(I) A plot of total pressure against cavity strain in % for the unload-reload cycle for each plot given in
number 2;
(m) Either a plot of total pressure against natural logarithmic value of volumetric strain. (clays and
rocks). for each plot given in number 2 or a plot of natural logarithmic value of effective pressure
against natural logarithmic value of current cavity strain, (sands) for each plot given in number 2;
(n) A preliminary assessment of the parameters.
4.7.5.Self Boring Pressuremeter Tests
(1) The pressuremeter shall be a cylindrical device designed to apply uniform pressure to the walls of the
borehole by means of a flexible membrane. The length to diameter ratio of the membrane shall be greater
than five. The vertical axis of the pressuremeter shall be straight to within 1mm per metre over the length of
the major diameter. Displacement shall be measured directly at the mid-point of the membrane at three or
more equidistant points around the circumference by displacement transducers m0unted within the
instrument. The sensitivity to external pressure of the displacement transducers shall not be greater than
4mm per GPa. The total pressure shall be measured by a transducer within the instrument and shall have a
working range less than or equal to the maximum capacity of the instrument.
(2) The resolution of the transducers mounted within an instrument shall be to within 0.05% of their full
working range. The data acquisition system used with the instrument shall be capable of recording the
transducer outputs to that resolution.
(3) Not Used.
(4) A self—boring pressuremeter shall be drilled into the ground using an integral cutting head at its lower
end such that the instrument replaces the material it removes. The drilling techniques and flushing medium
shall be consistent with achieving minimum disturbance to the ground surrounding the instrument such
that a direct assessment of the in situ total horizontal stress can be made.
(5) Cambridge type (soft ground) self-boring pressuremeter - This pressuremeter shall have a maximum
pressure capacity of 4.5MPa and a displacement measuring system capable of measuring an increase in
the diameter of at least 15% of the original diameter of the instrument. Two transducers shall be mounted
diametrically opposite on the central section of the membrane such that pore pressures can be determined
by those transducers.
(6) Not used
(7) Not Used.

(8) A statement from the manufacturer shall be given, if required in Appendix 6.15, that the instruments
stated in Appendix 6.15 meets the requirements of the specification for straightness and sensitivity.
Calibrations for each instrument shall be kept in a register for that instrument and be available for
inspection. The mean and standard deviation for the correlations of each transducer shall be given.
Calibrations shall be carried out in shaded clean dry conditions. The record of each calibration shall include
the ambient temperature at which the calibration was carried out and a description of the location where it
was carried out.
(9) The output from the transducers shall be read to within 0.05% of the output over the full working range.
The data for each transducer shall be tabulated and presented as a graph of measured displacement
against corresponding output. Regression analysis shall be used to determine the correlation between
output and displacement or pressure and the coefficient shall be expressed to at least three significant
figures. The coefficient of determination (r2) for each calibration shall be greater than 0.95. The correlation
coefficient for each calibration shall be within 5% of the mean correlation given in the register. Calibrations
which do not meet these criteria will not be acceptable without the approval of the Engineer.
(10) All calibrations shall be traceable to National Standards [MD12] in [SDS13] accordance with the
requirements of ISO 17025.
(11) The procedures for calibrating the instrument. described below shall be carried out.
a. Calibration of various Types of Elements
(a) Type 1- Displacement transducer: The calibration of a displacement. transducer shall be the
change in output from the transducer against the movement of the transducer measured by a
micrometer. The micrometer shall read to 0.01mm. The displacement shall be continuously
increased up to the maximum working range of the transducer and then reduced to zero at
increments of displacement of no greater than 0.5mm. Each transducer shall be calibrated
independently;
(b) Type 2 -Total pressure transducer: The instrument shall be placed in a cylinder strong enough
safely to restrain the expansion at full working pressure. The pressure in the instrument shall be
continuously increased in equal increments, such that there are 20 to 40 increments up to the total
working capacity of the installed pressure transducer. The pressure in the instrument shall be
reduced by the same number of increments used for pressurisation. The pressure at the end of
each increment or decrement shall be held constant until the readings from the transducer remain
substantially constant, readings being recorded at 10 second intervals throughout. The calibration
of a pressure transducer shall be the change in output from the transducer against the pressure
applied to the transducer measured by a calibrated Bourdon gauge. The maximum capacity of the
Bourdon gauge shall be between 100% to 120% of the maximum capacity of the transducer and
shall read to within 0.25% of the maximum capacity of the gauge;

(c) Type 3 - Pore pressure transducer: The procedure and equipment for calibrating the pore
pressure transducers shall be the same as that for type 2. If the pore pressure is measured relative
to the pressure within the instrument then the transducer shall be calibrated by internally
pressurising the instrument within a cylinder strong enough safety to restrain the expansion at full
working pressure. If the pore pressure is measured relative to atmospheric pressure then the
transducer shall be calibrated by externally pressurising the instrument within a cylinder strong
enough safety to restrain the applied pressure;
(d) Type 4 - Membrane stiffness: The instrument shall be clamped in a vertical position. A new
membrane shall be inflated up to the maximum movement of the displacement transducers and
deflated to the deflated instrument diameter at least three times before calibration.
The membrane shall be inflated in free air by applying pressure in increments until the expansion
commences. There shall be sufficient increments of pressure to accurately define the initial portion
of the expansion. Upon expansion a cavity strain rate shall be selected to give sufficient data to
accurately define the expansion curve. The expansion shall continue until the maximum movement
of one of the displacement transducers is achieved. The membrane shall then be deflated by
reducing the diameter of the membrane in the same decrements as the increments used for
inflation. The output from all the transducers shall be recorded at 10 second intervals.
The data for each transducer shall converted to engineering units by applying the calibration
coefficients determined in type 1 and 2 and presented as a graph of measured total pressure
against corresponding cavity strain or displacement for each displacement transducer. The
membrane stiffness calibration coefficients shall be expressed as the pressures required to lift the
membrane away from the body of the instrument and to move the membrane away from the body
of the instrument to the maximum movement of the displacement transducers. The coefficients
shall be expressed to at least two significant figures;
(e) Type 5 - Membrane compression: The instrument shall be placed in a cylinder of nown elastic
properties strong enough safely to restrain the expansion at full working pressure. A close fitting
cylinder with end restraints shall be used for self-boring pressuremeters. A cylinder with a ratio of
internal diameter of the cylinder to deflated instrument diameter of no greater than 1.1 shall be used
with high pressure dilatometers.
The instrument shall be pressurised up to its working pressure capacity. The pressure in the
instrument shall be reduced to 10% of the working capacity of the instrument and then increased
up to the working capacity in equal increments. The maximum increment or decrement shall be no
greater than 5% of the working capacity. The pressure in the instrument shall then be reduced to
zero. The pressure at the end of each increment or decrement shall be held constant until the
readings from the transducer remain sensibly constant, readings being recorded at 10 sec intervals.
throughout.

The data for each transducer shall be converted to engineering units by applying the calibration
coefficients determined in types 1, 2 and 4. The data shall be corrected for the expansion of the
cylinder and presented as a graph of total pressure corrected for membrane stiffness against
average cavity strain. The membrane compression calibration coefficient shall be expressed as the
average movement of the displacement transducers with pressure to at least two significant
figures.
b. Frequency
(a) The transducers shall be calibrated prior to the commencement and following the completion of
the testing on site. A copy of the calibrations shall be presented to the Engineer.
Membrane stiffness shall be carried out prior to the commencement of testing on site and after the
completion of every borehole. A new membrane shall be calibrated before use and after it is first
removed from the borehole. Calibrations stated in types 1 to 3 shall not be required on change of a
membrane.
The displacement and pressure transducers shall be recalibrated on site following any repair of the
transducers and associated instrument hardware.
The Engineer shall be able to inspect the instrument calibration register or shall be provided with
copies.
The frequency of membrane compression calibrations to be carried out for every 5 tests [SDS14]
[CJT15]
(12) The operator of the equipment shall have at least three months experience of the instrument under the
full time supervision of a technician with a minimum of two years experience in the use of the
pressuremeters. The operator shall be responsible to a Supervising Engineer who has minimum of five
years experience in Geotechnical engineering and is fully conversant with the operation of pressuremeters
and the interpretation of the data obtained [SDS16] [CJT17]
(13) Self-boring pressuremeter shall be drilled continuously from the ground surface or from the base of a
pre—drilled hole. It shall be drilled on at least 1m from a previous test position or at least 1m beyond the
base of a pre-drilled hole. If a length greater than 1m is required then the whole length shall be self-drilled. If
the Engineer is satisfied that it is impracticable under the prevailing ground Conditions to drill a length
greater than 0.8m but not greater than 1m, an expansion test may be carried out.
Drilling or boring to advance the hole to a test location shall be carried out using equipment, techniques
and a flushing medium selected to ensure minimum disturbance to the ground. Provision shall be made
during construction of the borehole for supporting the sides of the borehole by a temporary casing, in
which case it shall not extend beyond the base of the hole. During self-drilling of the pressuremeter the
setting, type and rotational speed of the cutter, type and characteristics of drilling fluid, the drilling fluid

pressure, rate of advance and ram pressure shall be adjusted to ensure minimum disturbance without
causing undue risk of damage to the equipment.
If the orientation of the instrument is to be recorded prior to commencement of self-drilling and before it is
removed from the drilled test pocket it shall be stated in the field report.
The frequency of recording the output from the pore pressure transducers during self-drilling and relaxation
shall be stated in the field report.
In free draining soils, an expansion test shall be commenced as soon as practicably possible following the
completion of self-drilling. In all remaining soils and rocks there shall be a minimum of 30 minutes and a
maximum of one hour between completion of self-drilling and the commencement of the expansion test.
(14) The following procedure shall be used for Self—Boring Pressuremeters Tests.
(a) Strain controlled tests shall be carried out at a constant rate of stress increase during the early
stage of the test until expansion commences and then at a constant rate of strain of 1% per minute,
with one unload-reload loop included in the loading sequence between 1% and 3% total cavity
strain. There shall be a sufficient number of readings taken to define accurately the pressure at
which expansion starts.
(b) Any additional unload-reload loops and any time required to maintain constant pressure or
constant strain before commencement of any unloading shall be stated in the field report.
(c) The pressuremeter shall be pressurised until either the maximum pressure capacity is reached,
or any one of the displacement transducers has reached its full working range or there is undue risk
of damage to the equipment.
(d) The pressuremeter shall be unloaded, both during the unload-reload cycle and the final
unloading at the same rates as the loading stage.
(e) The reduction in stress during any unload-reload loop shall be limited to ensure that it remains
within the elastic range of the ground under test.
(f) The output from the transducers shall be recorded at a minimum frequency of 10 seconds
intervals throughout the test.
(g) The duration of the test shall be no longer than 90 minutes.
(15) The data for each transducer shall be converted to engineering units by applying the calibration
coefficients determined in Type 1 to 3; the applied pressures shall be corrected for membrane stiffness
(Type 4) and if necessary, the calculated cavity strains shall be corrected for membrane compression (Type
5) and thinning (Change in thickness of the membrane due to expansion).
(16) The stiffness from the unload-reload cycle and in the case of high pressure dilatometer test, the initial
stiffness shall be determined using the analyses developed by Palmer (1972) and Windle & Wroth (1977).

(17) The strength shall be determined for clays using the analyses developed by Gibson & Anderson (1961)
and for sands by Hughes, Windle & Wroth (1977).
(18) The horizontal stress (self-boring pressuremeter tests only) shall be determined using the lift off
procedure developed by Wroth (1982).
(19) Any additional data processing and analyses required, including reporting, shall be stated in the field
report.
(20) All information shall be presented on A4 paper with all graphical plots presented at a scale which
sensibly fills the entire A4 page size. Prior to commencing work on site:
(a) Full details of the pressuremeter and testing equipment;

(b) Details of the proposed drilling equipment and flushing medium to be used for pre-drilling holes;
(c) Description of the methods of carrying out all the drilling operations for forming a test pocket;
(d) Details of the experience of the proposed operator and Supervising Engineer;
(e) Typical test data sheets and forms for presenting final results;
21) The following information shall be submitted for each test within one working day of the completion of
that test:
(a) Contract name and number. borehole number, depth of the top and bottom of the test pocket,
depth of the displacement measurement axes;
(b) Names of drilling and testing personnel;
(c) Details of equipment used;
(d) Details of boring, drilling, (and self-drilling if applicable). Including date and time of start and
finish of all drilling. description and estimate of any drilling fluid returns and depth and size of casing
used, if any;
(e) The output from the transducers recorded prior to and during installation and on removal from
the borehole (High pressure dilatometer only);
(f) Tabulated output for the transducers. time of start and finish of test and rates of stress and/or
strain on spreadsheets in EXCEL 2003 or later formats for [SDS18] the test;
(g) The calibrations coefficients used to convert the test data to engineering units;
(h) Tabulated calibrated data on media discs (CD, DVD or Flash Drives) in Spreadsheets in EXCEL
2003 or later versions compatible formats for the test;
(i) A plot of total pressure against cavity strain in % for each displacement transducer (self-boring
pressuremeters) or each opposing pair of displacement transducers (high pressure dilatometer
only);
(j) A plot of total pressure against displacement in mm for each displacement transducer. A plot of
total pressure against rate of change of cavity strain (creep) for each opposing pair of transducers
(high pressure dilatometer only);

(k) A plot of total pressure against cavity strain in % for the initial stage of the test, i.e. up to about
1% cavity strain, for each displacement transducer (self-boring pressuremeters); (I) A plot of total
pressure against cavity strain in % for the unload-reload cycle for each plot given in number 9;
(m) Either a plot of total pressure against natural logarithmic value of volumetric strain, (clays and
rocks), for each plot given in number 9 or a plot of natural logarithmic value of effective pressure
against natural logarithmic value of current cavity strain, (sands) for each plot given in number 9;
(n) A preliminary assessment of the parameters as outlined in the previous section;
(22) The calibrations determined in Clause (8) shall be reviewed by the supervising engineer. The data for
each transducer shall be recalibrated, if required by applying all the appropriate calibration coefficients
determined following this review.
(23) The supervising engineer shall reassess the calibrated data to give the parameters outlined in Clause
(16-18). These, together with the corrected plots, detailed in Clause (21). comprise the definitive
interpretation and presentation of the data for formal reporting purposes.
(24) The information submitted in the report shall be as specified in Clause (21) but incorporating any
amendments resulting from work undertaken in Clause (22).
4.7.6.Pressuremeter Tests
(1) When instructed by the Engineer [CJT19|[SDS20], conventional pressuremeter tests (Menard or OYO
type pressuremeter Tests) shall be carried out in drillholes. The pressuremeter probe, control unit and
tubing shall all be the standard Menard type or other approved by the Engineer. The pressure required to
expand the probe shall be supplied from a bottle of compressed nitrogen. The date of manufacture of the
equipment shall be supplied together with the calibration certificates of all pressure gauges. The calibration
shall be traceable to any internationally recognised accrediting organisation. Calibration of equipment shall
be carried out at the intervals recommended by the manufacturer. The pressuremeter shall be capable of
producing and measuring pressures up to 4MPa.
(2) The stiffness of the new membrane and protective sheaths shall be initially calibrated and recalibrated
for each drillhole or when any water circuit has been subject to a vacuum or sudden pressure release. The
probe must be pre-dilated a minimum of 5 times before calibration to ensure constant stiffness of the
membrane. The coaxial tubing shall also be calibrated before mobilisation to site. The results of the
calibration shall be presented graphically. Prior to a test, the membrane and the sheaths shall be checked
to ensure that they are in good condition and that there are no leaks in the system.
(3) The method of forming the pressuremeter pocket and installing the probe into the pocket shall be to the
approval of the Engineer. The diameter of the prebored hole shall not exceed the probe diameter by more
than 6 mm. The testing probe shall be installed into the prebored hole immediately after the hole is formed.
The drillhole water level shall be maintained at equilibrium with the ground water level throughout the test.
(4) The test shall be carried out according to the recommended procedure for the particular instrument
used. The pressure shall normally be increased in 10 increments of equal magnitude and duration. The

duration of each increment shall be two minutes or as recommended by the manufacturer. The pressure
shall be kept constant for the duration of each increment and volumeter readings shall be taken at 15, 30,
60, 90 and 120 seconds after the application of the pressure. Further readings shall be taken if signi ficant
volume change is still taking place after 2 minutes. The test shall be considered complete when the initial
volume of the cavity has been doubled. or when the pressure capacity of the equipment has been reached.
Cyclic loading shall be carried out when instructed by the Engineer. The differential pressure between the
guard cells and the central cell shall be maintained constant throughout the test.
The field measurements shall be tabulated to give all recorded data including the following:
(a) test depth;

(b) gauge height;
(0) water level;
(d) Common Ground or rock type;
(e) probe diameter ;
(f) hole diameter;
(g) hole forming tool;
(h) pocket length;
(i) membrane type and sheath type;
(j) differential pressure;
(k) date and time;
(I) weather ;
(m) the names of operating and checking personnel
(n) calibration and/or correlation data
(6) The results of pressuremeter tests shall be presented graphically in the form of a net volume versus net
pressure diagram with pressure indicated on the abscissa and volume on the ordinate. Creep volume
(volume at 120 seconds minus volume at 30 seconds) shall be plotted for each increment. The results shall
also include the following information:
(a) Limit Pressure;

(b) Pressuremeter Modulus;
(c) Secant Shear Modulus (initial and for each cycle);
(d) Secant Deformation Modulus (initial and for each cycle)
(7) The pressuremeter test record form is shown in Appendix 6.3. Preliminary results shall be submitted with
the relevant Investigation Station preliminary records. The final test report shall include all calibration
curves.
4.7.7.Field Vane Shear Tests
(1) When instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out field vane shear tests in drillholes. The
tests shall be carried out as specified in BS 1377 (Part 9, Test No. 4.4); amended by this Clause as
necessary.

(2) Vanes capable of measuring shear strengths up to approximately 60 kPa shall be available. The torque
measuring instrument shall be calibrated at the intervals recommended by the manufacturer. The
calibration shall be traceable to any internationally recognised accrediting organisation and a copy of the
most recent certified calibration chart shall be submitted with each set of vane test results and be included
in the Final Field Work Report.
(3) There shall be a pause of 5 minutes after the vane has been advanced to the test depth. The torque
applicator assembly shall then be carefully connected. The vane shall be rotated at a constant rate of
between 0.1 and 0.2 degrees/sec. Readings shall be made at intervals of each 5° rotation and the
maximum torque required to rotate the vane shall be recorded. The vane shall then be rotated rapidly
through 12 revolutions without taking any readings. After a pause of 5 minutes, the test procedure shall then
be repeated in order to obtain the remoulded (disturbed) undrained shear strength.
(4) Preliminary results shall be submitted on the record sheet as shown in Appendix 6.4 with the relevant
Investigation Station preliminary records. Final results of undrained shear strength, corrected for the torque
head calibration curve shall be submitted with the Final Field Work Report on the record sheet shown in
Appendix 6.4. The residual value of undrained shear strength shall be reported for the vane shear test on
remoulded Common Ground.
4.7.8.Piezocone Penetration Tests
(1) The Contractor shall carry out static cone penetration test by using electric piezocone equipment which
operates from the sea/river bed. The electric piezocone equipment shall be capable of measuring tip
resistance, sleeve friction and pore pressure simultaneously. The geometry of the cones and test procedure
shall follow the International Society for Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering (lSSMFE) International
Reference Test Procedure for Cone Penetration Test (CPT) published by the Swedish Geotechnical institute
in connection with the international Conference on Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering in Rio de
Janeiro, Brazil in 1989. The ASTM D5778 (2000) Standard method for performing electronic friction cone
and piezocone penetration testing of soils can also be used with the approval of the Engineer.
(2) The Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary for handling the test apparatus and a reaction
frame of appropriate construction to hydraulically advance the cone into the sea/river bed. The thrust
capacity of the equipment shall be 20 tonnes. The sea/river bed frame shall be suitably weighted and
anchored to provide the necessary reaction.
(3) The cone shall be advanced hydraulically at a steady penetration rate of 20 mm/sec (T5 mm/sec.).
Records at 20 mm interval of side friction, tip resistance. and pore water pressure shall be obtained. The
filter stones shall be fully saturated prior to commencement of testing to avoid erroneous pore pressure
readings and ensure an instantaneous response to changes in pressure. Pore water pressure dissipation
tests may be instructed at certain depths to assess permeability and compressibility of strata. An inclination
measuring device shall be provided if requested by the Engineer.

(4) Cone penetration tests shall be performed using cones and data acquisition systems with an overall
resolution of measured cone resistance of better than ±5kPa. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the
proposed cone and data acquisition equipment is capable of achieving this required resolution.
(5) The sensors of all cones shall be calibrated before, after and if necessary during fieldwork, to ensure that
the overall accuracy of the recorded measurements from all sensors shall not be worse than the following,
whichever is the smaller:
(a) 5% of the measured value;

(b) 1% of the maximum value of the measured resistance in the layer under consideration.
Tests shall terminate at the depth below sea/river bed level instructed by the Engineer, or at a lesser depth
if the capacity of the cone or reaction system is reached even after pro-drilling and attempting to go deeper.
(The PCPTs shall be carried out to refusal with a maximum cone resistance value of 100 MPa. The PCPTs
shall be capable of measuring cone resistance values of up to 100 MPa.). The termination of the PCPTs, if
they are above the required termination depths, shall be instructed by the Engineer.
(7) However, where CPTs are required to be penetrated to greater depths such as down to elevations of -
130 m PWD or to a shallower depth, it will not be possible to simply push the cones from the surface or the
existing riverbed. in such situations it will be necessary to carry out pre-drilling and locate the CPT rods
within the pre—drilled borehole. In such situations, it will be necessary to have special equipment such as
special drill rods. casings and centering devices for the drill rods so that a large axial force can be applied
on them to push the CPT down to the deeper depths.
(8) Two copies of the daily site records shall be submitted to the Engineer in the format as shown in
Appendix 6.5. These records shall be submitted within 3 working days of the completion of the fieldwork to
which they refer. The information required on the daily site records is listed below:
(a) Contractor's name, Contract title, cone penetration test number and co-ordinated position;
(b) Marine craft, equipment type, number, operator, hours worked and test procedure;
(c) Dates of operation, weather and sea/river conditions;
(d) Cone geometry and dimensions with position and dimensions of filter stone;
(e) Capacity of sensors (tip, pore pressure and sleeve friction);
(f) Calibration factors used;
(g) Zero readings of all sensors before and after each test;
(h) Observed wear or damage on tip or sleeve;
(i) Penetration rate;
(j) Any irregularities during testing;
(k) Theoretical effective area of tip and friction sleeve;
(I) Water depth to sea/river bed during test;
(m) Corrections due to tidal variations; if any,
(n) Method of de-airing filter stones.
(0) Cause or criterion for abortion/termination of test

(9) During actual testing the data acquisition system shall allow for real-time inspection and data
acquisition of the measured results both in digital and graphical form. The system shall be adequately
protected from adverse environmental affects, especially humidity, excess temperature change and
external vibration.
(10) For each test the Contractor shall provide the following information on the preliminary records and in
the final report to the approval of the Engineer:
(a) Plot of cone point resistance, qc, versus depth below sea/river bed level;
(b) Plot of local sleeve friction, fs’ versus depth below sea/river bed level;
(c) Plot of pore pressure, (u) versus depth below sea/river bed level;
(d) Plot of friction ratio, fs/qc versus depth below seal river bed level;
(e) Plot of pore pressure ratio (u/qc) versus depth below sea/river bed level;
(f) Plot of net cone resistance (qnet) versus depth below sea/river bed level;
(9) Plot of total cone resistance (qt) versus depth below sea/river bed level.
(h) Plot of normalized dissipation records versus time (if required);
(i) Common Ground profile adjacent to CPT plots, and a contour map based on CPT data;
(j) Copies of all detailed test data including tapes/diskettes/CD/DVD on which the data may be
stored;
(k) Details about the test procedure and cone geometry.
(11) Material and debris dumped on the sea/river bed may result in Continuous Piezocone Penetration
Tests meeting shallow refusal prior to full penetration of the soft marine deposits. If in the reasonable
opinion of the Engineer, shallow refusal of a Continuous Piezocone Penetration test occurs in these
circumstances, the Engineer may instruct the Contractor to relocate the Continuous Piezocone Test
equipment at a further position within a circle of radius of 5 metres centred at the original test position and
repeat the test. Up to three such retests can be instructed at each of the original test positions.
The rate for the move and set up at each Continuous Piezocone Penetration Test position shall include for
repositioning the Continuous Piezocone Penetration Test equipment for up to three retests within a 5 metre
radius of the original test position in the event of shallow test refusal being encountered [SDS21] [CJT22].
The rate for performing a Continuous Piezocone Penetration Test shall be applied to all linear meterage of
cone penetration irrespective of whether the testing has been performed in Continuous Piezocone
Penetration Test that meet shallow refusal.
4.7.9.Rising and Falling Head Permeability Tests
(1) Rising and falling head permeability tests shall be carried out using the apparatus described in
Appendix 6.6. The method of testing shall be in accordance with Appendix 6.7, the drillhole shall be flushed
prior to carry out the test. The type of filter material and sand to be used shall be between 1000mm and
1500mm long and shall consist of sand between the sizes of 200um and 1210pm and shall be placed in the
drillhole using a tremie pipe.

(2) Rising head permeability tests shall be carried out by lowering the water level in the standpipe by
approximately 3 m. The water level in the standpipe shall be allowed to rise to equalise with the ground
water level and the time for each 0.2 m rise in water level shall be recorded.
(3) Falling head permeability tests shall be carried out by raising the water level in the standpipe by
approximately 3 m. The water level in the standpipe shall be allowed to fall to equalise with the ground
water level and the time for each 0.2 m drop in water level shall be recorded.
(4) The method of flushing of the bottom of the hole for field permeability tests shall be as follows:
(a) Clean water shall be introduced to the cased hole through a 38mm diameter pipe fed from a
storage tank. The feed pipe shall contain a perforated section 480 mm in length consisting of 20
rings of holes, at 25 mm centres, each containing 4 holes of 6mm diameter. The complete
perforated section shall be positioned such that it is just below the existing ground water level in the
borehole. The end of the perforated section of pipe shall be capped.
(b) The flushing water shall be withdrawn from the casing through a 38 mm diameter pipe
positioned with its open end between 150 mm and 200 mm above the base of the borehole. The
discharge shall be by means of a pump of sufficient capacity to extract the flushing water from the
base of the borehole. Control of the flow of clean water and discharge water shall be by means of
valves positioned on the inflow pipe and the discharge pipe.
4.7.10. Constant Head Permeability Tests
(1) Constant head permeability tests shall be carried out using the apparatus described in Clause 4.7.9.(1).
Clean water shall be fed into the standpipe at a constant rate and the time for each 0.2 m rise in water level
shall be recorded until either a constant water level is established or until the water level is 0.3 m below the
top of the casing. The constant rate of inflow which is required to maintain a constant head shall be
recorded.
(2) After a constant water level has been achieved as stated by Clause 4.7.10.(1), the cumulative inflow
readings required to maintain the constant head shall be recorded in the following sequence:
(a) 4 readings at 15 second intervals.

(b) 9 readings at 1 minute intervals,
(c) 4 readings at 5 minute intervals. and
(d) readings at 10 minute intervals until two consecutive readings differ by less than 0.5 litre.
4.7.11. Records of In-situ testing
(1) Records of each in-situ test shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site. The permission of the Engineer
shall be obtained before test apparatus is dismantled.
(2) The results of standard penetration tests shall be recorded on drillhole logs as stated in Clauses 4.5.6.
and 4.8.1..

(3) The results of in-situ density tests shall be recorded in a form agreed by the Engineer and shall be
submitted to the Engineer within 24 hours after the test.
(4) The results of flat plate dilatometer tests (Marchetti dilatometer test, DMT) and high pressure dilatometer
(HPD) test shall be recorded as stated in Clauses 4.7.3. and 4.7.4. and shall be submitted to the Engineer
within 3 days after the test. Results of all other tests shall be submitted in as per the stipulated clauses
above or as agreed with the Engineer.
4.8. Reports for Ground Investigation
4.8.1.Reports for ground investigation
(1) Daily records of ground investigation operations shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site and two
copies of the records shall be submitted to the Engineer within 3 days after the ground investigation
operation to which they refer The daily records shall contain the following information in a form agreed by
the Engineer:
(a) Contractor's name, job and contract number, borehole reference number and inclination. site
name, rig type and number, operator, hours worked with times, date, weather, ground level at
borehole and measured water levels in the borehole at various times.
(b) The daily site record shall also include, for each sample, drilling or core run for each test,
installation or strata encountered, the following where applicable:
 start and finish depths below ground level.
 start and finish times,
 casing diameter and depth,
 bit number and type,
 sample reference number and type,
 SPT test result in number of blows recorded,
 percentage water returns and core recovery.
 a description of the soil and rock strata or sample,
 a description of field tests or instruments installed.
(2) A final report on ground investigation operations shall be prepared by the Contractor and shall be
submitted to the Engineer within 15 days after all comments on the preliminary drillhole logs have been
received from the Engineer. The report shall contain the drillhole logs and test records.
4.9. Laboratory Testing
4.9.1.General
All laboratory tests shall be carried out in accordance with the applicable test method, definition and
method of practice contained in relevant sections of American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
Book of Standards, Volume 04.08 & Volume 04.09, 2002. Soil and Rock (I & II), BS 5930 and BS 1377 together

with any of its Corrigenda which are in force, or other international codes shall be adopted as indicated in
Bangladesh National Building Code(BNBC) and in the Bangladesh Roads and Highways Department
(RHD) Standards.
4.9.2.Requirements on Accreditation from Internationally Recognised Accrediting Organisation
The Contractor shall be accredited under any internationally recognised accrediting organisation for all
tests. Accreditation of the tests shall be in accordance with BSl377z1990 together with any of its Corrigenda
which are in force. The full scope of accreditation shall be maintained at all times. The Contractor shall
produce any internationally recognised organisation's certificates. The Contractor shall seek accreditation
from the internationally accrediting organisation and provide the Organisation's endorsed test certificates
for any other tests order as soon as accreditation for such tests are available from the accrediting
organisation.
4.9.3.Tests
4.9.3.1. Moisture Content Tests
Moisture content determinations shall comply with the requirements of BS 1377: Part 2.
4.9.3.2. Bulk density test
Bulk density determinations shall comply with BS 1377: Part 2, Test 7. The length, diameter and mass of the
specimen shall be measured to an accuracy enabling the bulk density to be presented to ±1.0%.
4.9.3.3. Particle size distribution
Particles size distribution shall be carried out in accordance with the recommended procedures described
in clause 9.4.6.1 of BS 1377: Part 2. If the sample tested after wet sieving contains more than 10% by weight
of particles finer than 63pm, then sedimentation analysis has to be performed. A continuous particle size
distribution curve has to be constructed from the results of wet sieving and sedimentation tests.
4.9.3.4. Atterberg Limits
When PSD results are available on a sample for which Atterberg Limits tests have been instructed. the
plastic and liquid limit tests shall only be carried out if more than 15% of the material has passed through
the 63pm sieve. unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer. The Atterberg Limit Tests shall be carried out
in accordance with the recommended procedures described in clause 9.4.6.1 of BS 1377: Part 2.
4.9.3.5. Specific Gravity Tests
Specific gravity determinations shall be according to Small Pyknometer Method (Test Clause 8.3 of BS
1377: Part 2), except that the oven drying of the sample shall be conducted at 105°C.t5°C., unless otherwise
instructed by the Engineer. Tests shall be conducted using distilled water as the test liquid.

4.9.3.6. Mica content test
Mica content test shall be carried out in accordance with ASTM D295.
4.9.3.7. Chemical Tests
The following chemical tests may be assigned:
(a) Total sulphate content of soil, and the sulphate content of groundwater and of aqueous soil
extracts by gravimetric method in accordance with the requirements of Clause 8 of BS 1377: Part 3.
(b) Chloride content of soil and groundwater in accordance with Clause 7 of BS 1377: Part 3.
(c) pH value of soil or groundwater according to Clause 9 of BS 1377: Part 3 - with AMD 9028).
(d) Carbonate content of soil in accordance with Clause 6 of BS 1377: Part 3.
(e) Organic matter content of soil in accordance with Clause 3 of BS 1377: Part 3.
(f) Presence of sulphide and hydrogen sulphide using an approved detection and analysis device.
4.9.3.8. Resistivity test by disc electrodes method and open container method
Resistivity test shall comply with Clause 10 of BS 1377: Part 3.
4.9.3.9. Redox potential tests
Redox Potential tests shall comply with Clause 11 of BS 1377: Part 3.
4.9.3.10.Direct Shear Tests on re-constituted and Undisturbed Soil Samples
Consolidated drained (CD) direct shear tests shall be carried out in accordance with Clause 4 of BS 1377:
Part 7 (with AMD 8262) with the following modifications: All tests shall be carried out in an area free from
significant vibrations and other mechanical disturbance. The temperature variation during any test shall not
exceed 8°C, and the temperature at any time during a test shall be between 15°C and 28°C. The apparatus
shall be sited away from the effects of local sources of heat, direct sunlight and draught.
Clause 7 of BS 1377: Part 1 shall be followed in preparing and forming compacted soil specimen for the
test. Thereafter the trimming and setting up of soil specimen into the shear box shall follow Clause 4.4.2 of
BS 1377: Part 7 as if it was an undisturbed soil.
4.9.3.11.One Dimensional Compression l Consolidation Tests
One dimensional compression tests and consolidation tests shall be carried out as per the BS 1377: Part 6
on both reconstituted and undisturbed samples.
4.9.3.12.Triaxial Compression Tests
The Contractor may be required to conduct the following triaxial tests on the soil specimens:
(a) UUtest: Unconsolidated undrained tests without the measurement of pore water pressure.
(b) CU test: Consolidated undrained tests with the measurement of pore water pressure.

(c) CD test: Consolidated drained tests with the measurement of volume change.
Specimens for CD and CU tests shall normally be saturated by the application of back pressure.
Triaxial testing will generally be single stage tests. However, if the volume of sample is limited multi-stage
testing will be instructed by the Engineer. The size of the specimen to be tested will generally be 76mm or
100mm nominal diameter.
Unless specified otherwise, all triaxial tests shall be based upon BS 1377: Part 7 or the "Manual of Soil
Laboratory Testing, Volume 3, Effective Stress Tests" by K H Head, Second Edition (1998).
4.9.3.13.Continuity of testing
Except with the Engineer’s written approval, the complete procedures of any test must be carried out in one
continuous operations without any interruption including any caused by meal time break or holiday.
4.9.4.Laboratory test results
The Contractor shall submit, to the Engineer 2 copies of all test results within 3 days of completion of each
test and 2 copies of draft laboratory test report shall be submitted within one week of completion of a
testing schedule issued by the Engineer. The draft laboratory test report should contain full details of each
test together with a summary sheet or sheets tabulating the results of the tests undertaken on each sample.
4.9.5.Laboratory report
The Contractor shall submit, within 4 weeks after receiving the final Laboratory Test Schedule from the
Engineer, 4 copies of a bound Laboratory Report and two sets of CD-ROM containing data in AGS Digital
Format or similar approved by the Engineer. The report will contain all the information gained from the
testing programme and such introductory pages and summary sheets as are necessary.
4.10. Grouting for Geotechnical Works Glossary of Terms
4.10.1. Ground
Ground, for the purpose of grouting for geotechnical works, is fill material, soil and rock and the interfaces
between fill material, soil and rock and any structures.
4.10.2. Grout
Grout, for the purpose of grouting for geotechnical works, is cement grout, cement-sand grout, cement-
bentonite grout and proprietary grout approved by the Engineer.
4.10.3. Grouting
Grouting, for the purpose of grouting for geotechnical works, is the mixing and injection of grout through
predrilled or preformed holes.

4.10.4. Grouting stage
Grouting stage, for the purpose of grouting for geotechnical works, is the discrete length of drillhole into
which grout is to be injected in a continuous operation.
4.10.5. Lugeon
Lugeon is a water loss of 1 litre per minute per metre length of hole tested at an effective pressure of 1 MPa.
4.11. Materials
4.11.1. Materials for Grout
Materials for grout shall comply with Section 16 except as stated in this Section.
4.11.2. Grout for geotechnical works
(1) Cement grout for geotechnical works shall consist of OPC, sand and water. Admixtures shall not be
used unless permitted by the Engineer.
(2) Sand for grout shall be clean dry sand complying with BS 1200 and shall have a particle size distribution
such that 100% passes a 2 mm BS test sieve and not more than 30% passes a 0.2 mm BS test sieve.
(3) Water for grout shall be clean fresh water having a temperature not exceeding 30° C or less than 5° C.
(4) Cement grout shall have a minimum crushing strength of 30 MPa at 28 days.
(5) The amount of bleeding of grout shall not exceed 0.5% by volume 3 hours after mixing or 1.0%
maximum when measured at 23±1.7°C in a covered glass or metal cylinder of 100 mm internal diameter
and with a grout depth of approximately 100mm. In addition, the water shall be reabsorbed by the grout
within 24 hours.
(6) The flow cone efflux time of grout shall not be less than 15 seconds.
4.11.3. Standpipes
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer standpipes for grouting shall be standard black metal pipe
complying with BS EN 10255.
4.11.4. Particulars of grouting for geotechnical works
(1) The following particulars of the proposed materials and methods of construction for grouting for
geotechnical works shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a) details of drilling, grouting and testing equipment,

(b) details of grout mix, including admixtures,
(c) methods of storing, mixing and injecting grout,

(d) methods of drilling, cleaning, capping and sealing grout holes,

(e) methods of grouting, including grouting stages, order of working and regrouting methods, and
(f) methods of controlling surface water, groundwater, leakage and ground movement, including
methods of monitoring and instrumentation.
(2) The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 28 days before grouting starts.
4.11.5. Trials for grouting
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer a grouting trial shall be carried out. The extent and depth of
holes for grouting trials and the tests to be carried out shall be as stated in the Contract.
4.12. Drilling for Grouting for Geotechnical Works
4.12.1. Drilling for grouting for geotechnical works
(1) Holes in soil for grouting for geotechnical works shall be drilled using rotary or percussion type drills.
The tolerance for the holes shall be as stated in Clause 4.5.3.(1). Grease and other lubricants shall not be
used in the flushing medium or on the rods, except around the threads at the ends of the rods. Drilling
methods which result in drill cuttings causing blockages such that grouting cannot be performed
satisfactorily shall not be used.
(2) The flushing medium for drilling shall be clean water or air accompanied by the operation of an effective
dust extraction and filtering device.
(3) The minimum size of hole for grouting in rock shall be 40 mm.
(4) The location of all underground obstructions and utilities shall be determined by the Contractor before
drilling starts and the drilling pattern shall take account of the location of obstructions and utilities.
(5) Casings required to prevent the collapse of grout holes shall be as stated in Clause 4.5.2. and 4.5.3..
Casings shall be removed immediately before or simultaneously with the grouting or sleeve grouting
operation in such a manner that the grout hole will not collapse and the injection of grout will not be
hindered.
6) Grout holes shall be flushed clean with water or compressed air introduced at the bottom of the hole
after drilling is complete. The holes shall be protected with capping pipes or standpipes to prevent
subsequent collapse or clogging after flushing.
(7) Grout holes which have been drilled more than one day before grouting of the hole starts shall be
reflushed with water or compressed air immediately before grouting is commenced and excess flushing
water shall be removed by air jet. Holes drilled in soft ground or in ground other than rock and in which
sleeve grouts are proposed as part of the grouting operation shall be sleeve grouted as soon as practicable
after drilling.

4.12.2. Standpipes and capping pipes
(1) Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, grout holes shall be capped after drilling and before
grouting. Capping shall be by a suitably sealed grout connection, standpipe, packer or other methods
agreed by the Engineer. The cap shall seal the hole to prevent contamination or clogging of the hole until
grouting operations start.
(2) Standpipes, if stated in the Contract, shall be installed in holes after drilling. The pipe shall be sealed into
the hole using cement grout consisting of OPC and water in the proportions 1:1 by volume.
4.13. Grouting for Geotechnical Works
4.13.1. Monitoring of grouting operations
(1) Monitoring of grouting operations shall be implemented whenever grouting operations are carried out in
close proximity of utilities, structures and buildings, and as requested by the Engineer.
(2) Instrumentation shall be installed to monitor heave, bulging, settlement, lateral movement, deformation
or fracturing of the ground or structures due to grouting operations. Records of monitoring shall be kept by
the Contractor on the Site and a copy provided for the Engineer. Arrangements for installing instruments
and taking measurements inside and outside the Site shall be made by the Contractor.
(3) The accuracy of the instruments shall be checked before grouting starts and at regular intervals agreed
by the Engineer.
4.13.2. Grouting equipment
(1) Grouting equipment for geotechnical works shall be a type, quantity and size suitable for the grouting
required; the equipment shall be kept clean and in good working order.
(2) Standby grouting equipment shall be available at all times and shall be capable of being brought into
operation immediately in the event of breakdowns during grouting operations.
(3) Grout mixers shall be high speed colloidal mixers having a rotor speed of at least 1000r/min and
capable of producing a colloidal grout mix. Mixers shall be fitted with a water volume measuring device for
batching purposes.
(4) Holding tanks shall be fitted with an agitator to provide continuous agitation of the grout at 100 r/min.
The tank shall be fitted with a dipstick to allow continuous measurement of the volume of grout in the tank.
A 2.36mm removable screen shall be provided between the tank and the pump or grout lines.
(5) Grout pumps shall be a positive displacement type. Pumps shall be fitted with bypass valves to allow a
standby pump to be brought into operation.

(6) Working pressure gauges shall be accurate to within 3% and shall be calibrated against a test gauge
before grouting starts and at weekly intervals. A test gauge with accompanying calibration certificates shall
be kept on the Site for the purpose of calibrating working gauges. Working gauges shall be numbered and
a record shall be kept of gauge number, shifts worked, calibration dates and repairs undertaken; records
shall be kept on the Site and shall be available for inspection by the Engineer at all times.
(7) Packers shall be such that they seal holes at the specified level and shall be capable of withstanding the
maximum grout or water pressure to be used at that level without leakage. Packers may be of the
mechanical or inflatable rubber type. A sufficient number of packers of a size to suit the holes shall be
available on the Site.
4.13.3. Mixing grout
(1) Grout for geotechnical works shall be mixed by volume. The mix proportions may be adjusted if
approved by the Engineer depending on the results of the trial grouting. water tests in the hole or the results
of previously grouted holes.
(2) Grout shall be mixed by adding approximately two-thirds of the cement to the water, adding any
admixture and adding the remaining one-third of cement. Other mixing procedures shall not be used
(3) The time for which grout shall be mixed in high speed mixers shall be suitable for the type of mixer used.
Grout shall be continuously agitated in a holding tank after mixing and shall be screened before being
circulated in the grout lines. Mixed grout shall be continuously circulated in such a manner that grout which
is not taken in a hole can be returned to the holding tank.
(4) Grout to which a retarding agent has not been added, and which is not used within 30 minutes after
mixing, shall not be used for grouting.
4.13.4. Grouting for geotechnical works
(1) Ground other than rock shall be grouted in such a manner that grout can be injected at various points
along the grout hole in a multi-stage operation. The grouting method shall employ perforated pipes with
rubber sleeve valves unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
(2) Grouting pressures shall initially be 100 kPa per 4 metre depth of hole and shall not exceed the
overburden pressure unless permitted by the Engineer.
(3) Holes shall be grouted in a continuous operation at the grouting stages and pressures stated in the
Contract. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer grouting shall be carried out by injecting the grout
under pressure into each grouting stage of the hole until the grouting stage refuses to take further grout.
(4) If in the opinion of the Engineer grouting of any hole or grouting stage has not been completed due to
excessive grout takes, low pressures, excessive leakage or other causes, the hole shall be redrilled or
flushed out with water and re-injected with grout.

4.13.5. Loss or leakage of grout
(1) If during the grouting of any hole, grout is found to flow from adjacent grout holes in quantities which in
the opinion of the Engineer are sufficient to interfere seriously with the grouting operation or to cause
appreciable loss of grout. the holes shall be temporarily capped. if in the opinion of the Engineer capping is
not essential, ungrouted holes shall be left open to allow air and water to escape.
(2) If during the grouting of any hole grout is found to flow from joints in the geological formation at the Site
or any other location, the leaks shall be plugged or caulked in a manner agreed by the Engineer.
(3) If during the grouting of any hole the grout take increases suddenly by a significant amount, the
Engineer shall be informed immediately.
4.13.6. Making good drillholes used for Grouting [MD23] ]SDS24]
(1) Grout holes through concrete shall be made good [MD25] using [SDS26] concrete agreed by the
Engineer; the concrete shall be firmly compacted and shall be finished to match the adjacent surface.
(2) Uncapped holes shall be topped up after grouting using cement grout consisting of OPC and water in
the proportions 1:1 by volume, or 1:3 cement sand mortar.
4.13.7. Records of grouting for geotechnical works
(1) Records of grouting for geotechnical works shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site and shall be
available for inspection by the Engineer at all times. Records shall include the following details:
(a) hole location and reference number,

(b) depth of hole,
(0) type of grout and grout mix proportions,
(d) volume of grout injected,
(e) grouting pressures, and
(f) times and details of any interruptions, leakages and equipment malfunctions.
(2) A record of grouting for each hole shall be submitted to the Engineer within 24 hours after completion of
grouting of the hole. The record shall contain the following details:

(b) grouting stage numbers and lengths.
(c) collar level and hole inclination,
(d) details of grout injections including the information stated in Clause 4.13.7., and
(e) details of the grouting procedure, including any stoppages, leaks to other holes, surface leaks
and ground movement.
(3) A record of the testing for each hole, including test results, shall be submitted to the Engineer within 24
hours after completion of testing of a hole. Records of Packer tests shall contain the following details:

(b) depth of packer in the hole,

(c) date and time of test,
(d) type of gauge or meter and identifying reference number.
(e) test readings for each 5 minute period,
(f) calculated test results in Lugeons, and
(g) details of any equipment malfunctions, sudden water losses or blockages. surface leakage or
other variations in test procedure.
(4) A report of grouting for each part of the Works as stated in the Contract, including record drawings and
logs of holes, shall be submitted to the Engineer within one week after completion and testing of grouting
for that part of the Works. The form of records. logs and record drawings shall be as agreed by the
Engineer.
4.14. Testing : Grout — General Requirements
4.14.1. Batch: grout for geotechnical works
A batch of grout for geotechnical works is any quantity of grout used for grouting geotechnical works in one
continuous operation in one day.
4.15. Testing : Grout - Bleeding
4.15.1. Samples: bleeding of grout
(1 ) One sample of grout shall be provided from each batch of grout for geotechnical works to determine
the amount of bleeding of the grout.
(2) Samples shall be provided not more than 30 minutes after the grout has been mixed and shall be
protected from moisture content changes before the tests for amount of bleeding are carried out.
4.15.2. Testing: bleeding of grout
(1) Each sample of grout taken as stated in Clause 4.15.1. shall be divided into three specimens; each
specimen shall be tested to determine the amount of bleeding.
(2) Grout for geotechnical works shall be tested for bleeding in accordance with BS 1881.
4.15.3. Non-compliance: bleeding of grout
If the result of any test for amount of bleeding of grout for geotechnical works does not comply with the
specified requirements for amount of bleeding. particulars of proposed changes to the materials, grout mix
or methods of production shall be submitted to the Engineer; further grouting trials shall be carried out
unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.

4.16. Testing : Grout — Flow Cone Efflux Time
4.16.1. Samples: flow cone efflux time of grout
One sample of grout shall be provided from each batch of grout for geotechnical works to determine the
flow cone efflux time of the grout.
4.16.2. Testing: flow cone efflux time of grout
Each sample of grout taken as stated in Clause 4.16.1. shall be tested to determine the flow cone efflux
time. The method of testing shall be in accordance with ASTM 0939.
4.16.3. Non-compliance: flow cone efflux time of grout
If the result of any test for flow cone efflux time of grout does not comply with the specified requirements for
flow cone efflux time, particulars of proposed changes to the materials, grout mix or methods of production
shall be submitted to the Engineer; further grouting trials shall be carried out unless otherwise permitted by
the Engineer.
4.17. Testing : Grout — Crushing Strength
4.17.1. Samples: crushing strength of grout
(1) One sample of grout shall be provided from each batch of grout for geotechnical works to determine the
crushing strength of the grout.
(2) Samples shall be provided not more than one hour after the grout has been mixed and shall be
protected from moisture content changes before test cubes are made.
4.17.2. Testing: crushing strength of grout
(1) Nine 100 mm test cubes shall be made from each sample of grout taken as stated in Clause 4.17.1..
Three test cubes shall be tested to determine the crushing strength at 3 days, three test cubes shall be
tested to determine the crushing strength at 7 days and three test cubes shall be tested to determine the
crushing strength at 28 days.
(2) The method of making. curing and testing the test cubes shall be as stated in Section 8. - Concrete and
Joints in Concrete.
4.17.3. Non-compliance: crushing strength of grout
If the result of any test for crushing strength of grout for geotechnical works does not comply with the
specified requirements for grout, particulars of proposed changes to the materials, grout mix or method of

production shall be submitted to the Engineer; further trial mixes shall be made and further grouting trials
shall be carried out unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
4.18. Testing : Packer Tests on Drillholes for Grouting and Grouted Drillholes
4.18.1. Testing: Packer tests
(1) The water loss from drillholes for grouting and from grouted and regrouted drillholes shall be
determined by the Packer test.
(2) The number of drillholes for grouting to be tested to determine the water loss shall be as instructed by
the Engineer.
(3) Every grouted drillhole and every regrouted drillhole shall be tested to determine the water loss.
(4) Packer tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS 5930. Chapter 21.5 and Clause 4.18.(5) to (8).
(5) Tests shall be carried out using clean water, in grouting stages not exceeding 3 m in length. The rate of
flow of water in the test shall be determined to an accuracy of 10% for flows exceeding 1 l/min.
(6) The test pressure shall be equal to the overburden pressure and shall not exceed the specified
maximum grouting pressure for the grouting stage being tested.
(7) The test shall be carried out between a packer and the base of the hole for grouting stages at the base
of a hole and shall be carried out between two packers in other cases.
(8) The test shall be carried out by pumping water at the specified pressure into the grouting stage being
tested and measuring with a volume meter the water loss over three consecutive 10 minute periods. The
result shall be calculated in Lugeons for each 10 minute period.
4.18.2. Compliance criteria: Packer tests
The water loss determined by the Packer test in the grouted hole shall not exceed 5 Lugeons when
measured over a 10 minute period.
4.18.3. Non-compliance: Packer test on drillholes for grouting
If the result of any Packer test on drillholes for grouting does not comply with the speci fied requirements for
the test, the drillhole shall be grouted. re-drilled and retested. Grouting, re-drilling and retesting shall
continue until the result of the Packer test complies with the specified requirements for the test.
4.18.4. Non-compliance: Packer test on grouted and regrouted drillholes
If the result of any Packer test on grouted drillholes or regrouted drillholes does not comply with the
specified requirements for the test, the grout shall be removed and the drillhole shall be regrouted and

retested. Removal of grout. regrouting and retesting shall continue until the result of the Packer test
complies with the specified requirements for the test.
4.19. Groundwater Drainage and Control : Glossary of Terms
4.19.1. Caisson drain
Caisson drain is an excavated vertical shaft, with or without raking drains, to provide drainage by
intercepting and lowering the groundwater level in the vicinity.
4.19.2. Geotextile filter
Geotextile filter is a permeable sheet of synthetic material used like a granular filter for filtration and in-plane
drainage.
4.19.3. Filter pipe
Filter pipe is a perforated or non-perforated pipe used for draining groundwater.
4.19.4. Granular filter
Granular filter is a graded sand or gravel placed against a soil to prevent the migration of fine particles out
of the soil caused by water flow, and graded such that free discharge of water flowing into the filter is
allowed.
4.19.5. Prefabricated band drain
Prefabricated band drain is a synthetic drain which, when installed in a soil strata, acts as a drainage
medium for dissipation of pore water pressure.
4.19.6. Raking drain
Raking drain is a drillhole, with or without perforated filter pipes and geotextile filter sheath, installed
generally at an upward inclination for groundwater lowering by gravity flow.
4.19.7. Relief drain
Relief drain is a synthetic drain installed on slope surfaces or in excavations to divert water seepage before
applying sprayed concrete, chunam [CJT27], masonry [SDS28] dentition or other construction.
4.19.8. Trench drain
Trench drain is a trench wholly or partly filled with granular material or clean crushed rock, with or without
filter pipes and geotextile filter.

4.20. Groundwater Drainage and Control : Materials
4.20.1. Granular filter material
Granular filter material for granular filter, trench drains and caisson drains shall consist of durable, inert,
natural material free from clay, organic material and other impurities. Granular filter material shall have the
particle size distribution stated in the Contract.
4.20.2. Geotextile filter
Geotextile filter shall be a proprietary type approved by the Engineer and shall have the properties stated in
the Contract.
4.20.3. Filter pipes
(1) Filter pipes shall comply with the following:
Precast concrete pipes BS 5911

Vitrified clay pipes BS 65
DI pipes BS EN 545
Steel pipes BS EN 10224
Porous concrete pipes BS 1194
Perforated concrete pipes BS 5911
Pitch fibre pipes BS 2760
UPVC pipes BS 4660 or BS EN ISO 15493
Corrugated polyethylene tubing AASHTO Designation M252
(2) class O UPVC pipes shall not be used.
(3) The perforations in perforated pipes shall be cleanly cut and shall be uniformly spaced along the length
and circumference of the pipe.
(4) UPVC plastic pipes shall be jointed by couplers.
4.20.4. Raking drains
(1) Type O raking drains shall be unlined raking drains; drain holes shall be at least 40 mm diameter.
(2) Type 1 raking drains shall be single pipe raking drains consisting of a single perforated pipe with a non-
perforated invert.
(3) Type 2 raking drains shall be single pipe raking drains consisting of a single perforated pipe with a non-
perforated invert and enclosed within a geotextile filter sheath.
(4) Type 3 raking drains shall be double pipe raking drains consisting of an outer permanent pipe and an
inner removable pipe enclosed within a geotextile filter sheath; the outer and inner pipes shall be perforated
pipes with a non-perforated invert.

(5) Pipes for raking drains shall be as stated in Clause 4.20.3.(1) and (2); the openings and slots in pipes
with non-perforated inverts shall cover approximately two-thirds of the circumference of the pipe.
(6) Geotextile filter sheaths for raking drains shall be formed of woven or non-woven geotextile filter
complying with Clause 4.20.2..
4.20.5. Fill material for trench drains
(1) Fill material to be used with geotextile filter in trench drains shall be clean crushed rock. Type A and
Type B fill material shall have the particle size distributions stated in Table 4 -7.
(2) Fill material passing a 425 um BS test sieve shall be non-plastic.
(3) The D15 particle size of Type A fill material for use with perforated pipes shall be at least 15% larger than
twice the maximum dimension of the perforations, where D15 is the equivalent sieve size in millimetres,
interpolated from the particle size distribution curve. through which 15% of the fill material would pass.
Table 4- 7 – Particle size distribution of fill material for trench drains
Type of fill Percentage by mass passing BS test sieve

material 63 mm 37.5 mm 20 mm 10 mm 3.35 mm 600 μm 63 μm
Type A - 100 - 45-100 25-80 8-25 0-5
Type B 100 85-100 0-20 0-5 - - -
4.20.6. Caisson liners
Caisson liners shall be concrete tapered rings at least 100 mm thick and not exceeding 1 m deep. The
liners shall be constructed with well-compacted concrete of Grade 20/20 or greater.
4.20.7. Prefabricated band drains
(1) Prefabricated band drains shall consist of a core and a filter. The drains may be manufactured as a
single unit or the filter may be wrapped around the core, and overlapped and sealed to contain the core.
The drains shall be made from chemically treated paper, polyethylene. polyester, polyolefine or other
synthetic material or combination of such materials.
(2) Prefabricated band drains shall be provided with an outer casing or mandrel of rhomboidal or
rectangular cross section for use during installation. The drains shall also be provided with an anchor to
ensure embedment of the drain during extraction of the mandrel.
(3) The strength of the materials in prefabricated band drains shall be such that the drains will withstand all
forces resulting from handling and installation.
(4) The filter jacket for prefabricated band drains shall be a type which:
(a) has been previously proved effective under similar soil and pressure conditions,

(b) is in all cases able to prevent excessive migration of soil particles into the core, and
(c) has a permeability not less than that of the surrounding soil.
(5) Prefabricated band drains shall be able to conform to soil deformation without buckling or crimping of
the core.
4.21. Groundwater Drainage and Control : Submissions
4.21.1. Particulars of granular filters
(1) The following particulars of the proposed materials and methods of construction for granular filters shall
be submitted to the Engineer:
(a) whether granular filter material is to be supplied ready mixed or is to be mixed on the Site,
(b) source of supply, including name of supplier of ready mixed material,
(c) quantity of each constituent if the material is to be mixed on the Site.
(d) Constructional Plant and methods of mixing for material mixed on the Site,
(e) method of storage and location of storage areas on the Site,
(f) methods of deposition and compaction of material, and
(g) results of three tests for particle size distribution of the fill material against which the
granular filter is to be placed.
(2) The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 14 days before deposition of
granular filter material starts.
4.21.2. Particulars of geotextile filter
(1) The following particulars of the proposed materials and methods of construction for geotextile filter shall
(a) manufacturer's name and source of supply,

(b) details of geotextile filter including manufacturer's literature.
(c) a certificate for the geotextile filter showing the manufacturer's name, the date and place of
manufacture and showing that the geotextile filter complies with the requirements stated in the
Contract, and including results of tests stated in the Contract,
(d) calculations showing that the geotextile filter complies with the filtration characteristics stated in
the Contract,
(e) details of previous uses of the geotextile filter.
(f) details of quantities to be supplied in each delivery,
(g) method of storage,
(h) methods of cutting and jointing geotextile filter,
(i) method of repairing small batches, and
(j) methods of laying and holding in position.

(2) The particulars, including certificates, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 28 days
before the first delivery of the geotextile filter to the Site. Certificates shall be submitted for each batch of
geotextile filter delivered to the Site.
4.21.3. Particulars of trench
(1) The following particulars of the proposed materials and methods of construction for trench drains shall
(a) method of excavation of trench and installation of geotextile filter,

(b) details of granular fill material as stated in Clause 4.20.5., and
(c) details of geotextile filter as stated in Clause 4.21.2..
(2) The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 14 days before installation of
trench drains starts.
4.21.4. Particulars of raking drains
(1) The following particulars of the proposed materials and methods of construction for raking drains shall
(a) method of connecting adjacent sections of pipes,

(b) proportions of sealant mix, and
(c) details of geotextile filter sheath.
raking drains starts.
4.21.5. Particulars of relief drains
(1) The following particulars of the proposed materials and methods of construction for relief drains shall be
(a) details of relief drains and outlets, and

(b) method of fixing relief drains to the slope face.
(2) The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 14 days before fixing of relief
drains starts.
4.21.6. Particulars of caisson drains
(1) The following particulars of the proposed materials and methods of construction for caisson drains shall
(a) methods of excavation and installation and removal of caisson liners,

(b) method of compaction of fill material,
(c) details of granular filter material as stated in Clause 4.21.1., and
(d) details of geotextile filter as stated in Clause 4.21.2..

(2) The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 14 days before construction of
caisson drains starts.
4.21.7. Particulars of prefabricated band drains
(1) The following particulars of the proposed materials and methods of construction for prefabricated band
drains shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a) details of type of drain, including manufacturer's literature,

(b) a certificate showing the manufacturer's name. the date and place of manufacture and showing
that the drains comply with the requirements stated in the Contract,
(c) details of previous installations by the Contractor using similar drains,
(d) method of installation. and
(e) details of installation mandrel, drain anchor, method of penetration and method of recording
depth of installation.
prefabricated band drains starts.
4.21.8. Particulars of filter pipes
(1) The following particulars of the proposed materials and methods of construction for filter pipes shall be
(a) details of type of pipes, including manufacturer's literature,

(b) a certificate showing the manufacturer‘s name, the date and place of manufacture and
showing that the pipes comply with the requirements stated in the Contract,
(c) details of previous installations by the Contractor using similar pipes, and
(d) method of installation.
(2) The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 28 days before installation of the
filter pipes starts.
4.21.9. Particulars of groundwater control, drawdown and monitoring
(1) The following particulars of the proposed materials and methods of construction for groundwater
control. drawdown and monitoring shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a) Constructional Plant and materials for dewatering,

(b) timing and sequence of dewaten'ng operations,
(c) details of silt traps,
(d) methods of monitoring flow rates and volumes of silt, including monitoring intervals, and
(e) methods and locations for discharging groundwater.
(2) The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer for information at least 14 days before the relevant
work starts.

4.21.10. Samples of materials
Samples of the following proposed materials shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval of the source
and type of each material at the same time as particulars of the material are submitted:
(a) granular filter material,

(b) geotextile filter and two pieces of geotextile filter joined in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations for each type of joint, and
(c) relief drains.
4.22. Groundwater Drainage and Control : Handling, Delivery and Storage of Materials
4.22.1. Handling and storage of granular filter material
(1) Granular filter material shall not be handled or stored in a manner which will result in mixing of the
different types and sizes or in segregation, contamination, deterioration or erosion of the material.
(2) Stockpiles of granular filter material shall be placed on well-drained, prepared areas and shall be
separated by dividing walls of sufficient height to keep the different materials separate.
4.22.2. Delivery and storage of geotextile filter
(1) Geotextile filter shall be delivered in secure wrappings to ensure that the geotextile filter is dry and
protected from damage, contamination and exposure to conditions which may adversely affect it.
(2) Geotextile filter shall be stored on a level surface and shall be kept in a secure and dry condition, which
will not result in damage to the fabric or in contamination of the fabric.
4.22.3. Storage of filter pipes
Coils of plastic tubing for filter pipes shall be stored flat.
4.22.4. Delivery and storage of prefabricated band drains
(1) Prefabricated band drains shall be supplied in rolls, securely packed in light-proof wrappings.
(2) Prefabricated band drains shall be stored in a clean. dry environment.
4.23. Granular Filters
4.23.1. Mixing granular filter material
Granular filter material shall be thoroughly mixed by the method approved by the Engineer. Material which
has been stockpiled shall be remixed before deposition.

4.23.2. Deposition and compaction of granular filter material
(1) Granular filter material shall be deposited and compacted as stated in Section 2. of this Specification
[SDS29].
(2) Granular filter material shall be deposited in a manner which will not result in segregation or
contamination of the material.
(3) Granular filter material shall be deposited in such a manner that a continuous free draining zone is
formed. The surface of each layer shall be cleaned and scarified before the next layer is deposited unless
otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
4.24. Geotextile Filter
4.24.1. Damage to geotextile filter
(1) The total period for which geotextile filter is exposed to daylight or other sources of ultra-violet radiation
during handling, delivery, storage and installation shall not exceed 7 days.
(2) Geotextile filter which has been damaged or exposed to daylight or other sources of ultra-violet radiation
for longer than the period stated in Clause 4.24.1. shall not be used in the permanent work unless permitted
by the Engineer.
(3) Repairs to geotextile filter which has been torn or damaged during installation shall be carried out using
a patch of the same material extending at least 300 mm beyond the edge of the damaged area. Repairs
shall not be carried out on geotextile filter which has been damaged during storage or storage before
installation.
4.24.2. Laying geotextile filter
(1) Geotextile filter shall be installed in such a manner that the individual yarns, webs or layers of the fabric
retain their intended orientation and relative positions with respect to each another.
(2) Geotextile filter shall be installed, cut and jointed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
(3) Laps in sheets of fabric reinforcement which are not stated in the Contract to be jointed shall be at least
300 mm.
4.24.3. Protection of geotextile filter
Constructional Plant and other vehicles shall not operate on installed geotextile filter unless in the opinion of
the Engineer it is adequately protected by a cover of fill material or other means agreed by the Engineer.

4.24.4. Records of geotextile filter
Records of installation of geotextile filter shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site and a copy shall be
submitted to the Engineer each day. Records shall contain the following details:
(a) identification of structures and sections of work where geotextile filter is installed,
(b) type of geotextile filter, including identification of batch,
(c) date of first exposure of geotextile filter to ultra-violet radiation before installation,
(d) type of joint, amount of overlap, method of holding in place and any repairs to geotextile filter
carried out during installation,
(e) date of installation of geotextile filter, and
(f) date of final covering of geotextile filter.
4.25. Raking Drains
4.25.1. Installation of raking drains
(1) The length of raking drains assembled before installation shall not exceed 12.5 m. Connections between
adjacent pipes shall be secured in such a manner that the cumulative longitudinal extension of a 12.5 m
assembled length of pipe does not exceed 5 mm when pulled by hand.
(2) Pipes for Type 2 and Type 3 raking drains which are to be wrapped in geotextile filter sheath shall be
placed along the centre of a strip of geotextile filter of sufficient width to allow a lap of at least 50 mm. The
strip of geotextile filter shall be drawn around the pipe and fixed to the pipe along the pipe invert and fixing
with non-metallic ties at 300 mm centres to prevent dislocation during installation. The ends of pipes shall
be marked to ensure that the impermeable invert is correctly positioned during installation.
4.25.2. Drilling for raking drains
(1) Drilling lubricants other than clean air or fresh water shall not be used for drilling holes for raking drains.
Casings shall be used to prevent collapse of the hole and to permit unobstructed insertion of the pipes and
geotextile filter sheath.
(2) The drillhole entry point shall be positioned within a tolerance of 175mm. Deviation in alignment shall
not exceed 1 in 20. Deviation from straight shall not exceed 20 mm in any 3 m length of drillhole. A positive
gradient shall be maintained throughout the complete length of the hole. The inclination of holes shall be
measured by a method agreed by the Engineer.
(3) Drilling and sampling for undisturbed soil samples and rock cores instructed by the Engineer to be
recovered from drillholes shall be as stated in Clause 4.5..
(4) Drillholes shall be temporarily plugged or otherwise protected to prevent entry of deleterious material
after drilling.

4.25.3. Records of drillholes for raking drains
Records of drillholes for raking drains shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site and a drillhole log for each
drillhole shall be submitted to the Engineer before installation of the raking drain starts. The borehole log
shall contain the following details:
(a) drain reference number,

(b) location, inclination, bearings, diameter and length of hole.
(c) details of drilling progress,
(d) details of water seepage related to drilling progress, and
(e) details of samples taken.
4.26. Trench Drains
4.26.1. Excavation for trench drains
The width of trench drains shall be at least 450 mm. The width of trench drains with filter pipes not
exceeding 150 mm diameter shall be at least four times the nominal diameter of the pipe. The width of
trench drains for pipes exceeding 150 mm diameter shall be at least the same as the external diameter of
the pipe plus 450 mm.
4.26.2. Geotextile filter surround for trench drains
Geotextile filter surround for trench drains shall be installed as stated in Clause 4.22.2..
4.26.3. Bed for trench drains
(1) Concrete bed for filter pipes in trench drains shall be at least 75 mm thick and shall be Grade 20/20
concrete.
(2) Granular bed for filter pipes for trench drains shall have a thickness at least the same as the diameter of
the pipe or 150 mm, whichever is greater.
4.26.4. Deposition and compaction of fill material for trench drains
(1) The material for granular bed for trench drains shall be deposited in the trench in layers not exceeding
150 mm thick and for the complete width of the trench. Each layer shall be compacted with six passes of a
plate vibrator or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
(2) Fill material around filter pipes in trench drains shall be deposited and compacted as stated in Section
2.. The permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before fill material is deposited around filter pipes.

4.27. Relief Drains
4.27.1. Trials for relief drains
A trial length of relief drains of at least 2 m shall be constructed.
4.27.2. Fixing relief drains
Relief drains shall be fixed in position before surface protection or remedial measures are applied. Fixing
shall be carried out in a manner which will not affect the serviceability of the relief drains or outlets. Water
collected in relief drains shall be discharged to outlets agreed by the Engineer.
4.28. Caisson Drains
4.28.1. Construction of caisson drains
(1) Excavation for caisson drains shall be carried out by manual methods in stages not exceeding 1.0 m
depth unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Dewatering shall be carried out for excavation below the
groundwater level so that work may be carried out, as near as may be practicable in the circumstances, in
dry conditions. Dewatering shall be carried out as stated in Clauses 4.29.1. and 4.29.2..
(2) Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the caisson drain shaft shall be supported at all times
during construction using concrete liners. Voids between liners and excavated faces shall be filled with no
fines concrete. Caisson liners for each 1.0 m stage shall be installed on the same day as that stage is
excavated.
(3) Softened and loose material shall be removed from the base of the caisson drain immediately before
granular filter material is deposited in the caisson drain.
(4) Part or all of the concrete liner adjacent to the granular filter layer shall be removed before granular filter
material or fill material is deposited. Debris from the concrete liner shall be removed from the caisson drain.
(5) Granular filter material shall be deposited in layers not exceeding 500 mm and shall be compacted by
methods approved by the Engineer.
4.28.2. Discharge of water from caisson drains
Water collected in caisson drains shall be discharged to the outlets stated in the Contract.
4.28.3. Records of caisson drains
(1) Records of caisson drains shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site and a copy shall be submitted to
the Engineer within 14 days after completion of construction of caisson drains. The records shall contain
the following details:
(a) record of work carried out each day, and

(b) drawings showing the exact locations of caisson drains and the final depths relative to PD.
(2) Detailed face logs of caisson drains shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site and shall be available for
inspection by the Engineer at all times. The logs shall contain the information required in Clause 4.4.4.(2)(b),
(2)(c) and (2)(d) and the format shall be as shown in Appendix 6.8.
4.29. Groundwater Control and Drawdown
4.29.1. Drawdown of groundwater table
The groundwater table shall not be drawn down to more than 2 m below the earthworks final surface as
defined in Clause 4.1.3. for excavation.
4.29.2. Dewatering
(1) Dewatering shall be carried out in such a manner that no loss of fines from the ground occurs.
(2) Silt traps shall be provided and shall be regularly maintained; all dewatering pumps shall discharge into
silt traps.
(3) Pumped groundwater shall not be discharged onto roads. footpaths, kerb channels or adjacent land.
The Contractor shall make all arrangements with and obtain the necessary approvals from the relevant
authorities for discharging water to drainage systems. watercourses or the sea. Dewatering shall not start
until the approved arrangements for disposal of the water have been implemented. Water entering the Site
shall not be discharged into the same silt traps as are used for dewatering.
(4) The total capacity of pumps available on the Site for dewatering shall be at least equal to twice the rate
of flow measured through the silt traps at any time when the groundwater table is maintained at maximum
drawdown.
(5) Half of the total pump capacity shall be equipped with a secondary motive power source in addition to
the primary motive power. The secondary motive power source shall commence operation automatically in
the event of failure of the primary motive power source or an effective alarm system shall be set up which
will warn of failure of the primary motive power source. The maximum allowable delay between failure of
the primary motive power source and full operation of the secondary motive power source shall not exceed
15 minutes.
(6) A full-time attendant shall be available on the Site at all times to execute the changeover if manual
operation of equipment is required to bring the secondary motive power into operation.
(7) The operation of the changeover of motive power equipment shall be demonstrated before the relevant
work starts unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.

4.29.3. Groundwater recharge
(1) If groundwater recharge is to be carried out to maintain the specified groundwater levels at any location,
the groundwater recharge system shall have the means to regulate and measure the rate of recharge and
to provide an adequate continuous supply of water for recharge. Only clean fresh water shall be used.
(2) The capacity of pumps and the power sources which are to be used for groundwater recharge shall be
as stated in Clause 4.29.2.(4) except that the rate of flow shall refer to the maximum rate of groundwater
recharge required.
(3) The groundwater table at any location shall not be raised above the background groundwater table
measured before the relevant work starts.
4.29.4. Monitoring of groundwater control and drawdown
(1) Monitoring of groundwater levels shall be carried out at locations stated in the Contract or instructed by
the Engineer at all times when groundwater control and drawdown in carried out. Arrangements for
installing instruments and taking measurements both inside and outside the Site shall be made by the
Contractor.
(2) The survey marks for monitoring shall be located in position and level to the Bangladesh standard
survey grid and to PWD to within 10 mm in every direction.
(3) Monitoring stations and monitoring shall be as stated In Clauses 4.32. and 4.33..
(4) Groundwater levels shall be measured to an accuracy of 20 mm. Settlements shall be measured to an
accuracy of 3 mm.
(5) The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately if any incremental settlement reading exceeds 5
mm or if the accumulated settlement exceeds the maximum allowable settlement stated in the Contract.
4.29.5. Records of settlement, groundwater control and drawdown
Records of monitoring of settlement, groundwater control and drawdown shall be kept by the Contractor on
the Site and a copy shall be submitted to the Engineer within 24 hours of taking readings.
4.30. Testing : Granular Filter Material
4.30.1. Batch: granular filter material
A batch of granular filter material is any quantity of granular filter material of the same type and grading
delivered to the Site at any one time.

4.30.2. Samples: granular filter material
(1) One sample of granular filter material shall be provided from each 500 m 3 or part thereof of the material
delivered to the Site.
(2) Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, one sample of granular material shall be provided from
each 500 m3 or part thereof of granular filter material which has been deposited and compacted.
(3) The size of each sample taken as stated in Clause 4.30.2.(1) shall be 10 kg. The method of sampling
shall be in accordance with BS 932-1.
(4) Samples taken as stated in Clause 4.30.2. shall consist of material excavated from the compacted layer
to form a flat bottomed, steep sided hole of approximately 0.13 m 2 to the complete depth of the compacted
layer; a template shall be used to fix the edges of the hole if necessary. The sides and bottom of the hole
shall be at least 50 mm from other types of fill material.
4.30.3. Testing: granular filter material
(1) Each sample of granular filter material shall be tested to determine the particle size distribution.
(2) The method of testing shall be in accordance with the wet sieving method stated in BS 1377: Part 2
Method 9.
4.30.4. Non-compliance: granular filter material
(1) If the result of any test for particle size distribution on a sample of granular filter material taken as stated
in Clause 4.30.2.(1) does not comply with the specified requirements for particle size distribution. additional
samples shall be provided from the same batch and additional tests for particle size distribution shall be
carried out.
(2) The batch shall be considered as not complying with the specified requirements for particle size
distribution if the result of any additional test for particle size distribution does not comply with the specified
requirements for particle size distribution.
(3) If the result of any test for particle size distribution on a sample of granular filter material taken as stated
in Clause 4.30.2.(2) does not comply with the specified requirements for particle size distribution, additional
samples shall be provided from the same batch and additional tests for particle size distribution shall be
carried out.
(4) The batch shall be considered as not complying with the specified requirements for particle size
distribution if the result of any additional test for particle size distribution does not comply with the specified
requirements for particle size distribution.

4.31. Testing: Fill Material for Trench Drains
4.31.1. Batch: fill material for trench drains
A batch of fill material for trench drains is any quantity of fill material for trench drains of the same type
delivered to the Site at any one time.
4.31.2. Samples: fill material for trench drains
(1) Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, one sample of fill material for trench drains shall be
provided from each batch of fill material for trench drains delivered to the Site.
(2) The size of each sample and the method of sampling shall be in accordance with Clause 4.30.2.(3).
4.31.3. Testing: fill material for trench drains
(1) Each sample of fill material for trench drains shall be tested to determine the particle size distribution; fill
material passing a 425 um BS test sieve shall also be tested to determine the plasticity index.
(2) The method of testing to determine the particle size distribution shall be in accordance with BS 1377:
Part 2, Test Method 9.2. The method of testing to determine the plasticity index shall be in accordance with
BS1377: Part 2, Test Method 5.
4.32. Geotechnical Instrumentation: Glossary of Terms
4.32.1. Datum station
Datum station is a mark for which horizontal or vertical values, or both, have been fixed, and which is used
as a datum for monitoring or control surveys.
4.32.2. Geotechnical instrumentation
Geotechnical instrumentation is the installation and monitoring of instruments in the ground or structures to
provide information on soil and rock parameters, and to monitor specific variations in the condition of the
ground or structures for the purposes of geotechnical design, construction control and performance
monitoring.
4.32.3. Monitoring mark
Monitoring mark is a mark, fixed or installed, on a structure to be monitored.
4.32.4. Reference point
Reference point is a mark placed close to another important survey mark to aid recovery or replacement.

4.32.5. Survey station
Survey station is a mark on a stone, concrete, metal or wooden block, pipe, peg or other item de fining a
surveyed position.
4.33. Geotechnical Instrumentation : Submissions
4.33.1. Particulars of geotechnical Instrumentation
(1) The following particulars of the proposed geotechnical instrumentation shall be submitted to the
Engineer:
(a) details of instruments and any alternative instruments proposed by the Contractor,
(b) manufacturer's specifications,
(c) test and calibration certificates,
(d) method of installation,
(e) method of acceptance testing,
(f) details of ancillary measuring equipment,
(g) schedule for installing instrumentation in relation to other work,
(h) documents showing that the instruments are capable of measuring within the ranges and
accuracies stated in the Contract,
(i) name and experience of persons responsible for installation, testing and monitoring of
instruments,
(j) details of standpipe piezometer tips, including manufacturer‘s specification, and
(k) details of the form of records.
instrumentation starts.
4.34. General Geotechnical Instrumentation Requirements
4.34.1. Instruments for geotechnical instrumentation
(1) Instruments for geotechnical instrumentation and their accessories shall be provided complete with all
appropriate tubing, connections, monitoring equipment, read-out units and any other tools necessary for
the installation calibration, setting to work and maintenance of the instruments.
(2) Instruments shall be manufactured by companies with proven experience and only instruments which
are well proven and have been in successful use shall be used, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
(3) Installed instruments shall become the property of the Employer. Detachable tubing, connections,
monitoring equipment and read-out units shall become the property of the Contractor upon the expiry of
the Maintenance Period.
(4) Instruments shall be handled, stored. installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and in such a manner that the performance of the instruments will not be impaired.

(5) Instruments shall be protected from damage and measures shall be taken to ensure that the
instruments suffer the minimum practicable amount of disturbance. Instruments shall be calibrated by a
laboratory approved by the Engineer.
(6) Instruments shall be calibrated at intervals recommended by the manufacturer and at other intervals
instructed by the Engineer. Calibration certificates shall be provided to the Engineer within 24 hours after
calibration.
(7) Installation, testing and monitoring of the instruments shall be carried out under the Supervision of a
suitably qualified technician. Particulars of the technician, including qualifications and experience, shall be
submitted to the Engineer at least 7 days before commencement of work relating to geotechnical
instrumentation.
4.34.2. Location and arrangement of instruments
(1) The locations and arrangement of instruments for geotechnical instrumentation shall be as stated in the
Drawing or as agreed with the Engineer before installation.
(2) The positions and alignments of instruments shall be recorded after installation and surveys shall be
carried out at times and frequencies agreed by the Engineer to detect any displacement of the instruments.
(3) At least two reference points shall be established for each survey station or monitoring mark.
(4) The survey station which has the least chance of being disturbed shall be selected as datum station.
The datum station shall be stainless steel and shall be protected from damage. At least three reference
points shall be established for each datum station.
(5) The survey network shall be related to the territorial control points provided by the Engineer.
4.34.3. Installation of instruments
(1) The Contractor shall inform the Engineer 24 hours. or such shorter period agreed by the Engineer,
before the installation of each instrument for geotechnical instrumentation starts.
(2) Instruments shall be installed. fixed and protected in a manner which will ensure that the instruments
will function satisfactorily. Tests shall be carried out after installation to demonstrate that the instruments
have been correctly installed and are functioning correctly. Instruments which are not correctly installed or
are not functioning correctly shall be reinstalled or replaced as instructed by the Engineer.
(3) All installed instruments, tubes and wires shall be clearly marked with a unique and conspicuous
identification number.

4.34.4. Tubes and cables for instruments
(1) Tubes and cables attached to instruments for geotechnical instrumentation for remote reading shall be
impervious to air and water, and shall have sufficient strength and stiffness to withstand the internal and
external pressures. Tubes and cables shall be protected from mechanical damage and from the harmful
effects of direct sunlight, heat and ultra violet radiation at all times.
(2) Tubes and cables shall be free from defects and shall be marked with identification colours and
numbers at 5 m intervals. The tubes and cables shall be wound onto reels in such a manner that kinks are
not formed and strain is not induced. Open ends of tubes and cables shall be blocked with stop ends at all
times.
(3) Tubes and cables shall be buried at least 0.5 m below ground level.
(4) Tubes and cables shall be laid with sufficient slack. loops and bends to allow for settlement and other
ground movements. The routing of tubes and cables shall be as agreed by the Engineer and shall be in
straight lines unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. The radius of bends shall be at least 300 mm.
Each tube or cable shall be laid from the measuring instrument to the terminal duct in one continuous
length without joints.
4.34.5. Supply and Maintenance of instruments
(1) Instruments for geotechnical instrumentation and their accessories supplied by the Contractor shall be
new. All instruments and their accessories shall be provided complete with all appropriate cabling,
connections, monitoring equipment, readout units, and any other tools necessary for the installation,
calibration, setting to work and maintenance of the instruments.
(2) The types of readout units connect with electrical instruments, shall be provided as indicated below:
(a) Portable readout unit that shall be connected to the instrument terminals when monitoring is
required. The portable readout unit may be a portable notebook computer, a datalogger or a
proprietary system.
(b) The Dataloggers can be of the type are located in-place, installed at a central location on site
and one or more instruments are linked to it either by wire or wirlessly and the data downloaded
when required. The method of downloading data from the datalogger may be by connection to a
portable notebook computer, by connection to another datalogger or by withdrawal of removable
memory cards (datacards).
(c) On-line connection to a remote monitoring system. The connection may be either a fixed
communication line or may rely on wireless transmission.
(3) Electrical readout units shall be protected from potentially harmful environments, including water,
humidity, lightning strikes, vermin, vandals, vibrations and extreme temperature variations. Electrical
readout units installed at the Site shall be housed in waterproof boxes, preferably with external sockets so
that portable units can be connected for regular downloading without having to expose waterproof seals.

Waterproof boxes shall be rated for resisting one metre head of water for a minimum period of 14 days.
Dataloggers shall have a gas discharge tube on each multiplexer channel, and earth ground connections.
(4) A factory calibration shall be conducted on all instruments at the place of manufacture prior to
shipment. Each factory calibration shall include a calibration curve with data points clearly marked and a
tabulation of the data. Each instrument shall be marked with a unique identification number. Certification
shall be provided to indicate the equipment used for this purpose is calibrated and maintained in
accordance with the test equipment manufacturer's calibration requirements and that, where applicable,
calibrations are traceable to a national standards agency approved by the Engineer.
(5) The Contractor shall provide the manufacturers warranty for each instrument and readout unit.
(6) Instruments for geotechnical instrumentation shall be maintained in good working order until the expiry
of Maintenance Period. Instruments. survey marks and stations shall be protected by suitable barricades.
notices, signs, marker-buoys or by other methods agreed by the Engineer. Construction shall be carried out
in a manner which will avoid damage to the instruments.
(7) The Contractor shall inform the Engineer immediately of any instruments found damaged or instruments
found not to be in working order. Replacements shall be installed for read-out units which are faulty or
under repair.
4.34.6. Records of geotechnical instrumentation
(1) Records of activities relating to installation of geotechnical instrumentation shall be kept by the
Contractor on the Site and a copy shall be submitted to the Engineer within 24 hours after installation of the
instrument is complete.
(2) A drawing showing the locations and identification of installed instruments shall be prepared by the
Contractor and submitted to the Engineer within 24 hours after installation of the instrument is complete.
(3) A drawing showing the locations and details of survey stations. monitoring marks and reference points
shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer within 3 days after the survey network
has been established.
4.35. Monitoring and Recording
4.35.1. Recording readings
(1) Instrument readings and processed data for geotechnical instrumentation shall be recorded by the
Contractor on agreed record sheets, and shall be submitted to the Engineer within 24 hours after recording.
The form of record sheets shall be as agreed by the Engineer. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer,
readings shall be taken in the presence of the Engineer.
(2) Initial readings shall be taken immediately after the instruments have been installed and after the effects
of installation have subsided. The initial readings shall be submitted to the Engineer and shall form the

basis of comparison of subsequent readings. The instruments and the initial readings shall be replaced if
the initial readings are not repeatable.
(3) The frequencies for reading instruments shall be as agreed with the Engineer. The Contractor shall
inform the Engineer immediately of sudden or significant changes in the readings.
(4) All installed instruments shall be left in correctly functioning condition after final readings have been
taken or at the end of the Defects Liability Period. Keys for looks shall be tagged to identify the instrument
number and shall be handed over to the Engineer.
4.36. Settlement Markers and Settlement Plates
4.36.1. Settlement Markers
(1) instrument installation shall be in accordance with the procedures as generally outlined below, but shall
be agreed with the Engineer prior to commencement of any installation.
(a) Excavation a hole 0.8m x 0.8m and 1m deep and install a 25mm steel rod by push or driving into
the fill below the hole.
(b) Pour a concrete pad around the steel rod to fill the excavated hole obtain initial co-ordinates and
initial elevations by optical survey.
(c) Install protective barriers and high visibility markets.
Surface movement marker shall be monitored weekly for a period of 4 weeks and then monthly for an
additional 5-month period unless otherwise stated.
4.36.2. Installation of settlement plates
(1) Settlement plates for geotechnical instrumentation shall be securely founded on level ground free from
obstructions and shall be immediately surveyed for level and position and plotted on a plan.
(2) Settlement plates shall be protected from damage and shall be kept in position by a 600 mm thick layer
of granular fill material or bags of sand which shall be placed by manual methods and shall extend 600 mm
beyond the edges of the plate. The initial survey of levels and positions shall be taken immediately after the
fill material or bags of sand have been placed.
(3) The metal rod fixed to the centre of the plate shall be in an upright position, and protected by a tubular
sleeve. The sleeve and the metal rod shall be extended as fill material is placed such that at any time the
sleeve and rod are at least 500 mm above the level of the surrounding fill material or high water mark, and
the metal rod is within 2% of the embedded length to the vertical.
(4) The level of the top of the metal rod shall be recorded immediately before and immediately after each
extension piece is added. Marker-buoys shall be fixed to the tops of tubular sleeves installed in water,
unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.

4.37. Tiltmeter System
4.37.1. Installation of tiltmeter system
(1) Tilt-plates for geotechnical instrumentation shall be orientated to correspond with the specified direction
of measurement and fixed in place on the rock or structure. The installed direction shall be recorded to an
accuracy of ±3%.
(2) A protective cap or cover shall be fitted to protect the tilt-plates from damage.
(3) Tilt-plates and the tiltmeter shall be cleaned and inspected for damage before readings are taken. The
tiltmeter shall be accurately located on the tilt-plate and a reading taken. The tiltmeter shall then be
removed and the contact surface re-cleaned. The procedure shall be repeated until consistent readings are
obtained. The tiltmeter shall then be rotated through 180° and the procedures repeated.
(4) The accuracy of the tiltmeter and its readout system shall be checked both before and after the readings
taken each day. Instrument errors shall be investigated and immediately corrected; a record of calibrations
and adjustments shall be submitted to the Engineer together with the monitoring data.
4.38. Telltales
4.38.1. Installation of telltales
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer telltales for geotechnical instrumentation shall be as shown in
Appendix 6.9 shall be rigidly fixed across cracks to enable any movement across the cracks to be
determined. Telltales shall be labelled and marked with the date of installation.
4.39. Standpipe Piezometers
4.39.1. Standpipe piezometers
Standpipe piezometer tips for geotechnical instrumentation shall be porous ceramic or plastic material at
least 200 mm long and with a bore of at least 19 mm; the permeability shall be at least 10-4 m/s. The
piezometer tip shall be connected to rigid PVC standpipes with a bore of at least 19mm and with a wall
thickness of at least 3 mm. The standpipes shall be jointed together and to the porous tips in such a
manner that the joints remain leak proof under the anticipated head of water.
4.39.2. Installation of standpipe piezometers
(1) Standpipe piezometers for geotechnical instrumentation shall be installed in drillholes at the depths
(2) The sand filter surrounding the piezometer tip shall be between 1000mm and 1500 mm long and shall
consist of sand between the sizes of 200pm and 1210 um. Measurements shall be made to determine the
actual location of the sand filter column.

(3) A seal shall be formed above the sand filter by placing 500 mm of bentonite pellets of between 10 mm
and 15 mm in size. The pellets shall be placed in the hole and tamped with a suitably shaped tamper to
form a homogeneous plug to the hole.
(4) If the depth of the completed hole is greater than the depth at which the piezometer tip and sand filter
are to be placed, the bottom of the drillhole shall be grouted with grout consisting of cement and bentonite
in the proportions 1:1 by mass together with sufficient water to achieve the required workability. The
drillhole above the plug shall be grouted with the same type of material.
(5) The water level in the piezometer shall be measured after the standpipe piezometer has been installed
and the standpipe shall be topped up with clean water. The rate of drop of water level or pressure head
shall be recorded at times of 0, ¼, ½, 1, 2, 4, 8, 15, 30 minutes or until the water has returned to its initial
level.
(6) The water level shall be measured by an electrical type water level probe agreed by the Engineer; the
water shall be salted if necessary for response to the probe.
(7) Measurements of the depth of piezometer tip and sand filter and the readings taken as stated in this
Clause shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval within 24 hours after completion of installation of the
piezometer standpipe.
4.39.3. Piezometers in Drillholes
(1) When instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall install piezometers in completed drillholes or
coreholes as detailed in Appendix 6.10. These shall be installed within 3 working days of receiving the
instruction. The pipe shall be of rigid uPVC tubing not less than 19 mm internal diameter with a wall
thickness of not less than 3 mm. It shall be supplied and installed in not less than 3 m lengths except for
one shorter length as required to suit the total piezometer dimensions. The tubes shall be joined together,
and to the porous element, with uPVC couplings, glue and sealing tape in such a manner that the joints
remain watertight.
(2) The set of tubes shall be connected at its lower end, by a suitable uPVC fitting, to a piezometer tip. The
tip shall comprise a cylindrical porous element not less than 19 mm in diameter and 300 mm in length
protected by a perforated rigid plastic outer tube with a rigid plastic end fitting to the approval of the
Engineer. The piezometer tip shall have permeability in the order of 5 x 10 -4 m/sec. The details of each
piezometer installed shall be reported on the record sheet shown in Appendix 6.11.
(3) The upper end of each set of tubes shall be set in concrete and an appropriate surface box, as shown in
Appendix 6.12 and 6.13, shall be fitted. When instructed by the Engineer, a lockable cap shall be used as
shown in Appendix 6.14. The top of each tube shall be fitted with a uPVC cap containing a vent hole or slot.
(4) When the depth of the completed drillhole is greater than the depth at which the porous element, sand
filter and bottom bentonite seal are to be installed, the hole below the seal shall be grouted. Grout,
consisting of cement and bentonite in the proportion of 1:3 by weight or an alternative mix as agreed by the

Engineer, shall be prepared by thorough mixing and with just sufficient water to form a pumpable mix.
Sufficient grout shall be placed in the hole using a tremie pipe reaching to the bottom of the hole, such that
the top of the grout shall finish 1m below the base of the instructed response zone. Compressed bentonite
pellets, or other material to the approval of the Engineer, shall then be placed in the hole to form a
homogeneous impermeable plug 1 m thick.
(5) The sand filter surround to the piezometer tip, forming the response zone, shall be 1.0 m in length and
shall extend to a depth of at least 300 mm below the tip, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer. The
sand filter shall comprise clean sand, falling wholly between the grading limits of 1200 and 210 microns,
and the volume of the sand filter placed shall be recorded on the daily site records. Alternative filter material
shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
(6) Where there is water in a drillhole, the Contractor shall allow sufficient time for all the sand to settle, and
measurements of the upper surface of the sand shall be taken from time to time to ensure this. The depth
of all boundaries in an installation shall always be recorded on the daily site records.
(7) Backfilling of the drillhole above the sand filter with compressed bentonite pellets and cement/bentonite
grout shall be as described above to the dimensions shown in Appendix 6.10. (8) Readings of water levels
in piezometers shall be carried out daily for 7 working days following completion of the response (falling
head) test as Clause 4.7.5. and the results tabulated and incorporated in the Final Field Work Report.
4.39.4. Automatic Groundwater Monitoring Devices
(1) When instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall install automatic groundwater monitoring device
in piezometers or standpipes. The device shall be able to measure piezometric data in positive pressure
range up to about 700 kPa with an accuracy of ±0.1% full scale. The device shall be individually calibrated
to its full range by its manufacturer or supplier prior to delivery. When requested by the Engineer, calibration
certificates and results of all calibrations and checking shall be supplied with each automatic groundwater
monitoring device prior to installation.
(2) Each automatic groundwater monitoring device shall include a pressure sensor and a datalogger. The
pressure sensor shall be compact enough to be installed in the piezometer/standpipe tube. The datalogger
shall be battery-powered type and be programmed to capture piezometric readings from every 5 seconds
to 99 hours, and store at least 2000 readings in its memory. The captured piezometric data can be retrieved
from the datalogger through a communication software. The batteries shall allow the device to operate for
at least 3 months.
(3) Prior to installation, all instruments shall undergo pre-installation acceptance check. The acceptance
check shall include, where applicable, the examination of the instrument for damage, functional testing,
identification of serial numbers, checking completeness of the manufacturer's calibration data, etc. Only
instruments having passed the acceptance check shall be used. Test results shall be recorded and
submitted to the Engineer.

(4) Immediately after the installation is completed, a post-installation acceptance test shall be carried out to
ensure that a proper communication is set up between the piezometer, the datalogger and the host
computer with the communication software installed. All final water level readings shall be adjusted for the
compensation of barometric pressure as well as temperature variation.
(5) For the parts of the automatic groundwater monitoring device, such as the datalogger, which could not
fit into a surface box, a lockable metal protective box shall be provided to house the datalogger and all
cables. The protective box shall be screwed firmly from inside of the box to the top of the concrete surface
box.
(6) Readings of water level by the automatic groundwater monitoring device shall be carried out daily for 7
consecutive days following the completion of installation on a reading schedule as agreed by the Engineer.
Preliminary results shall be submitted within 3 working days after the date of completion of water level
monitoring. The final results shall be tabulated in the record sheet as shown in Appendix M26 or alternative
formats as agreed by the Engineer and incorporated in the Final Field Work Report.
4.39.5. Inclinometers in Ground and inside Piles
(1) The sinking of the drillholes for inclinometers installation shall be carried out in accordance with Clause
4.5. of the Specification. The drillholes shall be advanced by turning the casing with just sufficient circulation
of flushing fluid. The casing shall not be “surged” under any circumstances. The size of the drillhole shall be
consistent with the size of inclinometer casing to be installed. Jar samples from drillholes shall be obtained
at 1m intervals. The Contractor shall prepare records of drillholes in accordance with Clause 4.5.6..
(2) The drillhole shall be sunk at least 5 meters below the depth of monitoring. The drillhole shall be cased
throughout its length. The bottom of the drillhole shall be clean and free from any loose soil.
(3) A steel weight of not less than 50kg shall be attached to the bottom of the inclinometer casing. The steel
weight shall be secured to and supported by two non-stretch fibre cords during lowering of the
inclinometer casing into the drillhole. The inclinometer casing shall be sealed at the lower end.
(4) The inclinometer casing shall be joined and lowered section by section with a PVC grout pipe attached
at the outside the inclinometer casing. All joints and connections shall be watertight. Correct groove
alignment of the inclinometer casing shall be maintained at all times. Fresh water shall be added into the
inclinometer casing as required to ensure the assembly sinking into the hole smoothly.
(5) After the inclinometer casing reaches the bottom elevation of the drillhole, a dummy inclinometer probe
shall be lowered down each pair of grooves to confirm that it tracks properly. The inclinometer casing shall
then be orientated with the orientation of the grooves as directed by the Engineer. The inclinometer casing
shall be extended to at least 1m above ground level and shall be higher than the drill casing.
(6) Fresh water shall be pumped down the PVC grout pipe to check proper circulation prior to grouting.

(7) The full length of drillhole shall be grouted through the PVC grout pipe installed. The grout used shall be
in accordance with Clause 4.13..
(8) The bentonite and fresh water shall be well mixed first and then the cement poured in slowly circulating
through the pump and mixing tank until there are no lumps visible on the screen. The grout shall be
pumped down the PVC grout pipe to fill the annular space between the drill casing and the access tube
until grout of the same consistency as that leaving the pump overflows at the top of the drill casing.
(9) The outer drill casing shall then be withdrawn. Rotation of the drill casing shall be avoided and the
inclinometer casing shall never be lifted during drill casing withdrawal. After the drill casing has been
withdrawn, the grout level shall be topped up to 1m below the formation level.
(10) Initial readings of the inclinometer position shall be taken with the corresponding probe. Prior to each
set of inclinometer measurements a mechanical “hook" gauge shall be used to locate the vertical position
of each casing joint so that subsequent casing settlement can be assessed. The exact position and level of
the top of the tube shall be obtained by optical survey. The survey records and initial readings shall be
included in the Contractor's installation record for submission to the Engineer.
(11) A hole shall be excavated around the inclinometer casing and backfilled with concrete. A end cap shall
be provided for the access tube and a lockable cover shall be installed over the casing. Protective barriers
and high visibility markers shall be installed to protect the instruments from damage by construction
activities.
(12) Three days after installation of the inclinometer system, a sprial sensor shall be lowered down the
inclinometer casing to check the twist along the full depth of the casing. The sensor shall consist of two
interconnected independent wheel housings which are free to rotate relative to each other around the axis
of the sensor. The accuracy of the sensor shall be within 10mm for every gauge length of 1.5m. The
recorded data of the inclinometer shall be corrected according to the twisted recorded in the casing.
(13) The inclinometer casing shall be extended through the fill as the filling progresses. When raising the
level in the vicinity of inclinometer installations. the Contractor shall place and compact of the fill manually
to the full height of each lift. within a 1m radius of the casing. The surface protection of concrete block shall
be repeated for every 1.5m of filling.
(14) The Contractor shall survey the level and position of the top of the inclinometer casing tube every time
each inclinometer is monitored.
(15) lnclinometer pipes shall not deviate form the vertical by more than 2%.
(16) lnclinometer casings shall also be installed in piles where the variation of the pile inclination or the pile
deflections after construction of the pile needs to be monitored. The piles to be monitored with
inclinometers will be instructed by the Engineer.

4.39.6. Vibration Monitoring of Ground and Structures
Where required in the Contract or directed by the Engineer. monitoring of the vibration of the ground at
various distances from the source of vibration, any under ground utilities, existing or newly constructed
structures shall be carried out by the Contractor as instructed by the Engineer. The frequency of the
monitoring shall be in accordance with the Contract or directed by the Engineer. The vibration monitoring
shall be carried out using Seismographs approved by the Engineer.
(1) Seismographs
(A) Seismographs shall be provided for monitoring the velocities and pressures of ground vibrations
resulting from construction activities. Seismographs may either form a fixed monitoring system or be a
portable system. Either system shall be able to record. process and store high fidelity measurements of
vibration events from single or multiple locations as specified by the Engineer. Seismographs shall have the
following minimum features:
(a) Seismic range: 0.25mm to 100mm per second with an accuracy of ±5 percent of the measured
peak particle velocity (PPV) or better, at frequencies between 10 Hz and 100 Hz, and with a
resolution of 0.25mm per second or less.
(b) Acoustic range: 110 to 140 dB (referenced to 20 μPa) with an accuracy and resolution of ±1 dB.
(c) Frequency response (±3 dB points): 2 Hz to 200 Hz.
(d) Three channels for vibration monitoring plus a fourth channel for over-pressure due to blasting.
(e) Power supply. The seismograph shall have two power sources: internal rechargeable battery
and charger and be mains powered (220 to 240 volts AC). The battery for the seismograph must be
capable of supplying power to monitor vibrations continuously for up to 24 hours.
(f) Capability for internal dynamic calibration.
(g) Capability for producing strip chart recordings of readings on Site within one hour of obtaining
the readings.
(h) Computer software to perform analysis, produce reports of continuous monitoring, and to
perform zero-crossing frequency analyses of waveform data on magnetic disks.
(i) Self-triggering waveform capture mode that provides the following information for all vibration
events above a pre-set threshold: plot of waveforms. peak particle velocities, peak overpressure,
frequencies of peaks.
(j) Continuous monitoring mode must be capable of recording single-component peak particle
velocities. and frequency of peaks with an interval of one minute or less.
(B) Seismographs shall be housed in a strong protective case.
(C) Geophones shall be capable of generating a measurement signal proportional to particle velocity.
Triaxial geophone sensor assemblies shall be provided for complete motion recording. These transducers
shall be capable of driving signals over cable lengths of at least 500m. Two types of sensor shall be
installed. Near-field sensors shall be used for locations at close proximity to the blast or impact sites; they
shall have a sensitivity of 0.022V/mm/s. Far-field sensors shall be attached to structures and shall have a

sensitivity of 0.027V/mm/s. Certification documents for each transducer shall be submitted to the Engineer
for Approval.
(D) Factory calibration of seismograph vibration monitors shall be performed using a shake table and a
reference sensor traceable to a national standards agency approved by the Engineer. Factory calibrations
of over-pressure sensors shall be performed using a calibrator traceable to the same national standards
agency.
(E) Electrical readout options are as indicated in Clause 4.34.5.(2). Details of installation shall be provided
before delivery to the site. For fixed monitoring systems, the normal readout option shall be on-line
connection to a remote monitoring system; the recorded signals shall be processed and communicated in
real time to the remote station for assessment and logging.
(F) In addition to standard functions, the monitoring software shall permit recorded waveforms to be
viewed and analysed in detail immediately upon acquisition; zoom view. time and amplitude cursor and
Fourier transform options shall be included. The monitoring software shall also allow checks of operational
readiness of the instrument(s) to be made and to observe their real-time trigger status as well as to receive
warnings either by buzzer or warning message when Response Levels are reached.
(G) Connecting cables shall be shielded twisted pair type with military specification metal connectors.
Extension cables (100m, 200m and 500m lengths) and interconnection boxes shall be provided to allow
flexible network arrangements.
(H) The primary signal input stage for the data acquisition electronics shall be a differential input type to
reduce common mode noise effects, Programmed signal gains shall provide at least 5 doublings of range
to a maximum of at least 300mm/s (for the transducers selected). Sample rate shall also be programmable
with options of at least 1, 2 and 5kHz. At a sample rate of 5kHz the system memory capacity shall allow a
record duration of at least 2 seconds. The sample resolution shall be at least 12 bit (1 part in 4096). System
triggering shall be sourced from the signals themselves, programmable thresholds shall be set
independently on a per (triaxial) gauge basis or, for the portable system, on an external break-wire.
(2) Installation
(A) The Contractor shall locate seismograph vibration sensors (geophones) where directed by the
Engineer, including points on the ground surface between 1m and 2m from the faces of buildings. The
Contractor's method statement shall detail how the sensors are to be coupled to the defined surfaces such
that they may be subsequently removed and reused. Bolted or bonded baseplates shall be installed to
minimise resonance effects. Sensors shall be firmly mounted on the surface slab of concrete or asphalt, or
firmly set in undisturbed soil. and shall be left in place for a time adequate to achieve the data collection
schedule provided by the Engineer.
(B) The Contractor shall locate seismograph over-pressure sensors wherever the Engineer deems
necessary to monitor over-pressure due to pile driving activities or pile testing activities with PDA near
facilities that may be affected by these piling activities. Sensors shall be supported 1m to 2m above the

ground surface in the vicinity of the facilities, The sensors shall not be located closer than 3m to walls or
other large surfaces. and shall be left in place for a time adequate to achieve the data collection schedule
provided by the Engineer.
(C) The Contractor's method statement shall provide connection diagrams detailing cabling arrangements
and the layout of electronic components.
(3) Monitoring
(A) Seismograph data shall be collected prior to any vibration-producing construction activities to
document background vibrations, and also at the start of vibration producing construction activities to
establish the maximum energy which can be used without surpassing acceptable vibration and over-
pressure levels at nearby facilities. Vibration shall also be monitored during construction. Monitoring shall
be as follows:
(a) Monitoring during piling operations shall consist of recording single-component peak particle
velocities. over-pressure levels and corresponding frequencies. to obtain full waveform data.
(b) Monitoring during pile driving, PDA Testing, pavement breaking, breaking of concrete,
excavation and other vibration-producing construction activity shall consist of recording single-
component peak particle velocities. which shall be printed on a strip chart.
(c) Continuous monitoring and full waveform data shall be recorded.
(d) During all monitoring of vibration-producing construction activities, the Contractor shall
document all events that are responsible for the measured vibration levels. and submit the
documentation to the Engineer with the data.
(B) A reading shall include set-up and post monitoring retrieval of any portable components, including
seismograph, geophones and any protective boxes.
(C) Prior to their use, seismographs shall be calibrated by the manufacturer as specified in Clause 4.39.5..(1)
(E). Subsequently such calibrations shall also be performed at least once per year. A current certificate of
calibration shall be submitted to the Engineer.
(D) If set up in a trigger mode. all channels of the seismograph system shall acquire signal waveform data
according to a programmed configuration and duration.
(E) Waveforms shall be automatically processed to determine vector sum peak (resultant peak velocity per
triaxial gauge) and peak frequency (inverse zero cross half period around component velocity).
(F) The system shall process and save summary data for vibration events exceeding minimum trigger
levels. Waveform data need only be saved for events exceeding a second threshold value to be directed by
the Engineer.
(G) The time from when a seismograph records a vibration event until it is ready to record another (latency
time) shall not exceed 30 seconds.

(4) Reporting
(A) Plots of seismograph data shall be the following types: strip charts and full waveform plots.
(B) For seismograph data collected in continuous monitoring (strip chart) mode the Contractor shall
provide the following:
(a) A permanent record of single-component peak particle velocity. This permanent record shall be
in the form of a scaled histogram strip chart printed or photocopied onto A4 paper. The strip chart
shall also indicate the time-and magnitude of maximum single-component peak particle velocity
measured during each thirty minute or less interval of the monitoring period.
(b) A tabular summary report printed on A4 paper summarising the maximum single component
peak particle velocity measured during each thirty minutes or less of monitoring.
(c) A CD or DVD Rom containing all maximum single component peak particle velocity data.
(C) For seismograph full waveform data, the Contractor shall provide the following:
(a) Plots consisting of a graphical display of the three component particle velocities and over-
pressure levels during the entire course of the vibration producing construction activity.
(b) A table summarising maximum peak particle velocities. accelerations and displacements. as
well as over-pressure levels (in dB), printed or photocopied onto A4 paper, for each vibration
producing construction activity.
(c) A CD or DVD containing all the above waveform data stored on it for future analysis.
Appendix

5. PILING WORKS
5.1.1. General Requirements
Piling shall be undertaken in accordance with the Series 1600 Appendices, Manual of Contract Documents
for Highway Works, Volume 1 Specification for Highway Works, Series 1600 (SHW) and relevant Notes for
Guidance Series NG 1600 and BS EN 1536:2010 Execution of Special Geotechnical Works - Bored Piles, BS
EN 12699:2015 Execution of Special Geotechnical works – Displacement piles and BS EN 14199:2015
Execution of special geotechnical works – micropiles. For any items not covered by these documents the
Contractor shall comply with the third edition of the ‘Specification for Piling and Embedded Retaining Walls’
produced by the Institution of Civil Engineers (ICE, 2016).
Reference shall be made to the following documents regarding matters relating to the safety of piling
works:
- Code of Practice for Foundations – BS 8004.

- Guide to Safety precautions and procedures for the construction and descent of machine-bored shafts
for piling and other purposes – BS 8008.
The piles are to be bored cast-in-situ piles or displacement (driven) piles. The Geotechnical Engineer shall
be consulted should alternative installation methods, including support fluid, be proposed by the Contractor
instead of the methods specified in Drawings or this document. Any support fluids proposed is to be
highlighted in the method statements and will require explicit approval from the designer prior to
installation, as the design does not account for the use of support fluid.
5.1.2.Programme of Ground Investigation, Trial piles and Working piles construction
(1) The Contractor shall make due allowance in his programme and resources planning and plants
deployment schedule on ground investigation field works, field testing and laboratory testing including field
work preliminary reports and laboratory testing preliminary reports (hereinafter referred to as Gl Works); trial
piles (including constructability and load tests) and working pile construction. inter alia, the following
activities:
(a) Completion of the G.I. works;

(b) Prepare and submit the field work final reports and laboratory testing final reports (hereinafter
referred to as GI Final Reports) in accordance with Clauses 4.8. and 4.9. respectively of the
Specification;
(c) Completion of all trial piles (including constructability and load tests);
(d) Prepare and submit trial pile reports in accordance with this Specification;

(e) The Engineer to interpret the G.I. data and trial pile results, verify the geotechnical design
parameters, review the geotechnical design and issue the revised working drawings (if necessary);
and;
(f) The time required for the working pile construction and the subsequent activities.
(g) The time required for skin grouting (both driven piles and bored piles) as confirmed by the
Engineer after review of GI data and trial pile results.
(2) The G.I. specified in the drawings for each trial pile location shall be completed and the G.I. Final Reports
shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to commencement of trial test pile construction. Within 7 days after
receipt of the GI Final Reports, the Engineer will confirm the trial pile details, including trial pile depth; testing
sequences; test method; magnitude of test loads; etc.
(3) No working pile construction, including driven tubular pile and bored pile, can be commenced until all
trial pile works, including installation; testing and submission of trial pile test reports to the Engineer for his
approval, are complete.
(4) Before the construction of working piles for each pier, the GI. specified in the drawings at that pier, shall
be completed and the final report shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.
(5) The GI. at the following Main bridge piers locations, and at selected pier locations along the viaducts
must be completed to the schedule given in the table below;
Time to Completion from

Priority G.I Investigation Locations
commencement date
Main Bridge To be completed within 60
Group A
Pier x, Pier x, Pier days
Viaduct Piers
A total of 12 pier locations (6 pier
locations on east side and 6 pier To be completed within 60
Group B
locations on west side) at the pier days
locations as identified by the
Engineer
(6) The Engineer will review the GI. data and the trial pile results, and confirm the piling design parameters;
pile toe levels and issue the revised working drawings (if necessary) for the foundation working piles for
each bridge pier, including the main bridge and the viaducts, according to the following schedule;
(a) At each Main bridge Pier -

 45 days after receipt of Trial Pile Constructability Report; or
 45 days after receipt of Trial Pile Load Test Reports of i driven tubular steel trial pile load
tests; or
 28 days after receipt of the final G.l. report with G.l. at the pier.

 28 days after receipt of the final G.l. report of all Priority G.I.- Group A in item (5) above.
whichever is the latest date.
(b) At each Transition Pier & Viaduct Pier locations -
 45 days after receipt of Trial Pile Load test Report of all trial bored pile load tests; or
 28 days after receipt of the final G.l. report with G.I. at the pier,
 28 days after receive of the final G.l. report of all Priority G.I.- Group B in item (5) above.
whichever is the latest date.
(7) All preliminary logs shall be submitted to the Engineer within 7 days after completion of drilling works at
each G.I. location.
(8) All field test preliminary reports shall be submitted to the Engineer within 7 days after completion of field
tests.
(9) Prior to the confirmation of the piling design and issue of revised working drawings (if necessary) by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall not commence piling works for the working piles.
(10) In the event that the Contractor is late due to his own fault in completing the GI Works, the GI Final
Reports, the trial pile load testing and/or trial pile load test reports. the Contractor shall not be entitled to any
extension of time for the completion of the Works or any Section thereof or any payment due to, arising
from or consequential to the delay in the confirmation by the Engineer of the piling design and issue of the
revised working drawings (if necessary) to the Contractor.
(11) There shall be no extension of time to be granted to the Contractor, if the Engineer confirms the piling
design and issued the revised working drawings (if necessary) within the number of days as stipulated
above in this Clause.
5.1.3.Grout for piling works
Grout for piling works shall consist of Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) and water. Sand, Pulverised Fuel
Ash (PFA) and admixtures may be used with the agreement of the Engineer. The maximum percentage of
PFA allowed in grout shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
The minimum cementitious content of grout shall be 600 kg/m 3, or as specified in the drawings, or unless
otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
Grout used shall have a minimum crushing strength as specified in the drawings.
The amount of bleeding of grout shall not exceed 2% in the first 3 hours and shall not exceed 4% in total;
the water shall be reabsorbed by the grout during the 24 hours after mixing.
Free expansion of grout shall not exceed 10% at the ambient temperature.

The chloride ion content of admixtures for concrete containing embedded metal or for concrete made with
SRPC shall not exceed 2% by mass of the admixture or 0.03% by mass of the cementitious content,
whichever is less.
The maximum total chloride content of grout, expressed as a percentage relationship between the chloride
ion and the cementitious content by mass in the grout, shall not exceed 0.1%.
(1) Grouting Submissions:
(a) Particulars of grouting for piling works
The following particulars of the proposed materials and methods of grouting for piling works shall
be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 28 days before grouting :
(i) Details of grouting and testing equipment.
(ii) Details of grout mix, including admixtures.
(iii) Methods of storing, mixing and injecting grout.
(iv) Methods of grouting to cover the whole of the exterior of the steel tubular pile, including
grouting stages, outlet valve arrangement, order of working and regrouting methods.
(v) Methods of controlling surface water, groundwater, leakage and ground movement, including
methods of instrumentation and monitoring for all of the above.
(b) Grouting equipment
(i) Grouting equipment for piling works shall be of type, quantity and size suitable for the grouting
required. The grouting equipment shall be kept clean and in good working order.
(ii) Standby grouting equipment shall be available at all times and shall be capable of being
brought into operation immediately in the event of breakdowns during grouting operations.
(iii) Grout pumps shall be a positive displacement type. Pumps shall be fitted with bypass valves to
allow standby pumps to be brought into operation.
(iv) Working pressure gauges shall be accurate to within 3% and shall be calibrated against a test
gauge before grouting starts.
(c) Mixing grout
(I) Grout for piling works shall be mixed by volume. The mix proportions may be adjusted if
approved by the Engineer depending on the results of the trial grouting, water tests or the results of
previously grouted piles.

(ii) Grout shall be mixed by adding approximately two-thirds of the grout mix to water, adding any
admixture, and then adding the remaining one-third of grout mix. Other mixing procedures shall not
be used unless permitted by the Engineer.
(iii) The time for which grout shall be mixed in high speed mixers shall be suitable for the type of
mixer used. Grout shall be continuously agitated in a holding tank after mixing and shall be
screened before being circulated in the grout lines. Mixed grout shall be continuously circulated in
such a manner that grout which is not taken in a hole can be returned to the holding tank.
(iv) Grout to which a retarding agent has not been added, and which is not used within 30 minutes
after mixing, shall not be used for grouting.
(d) Grout for Pile Skin Grouting
Where skin grouting is specified on the working drawings or as instructed by the Engineer, grout shall be
injected around the outer periphery of the steel tubular pile to strengthen the adjacent soil and to increase
the pile-soil interface skin friction. A cement / water / plasticizer mix shall be used of a consistency and
injection rate suitable for the application. as detailed in the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide the mix
design of the grout for the approval of the Engineer.
(e) Grout for Pile Base Grouting
The Contractor shall use an appropriate grout mix as agreed with the Engineer to inject grout under
pressure at an appropriate injection rate beneath the concrete plug of the steel tubular pile and at the base
of the steel pile to uniformly and suitably strengthen and consolidate the soil underneath the pile base
(applying uniform grout pressure over the whole cross-section area of the pile base and below the concrete
plug), as detailed in the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide the mix design of the grout for the approval
of the Engineer.
5.2. Cast-in-situ Piling
5.2.1. Construction
a. Description
This work shall consist of construction of reinforced concrete cast-in-situ bored vertical or inclined piles for
abutments/pier(s) of structures at different locations in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings
and to the requirements of these specifications. The Contractor shall undertake confirmatory sub-soil
investigations at the actual location of such pile foundations prior to taking up the work of pile foundation.
A permanent steel casing, if shown on the Drawings, shall be provided for construction of bored cast-in-situ
piles through the water and soft upper soil layers.
The pile boring shall be carried out using a temporary steel casing up to the pile toe or to a level approved
by the Engineer. The temporary casing shall be withdrawn, unless otherwise stated in Drawings.

Under certain circumstances the Contractor may be permitted to bore all part of the pile length without
casing under water or using drilling fluid to stabilise the borehole as referred to in Clause 5.2.1..
The piles shall be concreted and reinforced to resist pile loads and horizontal forces on the pile caps
according to the Drawings and these Specifications.
b. Materials
i.) Steel Casing
This part of the Specification deals only with the permanent steel casing. For steel casing used during
boring of the piles see Clause 5.2.1..
The steel shall comply with BS EN 10025-2, BS EN 10210 (all parts), BS EN 10219 (all parts) and BS EN
13670 where relevant.
The minimum thickness of the permanent steel casing shall be 12mm. The minimum upstand shall be at
least 1m to prevent contamination of the concrete in the bore and provide an appropriate up-stand above
surrounding ground level for safety. Where an upstand of 1.0m cannot be achieved, the contractor shall
provide other means to create a safe environment around the bore. The minimum length shall be 5 metres
under the riverbed or into firm strata. If the permanent casing is used in the boring operation or if the
handling and transport require greater thickness to avoid deformation or buckling, the increase in thickness
shall be provided by the Contractor at his own expense.
The steel casing shall be furnished in appropriate lengths and the Engineer shall approve the joints. The
connection shall be watertight.
The casing shall be handled and stored in a manner that shall prevent buckling, damage or distortion, and
other deformation as well as accumulation of dirt, oil and paint. When placed in the work it shall be free
from dirt, oil, grease, paint, mill scale and loose or thick rust.
The fabrication tolerances of the permanent casing are to be taken into account when considering the
diameter of the pile bore and placement.
The outside surface of the permanent casing of piles to river piers for a maximum depth of 5.0 m from the
underside of the pile cap shall receive two coats of anticorrosion tar type paint. The Engineer shall approve
the paint and its application shall follow the manufacturer’s recommendation.
ii.) Concrete
The Concrete shall conform to Section 8. of these Specifications.
Concrete placed under water or drilling mud by tremie shall have a cement content of not less than 400
kg/m3.

The concrete shall be placed without such interruption as would allow the previously placed batch to have
achieved a stiffness which prevents proper amalgamation of the two concrete batches.
No soil, liquid or other foreign matter shall be permitted to contaminate the concrete.
The density and consistency of the concrete shall conform to the tremie casting method and the
maintenance of sufficient workability (slump) of all the concrete during the casting and casing handling
period, including reasonably calculated delays shall be secured by a design mix (including the necessary
retarders and plasticisers), which is tested by trial mixes prior to the pile construction.
All relevant concrete properties such as slump, time of setting, temperature and strength shall be measured
on the trial mixes.
iii.) Reinforcement
The reinforcement shall comply with Section 9. of these Specifications.
iv.) Drilling Fluid
Where a support fluid is used for maintaining the stability of an excavation (including piles, barrettes or
diaphragm walls) both bentonite and (Non-toxic) polymer support fluids are acceptable. If the Contractor
wishes to use other fluids (i.e. water), appropriate procedures and control parameters shall be prepared
and sought approval by the Engineer.
The properties and use of the fluid shall be such that the following requirements are achieved:
 continuous support of the excavation

 during excavation and prior to concreting a thick filter cake layer shall not be allowed to form which
could affect shaft friction and/or concrete cover. Alternatively, the Contractor shall propose a
method of removing any excessive filter cake layer and field trials shall be carried out to prove the
effectiveness of the method.
 solid particles are sufficiently kept in suspension (except in the case of water and some polymers
where procedures for the cleaning or exchanging the fluid and cleaning the base of the excavation
are to be included in the project specification)
 the support fluid can be easily displaced and the interface layer is carried up on top of the rising
concrete. Note: the interface layer develops on top of the rising concrete and comprises
o solids settled out of the support fluid
o material scoured from the filter cake at the walls
o debris remaining at the base of the excavation at the start of tremie concreting
o thick support fluid contaminated with concrete and also concrete fines from the concrete
 the fluid does not coat the reinforcement to such an extent that the bond between the concrete and
reinforcement is impaired
 the fluid shall not cause pollution of the ground and groundwater before, during or after use

 the fluid and/or its constituents shall not possess properties which are potentially harmful to site
operatives taking reasonable precautions.
Supply
The Contractor shall obtain a certificate from the manufacturer of the bentonite powder, showing the
properties of the consignment delivered to site. This certificate shall be made available to the Engineer. The
certificate shall include details of the constituents, properties and mix proportions, including all additives.
The properties to be given by the manufacturer are the apparent viscosity range, the gel strength range for
solids in water, liquid limit, swelling index and pH value.
Mixing
Bentonite and any other material shall be mixed thoroughly with clean water to make a suspension which
shall maintain the stability of the pile excavation for the period necessary to place concrete and complete
construction. The bentonite solution shall comply with Section 5.12..
Where saline or chemically contaminated ground water occurs, special precautions shall be taken to
modify the bentonite in fresh water so as to render it suitable in all respects for the construction of piles. The
constituents of the fluid shall be mixed thoroughly to produce a homogeneous mix.
Test
The Contractor shall carry out testing of the support fluid in accordance with the Contractor’s schedule, the
Specifications and/or the third edition of the ‘Specification for Piling and Embedded Retaining Walls’
produced by the Institution of Civil Engineers (ICE, 2016), to demonstrate compliance within the limits for
each test. The frequency of testing and the method and procedure of sampling shall be proposed by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of the Works. The frequency of the
test may be adjusted as required depending on the consistency of the results obtained. The control tests
shall cover the determination of density, fluid loss, viscosity, filter cake thickness, marsh funnel time, shear
strength (gel strength, sand content (if required) and pH values.
The Contractor shall supply all equipment and experienced operators required to carry out test on the
drilling mud. The tests are considered as an essential part of the drilling operations.
c. Length of Piles
The basic length of pile and its diameter is shown on Drawings. The final length shall be decided by the
Engineer on the basis of study of the results of initial load test on piles and on the basis of actual boring
data observed on site for individual pile. Test piles shall be installed as directed by the Engineer at selected
location of the bridge.
d. Construction Methods
i.) General

Pile type and construction methods shall ensure that the pile shaft shall not be weakened by contamination
of the concrete by sectional reduction, by washing out of cement, by breaking during pulling of temporary
casings or in any other way, including construction of neighbouring piles.
The method of piling shall be such that a continuous monolithic pile of the specified cross-section is formed
to the design depth.
Assumed Procedure
The following construction procedure has been assumed in this Specifications. Final construction
procedure shall be as approved by the Engineer prior to commencing piling operations and subsequently
modified if required:
1) Place permanent steel casing, if required, in position and embed casing toe into river bed up to firm
strata. If not permanent steel casing is required, a sufficient length of temporary steel casing shall
be used to stabilise the upper part of the borehole.
2) Bore and excavate inside the steel casing down to casing toe level, or to a level approved, and
continue excavation to final pile toe level using either temporary casing under water or using
drilling mud. Water level inside casings shall at all times be at least 2m higher than the water level
outside the casings.
3) The bore must be washed by fresh bentonite solution flushing to ensure clear bottom at two stages,
viz prior to concreting and after placing reinforcement.
4) Place concrete continuously under water or drilling fluid by use of the tremie method.
5) Withdraw the temporary steel casing concurrently with concreting to the instructed level.
6) After hardening, the top section of the concrete pile shall be broken out to reach sound concrete.
Approval of Construction Method
In the tender, the Contractor shall describe the construction method he proposes, including information on
boring equipment, materials, methods of work, control of quality and bearing capacity and name of Sub-
contractor, if any. The Contractor shall submit references from similar jobs carried out by him or his Sub-
contractor.
During contract negotiations, the Contractor shall submit all requested supplementary detailed information
in writing.
After the Contract has been awarded to the Contractor, the Contractor shall carry out a detailed programme
and establish a procedure for the pile construction in accordance with the above information.
The detailed programme shall contain all information as requested on materials, equipment, methods of
works, etc. and be approved in writing by the Engineer.
Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the pile construction.
ii.) Setting out Piles

The Contractor shall check the casing position for each pile during and immediately after placing the
casing and agree it with the Engineer.
iii.) Diameter of Piles
The diameter of a pile shall be not less than the specified diameter on Drawings.
iv.) Tolerances
The center of the completed pile at the cut off level shall not deviate more than 75 mm from the
theoretically correct position shown on the Drawings. The inclination of the vertical pile shall not deviate
more than 1:75 from vertical. The Contractor shall provide suitable equipment such as an inverted
pendulum, to check the verticality of the boreholes at intervals during drilling and prior to concreting.
v.) Boring
Methods
Method of excavation shall be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
Excavation for cast in-place concrete piles shall be carried out using mechanical methods only. Excavation
by blasting and compressed air shall not be used unless permitted by the Engineer. Water or air jetting for
boring of the piles shall not be allowed.
The stability of excavations for cast-in-place concrete piles shall be maintained where necessary by the use
of:
- temporary casings.
- the use of thixotropic slurry containing bentonite or other agents is not favoured. Such agents
may only be used if it can be demonstrated with multiple additional trial pile load tests carried
out at the Contractors own expense, that the required capacities can be consistently achieved,
and the method is approved and endorsed by the Engineer.
The bottom of the casings shall be advanced a sufficient depth below the level of the bore excavation
within the casing to prevent the flow of soil into the casing.
After casting the piles the pile bases shall be grouted.
Boring near recently cast piles
Piles shall not be bored so close to other piles which have recently been cast and which contain workable
or unset concrete so that a flow of concrete could be induced from or damage caused to any of the piles.
Boring and excavation for a pile shall not be commenced until 24 hours after completion of any pile within a
radius of 6.0m center to center.
Temporary casings

Temporary casing of approved quality or an approved alternative method shall be used to maintain the
stability of pile excavations that might otherwise collapse.
Temporary casing shall be free from significant distortion. They shall be of uniform cross-section
throughout each continuous length.
Construction using bentonite slurry
Where used, excavations for piles using bentonite slurry shall be completely filled with the slurry from the
time that excavation commences until concreting is complete. The slurry shall be maintained at a level of at
least 2 m above the level of the external groundwater and such that the slurry pressure exceeds the
pressure exerted by the soil and ground water.
If bentonite is to be used, bentonite processing and cleaning system shall be implemented to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. 28 days before the use commencing the installation of the bentonite handling
plant a method statement shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval. The set up shall include a
laboratory to carry out regular tests on samples of bentonite recovered at regular intervals as stipulated in
this specification or in the drawings, or as instructed by the Engineer.
The testing and cleaning of the bentonite shall be carried out to comply with the requirements stipulated in
Clause 5.12..
If there is a loss of bentonite slurry from the excavation which is sufficient to result in a lack of stability and if
instructed by the Engineer, the excavation shall be immediately filled with material agreed by the Engineer.
The cause of the loss of slurry shall be investigated and excavation shall not recommence until remedial
measures have been consented by the Engineer are implemented.
If permitted by the Engineer. before commencement of pile bore construction using bentonite slurry, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer proposed remedial actions for the following:
- In the event of loss of slurry, how the Contractor proposes to handle the situation and what
measures he propose to take;
- In the event that the design skin friction values and hence the pile load carrying capacity
cannot be achieved with bentonite due to cake formation on the side walls of the bore, what
measures he proposes to take and the methodology to regain the pile capacity including the
method of establishing the capacity of the remediated piles.
Bentonite shall be thoroughly mixed with water in a colloidal mixer. The water shall be taken from the
public supply of potable water or other suitable sources of fresh water approved by the Engineer. and shall
be at a temperature of at least 5°C. The temperature of the bentonite slurry shall be at least 5°C when
supplied to the excavation.
If the groundwater is excessively saline or chemically contaminated, the bentonite shall be prehydrated or
the bentonite slurry shall be modified such that the slurry is suitable for the support of the excavation.

Bentonite slurry which will not be reused shall be removed from the Site as soon as practicable and safely
disposed. The Contractor shall agree methods of disposal of used bentonite with the Engineer and the local
Authorities.
Stability of pile excavation using drilling fluid
Where a borehole is formed without casing under water or using drilling fluid for maintaining the stability of
a boring, the level of the water or fluid in the excavation shall be maintained so that the water fluid pressure
always exceeds the pressure exerted by the soils and external ground water. The water or fluid level shall
be maintained at a level not less than 2m above the level of the river water level or any artesian pressure
level.
In the event of a rapid loss of water or bentonite suspension from the pile excavation, the excavation shall
be backfilled without delay and the instructions of the Engineer shall be obtained before excavation at that
location is resumed.
Disposal of excavated material
No excavated material shall be dumped into the river or any connecting waterway without the written
approval of the Engineer. Excavated material shall be removed from site and dumped either beyond areas
affected by dredging, or taken to the Contractors dumping areas on land. The Contractor shall be fully
responsible for costs involved in removing the excavated material to spoil.
Pumping from boreholes
Pumping from a borehole shall not be permitted unless a casing has been placed into a stable stratum
which prevents the flow of water from other strata in significant quantities into the boring, or unless it can
be shown that pumping will not have a detrimental effect on the surrounding soil or property.
Obstructions
Where boulders or other obstructions render it impossible to bore the pile, excavation operations inside pile
casing as directed by the Engineer shall be carried out to remove obstructions and the Contractor shall be
reimbursed for such operations only when the largest dimension of the obstruction exceeds 300 mm and
the obstruction is found more than 2.0 m below river bed.
Unexpected ground conditions
The Contractor shall report immediately to the Engineer any circumstances which indicates that in the
Contractor’s opinion the ground conditions differ from those expected by him from his interpretation of the
site investigation reports.
Boring records
During the boring of the pile the Contractor shall compile a boring log indicating depths and types of the
various soil layers encountered, as well as the information described in ‘Specification for Piling and

Embedded Retaining Walls’ produced by the Institution of Civil Engineers (ICE, 2016). Disturbed sample
shall be submitted to the Engineer as requested.
Final pile toe level
The final pile toe level shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer after due
consideration of the Contractor’s proposals, boring logs and test results.
Inspection and cleaning bottom of excavation
The time between final excavation and bottom cleaning and the start of concreting shall be reduced as
much as possible and shall not exceed 2 hours. To achieve this, the final 2 m of excavation shall not start
until all preparations for cleaning, reinforcing and concreting are finished. In case of unexpected delay, the
Contractor shall dump sand or gravel in the bore to 2m above toe level.
Immediately after excavation the bottom of the excavation shall be carefully cleaned for mud and
sedimentation and other soft material. A short interruption is recommended to allow the fine materials to
settle.
The cleaning shall be made by an approved method. Before cleaning of every pile, notice shall be given to
the Engineer.
Sedimentation tests shall be carried out by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer.
If boring without casing, the diameter of the boring hole for a representative number of piles shall be
measured by caliper prior to the placing of concrete. The verticality of boreholes will be checked as
directed by the Engineer. These measurements shall be done by the Contractor using approved equipment
and no reimbursement shall be made.
vi.) Placing reinforcement
The reinforcement shall be placed as indicated on the Drawings. Reinforcement in the form of a cage shall
be assembled with additional support, such as spreader forks and lacings necessary to form a rigid cage.
Hoops, links or helical reinforcement shall fit closely around the main longitudinal bars and be bound by
them by approved wire, the ends of which shall be turned into the interior of the piler or pour.
Reinforcement shall be placed and maintained in position.
The cover to all reinforcement shall be not less than 75 mm.
Joints in longitudinal steel bars shall not be generally permitted unless otherwise specified. Joints in
reinforcement shall be such that the full strength of the bar is effective across the joint and shall be made so
that there is no relative displacement of the reinforcement during the construction of the pile.
Joints in longitudinal bars in piles with tension (for instance for test loading) shall be carried out by welding
unless other methods has been approved by the Engineer.

If couplers are used, the reinforcement cage shall be fabricated as one piece on the ground and then split
into sections before being lifted.
vii.) Placing concrete
Approval
No concreting shall take place before the bottom of the excavation has been cleaned, the borehole
inspected and approval obtained in writing from the Engineer.
Methods
The method of placing and the workability of the concrete shall be such that a continuous monolithic
concrete shaft of the full cross sections is formed.
The concrete shall be placed continuously, and without such interruption as would allow the previously
placed batch to have hardened. In this respect the Contractor shall submit details of his contingency plans,
standby plant, etc. to be utilised in the event of an equipment failure.
The use of pumped concrete and the methods in its use shall be approved.
The Contractor shall take all precautions in the design of the mix and placing of the concrete to avoid
arching of the concrete in a casing. No spoil, liquid or other foreign matter shall be allowed to contaminate
the concrete.
Workability of Concrete
Slump measured at the time of discharge into the pile boring shall be minimum 150 mm, maximum 200
mm.
Placing concrete in piles
Each pile shall be concreted as soon as practicable after the permission of the Engineer has been
obtained. Concrete shall be placed without interruption until the complete pile is concreted.
If excavations for piles are supported by bentonite slurry or if the rate of ingress of water exceeds 0.3 l/s, the
following shall be complied with:
- Concrete shall be placed by tremie unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer,

- The tremie pipe outlet shall always be maintained at a depth of at least 3m below the surface
of fresh concrete.
- The minimum cementitious content of the concrete shall be as stipulated in Section 8. of this
Specification.
- The level of the top of the concrete in piles shall be at least 750mm above the specified cut-off
level,

- After the concrete has hardened. excess concrete shall be removed to the specified cut-off
elevation.
Placing concrete under water or drilling fluid
Concrete to be placed under water or drilling fluid shall be placed by tremie and shall not be discharged
freely into the water or drilling fluid.
Before placing concrete, measures shall be taken to ensure that there is no accumulation of silt or other
material at the base of the boring and the Contractor shall ensure that heavily contaminated bentonite
suspension, which could impair the free flow of concrete from the pipe of the tremie has not accumulated
in the bottom of the hole.
A sample of the bentonite suspension shall be taken from the base of the boring using and approved
sampling device. If the specific gravity of the suspension exceeds 1.25 the placing of concrete shall not
proceed. In this event the Contractor shall modify the mud quality.
The concrete shall be in accordance with Section 8. of these Specifications.
The concrete shall be placed in such a manner that segregation does not occur.
During and after concreting care shall be taken to avoid damage to the concrete from pumping and
dewatering operations.
The hopper and pipe of the tremie shall be clean and watertight throughout. The pipe shall extend to the
base of the boring and a sliding plug or barrier shall be placed in the pipe to prevent direct contact between
the fist charge of concrete in the pipe of the tremie and the water or drilling fluid. The tremie pipe shall at all
times penetrate the concrete which has previously been placed with a maximum embedment which
permits the free flow of concrete out of the base of the tremie hopper and a minimum embedment of 3 m. It
shall not be withdrawn from the concrete until completion of concreting. At all times a sufficient quantity of
concrete shall be maintained within the pipe to ensure the pressure from it exceeds that from the support
fluid and workable concrete above the tremie base.
The internal diameter of the pipe of the tremie shall be of sufficient size to ensure the easy flow of concrete.
The internal face of the tremie pipe shall be free from projections.
The tremie pipe shall be so designed that external projections are minimised, allowing the tremie to pass
within reinforcing cages without causing damage.
The Contractor shall maintain a record of the volume of concrete used and the level of the concrete in the
pile. Any deviations from the theoretical, or expected, volume/level relationship shall be immediately
reported to the Engineer.
viii.)Extraction of temporary casing
Base grouting of bored piles

The Contractor shall demonstrate that his operations when placing concrete will not affect the quality of the
concrete placed inside the pile bore. Placing of concrete shall only be carried out with the agreement of the
Engineer. For the plugged pile construction, the Contractor shall use a system approved by the Engineer to
inject grout under pressure beneath the concrete plug. Injection shall be continued until refusal is met at
the working pressures specified in the drawings. Grouting shall be carried out as stipulated in the drawings
and in this specification.
Workability of concrete
Temporary casings shall be extracted while the concrete within them remains sufficiently workable to
ensure that the concrete is not lifted. During extraction the motion of the casing shall be maintain in an axial
direction relative to the pile.
Concrete level
When the casing is being extracted a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained within it to ensure
that pressure from external water, support fluid or soil is exceeded and that the pile is neither reduced in
section nor contaminated. The toe of the temporary casing shall be kept minimum 2.0 m under the outlet of
the tremie.
No concrete shall be placed in the boring once the bottom of the casing has been lifted above the top of
the concrete: it shall be placed continuously as the casing is extracted until the desired head of concrete is
obtained.
Adequate precautions shall be taken in all cases where an excess head of water or support fluid could
occur as the casing is withdrawn, because of the displacement of water or fluid by the concrete as it flows
into its final position against the walls of the pile bore.
The pile shall be concreted with a certain overheight of minimum 600 mm for chiseling off the top of the
concrete down to sound hard concrete.
The pile top shall after clean cutting be embedded 75 mmm in the foundation.
Vibrating extractors
The use of vibrating casing extractors shall be permitted subject to avoid damage to the piles.
Reinforcement Cage
During concreting and pulling the casing the reinforcement cage shall be secured against uplift and top
shall be kept under close inspection.
Removal of temporary casings to piles

A sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained within temporary casings which are being withdrawn
to ensure that the pressure from external water or soil is exceeded and that the pile is not reduced in
section or contaminated.
Temporary casings which are in contact with concrete and which are not withdrawn before the initial set of
the concrete has taken place shall be left in place; the cost of which is to be borne by the Contractor.
Empty bores above piles
Empty bores and shafts which remain above the pile after concrete has been placed shall be temporarily
protected or filled with material agreed by the Engineer as soon as practicable.
Supervision
The execution of the pile concreting shall be supervised by a qualified person of the Contractor’s staff, who
will keep records on the relation between quantity of concrete used, level of concrete and withdrawal of
casing.
ix.) Temporary support
The Contractor shall ensure that free standing piles are temporarily braced or stayed immediately after
driving to prevent loosening of the piles in the ground and to ensure that no damage resulting from
oscillation, vibration or movement of any free-standing pile length can occur.
x.) Records
The Contractor shall keep records as indicated below for the installation of each pile and shall submit two
signed copies of these records to the Engineer not later than noon of the next working day after the pile
was installed. The signed records shall form a record of the work. The following data are requested:
- Contract
- Pile reference number (location)
- Pile type
- Nominal cross-sectional dimensions or diameter
- Date and time of boring
- Date and time of concreting
- River bed level at commencement of installation of pile
- Working level
- Pile toe level
- River water levels
- Pile head level
- Length of temporary casing
- Length of permanent casing
- Soils samples taken and in situ tests carried out

- Standing water level

- Length and details of reinforcement
- Concrete mix
- Volume of concrete supplied to pile and corresponding levels of concrete and casings
- All information regarding obstruction delays and other interruptions to the sequence of work
- Bentonite samples taken and laboratory test results
- Sequence of installation of piles in a group
xi.) Measures in case of rejected piles
If any pile is found unsatisfactory in the opinion of the Engineer for utilisation in the structure it shall be cut
off below the pile cap if so ordered by the Engineer.
The pile shall be replaced as directed by the Engineer. Al extra expenses shall be borne by the Contractor
and payment shall be made on the basis that no payment for replacement pile had to be provided for the
unsatisfactory pile.
When the safe bearing value of any pile is found by test to be less than the design load, longer piles or
additional piles shall be installed as ordered in writing by the Engineer and at the contractors cost with no
liability to the owner.
xii.) Measurements
xiii.) Payment
5.2.2. Load test on cast-in-situ piles
5.2.2.1. Definitions
i.) Allowable load
The load which may be safely applied to a pile after taking into account its ultimate bearing capacity,
negative friction, pile spacing, overall bearing capacity of the ground below and allowable settlement.
ii.) Compression pile
A pile which is designed to resist an axial force such as would cause it to penetrate further into de ground.
iii.) Kentledge
The dead weight used in a loading test.
iv.) Maintained load test
A loading test in which each increment of load is held constant either for a defined period of time or until
the rate of movement (settlement or uplift) falls to a specified value.
v.) Pilot pile

A pile installed before the commencement of the main piling works or a specific part of the works for the
purpose of establishing the suitability of the chosen type of pile and for confirming its design, dimensions
and bearing capacity keeping the provisions of the effect of surcharge at such pile location as additional
load. Pilot piles may be utilised as working piles, subject to the engineer’s approval.
vi.) Proof load
A load applied to a selected pile to confirm that it is suitable for the load at the settlement specified. A proof
load should not normally exceed 250% of the working load on pile.
vii.) Reaction system
The arrangement of kentledge, piles, anchors or rafts that provides a resistance against which the pile is
tested.
viii.)Test pile
Any pile to which a test loading is, or is to be, applied.
ix.) Ultimate bearing capacity
The load at which the resistance of the soil becomes fully mobilised.
x.) Working load
The load which the pile is designed to carry.
xi.) Working pile
One of the piles forming the foundation of a structure.
5.2.2.2. Supervision
All tests shall be carried out only under the direction of an experienced and competent supervisor
conversant with the test equipment and test procedure. All personnel operating the test equipment shall
have been trained in its use.
5.2.2.3. Safety precautions
a. General
When preparing for, conducting and dismantling a pile test the Contractor shall carry out the requirement of
the various regulations and other statutory instruments that are applicable to the work for the provision and
maintenance of safe working conditions, and shall in addition make such other provision as may be
necessary to safeguard against any hazards that are involved in the testing or preparations for testing.

b. Kentledge
Where kentledge is used the Contractor shall construct the foundations for the kentledge and any cribwork,
beams or other supporting structure in such a manner that this will not cause differential settlement,
bending or deflection of an amount that constitutes a hazard to safety or impairs the efficiency of the
operation. The kentledge shall be adequately bonded, tied or otherwise held together to prevent it from
falling apart, or becoming unstable because of deflection of the supports.
The weight of kentledge shall be greater than the maximum test load and if the weight is estimated from
the density and volume of the constituent materials an adequate factor of safety against error shall be
allowed.
c. Tension piles and ground anchors
Where tension piles or ground anchors are used the Contractor shall ensure that the load is correctly
transmitted to all the tie rods or bolts. The extension of rods by welding shall not be permitted unless it is
known that the steel will not be reduced in strength by welding. The bond stresses of the rods in tension
shall not exceed normal permissible bond stresses for the type of steel and grade of concrete used.
d. Testing equipment
In all cases the Contractor shall ensure that when the hydraulic jack and load measuring device are
mounted on the pile head the whole system shall be stable up to the maximum load to be applied. Means
shall be provided to enable dial gauges to be read from a position clear of the kentledge stack or test frame
in conditions where failure in any part of the system due to overloading, buckling, loss of hydraulic pressure
and so on might constitute a hazard to personnel.
The hydraulic jack, pump, hoses, pipes couplings and other apparatus to be operated under hydraulic
pressure shall be capable of withstanding a test pressure of 1.5 times the maximum working pressure
without leaking.
The maximum test load or test pressure expressed as a reading on the gauge in use shall be displayed and
all operators shall be made aware of this limit.
5.2.2.4. Construction of a pilot pile to be test loaded
a. Notice of construction
The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least 48 hours notices of the commencement of construction of
any pilot pile which is to be test loaded.
b. Method of construction
Each pilot test pile shall be constructed in a manner similar to that to be used for the construction of the
working piles, and by the use of similar equipment and materials. Any variation shall only be permitted with
prior approval.

Extra reinforcement/concrete of increased strength shall be permitted in the shafts of pilot piles at the
discretion of the Engineer.
c. Boring record
For each pilot pile which is to be tested a detailed record of the soils encountered during boring or during
progress of driving shall be made available and submitted to the Engineer daily not later than noon on the
next working day.
d. Cut-off level
The pile shaft shall terminate at the normal cut-off level or at a level required by the Engineer.
The pile shaft shall be extended where necessary above the cut-off level of working piles so that gauges
and other apparatus to be used in the testing process are not damaged by water or falling debris.
e. Pile head for compression test
For a pile that is tested in compression, the pile head or cap shall be formed to give a plane surface which
is normal to the axis of the pile, sufficiently largo to accommodate the loading and settlement measuring
equipment and adequately reinforced or protected to prevent damage from application of the concentrated
load from the loading equipment.
5.2.2.5. Preparation of a working pile to be tested
If a test is required on a working pile the Contractor shall cut down or otherwise prepare the pile for testing
as required by the Engineer.
5.2.2.6. Reaction Systems
a. Compression tests
Compression tests shall be carried out using kentledge, tension piles or specially constructed anchorages.
Where kentledge is to be used, it shall be supported on cribwork disposed around the pile head so that its
centre of gravity is on the axis of the pile. The bearing pressure under supporting cribs shall be such as to
ensure stability of the kentledge stack. Kentledge shall not be carried directly on the pile head, except when
directed by the Engineer.
b. Tension tests
Trial pile load tests shall be carried out in tension to determine the ultimate pile shaft skin friction in tension
(pull-out tests for the tensile capacity to be determined in 1.2 m diameter piles) of the bored cast in place
piles.
The section of pile that is above -15 m PWD or as specified by the Engineer shall be sleeved to eliminate
skin friction contributions from the upper soil layers. The diameter and the test length of the trial test pile

sections shall be such that the pull out force that the testing system can apply shall not be less 40 MN. The
test length of the trial pile and the pile diameters are as shown in the Drawings. The pile toe elevation shall
be in the bearing strata of the working piles. The test length of the trial piles shall be fully instrumented to
measure the stresses along the pile shaft and at the base of the pile. The instrumentation shall be robust to
withstand the forces during installation. The instrumentation shall have built in redundancy, so that even if
some fail others are available for measurement. Installation details of the instrumentations for monitoring of
pile stress under pile load testing are as shown in the Drawings.
c. Working piles
Where working piles are used as reaction piles their movement shall be measured to within an accuracy of
0.5mm.
d. Spacing
Where kentledge is used for loading vertical piles in compression, the distance from the edge of the test
pile to the nearest part of the crib supporting the kentledge stack in contact with the ground shall be not
less than 1.3m.
The center to center spacing of vertical reaction piles, including working piles used as reaction piles, from a
test pile shall be not less than three times the diameter of the test pile or the reaction piles or 2 m,
whichever the greater.
e. Adequate reaction
The size, length and number of the piles or anchors, or the area of the rafts, shall be adequate to transmit
the maximum test load to the ground in a safe manner without excessive movement or influence on the
test pile.
f. Care of piles
The method employed in the installation of any reaction piles, anchors or rafts shall be such as to prevent
damage to any test pile or working pile.
g. Loading arrangement
The loading arrangement used shall be designed to transfer safely to the test pile the maximum load
required in testing. Full details shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to any work related to the testing
process being carried out on the Site.
The trial piles shall be loaded to failure. Failure will be deemed to be increasing settlement without further
increase of load or the gross settlement (total settlement of pile head) exceeds 10 % of the pile diameter.
The test load shall be applied in at least 3 maintained loading cycles, and is loaded and unloaded
incrementally with each cycle for each load increment. The load shall be held for a minimum period of 10
minutes; or longer until the rate of settlement is less than 0.05 mm in 10 minutes. For the load cycles 2 and 3

the maximum load on each cycle shall be maintained for at least 72 hours before unloading in stages. The
loads, loading cycles and the unloading cycles shall be included in the method statement and approved
and agreed with the Engineer before carrying out the pile load tests.
The trial piles shall be tested to failure as described in this Specification Appendix 7.1 after the method
statements which have been submitted to the Engineer and they have been approved by the Engineer. The
locations of trial piles shall be as shown on the Working Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.
5.2.2.7. Equipment for applying load
The equipment used for applying load shall consist of one or more hydraulic rams or jacks. The total
capacity of the jacks shall be at least equal to the required maximum load. The jack or jacks shall be
arranged in conjunction with the reaction system to deliver an axial load to the test pile. The complete
system shall be capable of transferring the maximum load required for the test.
5.2.2.8. Sequence of works
The proposed sequence of work in undertaking the trial bored pile load tests are as follows:
(i) Excavate the bore for the pile to the required depth using casing or bentonite, following the same
equipment and procedures as those proposed for the construction of the working piles.
(ii) If using bentonite slurry, carry out echo-sounder test to ensure the profile of the pile comply with the
dimension tolerances.
(iii) Prepare the reinforcement cage including the installation of instruments in the cage and the other
necessary tubings and lower the cage down the pile bore.
(iv) Place Tremie concreting and cast in place the reinforcement cage.
(v) Await setting of concrete for at least 48 hours.
(vi) Base grout the pile
(vii) Carry out the static maintained pile load test and take the pile to failure
(viii) Or carry out a pull-out test
(ix) PDA tests shall be carried out on the pile after completing the maintained load test and taking the pile to
failure to ensure pile integrity and to determine the pile capacity using the PDA technique for comparison.
(x) After completion of the test concrete cores shall be recovered from the concrete shaft and tests carried
out on cores to determine strength and the elastic moduli at regular depths (at a minimum every 5m).

5.2.2.9. Measurement of load
Suitable approved measuring devices for determining the load on the pile shall be supplied by the
Contractor. Certificates of calibration shall be supplied to the Engineer. In addition, large diameter (i.e.
exceeding 1.2 m) test piles shall be instrumented at 5 different depths to measure the load distribution
along the piles. The instrumentation shall consist of both a mechanical system and strain gauges for
measuring the pile deformation. The mechanical system shall consist of 6mm steel rods or high tensile
wires gauges No. 23, placed in steel tubes down to the various depths, and connected to dial gauges at the
top. The strain gauges shall be of a stable type, wholly protected by a steel capsule. They shall be welded to
the steel reinforcement, 2 gauges at each depth.
The types of gauges to be used and other details on the instrumentation shall be approved by the Engineer.
5.2.2.10.Adjustability of loading equipment
The loading equipment shall be capable of adjustment throughout the test to obtain a smooth increase of
load or to maintain each load constant at the required stages of a maintained loading test.
5.2.2.11. Measuring movement of pile heads
a. General
In maintained load test movement of the pile head shall be measured by two of the methods as described
below. One method for settlement measurements, the other method for control.
b. Levelling method
An optical or any other levelling method by reference to an external datum may be used.
Where a level and staff are used, the level and scale of the staff shall be chosen to enable readings to be
made to within an accuracy of 0.5mm. A scale attached to the pile or pile cap may be used instead of a
levelling staff. At least two datum points shall be established on permanent objects or other well-founded
structures, or deep datum points shall be installed. Each datum point shall be situated so that only one
setting up of the level is needed.
c. Independent reference frame
An independent frame may be set up to permit measurement of the movement of the pile. The supports for
the frame shall be founded in such a manner and at such a distance from the test pile, kentledge support
cribs, reaction piles, anchorages and rafts that movements of the ground in the vicinity of the equipment do
not cause movement of the reference frame shall be made and a check shall be made of the movement of
the pile head relative to an external datum during the progress of the test. In no case shall the supports be
less than three test pile diameters or 2.0 m, whichever is the greater, from the center of the test pile.
The measurement of pile movement shall be made by two dial gauges rigidly mounted on the reference
frame that bear on surfaces normal to the pile axis fixed to the pile cap or head. Alternatively the gauges

may be fixed to the pile and bear on surfaces on the reference frame. The dial gauges shall be placed in
diametrically opposed positions and be equidistant from the pile axis. The dial gauges shall enable
readings to be made to within an accuracy of 0.1 mm.
The reference frames shall be protected from sun and wind.
d. Other methods
The Contractor may submit for approval any other method for measuring the movement of pile heads.
5.2.2.12. Protection of testing equipment
a. Protection from weather
Throughout the test period all equipment for measuring load and movement shall be protected from the
weather.
b. Records
During the progress of a test, the testing equipment and all records of the test as required shall be available
for inspection by the Engineer.
5.2.2.13. Supervision
a. Notice of test
The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least 24 hours’ notice of the commencement of the test.
b. Records
During the progress of a test, the testing equipment and all records of the test as required shall be available
for inspection by the Engineer.
5.2.2.14. Test procedure
a. Proof test by maintained load test
The maximum load which shall be applied in a proof rest is shown on the Drawings. The loading and
unloading shall be carried out in stages in accordance with these Specifications or as required by the
Engineer.
Following each application of an increment of load the load shall be held for not less than the period shown
in Table 5 -8or until the rate of settlement is less than 0.25mm/h and is slowing down. The rate of
settlement shall be calculated from the slope of the curve obtained by plotting values of settlement versus
time and drawing a smooth curve through the points.
Each stage of unloading shall proceed after expiry of the period shown in Table 5 -8.

For any period when the load is constant, time and settlement shall be recorded immediately on reaching
the load and at approximately 15 min intervals for 1 h. at 30 min intervals between 1 h and 4 h, and at 1 h
intervals between 4 h and 12 h after the application of the increment of load.
The Engineer may require that the full loading, or any portion of the loading, be maintained on the pile for
periods longer than shown in Table 5 -8.
Table 5- 8 - Loading Sequence
Load, % of Working Load

Minimum time of holding load
Bored piles
25 1h
50 1h
75 1h
100 1h
75 10 min
50 10 min
25 10 min
0 1h
100 6h
125 1h
150 6h
175 1h
200 24h – Proof load
175 10 min
150 10 min
125 10 min
100 10 min
75 10 min
50 10 min
25 10 min
0 1h
5.2.2.15. Presentation of results
a. Results to be submitted
Results shall be submitted as:
i.) A summary in writing to the Engineer, unless otherwise directed within 24 hours of the completion
of the test, which shall give for a proof test by maintained load for each stage of loading, the period
for which the load was held, the load and the maximum settlement or uplift recorded.

ii.) The completed schedule of recorded data within seven days of the completion of the test.
b. Schedule of recorded data
The Contractor shall provide information about the tested pile in accordance with the following schedule
where applicable.
i.) General
Site location
Contract identification
Proposed structure
Date of test
ii.) Pile details
Identification (number and location of the test pile)
Ground level at pile position
Head level at which test load is applied
Type of pile
Length in ground
Level in ground
Level of toe
Details of permanent casing
Records of base grouting (grout mix details, grout pressures, grout volumes, and time taken for
grouting)
iii.) Installation details
Dates and times of boring and concreting of test pile and adjacent piles
Date and time of casting concrete
iv.) Test procedure
Weight of kentledge
Tension pile, ground anchor or compression pile details
Plan of test arrangement showing position and distances of kentledge supports, rafts, tension or
compression piles and reference frame to test pile
Jack capacity
Method of load measurement
Relevant dates and times
v.) The ground investigation data (borehole logs, CPT logs, insitu test data and laboratory test data).
vi.) Details of the PDA test carried out and the capacity predicted.
vii.) details of the cleaning of the soil and bentonite inside the pile, lowering the instrumented
reinforcement cage, and tremie concreting the pile.
viii.)Test results
In tabular form
In graphical form: loads plotted against movements and time
Concrete cube test results

Concrete Elastic Modulus determination tests on concrete cores recovered from the installed pile
Static test loading arrangement details and drawings
Description of the static load test, instrument monitoring data, details of the jacks, loading
sequence and unload-loading sequences. pile head settlement.
Reduction and processing of monitoring data
Presentation of the load and stress distribution plots with depth along the pile for the various loads.
as the load is increased and decreased and the final loads and stresses at failure.
End bearing pressures at various loads and the end bearing at failure
Conclusions and the recommended ultimate skin friction and end bearing pressures for the pile,
and correlation with the soil parameters to determine the α and βvalues, and any other parameters.
5.2.2.16. Completion of a test
a. Measuring equipment
On completion of a test all equipment and measuring devices shall be dismantled, checked and either
stored so that they are available for use in further tests or removed from the site.
b. Kentledge
Kentledge and its supporting structure shall be removed from the test pile and stored so that they are
available for use in further tests or removed from the Site.
c. Temporary piles
On completion of a preliminary test, temporary tension piles shall be cut off below ground level, removed
from the Site and the ground made good with approved material as specified.
5.3. Tubular steel piling
5.3.1.Construction
a. General
The work covered by this Section of the Specification comprises the provision of all necessary plant, labour,
equipment, appliances, and materials in performing all operations in connection with the fabrication and
installation of tubular steel piles to support the bridge.
b. Ordering of piles
The Contractor shall order the piles to suit the construction programme and seek the Engineer’s approval
before placing the order.
c. Materials
Tubular steel piles shall be manufactured from steel to BS EN 10210 or equivalent. Any additional steel in
the form of stiffening plates, jetting manifolds or shear keys shall be manufactured from the same grade of

steel unless otherwise approved. Steel tubes for use in built-in jetting arrangements shall be manufactured
to BS EN 10296 or equivalent.
d. Commencement of piling works
Piling works (including both trial piles and working piles), including groundwater control and ground
treatment for piling works, shall not commence until the relevant proposed materials and methods of
construction. including construction and testing of the trial piles, have been submitted to the Engineer and
the Engineer has issued his written approval of the same. Piling works at the abutments shall not
commence until the consolidation of the embankments are sufficient to prevent any potential lateral
movement of the piles. The consolidation of the underlying soil strata shall be monitored by installing
geotechnical instruments such as settlement markers and settlement plates. piezometers and standpipes,
e. Prevention of damage due to piling works
The position of existing utilities shall be determined and underground utilities adjacent to the piles shall be
exposed or otherwise accurately located before piling works start.
Where the utilities will be affected by the piling, they shall be relocated to safer areas, or re-provisioned as
necessary.
All necessary measures shall be taken to minimise the settlement of the ground and adjacent structures
and utilities and to prevent the formation of cavities in the ground resulting from piling works.
The vibrations due to piling works at structures, utilities and previously installed piles measured in terms of
peak particle velocity shall not exceed 25 mm/s in general.
f. Monitoring of noise, vibration, ground movement and groundwater level
Measurements of noise level, vibration, ground movement and groundwater level shall be taken at
locations and time intervals stated in the Contract or as instructed by the Engineer when piling works are
being carried out. Records of the measurements shall be kept and a copy of the records provided to the
Engineer. Arrangements for installing instruments and taking measurements both inside and outside the
Site shall be made by the Contractor.
All measurements of noise level, vibration. ground movements and groundwater level variations shall be
made with instruments of a type agreed by the Engineer.
Sufficient numbers of piezometers and survey points shall be installed and monitored to allow the changing
groundwater levels and the effects on structures, utilities and previously installed piles to be measured in
real time using automated monitoring and data logging devices. Measurements shall be taken at regular
intervals when groundwater control is being carried out and until such time as the groundwater has been
allowed to resumed its natural regime.

The Contractor shall inform the Engineer immediately of any sudden changes in the measurement trends
and if any unanticipated changes in measurements take place.
If the specified limits, or limits agreed by the Engineer, on vibration, groundwater movement or groundwater
level are exceeded, the work causing the limits to be exceeded shall be stopped and particulars of
proposed changes to the methods of construction shall be submitted to the Engineer for consent.
g. Ground investigation for piling works
Before piling works start at each bridge pier location of the main bridge river spans, and at each of the pier
and abutment locations of the approach viaducts, and for the trial piles, a borehole of minimum H size shall
be sunk to a depth at least three (3) pile diameters deeper than the pile design toe level of the deepest pile
within the pile group as specified in the Contract or instructed by the Engineer, to determine the soil profile
and the soil characteristics. A piezocone penetration test (PCPT) shall also be carried out to a depth equal
to 3 times the pile diameter below the design pile toe level of the piles, or to a level as instructed by the
Engineer. The PCPT location shall be at 6 m away from the borehole location. The borehole and PCPT
location plan is shown in Drawing No XXX.
Standard Penetration Tests (SPT) shall be carried out at 2m depth intervals, commencing from 2m below
the riverbed or ground level to the bottom of the borehole. The method of drilling, sampling, testing and
reporting shall be as stated in Section 4..
ln-situ soil tests shall be carried out at regular depth intervals as specified by the Engineer. ln-situ soil tests
shall include Flat Plate Dilatometer (DMT) Test, self-boring pressuremeter tests, Menard or OYO type
pressuremeter tests, and field vane shear tests in soft to firm clays shall be carried out as per specifications
detailed in Section 4., at a depth interval not exceeding 10m or as instructed by the Engineer.
Generally, in the riverine boreholes the tests shall be concentrated below elevations of - 50 m PWD.
However, tests shall be carried out above -50 m PWD in drillholes close to and in the river banks as
required by the Contract to assess driveability and the pile capacity.
In the case of the drillholes for the approach viaduct piers, in situ tests shall be carried out from immediately
below the ground level.
5.3.2.Fabrication
Except where otherwise stated in this Clause, fabrication shall be in accordance with Section 6..
a. Manufacturing tolerances
All pile shall be of the type and cross-sectional dimensions shown on the Drawings. The tolerance on
length shall be -0 and +75 mm. The rolling or manufacturing tolerance shall be such that the actual weight
of any section does not differ from the theoretical weight by more than ±5%.

The external dimensions shall not vary from the nominal dimensions by more than ±1% or ±13mm
whichever is the lesser at any section as measured by using a steel tape around the circumference.
The out-of-roundness (i.e. the ovality: the difference between the major and minor outside diameters) shall
not exceed 1% of the nominal diameter, except that 6mm shall be the maximum for wall thickness up to
50mm; and shall not exceed a ratio of out-of-roundness to wall thickness of 1:8 for wall thicknesses in
excess of 50mm. However, for large pile diameter pipe over 1.2 m outside diameter, where it can be shown
that the circumference tolerance is limited to ±6mm maximum, then the out-of-roundness tolerance shall
be 13mm maximum.
The root edges or root faces of lengths of piles that are to be shop butt-welded shall not differ by more than
3mm. Pile lengths shall be set-up so that differences in dimensions are matched as evenly possible.
b. Matching of pile lengths
Longitudinal seam welds forming a complete pile wall whenever possible be evenly staggered at the butt
by at least 90º to obtain a satisfactory match of the ends of piles and the specified straightness.
c. Straightness
The deviation from straightness shall not exceed 1/1000 of the appropriate gauge length. The gauge length
shall be taken to be the length of each fabricated piece and the total length of the pile. Checks shall be
carried out at a minimum of three radial points on each pile.
d. Welding
The piles shall be fabricated by longitudinal seam welding in accordance with the requirements of
Specification Section 6.. Longitudinal butt seam welds shall be full penetration butt welds, and extension
plates shall be used at the start and finish of welding to ensure full throat thickness.
e. Built-in jetting installation
Where internal jetting is used to assist penetration of the piles to the design toe levels, the jetting pipes and
manifolds shall be fabricated and installed in the pile manufacturer’s workshops. The vertical pipes shall
either be sleeved or welded to the inner wall of the pile and evenly spaced around the periphery. Design of
welded connections shall take full account of dynamic and fatigue effects of hammering. The lower ends of
the pipes shall terminate in a nozzle with the tip 150 mm above the bottom edge of the pile. The upper ends
shall terminate at removable manifolds place below the head of the pile with connections for the jetting
pumps. Pipes and manifolds shall be securely fixed to prevent dislodgement when the pile driven.
f. Shear keys
Where it is intended to remove soil from the interior of the pile and close the base of the pile by a concrete
plug, shear keys shall be welded to the interior of the pile at manufacturer’s works.

g. Fabrication of piles on site
When the pile lengths are made up on site all test procedures and dimensional tolerances shall conform to
the relevant Clauses of this Specification. Add-on pile sections shall be provided with tightly fitting stabbing
guides to facilitate alignment. The guider should be capable of safely supporting the full weight of the add-
on section prior to welding.
5.3.3.Corrosion/Abrasion protection of steel piles
a. Exposure zones
The foundations shall be divided into zones according exposure conditions.
These zones shall be as defined below:
Zone 1: below lowest scour level. This zone is permanently embedded in the ground.
Zone 2: above lowest scour level but below a level of (-) 15 mMSL. This zone is expected to be
embedded in the ground for most of the design life but could be exposed to river flow from
time to time.
Zone 3: above a level of (-) 15 mMSL but below a level of (-1) mMSL. This zone is below low water
level. The upper one metre is embedded in concrete. The remainder could either be
embedded in soil or exposed to river flow.
Zone 4: above (-) 1 mMSL. This zone is embedded in concrete.
b. Types of protection
Corrosion/abrasion protection shall be provided to steel parts not embedded in concrete according to the
zone in which they lie as specified below:
Zone 1: no protection is necessary.
Zone 2: sacrificial thickness of steel not less than 5 mm.
Inorganic Zinc primer shall be applied to the exterior surfaces of the steel piles above -15mMSL Elevation.
For tubular steel pile below -15mMSL elevation no coating shall be applied. The minimum thickness of the
Inorganic Zinc primer shall be 75μm.
Protective coatings shall be removed from the heads of steel piles which will be encased in concrete by
blast cleaning, flame cleaning or by other methods agreed by the Engineer. The coatings shall be removed
to a level of 75mm above the underside of the concrete into which the pile will be encased.

c. Sacrificial steel
The sacrificial thickness of steel shall be the difference between the actual thickness and the required in-
service structural design thickness of the pile. The latter shall be derived in accordance with the Drawings.
5.3.4.Marking, handling and storage
a. Marking
After a pile has been fabricated the date of fabrication, reference number and length shall be clearly
marked. Each pile shall be graduated at appropriate intervals along its length and at intervals of 250 mm
along the top 5 m.
b. Handling and storage
The method and sequence of lifting, handling, transporting and storing of all piles shall be such that the
piles are not damaged. Only the designed lifting and support points shall be used. During transport and
storage piles shall be stored on adequate supports located under lifting points of piles.
Lifting shall be by means of padded slings or internal cones. Holes of hooks shall not be cut in the piles for
lifting purposes but pad eyes may be attached at the designed lifting points. The piles shall be pitched by
lifting at the specified points with approved running slings. Where pad eyes are provided, they should be
removed by flame-cutting following by grinding smooth.
If piles are delivered by self floatation, the end bulkheads shall be removed above water, except as
specifically approved.
Piles shall be stored horizontally off the ground on level supports and in a manner which will not result in
damage or deformation to the piles or in contamination of the piles. Coated piles shall be handled and
stored in a manner which will not result in damage to the coatings. Bituminous coated piles shall not be
stacked.
Different types and sizes of piles shall be stored separately. Piles shall be stacked in groups of the same
length, with packings of uniform thicknessprovided at the lifting points.
5.3.5.Pile driving
a. General
The Contractor shall submit full details of this proposed methods for the approval of the Engineer.
The term equipment as used herein shall include all equipment necessary for pile installation including
conventional pile driving, jetting, internal excavation, drilling, vibration, concrete plugging and grouting.
Equipment shall be in good operating condition and be well maintained throughout pile installation.

The equipment maintained on Site shall be capable of installing the piles to toe levels up to 4 m below
those shown on the approved Drawings.
The Contractor shall demonstrate to the engineer the adequacy of the hammers he proposes to use. The
Contactor shall commission a driveability analysis for different pile penetrations for the hammers,
cushioning arrangement and followers he proposes to use. A parametric study shall also be made to
assess the changes in hammer efficiency, cushion properties and soil characteristics.
Preliminary test piling shall be carried out as specified in Clause 5.2.2..
At each pier location, prior to the commencement of piling, the Contractor shall carry out soil tests including
SPT or CPT to verify the ground conditions to a level 10m below the design toed level. Only data below the
maximum general scour level is required.
The pile toe levels as indicated in the drawings shall be reviewed by the Engineer upon receipt of all ground
investigation data and trial piles results as required in this Contract. The final design pile toe levels may be
deeper than those indicated in the drawings and the Contractor shall allow sufficient time in his program to
complete and submit reports for GI and trial piles to the Engineer for review and confirmation of design.
Upon review of the GI. data and trial pile results, the Engineer may instruct to carry out skin grouting
(provisional) for ALL or some of the driven tubular piles for the Main Bridge.
Where the Contractor decides to remove the soil from inside the tubular piles to facilitate installation of the
pits to the design depth, soil removal shall be achieved by a combination of water jetting at the soil surface
and airlifting or by other such methods as agreed with the Engineer. However. the Contractor shall exercise
all necessary care not to unduly disturb the soil at the base of the steel tube as the pile is being driven. The
Contractor shall at all times maintain the maximum length of soil inside the tubular pile that will still allow
him to drive the pile. In addition to the maximum length of soil (referred to as the soil head), a head of water
that is above the hydrostatic head shall be maintained inside the steel tube to prevent the sand. particularly
at the base of the pile, from boiling. The contractor shall submit to the Engineer for agreement a method
statement. on the verification of the depth of soil inside the pile shaft during pile installation. The contractor
shall measure the depth to the soil surface inside the pile shaft when instructed by the Engineer, and work
out the height of the soil column above the base of the pile shaft.
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer without delay of any sudden change in driving characteristics
such as large increases or decreases in the rate of penetration.
Piles driven with soil removal shall be backfilled with sand from the top of the concrete plug up to the level
shown on the Working Drawings.
When driving the pile the Contractor shall install accelerometers and other monitoring devices required. to
carry out his own pile driver analyser (PDA) using CAPWAP to monitor the pile during installation and also
to estimate the capacity of the pile as it is being installed. The Contractor shall carry out his own
measurements on all driven steel tubular piles when they are being installed. Using this data the Contractor

shall closely monitor his pile installations and also provide a detailed report of pile installation as stipulated
in this specification which will include an initial assessment of the pile capacity.
b. Leaders and templates
At all stages during driving and until incorporation in the pier units the free length of the pile shall be
adequately supported and restrained by means of leaders, templates, temporary supports or other guide
arrangements to maintain position and alignment and to prevent buckling. Lengths which remain
unsupported after driving shall be adequately restrained until they are secured by concreting or grouting
into the pier units. These constraint agreements shall be such that damage to the piles is prevented.
c. Driving method
Driving without jetting
The driving of each pile shall be continuous until the design toe level, resistance or set has been reached as
agreed with the Engineer. An interruption to driving will be permitted for the purpose of splicing on an
additional length of pile or for changing hammer size.
Driving stresses shall not exceed 80% of the yield stress of the steel.
Driving in conjunction with jetting
Built-in jetting facilities as specified in Clause 5.2.1. shall be operated continuously from time of lowering the
pile through the water, during driving and during splicing until the pile toe has reached an elevation above
design toe level agreed with the Engineer. Jetting shall then be shut down and driving by hammer shall
continue until the design toe level, re-compaction has been achieved, all as agreed with the Engineer. A
minimum of 100 blows of the hammer shall be delivered in this re-compaction process. The re-compaction
may, if required, be supplemented by injecting cement grout through the jetting pipes. Injection pressures
shall not be such as to cause hydrofracture of the surrounding soil. Driving stress shall not exceed 80% of
the yield stress of steel.
Where jetting and airlifting are employed the quantity of service water required to supplement the jetting
water shall be such as to maintain the water level in the pile between 0 and 5 m above river water level
when the toe level is below maximum scour level.
Driving in conjunction with soil removal
Where the Contractor decides to remove the soil plug from the interior of the pile to facilitate installation of
the pile to the design toe level, soil removal shall be achieved by a combination of jetting and airlifting or by
rotary drilling with fluid circulation or by other such methods as agreed with the Engineer. A soil plug of
minimum depth two pile diameters shall remain within the pile when the pile tip is below maximum scour
level. Where jetting and airlifting are employed the quantity of service water required to supplement the
jetting water shall be such as to maintain the water level in the pile between 0 to 5 m above river level when
the toe level is below maximum scour level.

When the pile has been driven down to a toe elevation close to the design elevation, jetting and airlifting
shall be suspended and the pile shall be driven by hammer only to a satisfactory set to be agreed with the
Engineer. Further soil removal shall then be undertaken to leave a plug of soil having a depth of twice the
diameter of the pile above the tip, followed by placing a concrete plug as specified in this Section.
After a waiting period to allow the concrete plug to attain its design strength the pile and its base shall be
grouted as specified in Clause 5.3.6..
d. Driving procedures and re-drive check
Driving using any of the procedures specified in this clause shall be undertaken only in the presence of the
Engineer. A detailed record shall be made over the full driving length of each pile.
For unplugged pile construction a re-drive check shall be made after a waiting period of at least 24 hours
following completion of driving to the design toe level of the first 4 working piles to be driven. Thereafter any
re-drives shall be made as deemed necessary by the Engineer as a result of these initial re-drives. All piles
shall be checked for heave 24 hours after driving and if heave has occurred and, if required by the
Engineer, the pile shall be re-driven at least to the original penetration and resistance to driving after
completion of driving all other piles to the pier position.
The final set of each pile shall be recorded as the number of blows required to produce a penetration of 50
mm. when a final set or resistance is being measured the following requirements shall be met:
 The exposed part of the pile shall be in good condition without damage or distortion.
 The cushioning materials, if any, shall be in good condition.
 The hammer blow shall be in line with the pile axis and the impact surfaces shall be flat and at right
angles to the pile and hammer axis.
 The hammer shall be in good condition, delivering adequate energy per blow and operation
correctly.
 The temporary compression of the pile shall be recorded if required by the Engineer.
e. Submissions for steel driven piling Works
(a) The following particulars of the proposed materials and methods of construction for piling works shall
be submitted to the Engineer.
(i) Details of Constructional Plant,
(ii) Methods and sequence of installation of piles, including methods of avoiding damage to
adjacent piles, structures and utilities and measures to be taken to deal with hard material and
obstructions,
(iii) Method of determination of the driving stresses in the pile and in any other component used
while driving the pile,

(iv) Methods of jointing and lengthening piles,
(v) Methods of controlling groundwater. and/or methods of treatment of groundwater,
(vi) Anticipated ground vibration, ground movement and groundwater drawdown and methods of
instrumentation and monitoring,
(vii) Methods and sequence of excavation, including methods of supporting excavations and of
cleaning the excavation,
(viii) Methods of concreting,
(ix) Methods of plugging piles with concrete.
(x) Methods of base / skin grouting,
(xi) Methods of sand filling and sand compaction,
(xii) Details of protective coatings to steel piles. including manufacturers' literature,
(xiii) Details of the Pile Driver Analyser (PDA) tests to be carried out on the driven steel tubular piles
and the bored piles, including method statements, names of the specialist international companies
undertaking the tests, the CVs of personnel assigned to carry out the tests,
(xiv) Details of the Constructability Trial Piles including method statements, plant and equipment to
be used, the instrumentation and monitoring work proposed during driving of steel tubular piles.
monitoring and analyses software to be used, and the method statements on how post installation
testing is to be carried out,
(xv) Details of all the fully instrumented Trial Pile Load Tests including method statements, detailed
drawings, instrumentation details, loading schedules (they shall be maintained load tests (MLT))
and Curriculum Vitae (CV) of the personnel carrying out the tests.
(xvi) Methods of testing, including details of the specialist firm for non-destructive testing of welds
and the programme for PDA and Pile Integrity Testing (PIT). Details of methods proposed to carry
out pile integrity tests, the details of the specialist companies undertaking these tests, details of the
equipment, and the CVs of personnel carrying out the tests.
(b) The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 21 days before the relevant Trial Pile Load
Test piles are constructed.
(c) When working piles are being installed, the particulars of installing the working piles shall be submitted
to the Engineer at least 21 days before the relevant piling works start.

f. Driving records
The Contractor shall keep records of the driving of every pile as instructed by the Engineer and shall submit
these details to the Engineer not later than noon on the following day.
The records shall show the following:
- The date and time of driving and re-driving.

- The pier number.
- The number, weight and length of the pile.
- The weight and drop of the hammer.
- The number of blows per metre over the whole depth of penetration.
- The number of blows per 250 mm over the last 5m of penetration.
- The number of blows per 50 mm over the last 500 mm.
- The river level.
- The bed level.
- The level of the surface of the sand inside the pile at the time of splicing or hammer change and
completion of driving.
- Any other information which the Engineer may require.
Records of temporary compression shall be taken for the preliminary test piles and for representative piles
throughout the Contract as directed by the Engineer.
g. Tolerances
Each pile shall be installed to within 150 mm of the position shown on the approved Drawings at the
underside of the concrete pile cap. The maximum permitted deviation of the finished piles from the
specified rake is 1 in 75.
h. Cut-off level
Piles shall be cut-off to the levels shown on the approved Drawings or as otherwise directed by the
Engineer. A tolerance of plus 25 mm or minus nil on the specified cut-off level will be permitted. The cut
shall be plane and square to the axis of the pile.
i. Temporary bracing
If required by conditions of river bed level and currents, the Contractor shall provide and erect suitable
bracing to hold the piles firmly in place throughout the period of construction of the substructures. The
bracing if required shall be of sufficient strength to carry the loading from any formwork or other devices
used for construction of the piers and abutment.
j. Disposal of offcuts
Offcuts shall not be dumped on the river bed and shall be removed from site.

k. Particulars of construction using bentonite slurry
(a) Use of bentonite or other equivalent polymer based slurries are permitted to be used by the Engineer,
with his approval.
The following particulars of the proposed materials and methods of construction using slurry containing
bentonite or other agent shall be submitted to the Engineer, at least 21 days before the relevant excavation
starts.
(i) A certificate for bentonite showing the type, the manufacturer's name the date and place of
manufacture and including details of the apparent viscosity range in Pa.s and the gel strength
range in N/m2 (Pascals) for solids In water,
(ii) Characteristics of the bentonite slurry in a freshly mixed condition and in the excavation
immediately before concreting,
(iii) Methods of quality control, sampling, testing, mixing, storing, re-circulating, removing silt and
sand, preventing spillages and disposal from the Site,
(iv) Head of bentonite slurry, including stability calculations,
(v) Details of guide walls, if any,
(vi) Methods of placing concrete by tremie,
(vii) Sequence of construction.
(b) Loss of pile/soil interface skin friction is a common problem when using bentonite to stabilise the bore
of the bored pile. Where bentonite is used the Contractor shall propose a methodology for the approval of
the Engineer to rectify this problem in the event that such a reduction of skin friction occurs, if so
demonstrated by the results of the Trial Pile Load Tests or by the working load test results obtained from
Working Piles.
(c) In the event the trial pile load tests demonstrate that the design skin friction capacities cannot be
achieved, the Engineer shall review the pile load test reports prepared by the contractor and will decide if
additional trial pile load tests with skin grouting need to be carried out. The Engineer shall then instruct the
contractor to undertake these additional trial pile load tests at suitable locations. If the 1 st trial without skin
grouting fails to achieve required design parameters, the Engineer may decide to abandon the rest of the
trials without skin grouting. The number of additional trial pile load tests to be carried out without skin
grouting shall be decided by the Engineer.
(d) If such slurries, bentonite or other polymer based slurries are allowed to be used by the Engineer, the
Engineer shall require additional testing of working piles. These additional tests will include static Working
Load Testing of working piles and PDA testing of working piles. The PDA testing shall be carried out on at
least 33% of the working piles if bentonite is used.

5.3.6.Plugging piles with concrete
a. Preparation
The length of the pile interior over which the concrete plug is required shall be thoroughly cleaned by high
pressure water jetting and debris shall be removed by airlifting. Measures shall be taken to prevent the
accumulation of silt and other material at the base of the excavation. During the process of base-cleaning,
the Contractor shall maintain a sufficient positive water head inside the borehole in order to prevent ingress
of water from the outside.
The contractor shall have the necessary means and equipment to demonstrate to the Engineer that the
cleaning has been carried out thoroughly. This will include if necessary the use of a video camera with
sufficient lighting, acoustic televiewers, or similar equipment. The contractor’s method statement shall
include how this verification is to be carried out by the contractor.
b. Concrete mix
Concrete shall comply with the requirements of Specification Section for underwater concrete.
In addition, the Contractor shall take all necessary steps to ensure that the concrete temperature in place
does not exceed 70º C during hydration.
Alternatively, the plug may be precast and the annulus between the pile wall and the precast plug shall be
injected with grout.
c. Placing
Concrete shall be placed continuously by tremie pipe or by pumping. The pile shall be filled to a height
above design plug top level equal to 10% of the design height of the plug.
The concrete plug in the pile shall ensure adequate bond with the pile shaft. Particular attention shall be
paid to limiting early thermal shrinkage effects, and the temperature of the concrete in place shall not
exceed 70°C.
d. Base grouting
For the plugged pile construction, as specified in this Clause, the Contractor shall use an approved system
to inject grout under pressure beneath the concrete plug. A bentonite/cement grout incorporating and
approved plasticiser and retarder shall be used and injected at a pressure at the base of the plug which will
reconsolidate the soil to the end bearing value required but without causing hydraulic fracture or uplift of
the pile. The grout shall be injected between the plug and a diaphragm formed by a flexible metal or rubber
sheet in such a manner as to ensure even distribution and compression of the soil over the whole base
area of the pile beneath the concrete plug. Injection shall be continued until refusal is met at the working
pressure, which shall be maintained for a period of 6-12 hours after completing the injection. The working
pressure shall not be greater than that which causes uplift of the pile.

Alternatively, a system of base grouting consisting of a grid o injection pipes beneath the concrete plug
may be used. The arrangement of the pipes shall be such as to ensure the application of a uniform
pressure over the whole cross-sectional area of the base plug either selectively in stages or as single
operation. The grout shall be injected at a pressure which will reconsolidate the soil to the end bearing
value required but without causing hydraulic fracture or uplift of the pile. This pressure shall be maintained
for a period of 6-12 hours after completing the injection.
A system of base grouting consisting of a grid of injection pipes beneath the sand plug as shown in the
drawings may be used, to preload; consolidate; compact the soil stratum below. The base preload shall not
be applied in less than 48 hours after casting the concrete plug. The arrangement of the pipes shall be such
as to ensure the application of a uniform pressure over the whole cross-sectional area of the base either
selectively in stages or as a single operation. The grout shall be injected at a pressure which will preload;
consolidate; compact the soil to the required pressure as stipulated in the drawings but without causing
hydraulic fracture or uplift of the pile. Or the Contractor can propose other means to provide the same
preload consolidation and compaction effect on the soil stratum subject to approval of the Engineer.
Reaction to the base pre-loading force shall be provided by the external skin friction along the pile shaft
plus other means as proposed by the Contractor to ensure pile shaft will not lift up.
The Contractor is required to submit his design and method statement of base pre-loading to the Engineer
for approval prior to any piling work on site. During the base pre-loading, the pile movement shall be
monitored according to the drawings. The design and method of base pre-loading shall be similar for the
trial piles and for the working piles.
The end bearing of the driven steel tubular piles may be affected by excessive cleaning out of the inside of
the pile in order to facilitate driving of the pile to the required depth. Therefore, it is required that all pile
bases are preloaded; consolidated and compacted. Base preloading shall not be performed until at least 48
hours after placing the concrete plug.
Where peripheral jetting has been employed, base grouting may, if required, be supplemented by grout
injection through the jetting pipes. This operation shall not be performed until at least 48 hours after placing
the concrete plug.
Injection pressures employed in peripheral and base grouting systems shall not be such as to cause
hydrofracture of the surrounding soil.
e. Skin grouting (provisional)
Where skin grouting is required to achieve the pile capacity, the grout shall be injected through outlet
valves spaced as shown in the drawings or as proposed by the Contractor in an approved sequence to
cover the whole of the exterior surface of the steel tubular pile from the speci fied level down to the
termination level of the pile. Details of the skin grouting arrangement shall be submitted to the Engineer for
agreement at least 21 days before the commencement of grouting operations. Skin grouting shall not
commence until concrete plugging of the steel tubular pile has been completed.

Since the skin friction of the driven steel tubular piles could decrease below the design values of the pile
due to high mica content in the sand, or for any other reason, when the 3m diameter steel tubes are
installed by driving, the Contractor shall ensure that provisions are built into the steel tubular pipe piles to
carry out skin grouting, as detailed in the drawings, in the event that it is determined from the trial pile load
tests that the capacity of the pile is inadequate to support the design loads of any given pile.
f. Records and testing of materials.
The Contractor shall keep and submit to the Engineer records of quantities of concrete and grout used in
each pile, the levels of the top and bottom of the concrete plug, and the range of injection pressures at
each stage of grouting. Tests on cement, aggregates and specimens of fluid and hardened grout and
concrete shall be made as specified in Clause 9..2.
5.3.7.Grouting of pile/sleeve connections
Where the substructure design incorporates means of transferring load from the substructure to the piles by
means of a grouted connection between a sleeve and the pile, a Portland cement grout with or without an
inner filler shall be used. The mix may include admixtures to improve the flow properties and/or reduce the
water content of the grout provided that it is satisfactorily established they have no harmful effect on the
performance of the connection. The use of calcium chloride or admixtures containing significant levels of
chloride iron shall not be permitted.
The compressive strength of 28-day-old specimens made and tested as specified in Section 8..
Centralisers shall be used to maintain a uniform annulus between the pile and the surrounding structure. A
minimum annulus width of 40mm shall be provided where grout is the only means of load transfer, but his
dimension shall take into account the provision or otherwise of shear keys.
The introduction of grout into the annulus shall be by methods such that dilution of the grout or formation of
voids in the grout is eliminated.
5.3.8.Sand filing
Piles driven with open ends without soil removal shall, where shown on the approved Drawings, be filled
with compacted local river sand from the level of the soil within the pile after driving up to the level shown.
Piles driven with soil removal shall be similarly filled with sand from the top of the concrete plug up to the
level shown on Drawings.
Above this level piles shall be filled with concrete as shown on the approved Drawings.
For sand filling, a steel tube of 200 mm diameter closed at the lower end by a steel plate and slotted along
its length shall first be lowered down the water-filled pile. Sand shall then be dumped or sluiced into place
up to the design level. The tube shall then be withdrawn while simultaneously applying vibration. During
withdrawal the tube shall be raised and lowered alternately to compact the sand. After complete

withdrawal of the tube further sand shall be added as necessary to make up the filling to the required level.
Exact details including rate of filing, frequency of vibration, etc. shall be as agreed with the Engineer.
5.3.8.1. Concrete plug at top of piles
The design of the concrete plug in the pile head shall ensure adequate bond with the pile shaft. Particular
attention shall be paid to limiting early thermal shrinkage effects, and the temperature of the concrete in
place shall not exceed 70ºC.
Alternatively, the plug may be precast and the annulus between the pile wall and the precast plug shall be
injected with grout.
5.3.9. Preliminary trial piling – Tubular piles
5.3.9.1. Purpose
The purpose of the trial piling shall be confirmed or otherwise that the equipment and methods proposed
by the Contractor are adequate for the purpose of installing all the piles required for the river works in
advance with this Specifications. The trial shall include concrete plugging, re-driving and/or grouting as
applicable. The trials shall be made close to the position of a static cone penetration test made as part of
the Contract soil investigations and close to the location of the bridge pier where the Contractor proposes
to commence foundation construction.
The non-working trial piles shall be of the same diameter and wall thickness as required for the permanent
works and their length shall be such as to achieve the maximum penetration depths required at any pier
location. The piles shall be installed at the design rake using the same equipment and methods proposed
for the permanent Works. The trial shall include plugging, grouting, sand filling and all other installation
operations.
At least two trial piles shall be driven and spaced centre to centre at a distance suitable for making a lateral
load test on them as per this Specifications. Before making this test the piles shall be filled with sand in the
manner specified in Clause 5.3.8.. Driving data shall be recorded as specified in Clause 5.3.5..
All work in connection with the trial piling shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer.
5.3.9.2. Trials
If it is shown that the pile can be driven to the required depth without difficulty and with a blow count in
terms of blows per 250mm of penetration similar to that predicted by the drivability analysis, the test will be
deemed satisfactory in respect of the adequacy of the equipment. Dynamic testing of the trial piles shall be
carried out in accordance with Clause 5.3.9.6..
If the trial pile cannot be installed to the required depth using the proposed methods, the Contractor shall
propose revised methods. The adequacy of these shall be proved on the partly driven trial pile or on further
trial piles as necessary as agreed with the Engineer.

5.3.9.3. Removal of trail piles
After completion of trial piles to the satisfaction of the Engineer, all trial piles shall be cut-off at bed level or
+0.0mPWD. whichever is the lower and the off-cut shall be removed from site. Where bed level is above
+0.0mPWD, the vicinity of the pile shall be dredged locally to achieve the specified cut-off level.
5.3.9.4. Vertical loading test on piles
These trial pile load tests shall be carried out to determine the ultimate skin friction of the steel piles and the
ultimate end bearing resistance when installed in the dense granular materials (i.e. sands. gravelly sand).
The section of pile that is above the dense sand layer shall be sleeved to eliminate skin friction
contributions from the upper soils layers. The diameter and the length of the test pile sections shall be
limited such that they can be taken to failure with a reaction force of not less than 40 MN. The test length of
the pile shall be not less than 30m in length and the test pile diameter shall be not less than 1.5m. There are
provisions for 4 test locations and at least 2 such piles shall be tested at each test location. In addition, there
are also provisions for 2 test locations with 1 pile (30m length section) for each location to be tested after
skin grouting. Thus, a total of at least 10 steel driven piles shall be tested. The test locations and pile
installation details are shown in the Drawings.
The GI, including PCPTs; bore holes; field tests; etc, at the trial pile locations shall be completed before
installation of trial piles. The Engineer will review the GI results and confirm the length of the trial piles. The
final design test length may be longer than the length as indicated in the drawings.
The test length of the pile shall be fully instrumented to the satisfaction of the Engineer to measure the
stresses along the pile shaft and at the base of the pile. The instrumentation shall be robust to withstand the
forces experienced during hard driving of the steel tubular piles with the attached instrumentation, and
insertion of the instrumented reinforcement cage into the pile shaft. The instrumentation shall be built in
with adequate redundancy, so that even if some fail others are available for measurement. The driving
method to be used, including the cleaning of soil inside the pile, shall be as similar as practical to the
method that will be used to install the permanent piles or the working piles. If a large number of the
installed instruments such as the strain gauges, and extensometers. both on the shaft and in the
reinforcement cage are damaged or malfunction after installing the pile such that all the required stresses
and forces along the pile shaft and at the base cannot be reliably determined in order to calculate the skin
friction and the end bearing values from the pile load test, the test pile installation or construction will be
considered to be unsatisfactory by the Engineer and will be discarded, and a new test shall be carried out
at Contractor's cost. All the installed instruments shall be checked before commencing the load test to
ensure that it is worthwhile to undertake the pile load test.
The test pile should be constructed identical to the working pile (but vertically with reduced diameter) with
the following procedures:

(a) After installing the pile to the required test depth as described by the construction method as specified
in this Section, the base of the pile shall be partially plugged with a length of soil column of 1% times the
diameter of the pile, along the pile shaft from the pile toe as shown on the Drawings.
(b) For these particular test piles, a concrete plug shall be constructed with tremie along the shaft from the
top of the soil plug to the top of the pile to accommodate the installation of instrumentations for monitoring
of pile stress under pile load testing as described in the Drawings.
(c) Before construction of the concrete plug, temporary casings for grout pipes with a steel cage acting as
centralizer to fix the tubes in position, from the pile top down to the top of the unexcavated soil plug shall be
installed as shown in the Drawings, which shall be used to preload the pile base to achieve the required
minimum preloading pressure. The design, execution and performance of the base preloading system shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor.
(d) After at least 48 hours following the formation of the concrete plug, the pile shall be backfilled to the top
of the test pile and then follow with base preloading. The grout pipe shall be inserted to the bottom of the
soil plug. The method of grout pipe insertion through the soil plug shall be same as for the working piles
and designed by the Contractor. The grouting procedures described in Section 7.8 and Drawings aim to
present the intended methodology of base preloading and for reference only. The Contractor shall design
their own base preloading method as necessary to suit their approach and equipment to base preloading
grouting and submit their proposal to the Engineer for approval at least 28 days before any piling works.
The Contractor shall also demonstrate the workability of their proposed base preloading method and
details through these trial pile tests to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(e) The construction method used shall be similar to the method proposed and agreed for the working
piles. At least 48 hours shall be allowed for the grout to set before any pile load tests are carried out.
(f) PDA tests shall be carried out on the pile after driving installation to designed depth to ensure integrity.
(g) Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the preload and test loads shall be applied in increments,
and removed in decrements, of 25% of the load. Increments of load shall not be applied until the rate of pile
movement is less than 0.1mm in 20 minutes.
(h) The location of trial piles shall be as shown on the Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer. The
requirements on equipment and preparation works before the pile test shall refer to Appendix 7.1. The trial
pile static load test shall consist of 3 stages as follows:
(i) Stage A - Base Preloading
- Kentledge or other supports installed at suitable locations to provide adequate reaction to the
test pile.
- Preload the bearing soil underneath the pile base by means of base grouting or other
equivalent method to the design preloading pressure.

- During the preloading, the upward movement of the casing shall be closely monitored to
ensure no heaving of the casing is occurred. If the upward movement exceeds 0.3% of the pile
diameter, the preloading pressure shall be reduced.
(ii) Stage B - Static Pile Load Testing
- Trial pile shall be tested to the maximum test loads as stated in the Drawings in 3 loading
stages and then be tested to failure of the pile in the 4 th stage. The testing procedure shall
comply with the requirements stated in Appendix 7.1.
(iii) Stage C - Post Test Investigations
- Carry out PDA tests to determine the pile capacity of the completed pile, after the testing to
failure.
- Carry out concrete coring for laboratory testing purposes.
- Dismantle the set up and make good the ground as instructed by the Engineer.
(i) The requirements on procedures after testing and reporting are described in Appendix 7.1.
(j) PDA tests shall be carried out on the pile after completing the maintained load test and taking the pile to
failure to ensure pile integrity and to determine the pile capacity using the PDA technique for comparison.
(k) After completion of the test concrete cores shall be recovered from the concrete shaft and tests carried
out on cores to determine strength and the elastic moduli at regular depths (at a minimum every 5m).
(I) Trial piles shall be tested to failure as described in this Specification Appendix 7.1.
(m) In the event that the test result of the tested trial pile to failure does not satisfy the design criteria (out of
the 2 test sections, even if 1 fails, the test is considered to have failed); a second trial pile shall be installed in
the nearby location as above, but with the application of skin grouting. Therefore, the provisions for skin
grouting such as external grout tube insertion tubes/pipes shall be welded and installed to the 1.5 m
diameter trial pile steel tubes of the second or the replacement trial pile load test pile.
(n) Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer the relevant trial pile testing works shall not commence
until the pile construction, the arrangement and installation, method of load application, reaction and
measuring devices, testing and records to be taken and maintained of the trial piles, as stated in the
Contract or as instructed by the Engineer, have been submitted to the Engineer for his review and has been
approved.
(o) The Contractor shall submit his proposed testing method statements 28 days before the scheduled date
of commencement of the trial pile load tests. The trial pile load tests shall only commence with the written
approval of the Engineer.
(p) During the trial pile load test, the Contractor shall provide all facilities to the Engineer to allow him to
closely supervise the trial pile load tests.

(q) Trial piles shall be left in position. cut off, or withdrawn and disposed of as stated in the Contract, or as
(r) All work in connection with the trial pile installation shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer.
(s) The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities and a safe environment for the Engineer to supervise
the trial pile installation and testing on a fulltime basis.
(t) Upon completing the test the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a detailed Trial Pile
Load Test Report. The contents of the report shall be agreed with the Engineer, but at a minimum shall
contain the following. This report shall present the analyses of the pile driving records and the capacity of
the pile as installed.
- The coordinates and the elevations at the test location.

- The ground investigation data (borehole logs, CPT logs, in situ test data and laboratory test
data).
- As built detailed drawing of the test pile installed and tested.
- Details and specifications of the instruments installed along with their calibration curves and
calibration certificates.
- Plant used to drive the piles.
- Pile driving records
o Date and time of driving
o Trial Pile test number,
o Number, weight and length of the pile,
o Weight and drop of the hammer,
o Number of blows per metre over the whole depth of penetration,
o Number of blows per 250 mm over the last 5.5m of penetration
o Number of blows per 50 mm over the last 500 mm,
o River water level and tide records (even if the location is not inundated),
o Level of the surface of the sand inside the pile at any given time while installing the pile;
and especially at the time of splicing or hammer change and completion of driving,
o Submit the Pile Driver Analyser report prepared using the data gathered from the attached
instrumentation during pile driving, which shall include the data and the results of the
analyses using the appropriate software used (CAPWAP, GRLWEAP etc. .) and the
predicted pile capacity of the as-driven pile at final set or founding elevation.
o Any other information which the Engineer may require.
- records of pressure grouting for preloading (grout mix details, grout pressures, grout volumes,
and time taken for grouting), pressure reached and locations.
- Details of the PDA test carried out and the capacity predicted.
- Detailed drawings showing the instrumentation layouts and the type of instrumentation
installed.
- Details of tremie concreting for the concrete plug of the pile

- Concrete cube test results

- Concrete Elastic Modulus determination tests on concrete cores recovered from the installed
pile.
- Static test loading arrangement details and drawings
- Description of the static load test, instrument monitoring data, details of the jacks, loading
sequence and unload-loading sequences, pile head settlement,
- Reduction and processing of monitoring data
- Presentation of the load and stress distribution plots with depth along the pile for the various
loads, as the load is increased and decreased and the final loads and stresses at failure.
- End bearing pressures at various loads and the end bearing at failure
- Conclusions and the recommended ultimate skin friction and end bearing pressures for the
pile, and correlation with the soil parameters to determine the α and β values, and any other
parameters.
5.3.9.5. Lateral loading test on piles
A lateral loading test shall be conducted on a pair of the preliminary trial piles installed by any of the
methods specified in Clause 5.3.5.. The maximum load applied to the pile heads shall be 1.5MN subject to a
maximum pile head deflection of 200 mm. The loading shall be applied in six equal increments and
returned to zero applying each increment.
The method of applying a loading and measuring recording the pile movement shall be as specified in ICE
SPERW_04_Spec for Piling and Embedded Ret Walls and CIRIA Report PG7 and Handbook on pile load
testing by the Federation of Piling Specialist.
5.3.9.6. Dynamic testing of piles using the pile driving analyser and CAPWAP method
The Contractor shall provide a pile driving analyser and experienced operators for obtaining measurement
of force and acceleration at various stages of pile driving.
a. Scope
This specification Clause covers procedures for testing vertical or battered piles individually to determine
the response of the pile to an impact force applied axially to the top of the pile. The procedures as detailed
are specified to one form of analysis. The Contractor is at liberty to suggest other testing procedures which
will provide the same information required subject to the Engineer agreeing that the alternative procedure
can supply the information specified to the accuracy required. The Contractor shall supply full details of any
such alternative to the Engineer together with details of where the alternative has been used, on what form
of piles and be able to demonstrate the quality of the results obtained.
It is required that the data on strain and acceleration of a pile under impact force shall be used to estimate
the load carrying capacity (both end bearing and skin friction components) and verify the integrity of the
pile. In addition, an assessment of pile stresses and the dynamic characteristics of the soils (quake valves,
damping coefficients) will be required.

b. Programme
Testing is to be performed on a number of piles with a test performed at a number of levels on any pile as
the pile is being driven. The piles to be tested and the level of testing shall be agreed with the Engineer.
It is envisaged that the programme for dynamic testing of piles will be as follows:
i.) Preliminary trial dynamic monitoring

ii.) CAPWAP to assess pile resistance, results of analysis required within 24 hours
iii.) Variability of driving resistance and pile capacity assessed using CAPWAP
iv.) Driving characteristics monitored, drivability and axial capacity assessed by use of result of
CAPWAP from preliminary trial pile
v.) As (iv) for five piles in the bridge on at every pier.
c. Apparatus for applying impact force
The apparatus for applying the impact force shall be the hammer selected for driving the permanent piles
for the bridge foundations. It shall be positioned so that the impact is applied axially to the head of the pile
and concentric with the pile.
d. Apparatus for obtaining dynamic measurements
i.) General
The apparatus shall include devices which are capable of independently measuring strain and acceleration
versus time at a specific location along the pile axis from the moment of impact until the piles come to rest.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the apparatus is securely attached to the pile so that slippage is
prevented. The apparatus shall have bene calibrated to an accuracy of two percent throughout the
applicable measurement range. If damage is suspected during use, the devices shall be replaced.
ii.) Force or strain measurement
Force measurements are to be made by strain transducers. A minimum of two of the devices shall be
securely attached to the pile diametrically opposite at a single section at least three diameters below the
head of the pile.
When using transducers placed between the pile head and the driving hammer, the analysis of the results
should recognise that such a transducer may alter the dynamic characteristics of the driving system. In
order to minimise the effects of bending, the connection between the force devices and the shall have the
smallest possible cushion necessary to prevent damage. The system shall be capable of providing
acceptable results under eccentric pile load. The modules of elasticity of the pile material shall be agreed
with the Engineer.
iii.) Velocity measurement

Accelerometers or velocity (displacement) devices may be used to obtain velocity data. The Contractor is to
supply full details of the intended method of obtaining the velocity.
Characteristics of the devices are to be appropriate for the material of the pile being tested. A minimum of
two devices shall be attached securely on diametrically opposite sides of the pile so that they do not slip.
iv.) Signal transmission
The signals from the devices shall be transmitted by means of a cable or equivalent, which limits electronic
or other interference to less than 2% of the maximum signal expected.
e. Apparatus for recording, reducing and displaying data
i.) General
The signals from the devices during the impact event shall be transmitted to an apparatus for recording,
reducing and displaying data to allow determination of the force and velocity versus time. The acceleration
and displacement of the pile head and of the energy transferred to the pile shall also be recorded. The
apparatus for recording, reducing and displaying data shall have the capability of making an internal
calibration check of force, velocity and time scales. No error shall exceed 2% of the maximum signal
expected.
ii.) Recording apparatus
Signals from the devices shall be recorded electronically in either analog or digital form.
iii.) Apparatus for reducing data
The adequacy of the proposed apparatus to generate the force and velocity data to the required degree of
accuracy shall be demonstrated to the Engineer either by test or by reference to previous results. The
apparatus for reducing signals from the devices shall be analog or digital computer capable of at least the
following functions:
1. Force measurement: if strain transducers are used the apparatus shall be able to compute the
force.
2. Velocity data: if accelerometers are used the apparatus shall integrate the acceleration over time to
obtain velocity. If displacement transducers are used, the apparatus shall differentiate the
displacement over time to obtain velocity. The apparatus shall zero the velocity value between
impacts and shall adjust the velocity record to account for transducer zero drift during the impact
event.
3. Display apparatus: signals from the devices shall be displayed by means of an apparatus on which
the force and velocity versus time can be observed for each hammer blow such as an oscilloscope
or oscillograph. Both the force and velocity data shall be reproduced for each blow and the
apparatus shall be capable of holding and displaying the signal from each blow for a minimum
period of 30 seconds.

f. Selection of piles
Test piles are to be selected by the Engineer following discussion with the Contractor, as the work
proceeds. A preliminary programme for pile testing is giving in this Clause.
g. Measurement/data processing
Measurement of force and acceleration of the pile continuously over time is necessary for the envisaged
CAPWAP analysis. All measurements are to be recorded on magnetic tape or equivalent medium such that
components of up to 1,000 Hz frequency are accurately preserved. Time of testing must be recorded. Pile
penetration shall be accurately measured.
It is required that immediate field processing be done for identification of malfunctions. The following
analysis must be carried out as the test proceeds (e.g. by the aid of the pile driving analyser):
1. Balance force continuously except when a rapid variation of force is sensed (occurrence of
impact).
2. Integrate acceleration over time to obtain velocity.
3. Display force and velocity on an oscilloscope or other suitable device which is capable of
displaying the records as they occur.
4. Integrate the product of force and velocity over time (transferred energy).
5. Determine maxima of force, acceleration, velocity, transferred energy, force at maximum velocity
and minimum force (tension at point of measurement).
6. Determine pile bearing capacity under each blow according to Case Method. The choice of
damping parameter must be based on experienced judgement and extensive soil data.
7. Print selected results from item 5 and 6 above.
8. Check force-velocity proportionality; causes of deviations, e.g. pile damage must be investigated.
9. Determine maximum pile tension force at locations other than the pile top.
10. Determine pile skin friction resistance and end bearing resistance through use of CAPWAP.
h. Procedures for obtaining dynamic measurements
i.) General
The Contractor’s intended procedure for obtaining dynamic measurements shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval. The procedure may be revised on site during testing as approved by the Engineer.
The procedure should be generally as outlined below. Dynamic properties shall be determined from a
minimum of ten impact records during initial driving and when used for soil resistance computations,
normally from one or two representative blows at the beginning of restricting. The force and velocity versus
time signals may be reduced by computer or manually to calculate the developed force, velocity,
acceleration, displacement and energy over the impact event.
ii.) Determination of strain wave speed
The Contractor shall provide a Method Statement for determination of strain wave speed.

iii.) Taking measurements
Record the number of impacts for a specific penetration. Record the drop of the ram or ram travel length.
Record the number of blows per minute delivered by the hammer. Take record and display a series of force
and velocity measurements. Compare the force and the product of velocity and impedance at the moment
of impact. If not in agreement, the cause shall be investigated, and the situation corrected. Compare the
force and velocity versus time for a series of impact events for consistency.
iv.) Data quality checks
For Confirmation of data quality, the force and the product of velocity and impedance at the moment of
impact are to be periodically compared for agreement and presented to the Engineer. In addition, the force
and velocity versus time over a series of consecutive impact events are to be compared for consistency.
Internal calibration checks are to be performed at the beginning and end of each data set.
v.) Analysis of measurements
Obtain force and velocity from the readout of the apparatus for reducing data or from the display apparatus.
Record the impact force and velocity and the maximum and minimum forces for the selected
representative blows. Obtain the maximum and minimum acceleration directly from the accelerometer
signal or by differentiation of the velocity versus time record. Obtain the displacement from the pile driving
record, the set-rebound curve from the displacement transducer if used or by integration of the velocity
versus time record. Obtain the maximum and final energy developed at the location of the devices.
Analyse the recorded data to compute the mobilised soil resistance. The recorded data shall also be
subject to field, laboratory or office computer analysis using CAPWAP (Case Pile Wave Analysis
Programme). The results of the analysis shall include an assessment of integrity of the pile, the driving
system performance and the maximum dynamic driving stresses. The evaluation of static soil resistance
and its distribution on the pile at the time of driving as obtained by the Contractor will be discussed with the
Engineer.
i. Report
The report of the dynamic testing shall include the following information when applicable:
General
- Project identification,
- Project location,
- Test site location,
- Owner,
- Engineer,
- Contractor,

- Designation and location of nearest boring and/or cone penetration test with reference to location
of the test pile and vertical control datum,
- Log of nearest test boring and/or cone penetration test
- Horizontal control datum,
- Vertical control (elevation) datum.
Pile installation equipment
- Make, model, type, size and recent service history of hammer,

- Weight of hammer and ram,
- Stroke of ram,
- Rated energy of hammer,
- Rated capacity of boiler or compressor,
- Type, dimensions and stiffness values of cap block and pile cushion,
- Weight and dimensions of drive cap and follower,
- Size of pre-drilling or jetting equipment,
- Type, size, length weight and stress transmitting area of mandrel,
- Detailed specifications of any special arrangement for applying impact force.
Test piles
- Identification and location of test piles,

- Working load of pile,
- Type of pile,
- Test pile material including basic specifications,
- Tip and butt dimensions of pile,
- Wall thickness of test pile,
- Description of test pile tip reinforcement or protection,
- Description of special coating used,
- Test pile (mandrel) weight as driven,
- Concrete cube strengths of plug when pile tested,
- Which piles vertical or batter,
- Rake of pile,
- Final elevation of test pile butt(s) referenced to fixed datum.
Pile installation
- Date installed,
- Volume of concrete or grout placed in pile,
- Grout pressure used,
- Description of pre-excavation or jetting depth, pressure, duration,
- Operating pressure for all hammers,
- Description of special installation procedures, used, such as piles cased off,

- Type and location of pile splices,

- Driving records,
- Final penetration resistance,
- Stroke of ram during final driving and/or blows/minute of hammer,
- Penetration for last two series of five blows with the hammer,
- Penetration resistance during restrike,
- When cap-block replaced (indicate on log),
- When pile cushion replaced (indicate on log),
- Cause and duration of interruptions in pile installation, and
- Any unusual occurrence during installation.
Dynamic Testing
- Detailed description of all components of the apparatus for obtaining dynamic measurements and
apparatus for recording, reducing and displaying data,
- Date tested,
- Test pile identification,
- The modulus of elasticity, density and wave speed of test pile, and how determined,
- Sequence in pile driving test carried out, such as End of Initial Driving, Beginning of Restrike,
- Length of pile embedded and length below apparatus for obtaining dynamic measurements,
during driving,
- Penetration resistance during dynamic testing,
- The range, average and standard deviation of the measurements of maximum and minimum
compression force and (in concrete piles) the maximum computed tension force,
- The range, average and standard deviation of the impact velocity data,
- The range, average and standard deviation of the measurements of maximum acceleration,
- The range, average and standard deviation of measurements of final penetration of the pile,
- The range, average and standard deviation of the maximum and final energy data,
- Which one-dimensional wave theory used for the analysis of the pile driving,
- The variables entered into the wave theory, such as damping, quake and resistance,
- The computed soil resistance acting on the pile at the time of testing, both end bearing and skin
friction and how computed,
- Comments on the integrity of the pile.
5.3.10. Pile Capacity Estimation using the Pile Driver Analyser (PDA Tests)
5.3.10.1.General
The pile capacity of selected piles shall be estimated using the Pile Driver Analyser (PDA) along with the
software CAPWAP to analyse the results obtained. PDA tests shall be carried out on selected driven steel
tubular piles and cast-in-place bored piles.

The Contractor shall engage an experienced independent international PDA testing company independent
from the foundation contractor and the main Contractor. approved by the Engineer to provide a pile driving
analyser and experienced operators for obtaining measurements of force and acceleration at various
stages of pile driving, and to estimate the capacities of the piles. as the driven piles are being installed, and
thereafter on completion of installation. The company engaged shall have experience in carrying out PDA
tests on piles of similar diameter and lengths to those to be installed in this contract.
In addition to these PDA tests carried out by this independent specialist testing company, the Contractor or
his appointed specialist sub-contractor installing the steel driven piles shall carry out his own
measurements on all driven steel tubular piles as these are being installed. Using this data the Contractor
shall closely monitor his pile installations and also provide a detailed report of pile installation as stipulated
in this specification which will include an initial assessment of the capacity of the pile.
The PDA tests instructed by the Engineer, and to be carried out by the independent specialist PDA testing
company shall be to further verify the capacity of the pile estimated by the Contractor at the time of driving
(due to the driving process the capacity calculated at the time of driving may not be the final capacity of the
pile). The PDA tests to be carried out by the independent specialist testing company will be ordered at the
time of driving the steel piles.
5.3.10.2.Scope
This specification Clause covers procedures for testing vertical or raked piles individually to determine the
response of the pile to an impact force applied axially to the top of the pile. The procedures as detailed are
specific to one form of analysis. The Contractor may suggest other testing procedures which will provide
the information required as listed in Clause 5.3.10.9.subject to the Engineer agreeing that the alternative
procedure can supply the information specified to the accuracy required. The Contractor shall supply full
details of any such alternative to the Engineer together with details of where the alternative has been used,
on what form of piles and be able to demonstrate the quality he results obtained to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
It is required that the data on strain and acceleration of a pile under impact force shall be used to estimate
the load carrying capacity (both end bearing and skin friction components) and verify the integrity of the
pile. In addition, an assessment of pile stresses and the dynamic characteristics of the soils such as the
shear moduli and the damping coefficients shall also be determined.
Testing is to be performed on a number of piles with a test performed at a number of levels on any one pile
as the pile is being driven. The piles to be tested and the level of penetration at which the pile is to be tested
shall be agreed with the Engineer.
PDA tests shall be carried on all constructability piles and on all trial pile. In addition these tests shall be
carried out on at least 25 % of the working piles, or as required by the Engineer.

5.3.10.3.Apparatus for Applying Impact Force for PDA tests
The apparatus for applying the impact force shall be a suitable hammer to generate the required forces to
generate sufficient movement in the permanent piles for the bridge foundations. It shall be positioned so
that the impact is applied axially to the head of the pile and concentric with the pile.
5.3.10.4.Apparatus for Obtaining Dynamic Measurements
(a) General
The apparatus shall include devices which are capable of independently measuring strain and acceleration
versus time at a specific location along the pile axis from the moment of impact until the piles come to rest.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the devices are securely attached to the pile so that slippage is
prevented. The apparatus shall have been calibrated to an accuracy of 2 percent throughout the applicable
measurement range. If damage is suspected during use, the damaged devices shall be replaced
immediately.
(b) Force or Strain Measurement
Force measurements are to be made by strain transducers. A minimum of four of the devices shall be
securely attached to the pile diametrically opposite at a single section at least three diameters below the
head of the pile.
When using strain transducers placed between the pile head and the driving hammer, the analysis of the
results should recognise that such a transducer may alter the dynamic characteristics of the driving system.
in order to minimise the effects of bending, the connection between the transducers and the pile shall have
the smallest possible cushion necessary to prevent damage. The system shall be capable of providing
acceptable results under the eccentric pile load. The modulus of elasticity of the pile material shall be
agreed with the Engineer.
(c) Velocity Measurements
Accelerometers or velocity (displacement) devices may be used to obtain velocity data. The Contractor
shall provide full details of the intended method of obtaining the velocity characteristics. The devices or
transducers to be used shall be appropriate for the material of the pile being tested. A minimum of four
devices shall be attached securely on diametrically opposite sides of the pile in manner such that they do
not slip.
(d) Signal Transmission
The signals from the devices shall be transmitted by means of a cable or equivalent, which limits electronic
or other interference to less than 2 percent of the maximum signal expected.
5.3.10.5.Apparatus for Recording, Reducing and Displaying Data
(a) General

The signals from the electronic instrumentation devices obtained during the impact event shall be
transmitted to an apparatus for recording, reducing and displaying data to allow determination of the force
and velocity versus time. The acceleration and displacement of the pile head. and of the energy transferred
to the pile shall also be recorded. The apparatus for recording. reducing, and displaying data shall have the
capability of making an internal calibration check of force. velocity. and time scales. No error shall exceed
2% of the maximum signal expected.
(b) Recording Apparatus
Signals from the devices shall be recorded electronically in either analogue or digital form.
(c) Apparatus for Reducing Data
The adequacy of the proposed apparatus to generate the force and velocity data to the required degree of
accuracy shall be demonstrated to the Engineer either by test or by reference to previous results. The
apparatus for reducing signals from the devices shall be an analog or digital computer capable of at least
the following functions:
(i) Force Measurements - if strain transducers are used, the apparatus shall be able to compute the force.
(ii) Velocity Data - if accelerometers are used, the apparatus shall integrate the acceleration over time to
obtain velocity. If displacement transducers are used that apparatus shall differentiate the displacement
over time to obtain velocity. The apparatus shall zero the velocity value between impacts and shall adjust
the velocity record to account for transducer zero drift during the impact event.
(iii) Display Apparatus - Signals from the devices specified shall be displayed by means of an apparatus on
which the force and velocity versus time can be observed for each hammer blow such as an oscilloscope
or oscillograph. Both the force and velocity data shall be reproduced for each blow and the apparatus shall
be capable of holding and displaying the signal from each selected blow for a minimum period of 30
seconds and then storing the data record.
5.3.10.6.Selection of Test Piles
The piles for PDA testing will be selected by the Engineer following discussion with the Contractor, as the
work proceeds.
5.3.10.7.Measurement and Data Processing
(a) Measurement of force and acceleration of the pile continuously over time is necessary for the envisaged
CAPWAP analysis. All measurements are to be recorded on hard drives or equivalent medium such that all
components of up to 1.000 Hz frequency are accurately sampled and preserved. Time of testing must be
recorded. Pile penetration shall be accurately measured.
It is required that immediate field processing be done for identification of malfunctions. The following
analysis must be carried out as the test proceeds with the aid of the Pile Driver Analyser.

(i) Balance force continuously except when a rapid variation of force is sensed (occurrence of impact).
(ii) integrate acceleration over time to obtain velocity.
(iii) Display force and velocity on an oscilloscope or other suitable device which is capable of displaying the
records as they occur.
(iv) Integrate the product of force and velocity over time (transferred energy).
(v) Determine maxima of force, acceleration, velocity, transferred energy, force at maximum velocity and
minimum force (tension at point of measurement).
(vi) Determine pile bearing capacity under each blow according to case Method. The choice of damping
parameter must be based on experienced judgement and comprehensive soil data.
(viI) Print selected results from items v and vi above.
(viii) Check force-velocity proportionality; causes of deviations, (e g. pile damage) must be investigated.
(ix) Determine maximum pile tension force at locations other than the pile top.
(x) Determine pile skin friction resistance and end bearing resistance through use of CAPWAP.
5.3.10.8.Procedure for Obtaining Dynamic Measurements
(a) General
The Contractor's intended procedure for obtaining dynamic measurements shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval. The procedure may be revised on site during testing as approved by the Engineer.
The procedure should be generally as outlined below. Dynamic properties shall be determined from a
minimum of ten impact records during initial driving and, when used for soil resistance computations,
normally from one or two representative blows at the beginning of re-striking. The force and velocity versus
time signals may be reduced by computer or manually to calculate the developed force, velocity,
acceleration. displacement, and energy over the impact event.
(b) Determination of Strain Wave Speed
The Contractor shall provide a Method Statement for determination of strain wave speed.
(c) Taking Measurements
Record the number or impacts for a specific penetration. Record the drop of the ram or ram travel length.
Record the number of blows per minute delivered by the hammer. Take, record, and display a series of
force and velocity measurements. Compare the force and the product of velocity and impedance at the
moment of impact. If not in agreement, the cause shall be investigated and the situation corrected.
Compare the force and velocity versus time for a series of impact events for consistency.

(d) Data Quality Checks
For confirmation of data quality, the force and the product of velocity and impedance at the moment of
impact are to be periodically compared for agreement and presented to the Engineer. In addition, the force
and velocity versus time over a series of consecutive impact events are to be compared for consistency.
Internal calibration checks are to be performed at the beginning and end of each data set.
(e) Analysis of Measurements
Obtain force and velocity from the readout of the apparatus for reducing data or from the display apparatus.
Record the impact force and velocity and the maximum and minimum forces for the selected
representative blows. Obtain the maximum and minimum acceleration directly from the accelerometer
signal or by differentiation of the velocity versus time record. Obtain the displacement from the pile driving
record, the set-rebound curve from the displacement transducer if used or by integration of the velocity
versus time record. Obtain the maximum and final energy developed at the location of the devices.
Analyse the recorded data to compute the mobilised soil resistance. The recorded data shall also be
subjected to field, laboratory or office computer analysis using CAPWAP (Case Pile Wave Analysis
Programme). The results of the analysis shall include an assessment of integrity of the pile, the driving
system performance and the maximum dynamic driving stresses. The evaluation of static soil resistance
and its distribution on the pile at the time of driving as obtained by the specialist PDA testing contractor will
be presented to the Engineer in a report and these results will then be discussed with the Contractor.
5.3.10.9.Report
The report of the PDA testing shall include the following information, where applicable:
(a) General
- Project identification,
- Project location,
- Test site location,
- Owner, Engineer, Contractor
- Designation and location of the nearest boring and/or cone penetration test with reference location
of the test pile and vertical control datum.
- Log of nearest test boring and/or cone penetration test,
- Horizontal control datum.
- Vertical control (elevation) datum.
(b) Pile Installation Equipment:
- Make, model, type, size, and recent service history of hammer,

- Weight of hammer and ram,
- Stroke of ram,

- Rated energy of hammer,

- Rated capacity of boiler or compressor,
- Type, dimensions and stiffness values of capblock and pile cushion,
- Weight and dimensions of drive cap and follower,
- Size of pre-drilling or jetting equipment,
- Type, size, length, weight and stress transmitting area of mandrel,
- Detailed specifications of any special arrangement for applying impact force.
(c) Test Piles:
- Identification and location of the pile tested,

- Working load of pile,
- Type of pile,
- Test pile material including basic specifications,
- Tip and butt dimensions of pile,
- Wall thickness of test pile,
- Description of test pile tip reinforcement or protection,
- Description of special coating used,
- Test pile (mandrel) weight as driven,
- Concrete cube strengths of plug when pile tested,
- Rake of pile,
- Orientation of pile rake,
- Final elevation of test pile buttes referenced to fixed datum.
(d) Pile Installation;
- Date installed,
- Volume of concrete or grout placed in pile,
- Grout pressure used,
- Description of pre-excavation or jetting depth, pressure, duration,
- Operating pressure for all hammers,
- Description of special installation procedures used, such as piles cased off,
- Type and location of pile splices,
- Driving records,
- Final penetration resistance,
- Stroke of ram during final driving and/or blows/minute of hammer,
- Penetration for last two series of 5 blows with the hammer,
- Penetration resistance during re-strike,
- When capblock replaced (indicate on log), _
- When pile cushion replaced (indicate on log), ‘ .
- Cause and duration of interruptions in pile installation, , . , ‘
- and Any unusual occurrence during installation. , " 7

(e) PDA Testing:
- Detailed description of all components of the apparatus for obtaining dynamic measurements and
apparatus for recording, reducing, and displaying data.
- Date tested,
- Test pile identification,
- The modulus of elasticity, density, and wave speed of test pile, and how determined,
- Sequence in pile driving test carried out, such as End of Initial Driving, Beginning of Restrike,
- Length of pile embedded and length below apparatus for obtaining dynamic measurements during
driving.
- Penetration resistance during dynamic testing,
- The range, average and standard deviation of the measurements of maximum and minimum
compression force and the maximum computed tension force,
- The range, average and standard deviation of the impact velocity data. The range, average and
standard deviation of the measurements of maximum acceleration,
- The range, average and standard deviation of the measurements of final penetration of the pile,
- The range, average and standard deviation of the maximum and final energy data,
- Which one-dimensional wave theory used for the analysis of the pile driving,
- The variables entered into the wave theory. such as damping. quake and resistance,
- The computed soil resistance acting on the pile at the time of testing, both end bearing and skin
friction and how computed,
- Comments on the integrity of the pile.
5.3.11. Placing Concrete in Driven Steel Piles and Base Grouting (for Concrete Plug)
(1) Cleaning the Inside of Driven Piles
The inside of the steel piles shall be cleaned by air lifting or by other methods agreed by the Engineer
before concrete is placed. If excavation is carried out down to the correct depth under water. cleaning shall
continue until the water is clear and free from particles of soil. Measures shall be taken to prevent the
accumulation of silt and other material at the base of the excavation.
A hydraulic head of more than 3m shall be maintained at all times when excavating and when cleaning the
inside of the pile shafts.
(2) Placing concrete in piles
Each pile shall be concreted as soon as practicable after the permission of the Engineer has been
obtained. Concrete shall be placed without interruption until the complete pile is concreted.
If the rate of ingress of water exceeds 0.3 I/s, the following shall be complied with:
(i) Concrete shall be placed by tremie unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer,

(ii) The tremie pipe outlet shall always be maintained at a depth of at least 3m below the surface of fresh
concrete.
(iii) The minimum cementitious content of the concrete shall be as stipulated in Section 8. of this
Specification.
(iv) The level of the top of the concrete in piles shall be at least 750mm above the specified cut-off level.
(v) After the concrete has hardened, excess concrete shall be removed to the specified cut-off elevation
(3) Base Grouting (for preloading)
The Contractor shall demonstrate that his operations when placing concrete will not affect the quality of the
concrete placed inside the pile bore. Placing of concrete shall only be carried out with the agreement of the
Engineer.
For the plugged pile construction, the Contractor shall use a system approved by the Engineer to inject
grout under pressure beneath the concrete plug.
5.4. Inspection of Piling Works
5.4.1. Inspection of excavations for piles
The Contractor shall allow the Engineer to inspect excavations for piles before placing concrete in the pile.
The Engineer shall decide on the most suitable method to be used for inspecting excavations and the
Contractor shall provide all the necessary facilities and equipment to enable the Engineer to carry out the
inspection in a safe manner. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer 24 hours, or such shorter period
agreed by the Engineer, before placing concrete in piles.
5.4.2.Inspection of installed piles
If instructed by the Engineer, installed piles shall be exposed for inspection or testing. Excavations for
exposing piles shall be of a depth agreed by the Engineer, and the face of the excavation shall be at least
750mm from the face of the pile. The excavation shall be maintained in a stable condition and kept free
from water.
The surface of the pile shall be washed clean of all silt, mud or other adhering materials to permit
inspection.
After inspection, excavations for exposing piles shall be filled using special fill material which shall be
compacted to obtain a relative compaction of at least 95% above the groundwater table.
5.4.3.Tolerances: pile installations
Piles shall be installed to within the tolerances stated in Section 5. and in Table 5 -9.

Viaduct piles and Transition pier piles are defined as land based piles even if some of them are installed by
marine plant. Steel driven tubular piles of the Main Bridge are defined as marine piles even if some of them
are installed from land based plant.
Piles which do not comply with the specified tolerances shall not be forcibly corrected.
After the pile bore has been completed and before lowering the reinforcement cage and placing concrete
the contractor shall determine the following:
(i) Centre of the pile bore
(ii) The verticality of the bore
(iii) The profile of diameter of the pile bore with depth
(iv) The toe elevation of the cleaned pile toe.
The Contractor shall submit in his method statements of his proposed method for the determination of the
above mentioned parameters. The method statements shall be submitted for the Engineer's approval at
least 2 weeks prior to commencement of any piling works. Concreting of the bore can only commence after
receipt of the approval from the Engineer, after submission of the results of the above mentioned surveys.
Table 5- 9 – Tolerances of installed piles
Tolerance
Marine piles
Description Land piles (driven raking
(Viaduct piles) steel tubular
piles)
Deviation from specified position in En, measured at cut-off level 75 mm 150 mm

Deviation from vertical (check shall be carried out at a minimum of
1 in 75 1 in 75
three radial points on each pile) for vertical piles
Deviation of Steel Driven raking piles from specified 1H:6V batter 1 in 75
Vertical deviation from specified cut-off level 25 mm

The diameter of cast in-situ piles shall be at least 97% of the specified diameter.
Tolerance of the pile toe elevations shall be less than 200mm..
5.5. Records of piling works
5.5.1.Records of piles delivered
Records of prefabricated piles shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site and submitted to the Engineer at
the time the piles are delivered to the Site. The records shall include test certi ficates, analyses and mill
sheets for steel piles and proprietary piles.

5.5.2.Records of pile driving
Records of pile driving shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site and submitted to the Engineer within 24
hours after the driving or installation of each pile has been completed. The records shall be kept on
standard forms as shown in Appendix 7.2 and shall be available for inspection by the Engineer.
5.5.3.Records of bentonite slurry
Records of tests on bentonite slurry shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site and a report shall be
submitted to the Engineer at times agreed by the Engineer. The records shall be kept on standard forms as
shown in Appendix 7.4, and shall be available for inspection by the Engineer.
5.5.4.Records of Cast-in-place Piles
Records of formation of the pile bore, pile bore verticality, profile of the pile bore diameter with depth. pile
bore founding elevation, details of the reinforcement cage. records of tremie concrete placement such as
concrete volume with depth, and any other relevant data shall be submitted to the Engineer on standard
forms shown in Appendix 7.3. and approved by the Engineer.
5.5.5.Records of Static load tests on piles
Records of load tests on piles shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site and a report shall be submitted to
the Engineer within 48 hours after the test has been completed. The records shall be kept on standard
forms as shown in Appendix 7.5 and shall be available to the Engineer for inspection. The records shall
include graphs showing load and settlement versus time, plotted in the format shown in BS 8004, Figure
15(a).
5.5.6.Records of FDA Tests on Piles
Records of FDA tests on piles shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site and a report shall be submitted to
the Engineer within 48 hours after the test has been completed. The records shall be kept on standard
forms where such standard forms have been prepared in formats to the satisfaction of the Engineer. and
approved by the Engineer. These forms shall be available to the Engineer for inspection. The records shall
include total pile capacity estimates. skin friction contribution and end bearing capacity contribution
estimated from the test.
5.5.7.Records of Integrity tests on piles
Records of integrity tests on piles shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site and a report shall be submitted
to the Engineer within 3 days after the test has been completed. The records shall be available to the
Engineer for inspection.

5.5.8.Record Drawings
Record drawings of installed piles shall be prepared by the Contractor and two copies shall be submitted to
the Engineer within 14 days of completing the piles, including cutting and trimming, in each pile group or
building block. The drawings shall include the as-built co-ordinates of the centre of each pile at cut-off level,
the final depth and cut-off level of each pile and other information required by the Engineer.
5.6. Testing: Static Load Tests on Working Land Based Bored Piles
5.6.1.Testing: load tests on working piles
The number of bored piles to be tested by static load testing shall be at least 1 % of the total number of
piles installed if such piles have been installed using temporary or permanent steel casings to stabilise the
pile bore during pile installation, or as instructed by the Engineer. However. if the piles have been installed
using bentonite or other approved polymer based slurries to stabilise the pile bore during bore construction,
the static load tests to be carried out on working bored piles shall be at least 10%. The piles shall be tested
to determine the settlement of the pile under load. Testing shall be carried out in accordance with a
procedure agreed by the Engineer. The method of testing shall be as stated in Appendix 7.1.
Piles shall not be tested until the concrete or grout has attained sufficient strength to withstand the tests.
The tests shall be carried out within 28 days of the Engineer's instruction to carry out the test unless
otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
5.6.2.Compliance criteria: load tests on working piles
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, on completion of testing and in accordance with the Clause above
(Clause 5.6.1.) the results of load tests on piles shall comply with the following requirements:
- The capacity of the pile shall be estimated from the pile load test results using a suite of methods
such as the Brinch Hansen's 80% Criterion (J.B. Hansen, 1963), the Chin-Kondor Method (Chin,
1970), Decourt Extrapolation Method (L. Decourt, 1999), and the De Beer Yield Load Method
(DeBeer, 1968). The methods to be used shall be detailed in the method statement and agreed with
the Engineer.
- The maximum extension at the head of the pile during the pull-out test shall be less than the elastic
extension (PL/AE) of the net length of the trial pile plus 4mm and the rate of recovery after the
removal of the maximum pull-out test load shall be less than 0.1mm / hour observed in a period of
not less than 15 minutes, the residual extension at the head of the pile shall not exceed the greater
of 4mm or 25% of the maximum pile head extension during the test, (c) under working load the
gross pile head settlement shall not exceed 10 mm for the viaduct foundations, and
- The Working Piles shall have a factor of safety equal or greater than 1.5 considering only skin
friction. The factor of safety in end bearing shall be greater or equal to 3.

5.6.3.Non-compliance: load tests on piles
If the result of any load test on piles does not comply with the specified requirements for settlement /
extension, the Contractor shall submit remedial proposals to the Engineer for approval.
5.7. Testing: PDA Tests on Land Based Working Bored Piles
5.7.1.PDA Tests on Working Bored Piles
PDA tests shall be carried out on selected cast-in-place bored piles of diameters less than 3m to determine
the pile integrity and the pile capacities. Testing shall only be carried out 7 days after completion of all
concreting or grouting works, allowing sufficient time for the setting of grout and concrete.
An appropriate pile cap shall be placed on the working pile in order to ensure that the pile top is not
damaged using the PDA test.
The required hammer weight and the drop height necessary to carry out an effective test shall be
determined from GRLWEAP or similar software.
All test equipment necessary for the execution of a PDA tests shall be furnished by the Contractor and the
PDA tests shall be carried out in conformance to the requirement of ASTM D-4945.
If the piles were installed by stabilising the bore with temporary or permanent steel casings, at least 25 % of
the bored piles installed shall be tested by PDA tests. If the piles were installed using slurries such as
bentonite or polymer based slurries. a minimum of 33 % of the working piles shall be tested. The Engineer
may in addition request additional PDA tests to be carried out over and above the 25 % or the 33%.
The capacity of the pile shall be determined from a CAPWAP analyses. which shall include the skin friction
component and the end bearing of the pile.
The Contractor shall provide all assistance to the PDA testing company to carry out the tests. The PDA tests
shall be carried out not later than 21 days after installing the pile.
If the PDA testing indicates that the estimated capacity is inadequate. skin and base grouting shall be
carried out and the pile re-tested within 21 days of undertaking grouting.
At select locations both static load tests and PDA tests shall be carried out for comparison purposes.
The PDA test shall also determine the integrity of the bored pile.
5.7.2.Non-compliance: load tests on piles
If the result of any PDA test demonstrates that a pile does not provide the design capacity of the pile even
after skin grouting and base grouting. the Contractor shall submit remedial proposals for that pile to the
Engineer for approval.

5.8. Testing Concrete Cores from Piles
5.8.1.Samples: concrete cores from piles
The number of concrete cores to be provided for testing from concrete piles shall be as stated in the
Contract or as instructed by the Engineer. The positions from which the cores are taken shall be as
Concrete cores shall be 100 mm diameter.
The method of taking concrete cores shall be in accordance with this Specification, clauses related to
sampling concrete for compliance tests.
At the instruction of the Engineer the holes formed by taking concrete cores from piles shall be reinstated
using an approved concrete or an approved grout mix.
5.8.2.Testing: concrete cores from piles
Each concrete core from a pile shall be inspected for evidence of segregation of the constituents and for
the presence of voids. Specimens selected from each core shall be tested to determine the compressive
strength.
The method of preparing, inspecting and testing concrete cores shall be as stated in Section 8..
5.8.3.Compliance criteria: concrete cores from piles
The compliance criteria for concrete cores from piles shall be as stated in Section 8..
5.8.4.Non-compliance: concrete cores from piles
If the result of any test on a concrete core from a pile does not comply with Section 8. additional cores shall
be taken from the same pile and additional tests shall be carried out.
Additional concrete cores shall be 100 mm diameter for concrete of 20 mm nominal maximum aggregate
size and 150 mm diameter for concrete of 40 mm nominal maximum aggregate size. The number of
additional cores shall be as instructed by the Engineer.
If the result of any additional test does not comply with the compliance criteria for concrete cores the
Contractor shall submit remedial proposals to Engineer for approval. The number of additional piles and
additional tests shall be as instructed by the Engineer.
5.9. Testing: PDA Testing of Driven Steel Tubular Piles
5.9.1.Testing During Installation by Driving
When the pile is being installed by driving, the energy imparted by the hammer, the pile displacement and
other relevant parameters shall be measured and stored on the on-board computer located on the pile

installation plant. This information shall then be analysed using CAPWAP pile driving analyses software to
obtain an initial estimate of the pile capacity.
The software and the methodology to be used to estimate the pile capacity during installation shall be
approved by the Engineer prior to use. The Contractor shall submit all necessary documentation and
calibration certificates to demonstrate the accuracy of the software and the approach used by the
Contractor to determine the pile capacity.
5.9.2.PDA Testing of Driven Piles for the Purpose of Checking the Integrity
PDA tests shall be carried out on selected piles after driving them to the required founding elevations to
check the integrity of the steel tubular piles.
All test equipment necessary for the execution of a PDA Pile Integrity tests shall be furnished by the
Contractor and the PDA tests shall be carried out in conformance to the requirement of ASTM D-4945.
At least 25 % of the piles installed shall be tested by PDA tests, by engaging an independent pile testing
company, approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide all assistance to the PDA testing
company to carry out the tests.
5.9.3.Non-compliance Testing of Piles
In the event that the integrity testing indicates that the steel tube of the pile has been damaged during the
installation process, the contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposals to rectify the damaged pile.
for the Engineers approval. These proposals shall be submitted within 7 days of completing the pile integrity
test of any given pile.
5.10. Testing: Non-Destructive Tests on Welds in Piles
5.10.1. Testing: non-destructive tests on welds in piles
The type of non-destructive tests on welds in piles shall be as per Clauses in Section 7. of this Specification.
The number of non-destructive tests on welds in piles shall not be less than 15% of welds made in piles or
as instructed by the Engineer.
Radiographic tests shall comply with BS EN ISO 17636-1 and ultrasonic tests shall comply with BS 3923:
Part 2.
5.10.2. Non-compliance: non-destructive tests on welds in piles
If the result of any test on a weld in a pile does not comply with the specified requirements, the complete
weld shall be cut out, the joint shall be re-welded and the weld shall be tested.

5.11. Testing: Integrity Tests
5.11.1. Integrity Tests on Land Based cast ln-situ Bored Piling Works
The Contractor shall employ a specialist subcontractor to carry out non-destructive integrity testing of the
Piling Works. Such integrity testing shall comprise sonic logging and transient vibration testing of the
completed piling works which shall be carried out in accordance with approved methods. The methods to
be used shall be approved by the Engineer. The method statements shall be submitted to the Engineer 28
days in advance of commencement of pile construction for his review and approval.
The number of piles tested by sonic logging shall depend upon the Contractor's method of construction but
shall not be less than 25% of the total number of bored cast-in place piles.
The number of piles tested by transient vibration shall depend upon the Contractor's method of
construction of these piles, but shall be not less than 10% of the total number of piles. Vibration testing shall
be carried out in addition to the sonic logging defined above.
On completion of the sonic logging testing all pipes shall be filled using a grout mix in accordance with this
Specification.
Integrity testing shall be completed allowing sufficient time before other related works start, to permit
remedial works to be carried out in the case of non-compliance.
The report shall contain the following details:
(i) pile reference numbers,
(ii) measured pile length,
(iii) test records
(iv) defects such as cracks, fractures or discontinuities, if any, and
(v) pile stiffness.
5.11.2. Non-compliance
If the result of any integrity test on piling works indicates a defect or discontinuity, additional tests shall be
carried out. The number of additional tests shall be as instructed by the Engineer. If further tests confirm the
presence of a defect or discontinuity, additional piles shall be installed and tested as stated above. The
number of additional tests shall be as instructed by the Engineer.

5.12. Testing: Bentonite Slurry
5.12.1. Samples: bentonite slurry
Samples of bentonite slurry shall be provided for testing at a frequency agreed by the Engineer. Samples
for testing to determine the density of the slurry shall be provided each day. A sample of bentonite slurry
taken from the base of the excavation shall be tested to determine the density of the slurry before placing of
concrete.
The method of sampling and the sampling apparatus shall be as agreed by the Engineer.
5.12.2. Testing: bentonite slurry
Each sample of bentonite slurry shall be tested to determine the density, viscosity, shear strength and pH
value.
The method of testing shall be as stated in Table 5 -10.
The measuring device for testing density shall be readable and accurate to ± 0.005 g/ml.
Samples to be tested for viscosity using the Farm viscometer shall be screened before testing using a 300
μm BS test sieve.
5.12.3. Compliance criteria: bentonite slurry
The results of tests on bentonite slurry shall be as stated in Table 5 -10.
Tests to determine the shear strength and pH value shall be discontinued if the results of tests indicate that
a consistent working pattern has been established, taking account of the mixing process, blending of
freshly mixed and previously used slurry and processes used to remove impurities from previously used
slurry. If there is a subsequent change in the established working pattern, the tests to determine shear
strength and pH value shall be reintroduced unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
5.12.4. Non-compliance: bentonite slurry
If the results of tests for density and viscosity do not comply with the specified requirements, or if the results
of tests for shear strength or pH value do not indicate a consistent working pattern, the bentonite slurry shall
be deemed unsuitable for the work and concrete shall not be placed in the slurry. The slurry shall be
replaced or its composition adjusted before concrete is placed.
Table 5- 10 – Properties of bentonite slurry and methods of testing
Property at 20ºC Test results Method of testing

Density as supplied to excavation ≤ 1.10 g/mL Mud density balance
Density at base of excavation
≤ 1.25 g/mL Mud density balance
before placing concrete
Fluid Loss in ml (30 minute Test) < 40 Filter Press

30 – 50 seconds Marsh cone method or

Viscosity
≤ 0.02 Pa.s Fann viscometer
2
Shear strength (10 minute gel 1.4 – 10 N/m Shearometer or
strength) 4 – 40 N/m2 Fann viscometer
pH indicator paper strips or
pH value 8 – 11
electrical pH meter
Sand Content (%) at base before
< 2% Sand screen set
concreting

Appendix 7.1
Procedure for Pile Load Tests
a. Scope
This method covers the determination of the settlement I elastic recovery of piles by means of a load test.
b. Equipment
The following equipment is required:
- Kentledge, anchor piles, compression piles or other anchorages or supports installed at suitable
locations to provide adequate reactions against jacking.
- A load measuring device which shall consist of a load column, pressure cell, vibrating-wire type
strain gauges or other appropriate system, calibrated before and after each series of tests, or
whenever adjustments are made to the device. or at time intervals recommended by the
manufacturer of the equipment.
- Four deflectometers accurate to 0.025 mm.
- Precision levelling equipment accurate to ±0.5mm.
- A reference frame for supporting deflectometers and providing a datum for deflectometer
measurements.
- Working platforms.
- Screens and protection from exposure to conditions which may affect the test.
- Hydraulic loading equipment with pressure gauges having calibration certificates, acceptable to
the Engineer, that are less than 3 months old.
- The survey control points and temporary bench marks (TBMs) used in the precise survey shall be
located on stable ground well away from any construction activities. It is recommended that
sufficiently deep reference posts are installed away from construction activities to be used as TBMs.
- In the event Osterberg Cells are proposed to be use in the pile load tests by the Contractor as an
alternative testing method, The load test method to be proposed by the contractor shall comply
with that proposed by the inventor and author, Osterberg, J, and presented in the publication by
Osterberg, J (1998), titled "The Osterberg load test method for bored and driven piles"; Proceedings
of the Seventh International Conference & Exhibition on Piling and Deep Foundation", Vienna,
Austria. The Contractor shall submit their proposal to the Engineer at least 2 weeks prior to any
piling woks for the Engineer's approval.
c. Procedure: before testing
The procedure before testing shall be as follows:
- The kentledge, anchor piles or other anchorages shall be installed. The centre of each anchor pile
shall be at least 2 m or three times the pile diameter, whichever is greater, from the centre of the
pile to be tested and from the centre of any adjacent pile.

- If required, the pile to be tested shall be extended from cut-off level to ground level. The strength of
piles at joints shall not be less than any normal section of the pile.
- A temporary square pile cap designed by the Contractor shall be constructed.
- Working platforms, screens and protection shall be installed.
- The reference frame shall be set up on supports which are at least 2m or three times the pile
diameter, whichever is greater, from the test pile and anchor pile. The four deflectometers shall be
mounted on the reference frame to measure he deflection of the four corners of the temporary pile
cap.
d. Procedure: load test
The procedure for the load test shall be as follows:
- Trial piles shall be tested to failure, or to the maximum test loads stated in Drawings. Working piles
shall be tested to not less than 1.25 times working load. Reductions for group or boundary effects
shall not be made in determining the test loads.
- Test loads shall be applied and removed in three stages as stated in Table 7.1.1 and then tested to
failure (Stage IV) after completing Stage III, when instructed to take the pile to failure, or if so
required by the Working Drawings.
- Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the test loads shall be applied in increments, and
removed in decrements, of 25% of the working load. Increments of load shall not be applied until
the rate of settlement of the pile is less than 0.1 mm in 20 minutes.
- The full test loads for Stage I shall be applied in increments and shall then be maintained for at
least 24 hours after the rate of settlement has reduced to less than 0.1 mm per hour. The Stage ll
and Ill maximum test loads shall be maintained for at least 72 hours when carrying out trial pile
load tests. The test loads shall be removed in decrements and the recovery of the pile determined
before loading is resumed.
- The procedure stated above for Stage I shall be repeated for Stage II loading.
- The procedure stated above for Stage I shall be repeated for Stage III loading unless the Engineer
instructs the loading to be maintained for a longer period.
- Upon instructed by the Engineer, continue testing for Stage IV until the settlement exceeds 10% of
the pile diameter.
- The settlement /heave of the pile shall be measured at hourly intervals or other intervals agreed by
the Engineer. The settlement / heave of the pile under each increment and decrement of loading
shall be measured. The exact times at which increments are applied and decrements are removed
shall be recorded. Settlements/ Heave shall be measured and times shall be recorded in the
presence of the Engineer.
- The level of the reference beam shall be checked at regular intervals agreed by the Engineer during
the test.
Table 5- 11 – Test loading stages
Stage Test load

I 25% of max. test load

II 50% of max. test load
III 100% of max. test load
IV Test to failure
e. Procedure: after testing
After testing, equipment shall be removed, temporary pile caps shall be demolished and pile extensions
shall be removed to cut-off level. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, anchor piles shall be
withdrawn.
f. Reporting of results
The following shall be reported as a minimum:
- The loads applied to the nearest 0. 05t.

- The settlement/heave of the pile head to the nearest 0.05 mm at hourly intervals and under each
increment and decrement of loading.
- The exact times at which increments were applied and decrements removed.
- The levels of the reference beam, to the nearest; millimetre
- The ground conditions at the location of the pile
- The results from the in situ and laboratory test results
- Pile installation methodology including plant and equipment used
- Details of the test pile configuration including instrumentation, where the piles are instrumented.
- Details of instrumentation, when piles are instrumented.
- Determination of the elastic moduli of the pile from the testing of concrete core samples
- Detailed analysis of the fully instrumented pile load tests and the estimation of the ultimate skin
friction values along the pile shaft at 2m pile segments, and the estimation of the end bearing
capacity of the pile in the case of the Trial Pile load tests.
- Detailed analyses of the pile load test result (Pile settlement versus load curve data) and the
estimation of the pile capacity using a suite of methods as agreed with the Engineer and the
establishment of the pile capacity and the applicable overall factors of safety of the pile for the
various load cases.
- Estimation of the settlement of the other working piles from these pile load tests result.
- Conclusions and recommendations including the ultimate skin friction and end bearing capacities
of the test piles.

Appendix 7.2
Driven Steel Piles
Minimum Requirements For Pile Driving Records

(Prefabricated steel piles)
Contract No. ___________________________ Title ______________________________________________________
Contract No. ______________________________________________________________________________________
Pile data
Reference No. _________________________ Location
___________________________________________________
Type ________________________ Size _____________________________ Rake
______________________________
For precast concrete and steel piles; Preformed length ________________________________________________
For precast concrete piles; Date of casting
____________________________________________________________
Drive system data
Hammer: type __________ mass _________ kg drop (at set) ______________ mm rated energy ____________
kJ
Helmet. dolly & anvil: type ____________________________________ mass ______________________________
kg
Packing: type _______________________ Condition ______________ thickness _________________________
mm
Levels
Commencing ground/sea bed* level (PD/CD)* _______________________________________________________
Depth of overburden/height of working platform above sea bed level ___________________________________
Reference working level/platform level*
______________________________________________________________
Date & Drop (m) Depth penetrated along No. of Cumulative Length of Remarks (state
time the Pile (parallel to the blows + No. of individual details of
Pile) (m) blows segments, obstruction,
location of delays,
splices and interruptions
tests carried and location of
To From out concrete
samples)++

+ per 0.25 m for top 3.0 m of pile
++ for cast in place piles
(*delete as appropriate)
If the pile driving is carried out using hydraulic or other hammers that are linked to a computerised data
collection system, the output from these data collection and GRWEAP type pile driveability analyses along
with an estimate of the capacity of the driven piles shall be submitted to the Engineer.
Pile Driving Record (Prefabricated steel piles)
Temporary compression record
(on graph paper graduated in millimetres to be pasted in space below)
Final penetration depth ________________________ mm Top of pile level

__________________________________
Temporary compression ___________________________ mm Cut off level

_________________________________
Final set _____________________ mm/last 10 blows Pile head level

_______________________________________
Or ________________________________ blows/25 mm Final toe level

_____________________________________
Deviation from plumb or rake 1 in ____________________
Deviation at cut-off level x-x _________________________ mm ; y-y ___________________________ mm

Appendix 7.3
Minimum Requirements for Pile Record for Bored Piles
(Bored cast-in-place piles)
Contract No. ______________________________________ Title ___________________________________________
Contractor ________________________________________________________________________________________
Pile data
Reference No. ____________________________________ Location

________________________________________
Type—
Bore hole record
Commencing ground/sea bed" level (P.D./C.D.)*
Diameter
Title
Location
mm Design Length mm Rake 1 in
Depth of overburden/height of working platform above sea bed level
Casing/drilling fluid* type
Reference working level/platform |evel*

6. STRUCTURAL STEEL & COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION
6.1. General requirements
This part of the Specification is in accordance with the Series 1800 Appendices, Manual of Contract
Documents for Highway Works, Volume 1 Specification for Highway Works, Series 1800 (SHW), together
with SCI Publication P382 (revised January 2012) – Steel Bridge Group: Model Project Specification for the
Execution of Steelwork in Bridge Structures; BS EN 1090-2:2008+A1:2011; PD 6705-2:2010+A1:2013 –
Structural use of steel and aluminium – Part 2: Recommendations for the execution of steel bridges to BS
EN 1090-2.
The requirements for the execution of structural steelwork for the project are given in the following
documents:
 List of drawings
Requirements for Materials, Workmanship, Inspection and Testing, Handling, Transport and Erection,
Supply Measurements and Weight of Structural Steelwork shall be as per the requirements of Series 1800
SHW.
The Contractor is free to present alternative methods for assembly, movement, and erection of a composite
steel/concrete superstructure.
Whichever method is proposed, the Contractor shall provide, for the prior approval of the Engineer, a
detailed statement of this proposed methods for assembly, movement, and erection of bridge units. The
statement shall include, but not limited to:
- Programme for assembly of the superstructure units,

- Details of the proposed assembly methods,
- Layout and details of the assembly yard and its equipment,
- Methods to be employed for ensuring accurate alignment of the steelwork at field splice positions,
- Methods for concreting of deck slab, including temporary supports (or bracing) to steelwork,
formwork details, methods for stripping and curing, casting sequence, etc.,
- Methods and equipment for storage bridge girders,
- Methods for movement, load-out, and transport of bridge girders to erection position,
- Methods for temporary support of girders prior to lowering onto permanent bearings,
- Methods to provide temporary horizontal restraint at top of pier required during erection and
concreting,
- Methods for bringing two pile piers bents into correct longitudinal alignment prevailing ambient
temperature,
- Details of temporary connections required to provide and maintain accurate alignment at field
splices prior to completion of permanent joint,
- Methods for concreting of infill slab at field positions,

- Method of providing continuity and ensuring compliance with maximum concrete crack width
limitation over piers.
The quantified service category for a component or structure (or part thereof) shall be as F71 in accordance
with PD 6705-2, unless otherwise identified in the Drawings and documents referred to in this
Specifications.
For bridge structures, execution class XC3 shall generally apply, except where specified otherwise on the
Drawings. For some elements of the cable-stayed bridge, a greater execution class involving greater scope
of inspection and testing and/or higher quality level acceptance criteria shall be required, in particular, in
the following elements or details:
 List of elements for XC4
A quality plan for the execution of the works, in accordance with Annex C of BS EN 1090-2 and with NHSS
20, shall be provided and maintained.
To ensure consistent high quality, the Contractor shall employ only qualified engineers and personnel
experienced in the techniques of steel bridge construction to superintend these works. The works manager
and his depute shall be registered members of a recognised professional body or institution and be
qualified to university degree level.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details of the experience and qualifications of the personnel
he proposes to superintend these works together with descriptions of their duties, down to foreman level.
Supervisory staff down to foreman level shall be able to communicate clearly with their local counterparts
and operatives. The Contractor shall provide special practical training to his local staff prior to manufacture
of units for the permanent works. This training shall be deemed part of the Contractor’s obligations under
the contract and included in his price for the works.
Expatriate operatives employed for steelwork assembly or erection shall be experienced in the construction
of steel bridge works.
6.2. Record of material source and “as-built” drawings
All of the steel material shall be supplied by a supplier who is in an accredited QA scheme. The identity of
the proposed supplier shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least four weeks before any
intended orders are placed.
The Contractor shall maintain a record of the source of, and test certificates for, each plate, section, welding
consumable, bolt, rivet, washer, nut and shear connector and record its location where used on the project.
The “As-built” drawings shall be so referenced that it shall be possible to determine properties of each piece
of material added to the bridge by reference to the material certificates.

6.3. Requirements for supply and delivery
The grade and quality of structural stell shall be as specified on the drawings. Structural steel sections shall
be supplied in accordance with BS EN 10025-2:2004.
Structural hollow sections shall be supplied in accordance with BS EN 10210-1:2006. Tolerances,

dimensions and sectional properties of hollow sections shall comply with BS EN 10210-2:2006.
The following optional technical delivery conditions in accordance with BS EN 10025-1:2004 shall be
invoked:
- Steel making process shall be indicated.

- Product analysis shall be carried out; the number of samples and the elements to be determined
shall be as agreed with the Engineer.
- Inspection of surface condition and dimensions shall be witnessed by the purchaser at the
manufacturer’s works.
- The type of marking required.
- Om addition to the options of BS EN 10025-1:2004 the following options apply to produce
according to BS EN 10025-5:
 Sheet, plate, strip, wide flats and flats (width < 150mm) with nominal thickness < 20mm shall
be suitable for flanging without cracking.
 For flat products of quality J2 and K2 out of each parent plate or coil the impact properties
only shall be verified.
 For flat products of quality J2 and K2 out of each parent plate or coil the impact properties
and the tensile properties shall be verified.
 The grain size shall be verified for products of quality J2 and K2 with nominal thickness
<6mm.
 Further to the delivery options in Requirements for Workmanship, the Engineer shall be
afforded the opportunity to witness all mechanical tests and to inspect all steel.
 Specific inspection and testing shall be carried out. The inspection document shall be
inspection certificate type 3.1. as defined in Clause 4.1. of BS EN 10204.
 The tolerance on thickness of plates and flats shall be Class A to BS EN 10029.
 The surface condition shall comply with Class A3 (for flat products) or Class C3 (for sections)
to BS EN 10163.
- The surface of the steel material, before surface preparation and protective treatment, shall comply
with rust grades A or B according to EN ISO 8501-1. Material which is pitted, i.e. rust grades C or D,
shall not be used.
- Areas of plate shall not have internal imperfections exceeding the limits set in BS EN 10160.
- Areas where material shall comply with requirements for improved deformation properties
perpendicular to the surface according to BS EN 10164 are specified on the Drawings.

6.4. Requirements for workmanship
The Contractor shall not interchange steel components or members.
Fabrication tolerances:
i.) Steelwork dimensions given on the Drawings are specified for a mean temperature of 10ºC. The
Contractor shall made adjustments as necessary to achieve the specified dimensions at this
temperature.
ii.) The Contractor shall make allowances in the fabricating of the steelwork for changes in the
dimensions and profile of the steelwork due to the method of fabrication and due to the method of
connecting together of the steelwork during erection.
iii.) If not trial erection is to be performed, the fabricated steelwork shall be measured for length in the
workshop, to check for gross errors:
 On length over span, measured between plinth centrelines.
 On the cumulative length from end to the opposite end.
 On length of transverse members and bracing members
iv.) Where webs and flanges are fabricated using more than one plate, then each plate shall be spliced
using a full penetration butt weld. The position of the splice shall be agreed with the Engineer.
v.) Butt welds shall be ground flush with adjoining plate surfaces. All grinding shall be in the
longitudinal directing the member.
vi.) The acceptability of the addition of any welded temporary attachments and the making of any butt
welds additional to those specified on the Drawings shall be verified according to the design rules.
A record of the details of such attachments and butt welds shall be provided as part of the
Contractor’s execution documentation. Areas where temporary attachments have been made shall
be made good. If weld repairs are necessary, these shall be carried out in accordance with the
requirements of the appropriate Standard.
vii.) Refer to Drawings for any restrictions on positioning of temporary attachments. In general,
temporary welded attachments are not acceptable within 25mm of the edges of flange plates.
6.5. Preparation of edges, ends and surfaces
The Contractor shall submit written procedures for flame cutting and shearing before commencing
fabrication. Documentary evidence shall be submitted to show that procedure trials witnessed by an
independent inspection authority demonstrate that these procedures comply with the requirements of SHW
Clause 1803. Additionally, flame cut edges shall be ground or machined to remove all visible signs of drag
lines.
Where ends of stiffeners are required to be fitted, they shall be ground or otherwise prepared, so that the
maximum gap between the end of the stiffener and the surface against which it is fitted does not exceed
0.25 mm over 60% of the fitted area and does not exceed 0.75 mm over the remainder of the fitted area.

6.6. Bolts, nuts and washers
All bolts shall be preloaded assemblies (high strength friction grip). Non-preloaded assemblies are not
permitted in structural connections for bridgework (see BS EN 1993-2, 2.1.3.3).
Preloaded assemblies shall not be provided with additional locking devices. For non-preloaded assemblies,
locking devices shall be provided.
Bolt sizes for structural bolting shall be as specified on the Drawings.
The dimensions and steel grade of the bolts, nuts and washers shall be as specified on the Drawings.
Tightening shall be carried out following the part-turn method, which comprises two-step tightening, in
accordance with Series 1800 SHW and BS 4604. Other methods of tightening may be proposed for the
Contractor and shall seek for approval of the Engineer.
The area of contact surfaces in preloaded connections where a particular friction class is required shall be
as specified on the drawings. The treated surfaces shall be adequately protected until they are brought
together.
Bolts and nuts shall not be welded, unless otherwise specified on the Drawings.
6.7. Holes for bolts
Tolerances on hole diameters shall be as specified on the Drawings. Slotted holes shall be as specified on
the Drawings.
Punching holes to full size will not be permitted unless agreed with the Engineer.
6.8. Welding
Only welding processes set out in BS EN 1090-2:2018+A1:2011 Cl. 7.3 shall be used.
Welding shall be carried out with qualified procedures using a welding procedure specification (WPS) in
accordance with the relevant part of EN ISO 15609 or EN ISO 14555 or EN ISO 15620, as relevant. If
specified, special deposition conditions for tack welds shall be included in the WPS. For joints in hollow
section lattice structures the WPS shall define the start and stop zones and the method to be used in order
to cope with locations where the welds change from a fillet weld to butt around a joint.
Qualification of welding procedures and welding personnel shall be in accordance with BS EN 1090-
2:2008+A1:2011. The tests (impact tests, welding production tests, etc) shall be agreed by the Engineer.
The fit-up of parts joined by fillet weld shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 1011-2. Additionally,
gaps between parts jointed by fillet welds shall not exceed 1mm average (measured over 1m or the length
of weld, whichever is smaller). Where this additional requirement is not achieved, the Contractor shall
increase the size of the fillet weld accordingly, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.

All welds shall be continuous, unless otherwise specified on the Drawings or agreed by the Engineer.
Intermittent fillet welds shall not be permitted.
All slag associated with welding shall be removed.
The location of butt welds used as splices to accommodate available lengths of constituent product is
permitted, except in areas specified on the Drawings. The location of all such splices shall be shown in
shop drawings and agreed by the Engineer.
Butt welds shall be ground flush only where specified on the Drawings.
Identification shall be provided to enable each weld to be traced to the welder or operator who made it.
Relevant prequalified welding procedures certified by an independent inspection authority will be

considered by the Engineer.
In general tack welds should be made to the same welding procedure specification as the permanent
weld. If special deposition conditions for tack welds are required, they shall be included in the welding
procedure specification.
The position of any welded temporary attachments and additional shop butt welds shall be to the approval
of the Engineer and a written record of the details shall be provided. In general, temporary welded
attachments will not be allowed within 25mm of the edges of flange plates. Any temporary welded
attachments shall be completely removed. Attachments may be removed by flame cutting not less than 3
mm above the connection on condition that the welded area is subsequently ground flush and checked for
cracks using Magnetic Particle Inspection.
The use of temporary attachment is permitted, except in areas specified on the Drawings. Any welded
attachments provided for temporary works during construction that can, with the agreement of the
Engineer, be left in position, such as lifting cleats on top flanges that are subsequently cast into reinforced
concrete, shall be considered as permanent works and be subjected to appropriate testing and inspection.
In addition to the requirements of BS EN 1090-2:2018, the cause of any defect shall be identified and details
given to the Engineer. Where in the opinion of the Engineer the incidence of unacceptable defects is
unduly high, he may require amended welding procedure trials to be undertaken before work proceeds.
Formal procedures for the repair of welds shall be agreed by the Engineer.
The acceptance criteria for “excessive throat thickness” shall be quality level D in accordance with EN ISO
5817. Unless the excessive throat thickness is detrimental for the performance of the bridge.
6.9. Bending and pressing
The Contractor shall submit written procedures for pressing and bending of plates before commencing
fabrication. Procedure trials shall be carried out witnessed by an independent inspection authority.

6.10. Handling, transport and erection
The design is based on the construction method and/or sequences given in the following documents:
- Insert drawings
The steelwork dimensions on the Drawings are specified for a reference temperature of 10ºC.
Where cambering is achieved by a series of straight chords to a continuous curve, the chord lengths shall
be agreed by the Engineer.
If shims are provided in slip resistant connections, the class of contact surface and surface treatment of the
shims shall be the same as for the contact surfaces of the primary components. All shims shall be made of
flat steel.
Requirements for temporary bracing shall be compatible with the construction method shown in the list of
documents herein this Section. Contractor’s design of temporary bracing shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval.
The allowances for permanent deformation and other associated dimensions specified on the Drawings
allow for the quasi-permanent effects of the following actions, using the design basis method of erection:
i.) After steelwork erection:

Self weight of structural steelwork
ii.) After completion of structure:
Self weight of structural steelwork
Self weight of structural concrete
Self weight of non-structural parts
The effects of shrinkage modified by creep
6.10.1. Contractor’s erection method
If the Contractor proposes to adopt an alternative construction method and/or sequence to that referred to
in Section 6.10., the Contractor shall verify in accordance with the design rules that the alternative method
and/or sequence can be used without detriment to the permanent works.
The Contractor shall allow a period of at least 8 weeks for the verification of the erection method in
accordance with the design rules, to the satisfaction of the permanent works designer.
6.10.2. Marking for erection
A method of durable marking of all pieces shall be agreed by the Engineer. Hard stamping giving angular
indentations shall not be permitted.

6.10.3. Supports, anchors and bearings
Compensation for settlement of support shall be made by the Contractor if such settlement differs from the
design assumptions.
The finished cover to steel packings (comprising a total thickness of grout and any concrete) shall comply
with the cover requirements of EN 1992.
Packings and levelling nuts may be left in position provided that it can be verified in accordance with the
design rules that there is no detriment to the permanent works, subject to the Engineer’s approval.
The treatment of steelwork, bearings and concrete surface before grouting shall be as specified on the
Drawings.
Areas where the edges of the base plate are to be sealed, without grouting, are specified on the Drawings.
6.10.4. Handling and storage
The Steelwork Contractor shall provide any additional bracing or other restraints that may be required to
ensure stability and strength of the steelwork during handling, transport and erection.
Fabricated and manufactured items which are to be stored prior to transport or erection shall be kept clear
of the ground and shall be laid out or stacked so as to prevent water or dirt accumulating on or against any
of the surfaces. Suitable packing shall be placed between layers of stacked steelwork. When cover is
provided it shall be ventilated sufficiently to keep condensation to a minimum.
Fabricated components shall not be stacked or stored in an external environment without openings in
closed sections being adequately sealed to prevent internal corrosion.
Components weighing less than one tonne shall be kept in a storage area away from their erection point in
order to minimise damage to protective coatings.
Fabrication components shall be positioned or have openings sealed in such a manner to prevent internal
corrosion of closed sections.
When appropriate, special slings or lifting points or both shall be utilised for handling, loading and
unloading in at the place of manufacture, during transit and on site. Special supports, packing and lashings
shall be provided on vehicles, trucks and on ship to prevent chafing. Small components shall receive
special handling and stacking treatment.
6.11. Surface treatment
The corrosion protection requirements shall be as detailed on these Specifications and Drawings.
All exposed edges that are prepared for coating shall be rounded to a minimum radius of 2mm.

Preparation grade P2 shall generally apply. Should the corrosivity category of the bridge is C4 or above, the
preparation grade shall be P3. Generally, preparation grades shall be compatible with the corrosion
protection specified in Section 7..
External surfaces of weather resistant steel shall be blast cleaned to grade Sa2 to BS EN ISO 8501-1 to
ensure uniform weathering. Weather resistant steel shall be kept free of contamination such as oil, grease,
paint, concrete or asphalt.
The internal treatment system to be provided to enclosed spaces that are to be sealed by welding or
provided with internal protective treatment shall be as described in Series 1900 SHW.
All internal spaces which have been identified as being hermetically sealed shall have all joints, whether
welded, mechanically fastened or bonded, leak tested prior to application of the external protective coating,
in accordance with BS EN 1779. The bubble emission technique in accordance with BS EN 1593 is
recommended.
Where spaces are to be fully enclosed by seal welds to prevent the ingress of moisture, weld imperfections
otherwise permitted under the welding specification shall be sealed by application of suitable filler material.
Where mechanical fasteners penetrate the wall of sealed enclosed spaces, the penetrations shall be sealed
to prevent the ingress of water.
It is recommended in NA to BS EN 1993-2 that box girders shall not be sealed and should be provided with
additional sacrificial thickness, rather than internal treatment. It also recommends that structural hollow
sections either be sealed or be provided with additional sacrificial thickness.
Surfaces that are to be in contact with concrete, including parts of the undersides of baseplates, shall be
coated with the protective treatment applied to the steelwork, excluding any cosmetic finishing coat, for a
distance from the exposed edge. Where concrete is cast against the surface, this distance shall be at least
25 mm. Where permanent formwork bears on the surface, the distance from the exposed edge shall be at
least 100 mm, or a greater distance as specified on the Drawings.
Uncoated surfaces shall be blast cleaned or wire-brushed to remove loose mill scale and cleaned to
remove dust, oil and grease. Immediately before concreting, any loose rust, dust and other loose debris
shall be removed by cleaning.
For slip resistant connections in inaccessible area, faying surfaces shall meet the requirements necessary
to develop the friction for the specified surface treatment. Other connections shall not be made with excess
paint on the faying surfaces. As a maximum, faying surfaces and surfaces beneath washers shall be treated
with a primer and undercoat.
Bolted connections in inaccessible areas, including the perimeter around such connections shall be treated
with the full corrosion protection system specified for the remainder of the steelwork.

Where precoated constituent products are welded, all coating affected by the welding process shall be
made good to the original standard.
6.12. Geometrical tolerances
The tolerance of steelwork dimensions and levels at completion shall be as follows:
i.) On level, relative to that specified:

At the supports: 5mm
At midspan: span/1000, up to a maximum of 35mm
ii.) On level, of one main girder relative to another, adjacent, main girder:
20 mm
iii.) On level, of one ladder deck cross girder relative to another, adjacent, cross girder:
20 mm
iv.) On plan position of steelwork at bearings (structure datum temperature):

Transverse position of bearing top and bottom plates relative to substructure:
± 15 mm
Longitudinal position of bearing top plate relative to bottom plate:
± (10 mm + Ls / 10000)
Longitudinal position of bearing bottom plate relative to substructure:
± 10 mm
Where Ls is distance from the fixed point.
v.) On verticality of main girder webs at supports:
Depth/300 or 3mm, whichever is greater.
vi.) On spacing of top flanges where permanent formwork is to be used:
± 10 mm
If the steelwork is not within tolerance, it shall be reported to the designer of the permanent works and shall
be adjusted, if necessary, to maintain the structural adequacy in accordance with the design rules.
Dimensional checks shall be recorded at acceptance of the structure. The positional accuracy of the
erected steelwork shall be measured in the following condition:
 Under self-weight of steelwork.

 Once the deck and surfacing are in place.
 Upon final completion of the structure.
Note: in all cases no live loads is to be applied to the structure.

6.13. Inspection, testing and correction
6.13.1. General
Inspection and testing shall be carried out by relevantly qualified personnel.
6.13.2. Welds
All welds shall be visually inspected to BS EN ISO 17637 before non-destructive testing and protective
treatment.
Non-destructive testing shall be in accordance with the appropriate standards:
- Ultrasonic BS EN ISO 17640

- Magnetic Particle BS EN 6072
All welds shall be inspected not less than 48 hours after welding using the methods and detailed
procedures approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall carry out Magnetic Particle Inspection to BS EN 6072 for the following:
- All full penetration butt welds.

- All partial penetration butt welds.
- 10% of the length of each continuous longitudinal fillet weld.
- 20% of the length of each fillet weld for bearing and other stiffeners.
The Contractor shall carry out ultrasonic inspection to BS EN ISO 17640 for all penetration and partial
penetration butt welds.
The weld material and heat-affected zone in production test plates shall be tested to ensure compliance
with 5.4.1.2 of BS 5400: Part 6.
All loose rust and scale, slag residue and weld splatter shall be removed prior to inspection.
Weld inspection and weld acceptance criteria shall conform to the requirements of BS 5400: Part 6 Clause
5.5.2. For the purpose of weld acceptance criteria, the minimum class requirement for all welds shall be
Class F.
In addition to the requirements of Clause 5.5.2.4 of BS 5400: Part 6, the following defects are unacceptable:
- Stray-arcing spots
Weld production tests shall be carried out on stud shear connectors, as follows:
i.) Each stud shall be tested by striking the side of the head of the stud with a 2 kg hammer. The weld
shall be considered acceptable if there is a clear ring tone due to the striking.

ii.) Selected studs shall be bent by striking the side of the head of the stud with a 6 kg hammer until its
head is displaced laterally a distance of approximately 0.25 times the height of the stud from its
original position. Satisfactory studs shall not be bent back again.
The studs to be tested in accordance of ii.) above shall be selected at a rate of approximately 1 in 50 studs
on each girder or piece of steelwork, with a minimum of 2 per piece. The direction of the test shall be such
as not to interfere with the fixing of reinforcement. Additionally, before starting welding, three studs shall be
welded to a plate of the same thickness as the flange plate and tested in accordance with ii.) above. If any
of these studs fail, further sets of three studs shall be welded and tested until satisfactory results are
obtained, before any studs are welded to the girders. Studs whose welds have failed either of these tests
shall be replaced, according to an approved welding repair procedure.
Repair by welding on cover plates is not permitted.
6.13.3. Mechanical fastening
The inspection shall be carried out during and after tightening.
For the torque method, the torque may be applied to the head, if access to apply torque to the nut is not
possible.
For the part turn method, the first step shall be controlled by use of calibrated torque wrench. Before the
second step starts, the marking of all the nuts relative to the bolt threads shall be visually inspected. Any
missing mark shall be corrected. After the second step, the marks shall be inspected with the following
requirements:
i.) If the angle of the second step rotation is more than 15º below the specified value, this angle shall
be corrected.
ii.) If the angle is more than 30º over the specified angle, or the bolt or the nut has failed, the bolt
assembly shall be replaced by a new one.
6.14. Mortar filling / bedding of bases
Bedding thickness range: 15-50mm
Spaces beneath base plates: completely filled as follows:
Spaces 0-25 mm deep: obtain instructions.
Spaces 25-50 mm deep: 1:1 cement, sand mortar, just fluid enough to pour. Tamped well as
filling proceeds. Provide temporary shuttering as necessary.
Spaces 50-80 mm deep: 1:2 cement, sand mortar, just damp, tamped well against properly
fixed supports as filling proceeds.
Cement: Portland cements to BS EN 197-1 – CEMI 42.5 or 52.5.

Sand: to BS EN 1260, grade 0/4 or 0/2 (MP).
Additives: N/A.
viii.)

7. PROTECTION OF STEEL WORK AGAINST CORROSION
Documents for Highway Works, Volume 1 Specification for Highway Works. All painting and surface
preparation shall be carried out in accordance with this Specification.
Throughout this specification the definition of nominal dry film thickness shall be that the average of the
readings taken over 10 sq.m should equal or exceed the nominal thickness and in no case should any
reading be less than 80% of the nominal thickness. All dry film thickness measurements shall be carried out
in accordance with Association for Materials Protection and Performance (formerly Steel Structures
Painting Council) and SSPC Specification P.A.2.
The approximate thickness of hot dipped galvanising shall be determined by the use of electromagnetic
gauges. The thickness of subsequent coats of paint shall be measured on areas of galvanising that have
been previously measured and recorded.
The Contractor shall make wet film thickness measurement immediately after the application of paint as
often as is necessary to ensure that the specified dry film thickness is obtained overall.
The finish schedule is included in Section 7.9..
7.2. Surface preparation
7.2.1. Dry abrasive blast cleaning of new steelwork
Surface preparation by blast cleaning is the minimum acceptable standard for all paintwork. The products
resulting from blast cleaning or the abrasive shall not contaminate wet paint films in adjacent locations. All
equipment for blast cleaning shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
Oil and vapor traps shall be fitted in all compressed air lines used for nozzle blast cleaning steel surfaces to
ensure that compressed air is free from oil and moisture vapor.
Equipment which uses abrasives more than once shall be equipped with a dust removal system and sieves
to remove fines and contaminated matter. Also with such equipment extra care shall be taken to ensure
that all surfaces are degreased before blast cleaning. The Contractor shall carry out a series of tests using
various sizes of abrasives to determine which gives the specified surface profile. This size of abrasive shall
be used for all subsequent blast cleaning. The grading of abrasives for equipment which uses abrasives
more than once shall be checked at regular intervals and fresh abrasives added to ensure that the correct
grading is maintained.
Before blast cleaning commences, oil and grease shall be removed from the surfaces of the steel by
scabbing with an emulsion cleaner and rinsing with clean water. Solvents to remove oil and grease shall
not be used.

Blast cleaned surfaces shall comply with the requirements of SHW clauses 1903.11, 12 and 13.
Defects in the surface of steel, i.e. skin laminations, surface shelling, rolling laps, cracks and deep pitting,
shall be made good to the Engineer’s satisfaction. Any polished or smooth areas shall be further roughened
before the blast primer or other paint is applied.
All welds shall be cleaned of rust, slag and adherent mill scale and all welds spatter removed. The welds
should be ground or otherwise repaired to remove sharp edges and other irregularities. Undercuts and
pinholes should be filled with welding. The method of cleaning shall be by SSPC-SP2, Hand tool cleaning,
or SSPC-SP3, Power tool cleaning, followed by abrasive blast cleaning.
The surface roughness shall be estimated by ISO profile comparator as detailed in BS EN ISO 8503, Part 2.
The grade required for each finish is stated in the schedule within these Specifications.
If the steelwork before surface preparation is in a worse condition than rust grades A and B according to BS
EN ISO 8501-1, then the surface cleaned to the visual cleanliness specified in the schedule shall be further
chemically tested for the presence and quantity of soluble iron corrosion products. The test shall be carried
out in accordance with the method detailed in BS EN ISO 8502, Part 1. For steelwork subsequently to be
immersed or in splash zone conditions, the maximum quantity of ferrous salts remaining shall be 20
mg/sq.m. For all other steelwork the maximum shall be 100 mg/sq.m.
7.2.2. Cleaning of sound, previously painted steelwork for remedial work
Areas shall be thoroughly cleaned of all extraneous matter. Oil and grease shall be removed firstly by
wiping with clean dry rags followed by an approved emulsion cleaner. Surfaces shall then be washed
down with an aqueous solution of an approved detergent followed by thorough rinsing with fresh water.
This sequence of operations shall be repeated until the surface passes a “water-break” test, i.e. clean fresh
water spreads freely over the surface with a low contact angle. The cleaning agent shall not leave a residue
on the surface.
All sound, strongly adherent paint shall be scrubbed free from loose chalking paint residues, dirt and other
contaminants using an aqueous solution of an approved detergent. Alkaline cleaning agents shall not be
used. The surface shall then be thoroughly rinsed with fresh water and allowed to dry completely before
painting. Water trapped in crevices shall be removed using compressed air.
Areas of paintwork which are glossy shall be lightly abraded with 240 grade abrasive paper to provide a key
for subsequent coats. Any dust remaining on the surface shall be removed, preferable by vacuum cleaning.
7.2.3. Preparation of previously painted steelwork showing breakdown or corrosion
Corroded areas shall be restored to a bright metal finish, and the surrounding area of paint roughened, by
mechanical abrading tools. If blast cleaning is used the surrounding area of paint in the overlap shall be
tested for adhesion to ensure that its bond has not been weakened or destroyed.

Areas to be blast cleaned shall be grit blasted to Sa 2½ according to BS EN ISO 8501-1 using non-metallic
abrasive to the standards as stated in this Specification.
The blasted area shall be extended to 50mm into adjacent surfaces and subsequent paint coats shall
overlap the surrounding areas by 25 mm.
The cleaned steelwork shall be tested for soluble iron corrosion salts in accordance with Section 7.2.1..
Loose and flaking paint shall be removed and the existing paint taken back to a firm edge and the edges
bevelled. The prepared metal surfaces shall then be patch primed with the specified primer.
7.2.4. Preparation of hot dip galvanising for painting
All dirt and other adhering contaminating matter shall be removed from galvanised surfaces by brushing
with wire or stiff bristle brushes or by other methods which are to be to the approval of the Engineer.
Cleaning must not damage the galvanising.
Any oil or grease shall be removed by application of an approved emulsion cleaner. Any zinc corrosion
products remaining shall be removed by washing with clean water and scrubbing with hard bristle
brushes.
Prior to the application of paint, all galvanised surfaces shall be treated with Alvoland Z (as manufactured
by Pyrene Chemical Services or similar approved chemical pretreatment). All visible zinc corrosion
products shall be removed by abrading to bridge metal before such treatment.
7.3. Priming
7.3.1.Priming of blast cleaned steel
The surfaces of the steel shall, after completion of the blasting process, be cleaned to ensure that all loose
material and blast cleaning products are removed.
The surface of the steel shall be dry before the primer is applied.
Oil or grease on the surface of the steel prepared by blast cleaning shall be removed by an emulsion
cleaner and re-blasted.
Steel surface which have been blast cleaned shall be painted with the specified blast primer. Surfaces shall
be primed before there is any visible evidence of deterioration. If such deterioration occurs very rapidly the
surface is contaminated with soluble iron corrosion salts and shall be cleaned again appropriately.

7.4. Protection of joints
7.4.1. High strength friction grip (HSFG) bolted joints
In the case of painted steelwork where the faying surfaces of HSFG bolted joints are bare steel, the blast
primer shall be taken between 10 mm and 20 mm inside the perimeter of the joint area. The outer edges
and surfaces of joint plates may also be given a coat of blast primer in order to reduce subsequent surface
preparation. The remainder of the faying surface area shall be masked by adhesive type.
The tape shall be retained as temporary protection, being removed immediately before assembly. All visible
traces of adhesive shall be removed from the surface using an approved solvent before making the joint.
The solvent must be carefully applied and be not harmful to the paint system.
Where load indicating washers or bolts with load indicating heads are used, the feeler gauge slots shall be
filled with a high build paint or mastic compatible with the final coating system. The filling shall be carried
out after the final tightening of all bolts and checking procedures.
Bolted connections to receive 1 additional stripe coat over and above that specified in Clause 1914(13) of
SHW.
7.4.2. Non friction grip bolted joints
For all components coated to any extent before fabrication, the contact surfaces shall be coated to the
same standard.
Joint surfaces erected uncoated shall be hand or power tool brushed and coated with one coat of the
appropriate primer.
7.4.3. Welded joints
Where paints other than blast primers are to be applied to the parent surfaces before caking a joint, they
shall be stepped back at 3 mm intervals commencing at 80 mm from welded joints.
Before painting, all welds shall be cleaned to the same standard as specified for the parent surfaces and
dressed to a smooth contour. Weld scale and spatter shall be removed by grinding or chipping.
If the welding process leaves alkaline deposits these shall be washed from the weld area with clean water.
Unless otherwise describe in the Specification, welds and surfaces which have been affected by welding
shall receive the protective system, which is applied to the parent surfaces, but including one extra stripe of
coating of the primer.

7.5. Application
7.5.1. Sequence and order of work
Painting shall be carried out as expeditiously as possible and in accordance with the programme
requirements.
The sequence of work shall ensure that contamination of all paint coats in the system is reduce to a
minimum.
Steel surfaces with a blast primer shall be painted as soon as conditions permit.
Where dirt and dust has been trapped in the paint film it shall be removed with fine abrasive paper and the
area repainted with the coat affected.
7.5.2.Application of paint
All paints shall be prepared and applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s data sheets or written
instructions. No thinners or cleaners shall be employed other than those recommended by the paint
manufacturer.
All coating materials shall be thoroughly stirred prior to application. If there is settling of the pigment, it shall
be redispersed with a power agitator to form a uniform mixture. For two-component materials that are
mixed separately from to the spray apparatus, the catalysed mixture shall be agitated with a power mixer.
For heavily pigmented coatings the agitation shall continue during application.
Two pack materials shall be mixed by mechanical stirrer and shall be in the proportions supplied by the
paint manufacturer.
Mixes shall be prepared from the contents of whole containers. No part use of containers will be permitted.
Solvent container closures shall be tight at all times to prevent the entrance of humid air.
Painted surfaces to be over-painted shall be cleaned and dried before a further coat of paint is applied.
Dust shall be removed by brushing or vacuum cleaning. Oil, grease or other contaminating matter shall be
removed by an emulsion cleaner. Painted surfaces which have become contaminated by sea-salt shall be
thoroughly washed with clean potable water.
Coatings shall only be applied to clean, dry surfaces that have been prepared to, and meet the
requirements of this Specification. A new coat shall not be applied over another coat that has any
contamination present.
Paints shall be applied as evenly as possible to provide a smooth coating of uniform thickness. Adequate
thickness, meeting the minimum thickness, shall be applied to all bolts and edges.

Damaged areas of priming coats or undercoats shall be made good before further coats of paint are
applied. The surface preparation, types of paint, and the number of coats used for making good shall be the
same as that existing on the damaged surface.
Application shall normally be by spray unless indicated otherwise. Paint with a consistency suitable for
spray application shall not be applied by brush except for very small areas, for surfaces not accessible to
the spray gun or for cutting in at edges and similar locations.
7.5.3. Application of paint by brush
Brushes shall be to the approval of the Engineer and shall comply with the requirements of BS 2992.
Brushes shall be in good conditions and be of the correct type and size to suit the type of paint and surface
being painted.
7.5.4. Application of paint by roller
The type and covering of rollers for applying paints shall be to the approval of the Engineer. Edges shall be
masked, or cutting-in shall be carried out using a small brush just prior to rolling.
7.5.5. Application of paint by spray
The procedure and equipment for spray application shall be approved by the Engineer and shall be of the
type and capacity suitable for the application of the specific material in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Spray equipment, especially spray guns using compressed air, shall not be used in locations where over-
spray, re-bound, drift or spray mist causes a nuisance or defaces the works.
Tests of spray application shall be carried out and where necessary, the fluid tip, air cap, air pressure or
other variable components of the equipment shall be changed as agreed with the Engineer to ensure that
the best results are obtained.
7.5.6. Scaffolding and access
The painting contractor shall provide all necessary scaffolding or safe access to enable the work and the
inspection of the work to be efficiently carried out in the prevailing ambient conditions. Scaffolding shall
conform to current legal requirements. Spraying from a boatswain’s chair or spider stage may be permitted
subject to the Engineer’s consent.
7.5.7. Ambient conditions
No material shall be applied or blasting take place when any of the following criteria exist:
i.) The metal temperature is less than 3ºC above the dew point.
ii.) The air temperature is below 10ºC.

iii.) The relative humidity exceeds 85% or as recommended by paint manufacturer and agreed with the
Engineer.
iv.) The metal temperature is less than 10ºC or more than 30ºC during application.
7.6. Handling of coated items
7.6.1. Transport
Where provided, lifting lugs or brackets shall be used for all handling operations.
Where lifting lugs are not provided, only nylon slings or rubber protected chairs shall be used.
No steelwork shall be loaded for transport until the coating system has been passed by the Engineer as
being sufficiently dry for handling.
During transport, loose items shall be packed and lashed to avoid chafing.
7.6.2. Repair of damage to coatings
Paint coatings that have failed or been damaged shall be replaced to the standard and with the materials
originally specified. Sound point that has to be overlapped shall be suitably abraded and the applications
feathered to give a smooth finish.
Small areas of damage on galvanised coatings shall be repaired using appropriate approved melt sticks.
For larger areas of damaged galvanising or aluminium metal spray, the surface shall be abrasive blasted or
abraded to bright metal and then coated with a minimum of two coats of a two pack zinc rich epoxy to
minimum total dry film thickness of 100 microns.
7.6.3. Storage
Timber packing shall be used to prevent contact of painted surfaces stored on the ground.
Painted items not stacked under cover shall be stacked such that:
i.) There is no water ponding.

ii.) The bottom layer is raised above the ground and the rain up lash zone.
The area of packing on contact surfaces shall be sufficiently large to avoid damage to the coatings, taking
into account the dead weight of the complete stack.
The number of positions of the packing shall be such that there is no distortion of the painted item.
7.6.4. Surface in contact with concrete
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, primer coatings and all shop paint coats shall be returned
25mm into the concrete/steelwork contact area.

Galvanised coatings shall be applied overall. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, concrete may
come into direct contact with galvanised surfaces.
7.7. Materials
7.7.1. Paint
The Contractor shall submit with his tender, the name of the manufacturer or manufacturers of the paint he
proposes to use in the work. Paints shall comply with CG 303 DMRB (formerly BD 35/14).
All paint materials shall be delivered on site in the manufacturer’s sealed containers bearing the
manufacturer’s labels identifying the type, colour and batch number.
All paint materials shall be stored under cover, at not less than 4ºC or more than 27ºC.
Paint shall be stored in such a manner that each batch can be issued for use in order of delivery.
A separate store shall be provided for cleaning solvents used for cleaning out spray apparatus, brushes,
etc. They shall not be stored where paint or paint thinners are stored or where paint is prepared for
application.
Paint with a limited safe shelf life shall not be used after the period stated in the manufacturer’s data sheet.
If the period has been exceeded the materials shall be marked unequivocally as time expired and removed
from the store.
Inflammable materials shall not be stored in accordance with the appropriate regulations.
7.7.2.Data sheets
Full data sheets shall be supplied for all materials giving details of at least the following information:
- Brand name
- Name of manufacturer
- Date of manufacturer
- Composition of paint:
o Pigment
o Binder
o Solvent
- Physical properties including specific gravity and flash point
- Colour
- Practical spreading rate
- Wet film thickness
- Dry film thickness
- Surface drying time
- Hard drying time

- Re-countable time, minimum and maximum

- Recommended method of application
- Recommended thinners
- Pot life
- Effects on dry paint of adjacent welding or burning
- Safety factors, lower explosive limit and threshold limit values far both vapour and spray mist
- Safety precautions:
o Requirements for personal protection
o Early symptoms of over exposure
- First aid for:
o Ingestion
o Splash on skin
o Splash in eyes
- Ventilation requirements
- Storage requirements
- Spillage or leakage procedures
- Fire precautions:
o Any special hazards
o Extinguishing media
Properties listed above shall where appropriate be related to standard reference temperatures and relative
humidity. The effects of differing ambient conditions shall be fully detailed.
Successive coats in a system shall be supplied in different shades of colour. Unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer, all the different paints forming the system applied to a particular surface shall be supplied by
the same manufacturer. The source of supply shall not be changed without the prior written approval of the
Engineer.
7.7.3. Containers
All paint shall be delivered in containers sealed by the manufacturer.
The name of the manufacturer, colour, type of paint, batch number, information regarding storage
requirement and all the appropriate safety symbols shall be clearly shown on each container.
The markings on the containers shall clearly identify the method of application for which it is in a “ready to
apply” state.
Two pack paints shall be supplied in kits of sealed containers by the manufacturer. Each kit shall have
sufficient materials for a full batch of paint of correct proportions.

7.7.4.Galvanized Coatings
Galvanized coatings shall comply with BS EN ISO 1461 “Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and
steel articles” and with the following:
i.) Inhibited hydrochloric acid with a strength not exceeding 14% and within a temperature range of
15ºC to 25ºC pr inhibited sulfuric acid with a strength not exceeding 14% and within a temperature
range of 60ºC to 80ºC shall be used for pickling.
ii.) Components shall not be immersed in the pickling acid longer than is necessary for cleaning the
surfaces prior to galvanizing.
iii.) The surfaces of components to be galvanized shall be dried before immersion in the molten zinc.
iv.) When an aqueous flux is to be used all traces of acid shall be washed off immediately after
pickling.
v.) Galvanized coatings shall be virtually free from imperfections, including porosity, to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
vi.) Detrimental surface contamination of galvanized coatings which are to be painted shall be
removed by wet cleaning in compliance with Clause 7.2.. The surfaces shall not receive chromate
passivation treatment.
vii.) Vent holes drilled in hollow sections prior to galvanizing shall be plugged to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
7.8. Coating Inspection
7.8.1. General
The Contractor shall carry out full quality control procedures to ensure compliance with these specifications
and shall afford full access for inspection by the Engineer at all stages of protective treatment.
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the Contractor’s coating inspection staff shall be qualified to a
minimum of Session-1 level of the AMPP (formerly NACE) International Coating Inspectors Training and
Certification programme.
7.8.2. Surface condition
All surfaces to be coated shall be inspected before application commences.
The condition of new steel surfaces before being prepared shall be recorded in accordance with Class A, B
or C of Swedish Standard SIS 05 59 00. Where steel has been exposed for considerable periods, or when
instructed by the Engineer, tests shall be carried out to determine the extent of contamination by
hygroscopic salts. Where in the opinion of the Engineer excessive rusting has taken place, the steel shall be
rejected.
The records of the examination of surfaces before preparation shall include information on all defects such
as skin laminations, surface shelling, rolling laps, cracks and deep pitting in steel surfaces which are to be

prepared by blast cleaning. The Contractor shall ensure that these defects are corrected to the approval of
the Engineer before priming.
All surfaces shall be inspected when preparation is completed and immediately before any paint or other
coating material is applied, to ensure that the standard of surface preparation is not less than that specified.
The amplitude of surface roughness of a blast cleaned surface shall be measured by ISO Comparator, to
ensure that it complies with the requirements of the coating to be used.
The cleanliness of a blast cleaned surface shall be assessed to determine its freedom from:
i.) Dust and debris.

ii.) Water soluble corrosion salts.
iii.) Oil and grease.
iv.) Millscale and visible rust deposits.
v.) Alkaline weld deposits.
vi.) Moisture.
7.8.3. Abrasive
The abrasive used for blast cleaning shall be sampled at regular intervals and tested to ensure that the
correct grading is maintained.
Re-used abrasive shall be tested for oil contamination and the entire working nix rejected if found
contaminated.
Steel surfaces prepared by blast cleaning shall be inspected to ensure that all defects such as skin
laminations, surface shelling, rolling laps, cracks and deep pitting have been treated to ensure that coatings
can be applied effectively.
7.8.4. Paint
Samples of paint shall be taken from paint kettles or other containers used in the application process. The
samples shall be taken where the measurement of film thickness or other variation in the paint properties
indicate that the paint is not being correctly prepared or excessive quantities of thinners are being added.
Such samples shall be taken in duplicate, and one shall be held for testing by the Engineer.
Where specification permits the addition of limited quantities of thinners to paints when applied by spray
equipment or in certain ambient conditions, the Contractor shall ensure that only thinners of the correct
type are used and that the quantity added does not exceed that specified or recommended by the paint
manufacturer, and that the limit is thoroughly mixed with the thinners.
The Contractor shall ensure that appropriate allowance is made for curing time, minimum and maximum
over coating time and pot life of two pack paints in relation to ambient temperature, strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

No two pack paints shall be used after expiration of their pot life for the relevant ambient temperature, even
if the paint appears to be in satisfactory conditions. Under no circumstances shall it be permitted to add
solvent to the mix in order to extend the pot life.
As required by the Engineer samples of paint shall be taken from freshly opened cans for testing in
approval independent laboratory. Tests to compare the relative properties of paint shall be carried out in
accordance with BS3900 Parts A1, A2, A3, A6, C2, C6. A duplicate sample shall be retained for further testing
as required by the Engineer.
7.8.5. Application
Application of paint systems by coating sub-contractors shall be inspected by the Contractor at all stages to
ensure that all the coats of the system are correctly applied in the right sequence. Intermediate coats of
paint shall be inspected to ensure that they are in the correct condition and that surfaces are prepared in
accordance with the Specification before they are overprinted.
Any are not satisfying the standards required shall be repainted.
Records of the application of paint systems shall include any information relating to work in adjacent areas
or any other factors which could result in contamination of, or affect the paint films in any way whatsoever.
The thickness of dry paint films shall be measured by means of electromagnetic gauges. Wet film
thicknesses shall be measured by comb or wheel gaug Dry film thickness gauges shall be calibrated in
relation to the roughness of the blast cleaned surface and used in accordance with Steel Structures
Painting Council (S.S.P.C), Paint Application Specification No. 2. The measurement procedure shall also be
in accordance with that specification.
When the Engineer is satisfied that dry film thickness measurements show that the specified film thickness
for each coat of the system is being consistently obtained, he may accept the use of wet film thickness
gauges for routine measurements with dry film thickness measurements being taken at less frequent
intervals. Acceptance by the Engineer of wet film thickness measurements shall in no way relieve the
Contractor from his responsibility for complying with the specified requirements for dry film thicknesses.
Measurements of film thickness by destructive methods, for example the wedge-cut measuring devices,
shall only be carried out with the approval of or when instructed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall bear
the cost of making good areas of damage from such tests.
Areas which have been subject to damage shall be inspected before remedial work is carried out, and
remedial measures shall be agreed with the Engineer.
7.8.6. Access for inspection
Access to the work surface shall be provided for inspection by the Engineer’s inspector at all times. All
necessary facilities to permit the inspector to carry out his duties to the satisfaction of the Engineer shall be
provided.

7.8.7. Approval of work
The inspector is not authorised to give dispensation for relaxing the specification requirements. Only the
written authority of the Engineer is sufficient for a change in the specification.
7.8.8. Equipment
The Contractor shall provide all instruments, tools and equipment necessary for inspection of paintwork.
Sufficient equipment of the approved type shall be provided to test the standards of surface preparation,
quality of coatings and obtain the necessary environmental data. Full details of all instruments to be
provided for use by the inspector, including their make and range shall be provided to the Engineer for his
approval. Equipment shall be maintained in good, clean condition and gauges shall be calibrated against
standard instruments at regular intervals.
7.8.9. Programme and records
Programme and progress records shall be prepared and kept up to date. They shall be in a form approved
by, and be available when required by the Engineer.
Records shall show the condition of each surface before preparation. They shall also state when surfaces
were prepared, and coatings were applied to the various sections of the coating works. In addition to
showing the total amount of work completed, the reports shall include the date on which surfaces were
examined before preparation and also when the approval or otherwise was given to prepared surfaces,
priming, intermediate and final coats of the coating systems.
Information on conditions which were responsible for suspending coating work on any sections shall be
included in the record sheet. The information relating to inclement weather conditions shall be separated
from other conditions.
The record sheets shall show the daily weather conditions including temperature and humidity and also
fluctuations in these conditions which affect the coating work. A quality control document shall be provided
for each day’s work. Areas of completed work must be clearly defined by reference to approved working
drawings.
7.9. Coating Schedule
7.9.1. System-1
All structural steelwork excluding interior of box girders, parapets, refuge outstands, power supply masts
and piling.
Out Site
- Blast clean to Sa 2.5 Swedish Standard SIS 05 59 00 and medium profile to ISO 8503/1 (grit).

- Coat with two pack polyamide cure epoxy blast primer to 25 microns (with allowance for the
roughness of the steel) nominal dry film thickness (dft).
Note: The maximum over coating time for the primer shall be sufficiently long to allow a reasonable period
between fabrication painting on site without the need to abrade the surface. This period must be to the
agreement of the Engineer.
On Site
- Mechanically remove weld spatter, grind welds and sharp edges to a smooth contour.
- Blast welds and any corroded areas to a bright metal finish.
- Remove all oil, grease or extraneous matter.
- Coat overall with 75 microns dft of a primer consisting of a linseed/tung oil phenolic medium
containing micaceous iron oxide pigment (natural shade, no aluminium pigment permissible).
- Coat overall with 40 microns dft of alkyd undercoat suitable for finishing coat colour.
- Coat overall with 40 microns dft of alkyd gloss finishing coat to required colour.
7.9.2. System-2 Interior of Box Girders
As above but excluding alkyd top coat or coats.
7.9.3. System-3 Steel parapets and fencing, refuge outstands and power supply masts
Hot dip galvanize to BS EN ISO 1461 or equivalent (coating weight as specified for appropriate thickness of
steel).
No further treatment required on site.
7.9.4. System-4 for all small fixings and fasteners
Spun galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461 or equivalent or sherardized to BS 4921 or equivalent, as appropriate.
On site sherardized items should be coated with the same “on site” system as for systems 1 and 2, as
appropriate.
7.10. Warranties
7.10.1. Preliminary Stage
Each protection system used for items with a surface to be coated bigger than 25 m 2, shall be applied on
control surfaces adequately selected with regards to material, equipment, position, shape, exposure, etc.
Those works shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer or his representative, by the Contractor’s
manpower and according to the technical procedures of the paint manufacturer.

These control surfaces shall be used as check samples in case of defects occurring during the working
period or between the completion of work and the end of warranty period.
The comparison between the control surfaces and the worked surfaces shall be used as a base of
investigation to determine the origin of defects (if any) and to impute the defects to the products used or to
the workmanship.
7.10.2. Warranty period
The warranty period shall be 10 years. This period starts at the completion of the last coat of an item.
7.10.3. Warranty Criteria
Every paint protection system shall be considered satisfactory if, during the warranty period, the
deterioration of surfaces with which they are covered shall not exceed reference criterion Re2 of the
“European Scale of Degrees of Rusting for Anti-corrosive Paint” (or 0.5% of the surface), or a similar level of
failure by blistering or flaking.
The repair work shall be carried out at the Contractor’s expense to reach a surface protection with the same
warranty as the original protection. Methods and materials to be used shall be agreed with the Engineer.
In addition to the warranty against corrosion, the warranty shall cover also defects such as blistering,
cracking, flaking, sealing, chalking, under film corrosion and colour changes.
7.10.4. Guarantee
XXX

8. CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
8.1. General requirements
Documents for Highway Works, Volume 1 Specification for Highway Works, Series 1700 (SHW), together
with BS 8500-1 & 2 (2015 + A2:2019) and BRE Special Digest 1: 2005 Concrete in Aggressive ground (third
edition).
This section applies to the works that shall consist of the construction of all or portions of structures of
concrete, of the required grades and types, with or without reinforcement, prestressing reinforcement and
with or without admixtures, constructed in accordance with these Specifications and the lines, levels,
grades, and dimensions shown on the Drawings, and as required by the Engineer.
8.2. Ground conditions
The detailed Geotechnical Design Report states that the ground conditions are … aggressiveness….
8.3. Schedule for the Specification of Designed Concrete
Uses for the scheduled designed concrete specifications:
Designed Concrete Ref.
Mix Description Mix 1 – C40/50(1) Mix 2 – C40/50(2) Mix 3 – C40/50(3) Mix – C40/50(4)
Intended Use XXXX XXX XXX XXX
The concretes below shall be supplied as designed concretes in accordance with this Specification and
the relevant clauses of BS 8500-2.
Requirement Mix 1 Mix 2 Mix 3
In-situ - deck slab / Parapet stringcourse and In-situ - Bankseats /

4 4
diaphragm beam deck cantilevers Piers / Wingwalls
and Pilecaps for
Top face Bottom face
Underbridges4

C40/50 C40/50 C40/50
Intended Working Life of Structure 120 120 120
Minimum Cover to Reinforcement 35mm 50mm 35mm 50mm
Applicable Exposure Classes to XC4, XD3, XC4, XD1,

XC4, XD1, XF2 XC4, XD3, XF4
BS 8500 (Excluding DC-class) XF4 XF2
DC-class to BRE SD1 (where

DC-2 N/A DC-3
appropriate)1
Minimum Cement Content

360 380 380
(kg/m3)
Maximum Free Water/Cement

0.45 0.40 0.40
Ratio
IIIA+SR,
Required Group or Type and
IIIA, IIB-V IIIA, IIB-V
Class of Cement or Combination
IIB-V+SR
Maximum Aggregate Size (mm) 20 20 20
Chloride Content Class Cl 0,30 Cl 0,30 Cl 0,30
For Lightweight Concrete, the

N/A N/A N/A
Density Class or Target Density
For Heavyweight Concrete, the

N/A N/A N/A
Target Density
Consistence Class2 S3 S3 S3
Special Type or Class of Cement

N/A N/A N/A
or Combination
Freeze thaw
Required Source/Special Type of Freeze thaw resisting to BS
N/A resisting to BS EN
Aggregate EN 12620
12620
Required Admixture N/A N/A N/A
Air Entrainment Required

NO NO NO
[YES/NO]
Minimum or Maximum
5-30 5-30 5-30
Temperature of Fresh Concrete °C

Sampling and Testing As App 1/5 As App 1/5 As App 1/5
Other Requirements3 None None None
Mix 4 Mix 5 Mix 6
Parapet stringcourse and In-situ - Bankseats /

4
In-situ - deck slab / deck cantilevers Piers / Wingwalls
Requirement diaphragm beam 4
and Pilecaps for
Top face Bottom face Underbridges4
C40/50 C40/50 C40/50
Intended Working Life of Structure 120 120 120
Minimum Cover to Reinforcement 35mm 50mm 35mm 50mm
Applicable Exposure Classes to XC4, XD3, XC4, XD1,

XC4, XD1, XF2 XC4, XD3, XF4
BS 8500 (Excluding DC-class) XF4 XF2
DC-class to BRE SD1 (where

DC-2 N/A DC-3
appropriate)1
Minimum Cement Content

360 380 380
(kg/m3)
Maximum Free Water/Cement

0.45 0.40 0.40
Ratio
IIIA+SR,
Required Group or Type and
IIIA, IIB-V IIIA, IIB-V
Class of Cement or Combination
IIB-V+SR
Maximum Aggregate Size (mm) 20 20 20
Chloride Content Class Cl 0,30 Cl 0,30 Cl 0,30
For Lightweight Concrete, the

N/A N/A N/A
Density Class or Target Density
For Heavyweight Concrete, the

N/A N/A N/A
Target Density
Consistence Class2 S3 S3 S3
Special Type or Class of Cement

N/A N/A N/A
or Combination

Freeze thaw
Required Source/Special Type of Freeze thaw resisting to BS
N/A resisting to BS EN
Aggregate EN 12620
12620
Required Admixture N/A N/A N/A
Air Entrainment Required

NO NO NO
[YES/NO]
Minimum or Maximum
5-30 5-30 5-30
Temperature of Fresh Concrete °C
Sampling and Testing As App 1/5 As App 1/5 As App 1/5
Other Requirements3 None None None
Notes:
i.) The ground conditions, as gathered in section 8.2., assumed condition DC-3 to BRE SD1 except
where the ground is a fill to Specification for Highways Works Series 600.
ii.) Contractor to confirm consistence class suitable for the construction method.
iii.) See section XXXX for special concrete finish details.
iv.) For section thickness greater than 600mm, a thermal plan must be carried out in accordance with
CIRIA 660.
v.) Mass concrete may include mesh reinforcement for crack control.
vi.) Consistence class S1 or S2 may be used in accordance with CD 364 (formerly BA 82/00).
vii.) The addition of the abbreviation ‘+SR’ denotes an additional requirement for sulphate resistance,
that where the alumina content of the slag exceeds 14%, the tricalcium aluminate content of the
Portland cement fraction shall not exceed 10%.
viii.)APMX is achieved by using…
ix.) Δc is to complay with UK National Annex to BS EN 1992-1-1 and BS EN 1992-2, and as such will be
10mm with the following exceptions:
o For precast concrete construction it may be reduced to 5mm where certificates of
compliance are provided by the supplier which demonstrate, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, that such a reduction in tolerance is justified and achievable.
o For concrete cast directly against the ground, including for bored / cast in place piles, it
shall be increased to 50mm.
x.) See table below for additional performance requirements of sprayed concrete.
Sprayed concrete performance characteristics
Test Required Performance

Adhesion to substrate 1 to 1.5 N/mm3
Characteristic strength of cores (at 28 days) 40 N/mm2
Tensile splitting strength (at 28 days) >2.4 N/mm2
Static Modulus of Elasticity 33,000 N/mm2
Shrinkage <0.07 %
Coefficient of Thermal Expansion 8 to 12x10-6 /ºC
Coefficient of Chloride Ion Diffusion <700 x 10-15 m2/s
8.4. Impregnation Schedule
8.4.1. General Requirements
The structural concrete elements receiving surface protection systems shall be as specified in Section
8.4.2.. of this Specification.
The Contractor shall submit details of the surface protection system products to the Engineer at least four
(4) weeks prior to commencing any works in respect of surface protection for his approval.
Special requirements or constraints to the application of surface protection system shall be as detailed in
Section 8.4.2..
Contaminated materials, protective sheeting or masking that have come into contact with surface
protection system products shall be disposed of at an appropriate disposal facility by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall ensure that any surface protection system products used in combination with other
surface protection system products shall be compatible with each other and applied in complementary
combinations.
The Contractor shall ensure surface protection systems shall be clear and colourless following application
to the concrete substrate.
8.4.2. Structural concrete element receiving surface protection systems
The following structural concrete element shall receive surface protection systems:
- List if required.

8.4.3. Supply, storage and disposal of surface protection system
To be completed if needed.
8.4.4. Surface protection
8.4.5. Hydrophobic impregnation
8.4.6. Anti-carbonation coatings
8.5. Surface finishes
Refer to Section Error: Reference source not found.
8.6. Buried concrete
Buried concrete in contact with the soil and where not protected by structural waterproofing, shall be
treated with two coats of bituminous paint in accordance with the Specification where feasible.
ACEC class and Design Chemical class are shown in the Geotechnical Design Report and Section 8.2..
Where sulphate resistant concrete or additional measures are needed these will be indicated on the
Drawings and below.
STRUCTURE NAME OR LOCATION Piles, pile caps, wingwalls and abutments
ACEC Class AC-3 (pile cap / pile / wingwall /

abutment)
EXPOSURE CONDITION AND FORM OF
Cast in-situ concrete with one or more faces in
CONSTRUCTION ACEC contact with natural or undisturbed ground.
(Table A.2 of BS8500) ACEC Class AC-2 (pile cap / wingwall / abutment)
Cast in-situ concrete with one or more faces in

contact with imported backfill to Specification for
Highways Works Series 600.

OTHER REQUIREMENTS AND DESIGN
CONSTRAINTS
[eg Limitations on drainage, Additional Protective
Measures required etc]
DESIGN CHEMICAL CLASS
[derived from the ACEC class determined by
assessment of ground conditions, together with DC-3 for cast in-situ concrete with one or more faces
the Structural Performance Level and the in contact with natural or undisturbed ground
concrete section thickness and adjusted as
DC-2 for cast in-situ concrete with one or more faces
necessary by reference to the footnotes to Table
in contact with imported backfill Specification for
A.5 of BS 8500-1 and NG 1704.11(i)
Highways Works Series 600.
for increase in concrete quality when used as an
Additional Protective Measure; specification of
‘starred’ or ‘double-starred’ DC classes]
8.7. Materials
Specifications for materials shall conform to the requirements of BS EN 206:2013+A1:2016 and BS 8500-1
and 2:2015+A2:2019.
Only constituents with established suitability for the particular intended use of the concrete conforming to
these European Standard shall be used.
Constituents shall not contain harmful ingredients in such quantities as may be detrimental to the durability
of the concrete or cause corrosion of the reinforcement and shall be suitable for the intended use in
concrete.
8.7.1. Cement
General suitability is established for cement conforming to EN 197-1. Suitability for concrete for massive
structures is established for very low heat special cement conforming to EN 14216.
8.7.2. Water
General suitability is established for mixing water conforming to EN 1008. All water shall be clean and free
from salt, oil or acid, vegetable or other substances injurious to the finished product.

8.7.3. Admixtures
General suitability is established for admixtures conforming to EN 934-2.
The use of admixtures shall be approved by the Engineer.
8.7.4. Aggregates
General suitability is established for:
- Natural normal-weight aggregates, heavy-weight aggregate and air-cooled blast furnace slag
conforming to EN 12620.
- Lightweight aggregates conforming to EN 13055.
- Reclaimed aggregates conforming to BS EN 206.
Recycled and manufactured aggregates, other than air-cooled blast furnace slag, may be used as
aggregate for concrete if the suitability is established by provisions valid in the place of use.
Aggregates shall be clean, free from dust and other deleterious material.
In heavily reinforced structures with difficult casting conditions smaller size aggregates may be used if
8.8. Testing of materials
8.8.1. General
All testing shall be carried out by the Contractor. The cost of providing all samples and all testing shall be
borne by the Contractor without any extra charge to the Employer. The Contractor shall advise and provide
the opportunity for the Engineer to witness any testing he chooses. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer
of dates of delivery so that there will be sufficient time for sampling.
The scope of the testing cover in the following table should not be regarded as exhaustive. Routine tests
carried out by manufacturers and suppliers in compliance with a British Standard, Eurocodes or other
standard or specification might not be included but provision for these tests shall be made.
Clause Work, Goods or Material Test Frequency of Test Comments

Testing Certificate
Series 1700
1702 Cement types as stated in Required Certificate to be

sub-Clause 1702.1 provided monthly
1704
for each type of
cement


Testing Certificate
Quality
management and
product
certification
schemes apply
Cements (all types) Chloride content Monthly Tests to be carried

out by the
manufacturer and
results included
on the test
certificates
required above
Pulverised-fuel ash Sulfate content Monthly
Ground granulated blast Acid-soluble alkali Daily (PC)

furnace slag content
Weekly (pfa
ggbs)
Aggregates Grading and fines 1 per week (per Results of routine

content source) control tests from
the factory
Shell content (N) Monthly
production control
Flakiness index Monthly system operated
(N) by the producer to

be provided – see
Resistance to Every 6 months Annex H of BS EN
fragmentation (N) 12620. Product
certification
Drying shrinkage 1 per 5 years
scheme applies
(N)
Chloride content 1 per week or as

(N) otherwise
agreed
Sulfate content Yearly

(N)


Testing Certificate
Blastfurnace Slag Bulk density (N) Every 6 months
Stability (N) Every 6 months
Sulfur content (N) Every 6 months
Water Tests specified in 1 per source

BS EN 1008
Chloride content Monthly
Sulfate content Monthly
Acid-soluble Weekly
alkali content
Admixtures Chloride content 1 per Required

consignment
(BS 934-2)
Sulfate content 1 per Required

consignment
Acid-soluble alkali 1 per

content consignment
1707 Concrete Cube strength (N) Reinforced Required

concrete – two
cubes from 20
m3 or 4 batches
whichever
represents the
lesser volume
Mass concrete –
two cubes from
50 m3 or 50
batches
whichever
represents the


Testing Certificate
lesser volume
Additional
cubes for
special
purposes
Cube strength- 2 cubes from

identity testing as each of two
described in samples of
Appendix 17/4 each batch
(N)
Density
Modulus of
elasticity
Fresh concrete Consistence Each batch Required

(slump or
compacting
factor or Vebe)
(N)
Air content Each batch
Cement content
Water/cement
ratio
1709 Silane Required for Certification that

each delivery the silane
complies with
Clause 1709 is
required
Refractive Index Three samples [See sub-Clause

1709.2(ii)]
Trial panels, [See sub-Clause


Testing Certificate
where required in 1709.8]

the Contract
1710 Concrete packing Cube strength Required Product

certification
Mortar packing (Manufacturer’s
tests)
Epoxy resin bonding
agent
Precast concrete Cube strength to make available

manufactured off Site (Manufacturer’s records of tests by
tests) the manufacturer
1712 Reinforcement
Steel bars Required Product

certification
(BS 4449)
scheme applies
Steel wire Required
(BS 4482)
Steel fabric Required
(BS 4483)
Stainless steel Required
(BS 6744)
1713 Fabricated reinforcement Required Certification that

fabricated
reinforcement
complies with the
routine
inspection/testing
requirements of
BS 8666 is
required if the
fabrication is not


Testing Certificate
covered by a
product
certification
scheme listed in
Appendix B
1716 Reinforcement jointing Permanent Required for BBA Roads and

systems elongation each type of Bridges certificate
connection or CARES
Characteristic
certificate of
strength
product
(Manufacturer’s
assessment or
tests)
fully equivalent
scheme apply
1717 Reinforcement metal arc Welding As required in Tests should be

welding procedure BS 7123 carried out by an
approval (BS independent
7123) testing body
specified in BS
8666
Welder approval
(BS 7123)
1726 Stainless steel bar Required
(BS 6744)
1727 Inspection and testing of

structures and
components
Notes:
- Any cement that has been stored at the site for a period in excess of three months shall be tested
before use.

- Samples and specifications of any admixtures or additive proposed to be used shall be submitted
at least 28 days before the commencement of construction or manufacture of the particular
structure on which the admixtures are intended to be used.
- All exposed structural in situ concrete for each structure shall be supplied using the same
constituent material sources y mix designs.
8.8.2. Trial Mixes
Trial mixes with concrete of designed proportions shall be carried out to prove and establish workability,
strength, water/cement ratio, surface criteria, etc. Methods of transporting fresh concrete and the
compaction equipment shall be considered. The trial mixes shall be made and compacted in the presence
of the Engineer, using the same type of plant and equipment as will be used for the works.
From each trial mix, tests in accordance with Section 8.8.1. shall be carried out.
From the same mix as that from which the test specimens are made, the workability of the concrete shall
be determined by the slump test. The remainder of the mix shall be cast in a wooden mould and
compacted. After 24 hours the sides of the mould shall be struck and the surface examined in order to
satisfy the Engineer that an acceptable surface can be obtained with the mix.
The trial mix proportions should be approved if the required strength is obtained from tests carried out in
accordance with Section 8.8.1.. In addition, the consistency and surface shall be to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
When a proposed mix has been approved, no variations shall be made in the mix proportions, or in the
type, size, grading zone or source of any of the constituents without the consent of the Engineer, who may
require further trial mixes to be made before any such variation is approved.
Until the results of trial mixes for a particular class have been approved by the Engineer, no concrete of the
relevant class shall be placed in the works.
When the Contractor intends to purchase factory-made precast concrete units, trial mixes may be
dispensed with provided that evidence is given to satisfy the Engineer that the factory regularly produces
concrete that complies with the Specification. The evidence shall include details of mix proportions, water-
cement ratios, slump tests and strengths obtained at 28 days.
8.9. Concrete – General
Permitted cement types are described in BS 8500 Parts 1 & 2.
All reinforcement shall be tied using 1.2mm stainless steel wire.
No welding of reinforcement other than steel fabric reinforcement is permitted.

Any embedded steel fixing at the surface of the concrete or with less than the specified cover to
reinforcement at that location shall be stainless steel.
All exposed concrete corners shall be chamfered except those corners which are buried or unless noted
otherwise on the Drawings. The size of the chamfer shall be 25mm x 25mm unless noted otherwise.
Chamfers shall be formed with plastic (not timber) to minimise split-timber chamfers when fixing.
All construction joints are to incorporate grout checks on all exposed surfaces.
Self-Compacting Concrete (SCC) is not to be used.
Surfaces of existing concrete that are to receive waterproofing shall be completely free from oil, grease or
any loosely adherent or protruding material. If the concrete surface is defective or has laitance, it must be
cut back to a sound base. Any bolt holes or fixing pockets must be blown clean of any dirt or debris and
filled to provide a flush surface.
Where the Contractor proposes to strike the formwork early, additional cubes shall be tested in accordance
with Specification clauses 1707.1 and 1710.4 of SHW. In addition, formwork that is not supporting concrete
in bending may be removed when the cube strength is 10 N/mm 2 or the strength needed by the design
whichever is greater.
8.10. Construction Methods
8.10.1. General
The Contractor shall in due time and as soon as possible present and discuss his construction methods
and work programme with the Engineer and shall obtain his approval before commencement of any work.
The Contractor shall maintain an adequate number of trained and experienced supervisors and foremen at
the Site to supervise and control the works.
All construction, other than concrete, shall conform to the requirements prescribed in other sections for the
several items of work entering into the complete structure.
8.10.2. Care and storage of concrete materials
Stocks of cement, admixtures, water and aggregate shall normally be sufficient to cover a planned casting.
If not, the Engineer shall be informed and the Contractor shall be required to certify that supplies will be
available by the required time.
i.) Storage of cement
All cement shall be stored in suitable weatherproof buildings or silos which will protect the cement from
dampness. These buildings or silos shall be placed in locations approved by the Engineer. Provisions for
storage shall be ample, and the shipments of cement as received shall be separately stored in such
manner as to provide easy access for the identifications and inspection of each shipment. Storage

buildings shall have a capacity for the storage of a sufficient quantity of cement to allow sampling at least
12 days before the cement is to be used. Stored cement shall meet the test requirements at any time during
storage.
ii.) Storage of aggregates
Aggregate shall be so stored as to prevent the inclusion of foreign material. Aggregates shall not be placed
upon the finished roadbed. Aggregates of different sizes and kinds shall be placed in different stockpiles.
Stockpiles of blended coarse aggregates shall be built up in successive horizontal layers not more than 1
meter thick. Each layer shall be completed before the next is started. Should segregation occur, the
aggregates shall be recombined to obtain the grading requirements.
Washed aggregates and aggregates produced or manipulated by methods which involved the use of
water shall be allowed to drain at least 12 hours before use.
8.10.3. Preparation before casting
Before any major casting, the Contractor shall carry out a complete ‘casting programme’ dealing with staff
and labour, consumption of materials, tools and equipment, reserves of the above, way of handling and
placing the concrete, acts of controls, etc.
The Engineer shall approve the casting programme.
Equipment and tools necessary for handling materials and performing the work, and satisfactory to the
Engineer as to design, capacity, and mechanical condition, shall be at the site of the work before work is
started.
If any equipment is not maintained in full working order or if the equipment as used by the Contractor
proves inadequate to obtain the result prescribed, such equipment shall be repaired or other satisfactory
equipment substituted or added at the discretion of the Engineer.
8.10.4. Measuring materials
i.) General
All material in the mix shall be proportioned wholly by weight. A batching plant shall be used for measuring
materials but alternative methods proposed by the Contractor may be considered subject to the approval of
the Engineer. The batching plant shall include bins, weighing hoppers and scales for the fine aggregate
and for each separated size of coarse aggregate. If cement is used in bulk, a bin, hopper and scales for the
cement shall be included. The container shall be watertight.
Provisions satisfactory to the Engineer shall be made for batching other components of the mix, at the
batching plant or at the mixer, as may be necessary. The batching plant may be either stationary or mobile
type. It shall be always properly levelled within the accuracy required for the proper operation of the
weighing mechanisms.

ii.) Scales
The scales for weighing aggregates and cement shall be of either electronic or mechanical, such as beam
type or the springless-dial type. They shall be accurate within one-half of 1% under operating conditions
throughout the range of use. Ten 25 kilogram weights shall be available for checking the accuracy. For
mechanical type, all exposed fulcrums and similar working parts of scales shall be kept clean. When beam-
type scales are used, provision shall be made for indicating to the operator that the required load in the
weighing hopper is being approached. The device shall indicate at least the last 100 kilograms of load and
up to 25 kilograms overload. All weighting and indicating devices shall be in full view of the operator while
charging the hopper and he shall have convenient access to all controls.
Cement may be measured by weight, or in standard sacks considered to weigh 50 kilograms net. When
measured by weight a separate, satisfactory scale and hopper shall be provided together with a boot or
other approved device to transfer the cement from the weighing hopper. Satisfactory methods of handling
shall be employed.
Batching shall be so conducted as to result in the weights of material required, within tolerances of 1% for
cement and 2% for aggregates.
In addition the deviation from the average amount of filler (materials including cement less than 0.25mm)
from ten samples of different batches of fresh concrete should not be more than 6%.
8.10.5. Mixing concrete
i.) General
All concrete shall be mixed in batch mixers. It may be mixed at the site of construction, at a central plant, or
in transit. Each mixer shall have attached to it in a prominent place, a manufacturer’s plate showing the
capacity of the drum in terms of mixed concrete and the speed of rotation of the mixing drum.
ii.) Mixers at local site of construction
Mixers at local sites shall be approved drum-type capable of combining the aggregate, cement, and water
into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass within the specified mixing period and of discharging the
mixture without segregation. The mixer shall be equipped with a suitable charging hopper, water storage
and a water-measuring device, accurate within 1%. Controls shall be so arranged that the water can be
applied only while the mixer is being charged. Suitable equipment for discharging the concrete shall be
provided. The mixer shall be cleaned at suitable intervals. The pickup and throw-over blades in the drum
shall be replaced when they have lost 10% of their depth.
The mixer shall be operated at a drum speed of not less than 15 nor more than 20 revolutions per minute.
The batched materials shall be so charged into the drum that a portion of the water shall enter in advance
of the cement and aggregates and the water shall continue to flow into the drum for a minimum time of 5
seconds after all the cement and aggregates are in the drum. Mixing time shall be measured from the time

all materials except water are in the drum and shall, in the case of mixers having a capacity of 1 cubic
meter or less, not be less than 50 seconds nor more than 70 seconds. In the case of dual drum mixers, the
mixing time shall not include transfer time. The contents of an individual mixer drum shall be removed
before a succeeding batch is emptied therein. Any concrete mixed less than the specified minimum time
shall be discarded and disposed of by the Contractor at his own expense.
The volume of concrete mixed per batch shall not exceed the mixer’s nominal capacity as shown on the
manufacturer’s guaranteed capacity standard rating plate on the mixer; except that an overload up to 20%
of the mixers nominal capacity may be permitted provided concrete test data for strength, segregation and
uniform consistency are satisfactory, and provided no spillage of concrete takes place.
Retempering concrete by adding water or by other means shall not be permitted. Concrete which is not of
the required consistency at the time of placement shall not be used.
iii.) Central plant mixers
These mixers shall be of approved drum type capable of combining the aggregate, cement and water into
a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass within the specified mixing period and of discharging the mixture
without segregation. Central plant mixers shall be equipped with an acceptable timing device that will not
permit the batch to be discharged until the specified mixing time has elapsed. The water system for a
central mixer shall be either a calibrated measuring tank or a meter and shall not necessarily be an integral
part of the mixer.
The mixers shall be cleaned at suitable intervals. They shall be examined daily for changes in interior
condition. The pick up and throw-over blades in the drum shall be replaced when they have lost 10% of
their depth.
In addition to the requirement for mixers at local sites detailed above, central plant mixers which have
capacity of not less than 2 cubic meters nor more than 5 cubic meters, and mixers having a capacity
greater than 5 cubic meters, may have a minimum mixing time of 90 seconds and 120 seconds
respectively, provided a mixing analysis and test of the job materials indicates such produced concrete is
equivalent in strength and uniformity to that attained as stated in the preceding paragraphs.
Mixed concrete shall be transported from the central mixing plant to the site of work in agitator trucks or,
upon written permission of the Engineer, in non-agitator trucks. Delivery of concrete shall be so regulated
that placing is at a continuous rate unless delayed by the placing operations. The intervals between delivery
of batches shall not be so great as to allow the concrete in place to harden partially, and in no case shall
such an interval exceed 30 minutes.
iv.) Agitator trucks
Unless otherwise permitted in writing by the Engineer, agitator trucks shall have watertight revolving drums
suitably mounted and shall be capable of transporting and discharging the concrete without segregation.
The agitating speed of the drum shall not be less than two or more than six revolutions per minute. The

volume of mixed concrete permitted in the drum shall not exceed the manufacture’s rating nor exceed 80%
the gross volume of the drum.
Subject to approval by the Engineer, open-top, revolving-blade truck mixers may be used in lieu of agitating
trucks for transportation of central plant mixed concrete.
The mixer manufacturer shall supply gross volume of agitator bodies expressed in cubic feet or cubic
meters. The interval between introduction of water into the mixer drum and final discharge of the concrete
from the agitator shall not exceed 45 minutes. During this interval the mix shall be agitated continuously.
v.) Non-agitator trucks
Bodies of non-agitating equipment shall be smooth, watertight metal containers equipped with gates that
will permit control of the discharge of the concrete. Covers shall be provided when needed for protection
against the weather.
The non-agitating equipment shall permit delivery of the concrete to the site of the work in a thoroughly
mixed and uniform mass with a satisfactory degree of discharge.
Uniformity shall be satisfactory if samples from the one-quarter and three quarter points of the load do not
differ by more than 3 centimetres in sump. Discharge of concrete shall be completed within 30 minutes
after the introduction of the mixing water to the cement and aggregate.
vi.) Truck or transit mixers
These shall be equipped with electrically actuated counters by which the number of revolutions of the drum
or blades may readily be verified and the counters shall be actuated at the commencement of mixing
operations at designated mixing speeds. The mixer when loaded shall not be filled to more than 60% of the
drum gross volume. The mixer shall be capable of combining the ingredients of the concrete into a
thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and of discharging the concrete with a satisfactory degree of
uniformity.
Except when intended for use exclusively as agitators, truck mixers shall be provided with a water-
measuring device to measure accurately the quantity of water for each batch. The delivered amount of
water shall be within plus or minus 1% of the indicated amount.
Truck mixers may be used for complete mixing at the batch plant and as truck agitators for delivery of
concrete to job sites or they may be used for complete mixing of the concrete at the job site. They shall
either be a closed watertight revolving drum or an open top revolving blade or paddle type.
The amount of mixing shall be designated in number of revolutions of the mixer drum. When a truck mixer
is used for complete mixing, each batch of concrete shall be mixed for not less than 70 nor more than 100
revolutions of the drum or blades at the rate of rotation designated by the manufacturer of the equipment
as the “mixing speed”. Such designation shall appear on a metal plate attached to the mixer. If the batch is
at least 0.5 cubic meter less than guaranteed capacity, the number of revolutions at mixing speed may be

reduced to not less than 50. Mixing in excess of 100 revolutions shall be at the agitating speed. All materials,
including the mixing water, shall be in the mixer drum before actuating the revolution counter that will
indicate the number of revolutions of the drum or blades.
When wash water (flush water) is used as a portion of the mixing water for the succeeding bath, it shall be
accurately measured and taken into account in determining the amount of additional mixing water
required. When wash water is carried on the truck mixer, it shall be carried in a compartment separate from
the one used for carrying or measuring the mixing water. The Engineer will specify the amount of wash or
flush water, when permitted, any may specify a “dry” drum if wash water is used without measurement or
without supervision.
When a truck is used for complete mixing at the batch plant, mixing operations shall begin within 30
minutes after the cement has been added to the aggregate. After mixing, the truck mixer shall be used as
an agitator, when transporting concrete, at the speed designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as
agitating speed. Concrete discharge shall be completed within 45 minutes after the addition of the cement
to the aggregates. Each batch of concrete delivered at the job site shall be accompanied by a time slip
issued at the batching plant, bearing the time of departure there from. When the truck mixer is used for the
complete mixing of the concrete at the job site, the mixing operation shall begin within 30 minutes after the
cement has been added to the aggregates.
The rate of discharge of the plastic concrete from the mixer drum shall be controlled by the speed of
rotation the drum in the discharge direction with the discharge gate fully open.
8.10.6. Handling and placing concrete
The temperature of concrete at the time of placing shall not exceed 35ºC.
In preparation for the placing of concrete all sawdust, chips and other construction debris and extraneous
matter shall be removed from the interior of forms. Structs, stays and braces, serving temporarily to hold the
forms in correct shape and alignment, pending the placing of concrete at their locations, shall be removed
when the concrete placing has reached an elevation rendering their service unnecessary. These temporary
members shall be entirely removed from the forms and not buried in the concrete.
Concrete that does not reach its final position in the forms within the time stipulated under the specification
shall not be used.
Concrete shall be placed so as to avoid segregation of the materials and the displacement of the
reinforcement. The use of long though, chutes and pipes for covering concrete from the mixer to the forms
shall be permitted only on written authorization of the Engineer. In case an inferior quality of concrete is
produced by the use of such conveyors the Engineer may order discontinuance of their use and instruct for
a satisfactory method of placing.
Open troughs and chutes shall be of metal or metal lines, where long steep slopes are required, the chutes
shall be equipped with baffles or be in short lengths that reverse the direction of movement.

All chutes, troughs and pipes shall be kept clean and free from coatings of hardened concrete by
thoroughly flushing with water after each run. Water used for flushing shall be discharged clear of the
structure.
When placing operations would involve dropping the concrete more than 1.5m it shall be deposited
through sheet metal or other approved pipes. As far as practicable, the pipes shall be kept full of concrete
during placing and their lower ends shall be kept buried in the newly placed concrete. After initial set of the
concrete, the forms shall not be jarred and no strain shall be placed on the ends of reinforcement bars that
project.
Concrete, during and immediately after depositing, shall be thoroughly compacted. The compaction shall
be done by mechanical vibration to the following provisions:
i.) The vibration shall be internal unless special authorisation of other methods is given by the
Engineer or as provided herein.
ii.) The Engineer shall approve of a type and design vibration method. They shall be capable of
transmitting vibration to the concrete at frequencies of not less than 4,500 impulses per minute.
iii.) The intensity of vibration shall be such as to visibly affect a mass of concrete of 2 cm slump over a
radius of at least 45 cm.
iv.) The Contractor shall provide a sufficient number of vibrators to properly compact each batch
immediately after it is placed in the forms.
v.) Vibration shall be manipulated to thoroughly work the concrete around the reinforcement and
embedded fixtures, and into the corners and angles of the forms.
Vibration shall be applied at the point of deposit and in the area of freshly deposited concrete. The
vibrators shall be inserted and withdrawn from the concrete slowly. The vibration shall be of
sufficient duration and intensity to thoroughly compact the concrete, but shall not be continued so
as to cause segregation. Vibration shall not be continued at any one point to the extent that
localised areas of grout are formed. Application of vibrators shall be at points uniformly spaced and
not further apart than twice the radius over which the vibration is visibly effective.
vi.) Vibration shall not be applied directly or through the reinforcement to sections or layers of concrete
which have hardened to the degree that the concrete ceases to be plastic under vibration. It shall
not be sued to make concrete flow in the forms over distances so great as to cause segregation,
and vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete in the forms.
vii.) Vibration shall be supplemented by such spading as is necessary to ensure smooth surfaces and
dense concrete along form surfaces and in corners and locations impossible to reach with the
vibrators.
viii.)The provisions of this article shall also apply to precast piling, concrete cribbing and other precast
members except that, if approved by the Engineer, the manufacturers’ methods of vibration may be
used.
Concrete shall be placed in horizontal layers not more than 60 cm thick except as hereinafter provided.
When less than a complete layer is placed in one operation, it shall be terminated in a vertical bulkhead,

each layer shall be placed and compacted before the preceding batch has taken initial set to prevent injury
to the green concrete and avoid surfaces of separation between the batches. Each layer shall be
compacted so as to avoid the formation of a construction joint with a proceeding layer that has not taken
initial set.
When placing of concrete is temporarily discontinued, the concrete, after becoming firm enough to retain
its form, shall be cleaned of laitance and other objectionable material to a sufficient depth to expose sound
concrete. To avoid visible joints as far as possible upon exposed faces, the top surface of the concrete
adjacent to the forms shall be smoothed with a trowel. Where a “feather edge” might be produced at a
construction joint, as in the sloped top surface of a wing wall, an inset form shall be used to produce a
blocked out portion in the preceding layer which shall produce an edge thickness of not less than 15 cm in
the succeeding layer. Work shall not be discontinued within 45 cm of the top of any face, unless provision
has been made for a coping less than 45 cm thick, in which case, if permitted by the Engineer, a
construction joint maybe made at the underside of the coping.
Immediately following the discontinuance of placing concrete all accumulations of mortar splashed upon
the reinforcement steel and the surfaces of forms shall be removed. Dried mortar chips and dust shall not
be puddled into the unset concrete. If the accumulations are not removed prior to the concrete becoming
set, care shall be exercised not to injure or break the concrete-steel bond at and near the surface of the
concrete, while cleaning the reinforcement steel.
For simple spans, concrete, preferably, shall be deposited by beginning at the centre of the span and
working from the centre towards the ends. Concrete in girders shall be deposited uniformly for the full-
length of the girder and brought up evenly in horizontal layers. For continuous spans, the concrete placing
sequence shall be as shown on the plans or agreed on by the Engineer.
Concrete in slab and girder haunches less than 1.0 m in height shall be placed at the same time as that in
the girder stem.
Concrete in slab spans shall be placed in one continuous operation for each span unless otherwise
approved.
Concrete in T-beam or deck girder spans may be placed in one continuous operations if permitted by the
Engineer.
Concrete in columns and pier shafts shall be placed in one continuous operation, unless otherwise
directed.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, no concrete shall be placed in the superstructure until the
column forms have been stripped sufficiently to determine the character of the concrete in the columns.
The load of the superstructure shall not be applied to the supporting structures until they have been place
at least 14 days, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.

Pneumatic placing of concrete shall be permitted only if authorised by the Engineer. The equipment shall
be so arranged that vibrations does not damage freshly placed concrete.
Where concrete is conveyed and placed by pneumatic mean the equipment shall be suitable in kind and
adequate in capacity for the work. The machine shall be located as close as practicable to the place of
deposit. The position of the discharge end of the line shall not be more than 3m from the point of deposit.
The discharge lines shall be horizontal or inclined upwards from the machine. At the conclusion of
placement the entire equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned.
Placement of concrete by pumping shall be permitted only if authorised by the Engineer. The equipment
shall be so arranged that vibrations do not damage freshly placed concrete. Where concrete is conveyed
and placed by mechanically applied pressure, the equipment shall be suitable in kind and adequate in
capacity for the work. The operation of the pump shall be such that a continuous stream of concrete
without air pockets is produced. When pumping is completed, the concrete remaining in the pipeline, if it is
to be used, shall be ejected in such a manner that there is not contamination of the concrete or separation
of the ingredients. After this operation, the entire equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned.
8.10.7. Perforations and embedment of special devices
The Contractor is responsible for determining in advance of making any concrete pours, all requirements
for perforation of concrete sections or embedment therein of special devices of other trades, such as
conduits, pipes, weep holes, drainage pipes, fastenings, etc. Any concrete poured without prior provision
having been made shall be subject to correction at the Contractor’s expense.
Special devices to be embedded:
- Expansion joints.
- Drain outlets including down pipes and bolts hereof.
- Bolts and inserts for sign posts.
- Bolts and inserts for various purpose regarding inspection and maintenance as directed by the
Engineer.
Other devices not mentioned above shall be shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
8.10.8. Construction joints
Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to the construction joints the position and details of which
shall be as shown on approved drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Such joints shall, however, be kept
to the minimum.
For a vertical construction joint, a stopping board shall be fixed previously at the pre-determine position and
shall be properly stayed for sufficient lateral rigidity to prevent its displacement or bulging when concrete is
compacted against it. Connecting shall be continued right up to the board. The board shall not be removed
before the expiry of the specified period for removal of vertical forms.

Before resuming work at any construction joint when concrete has not yet fully hardened, all laitance shall
be removed thoroughly, care being taken to avoid dislodgment of coarse aggregates.
When work has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened it shall be thoroughly hacked, swept
clean, wetted and covered with a layer of neat cement grout. The neat cement grout shall be followed by a
13 mm thick layer of mortar mixed in the same proportion as in concrete and concreting resumed
immediately thereafter. The first batch of concrete shall be rammed against the old work to avoid formation
of any stone pockets, particular attention being paid to corners and close spots.
In prestressing concrete structures construction joints shall be avoided, as far as possible, especially in the
area of tensile stresses, but where necessary, concreting shall be carried out continuously up to such joints
which shall preferably be transverse to the line of main compression. In all cases, the position and detailed
arrangement of all construction joints shall be predetermined and approved by the Engineer.
In rehabilitation work where the old concrete of an existing structure is specified to be removed, such
removal shall be done with extreme care so that the concrete is taken out and the existing reinforcements
are carefully stripped of the concrete. Care shall be taken that the reinforcement does not get
damaged/pitted in the process. On completion of the removal of old concrete to desired line & level the
freshly broken surface shall be cleaned thoroughly with water. The surface shall be applied with a thick
coat of epoxy bonding agent followed by 13 mm thick layer of sand cement mortar prior to placing and
building up the concrete.
Epoxy bonding agents for the joints shall be thermosetting 100% solid compositions that do not contain
solvent or any nonreactive organic ingredient except for pigments required for colouring. Epoxy bonding
agents shall be of two components, a resin and a hardener. The two components shall be distinctly
pigmented, so that mixing produces a third colour similar to the concrete and shall be packaged
proportionated, labelled in ready-to-use containers. Epoxy bonding agents shall be formulated to provide
application temperature ranges that will permit applications at substrate temperatures from 5ºC to 45ºC.
instructions furnished by the supplier for the safe storage, mixing, and handling of the epoxy bonding agent
shall be followed. The epoxy shall be thoroughly mixed until it is of uniform colour. Use of a proper sized
mechanical mixer operating at no more than 600 rpm will be required. Contents of damaged or previously
opened containers shall not be used. Surfaces to which the epoxy material is to be applied shall be free
from oil, laitance, form release agent, or any other material that would prevent the material from bonding to
the concrete surface. All laitance and other contaminants shall be removed by high sandblasting or by
pressure water blasting with a minimum pressure of 35 N/mm 2. Wet surfaces should be dried before
applying epoxy-bonding agents. The surface should be at least the equivalent of saturated surface dry (no
visible water).
8.10.9. Curing concrete
Curing shall be as per clause 1710 of SHW. The methods of curing and their duration shall be such that the
concrete shall have satisfactory durability and strength and the member shall suffer a minimum of

distortion, be free of excessive efflorescence and shall not cause, by its shrinkage undue cracking in the
structure in excess of the acceptable flexural and early thermal cracking limits.
The execution of concrete structures shall conform to the assumptions made in the design to control early
thermal cracking which are:
- The maximum temperature at any point within the pour shall not exceed 70ºC;
- The maximum temperature differential in a single pour shall not exceed 20ºC;
- The maximum value of mean temperature between adjacent elements cast at the same time shall
not exceed 20ºC; and
- The maximum value of mean temperature between adjacent elements cast at the different times
shall not exceed 15ºC.
The Contractor shall submit a thermal plan and risk assessment, covering all aspects of CIRIA C660,
reflecting the design (element size and geometry, crack control steel, etc.) and the assumptions above with
a thickness greater than 500 mm. This thermal plan should be reviewed, approved and fed back into the
Contractors methodology ad method statements.
The Contractor shall establish measures to avoid harmful excessive heat generation in massive structures,
such as cooling down aggregates before mixing and/or providing temporary canopies over new concrete
mix being placed. The Contractor shall submit in due time a proposal for the establishment of such
measures to the Engineer for his approval. The measures shall instantly be changed if later requested by
the Engineer.
The Contractor shall design the concrete mix to minimise the peak temperature in the works; as such the
cement content shall be the least amount which will produce concrete complying with the requirements of
this specification. The mix shall be designed to obtain concrete which will provide the required strength and
density in the final works.
The temperature of the concrete in the works shall be monitored through the use of embedded
thermocouples or other temperature sensors within, and across the section; from the centre to the form
surfaces.
All concrete surfaces shall be kept thoroughly wet for at least 14 days after placing. Concrete shall be
protected against harmful effects of weather, running water and drying out by one of the following
methods:
Method 1:
A liquid curing compound shall be applied to the concrete surface by a low-pressure spray until a
continuous visible covering is achieved.
Method 2:

The concrete surface shall be covered with hessian, sacking, canvas or other absorbent material agreed by
the Engineer; the hessian. sacking. canvas, or absorbent material shall be kept constantly wet.
Method 3:
The concrete surface shall be covered with polyethylene sheeting; concrete surfaces which have become
dry shall be thoroughly wetted before the sheeting is placed.
Method 4:
Unformed concrete surfaces shall be covered with polyethylene sheeting until the concrete has hardened
sufficiently for water curing to be carried out. Water curing shall be carried out by spraying the concrete
surface continuously with cool water or by ponding immediately after the sheeting is removed. If in the
opinion of the Engineer water curing is impracticable, Method 2 shall be used instead of water curing.
Method 1 shall not be used on concrete surfaces against which concrete will be placed or which will have
a Class T1 finish or which will be painted or tiled.
Method 1. 2, 3 or 4 shall be carried out on unformed concrete surfaces immediately after the concrete has
been compacted and finished.
Method 1. 2 or 3 shall be carried out on formed concrete surfaces immediately after the formwork has been
removed.
Polyethylene sheeting shall be impermeable and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.125 mm. Hessian.
sacking, canvas. absorbent material and polyethylene sheeting shall be lapped and securely held in
position in such a manner that the concrete surface will not be damaged.
Cold water shall not be applied to concrete surfaces or formwork intermittently in large quantities.
The different methods of protection shall be maintained for the minimum periods stated in Table 8 -12
after the concrete has been placed.
The minimum periods may be reduced by the number of days during which formwork is left in position.
Table 8- 12 Minimum periods of protection for concrete
Minimum period of protection (days)

Type of Structure Method of Protection Concrete not containing Concrete containing
PFA or PPFAC PFA or PPFAC
Water retaining 1 7 7
structures and
2, 3 or 4 7 9
watertight structures
1 7 7
Others
2, 3 or 4 4 5

After a period of 14 days, the concrete shall be watered daily at regular intervals approved by the Engineer
to avoid drying out of the surface. This shall take place during the following 2 weeks. The water used shall
be the same as used in concrete mixes unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor’s proposal for the use of liquid membrane curing compound shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
8.10.10. Repair of Concrete
As soon as the form has been stripped, the Contractor shall advise the Engineer who shall inspect the
concrete before any improvement of the surface takes place.
All wire or metal devices used for securing the formwork which project from or appear on the surface of the
finished concrete shall be removed or cut back at least 5cm from the finished surface of the concrete. All
holes and pockets so formed shall be filled with cement mortar mixed in the same proportions as the fine
aggregate to cement of the concrete mix used for that particular section of the structure, after the surface to
be patched has been thoroughly cleaned and wetted to receive the patch.
Excessive honeycombing shall be sufficient to cause rejection of portions of the structure containing this
honeycombing. The Contractor, on receipt of written orders from the Engineer, shall remove and rebuild
such portions of the structure at his own expense.
Smaller honeycombing and other defects can be repaired if permitted by the Engineer. Structural,
maintenance and aesthetically points of view shall be taken into consideration before such approval, if any,
may be given.
The Engineer shall approve the method of repair.
8.10.11. Placing concrete under water
Concrete shall not be deposit in water except with the approval of the Engineer and under his immediate
supervision; and in this case the method of placing shall be as defined in this Section.
Concrete placed under water shall be carefully placed in a compact mass, in its final position, by means of
a tremie tube and shall not be disturbed after being deposited. Special care must be exercised to maintain
still water at the point of deposit. Concrete shall not be placed in running water. The method of depositing
concrete shall be so regulated as to produce approximately horizontal surfaces.
Concrete pours shall be placed in one continuous operation. When a tremie tube or pipe is used, it shall
consist of a tube or pipe not less than 15 cm in diameter. All joints in the tube shall be watertight. The
means of supporting the tremie tube shall be such as to permit free movement of the discharge end over
the entire top of the concrete and to permit its being lowered rapidly when necessary to choke off or retard
the flow. The tremie tube shall be filled by a method that prevents washing of the concrete. The discharge

end shall be completely submerged in concrete at all times and the tremie tube shall be kept full. Concrete
slump shall be not less than 150 mm.
Dewatering shall proceed only when the concrete pour is considered strong enough to withstand any
pressure to be exerted upon it. The Engineer shall decide this time.
All laitance or other unsatisfactory material shall be removed from the exposed surface by scraping, jetting,
chipping, or other means that do not injure the seal unduly.
8.10.12. Factory made precast concrete elements
The Engineer shall approve any supplier of precast concrete elements in writing. The approval can later be
withdrawn if so desired by the Engineer.
All concrete work of such elements shall fully conform to these specifications.
The supplier shall maintain laboratory facilities of the same standard as the site laboratory.
Some of the concrete control may be passed over to the supplier and under his responsibility if so directed
by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, precast concrete members shall not be moved from the
casting position until the concrete has attained a compressive strength of 80% of the specified 28 days
strength, nor transported until it has developed a strength of 90% of the specified 28 days strength.
Extreme care shall be exercised in handling and moving precast concrete members. Precast girders and
slabs shall be transported in an upright position. Shock shall be avoided and the points of support and
directions of the reactions with respect to the member shall be approximately the same during
transportation and storage as when the member is in its final position. If the Contractor deems it expedient
to transport or store precast units in other than this position, it shall be done at his own risk after notifying
the Engineer of his intention to do so. Any unit rejected shall be replaced at the contractor’s expense by an
acceptable unit.
All details on the handling and transport of precast members shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer
for his approval.
Each precast member is to be uniquely and permanently marked so as to show its type, date of casting
and reinforcement.
8.10.13. Loading
No superstructure load shall be placed upon finished bents, piers, or abutments until the Engineer so
directs but in no case shall any load of any kind be placed until the concrete has completed curing.

The Contractor shall not take any temporary loads on deck slabs unless allowed by the Engineer in writing.
Bridge deck slabs shall be opened to traffic only when so directed by the Engineer and generally not
sooner than 28 days after the placing of the concrete has been completed.
8.10.14. Cleaning up
Upon completion of structure and before final acceptance, the Contractor shall remove all forms and
scaffolding, etc., down to 0.5 m below the finished ground line. Excavated, or useless materials, rubbish,
etc., shall be removed from the Site and the Site shall be left in a neat and tidy condition satisfactory to the
Engineer.
8.10.15. Standard of Acceptance
The average strength of the group of cubes cast for each day shall not be less than the specified works
target mean strength. 20% of the cubes cast for each day may have values less than the specified strength,
provided the lowest value is not less than 85% of the specified strength.
Any concrete which gives below standard results, becomes severally damaged due to cracking, shows
excessive honeycombing, and exposure of reinforcement or exhibits any fault which in the opinion of the
Engineer seriously impairs its function, may be declared defective concrete. Such concrete shall be cut out,
removed from the site and replaced by fresh concrete of the specified quality at the Contract’s own
expenses. Alternatively, the Contractor shall carry out whatever other remedy the Engineer may reasonably
require having regard to all the circumstances that the remedy shall be at the expenses of the Contractor.
8.10.16. Tolerances for Concrete Construction
i.) General
Tolerances are allowable deviations from plumb or level and from alignment profile, grades and
dimensions shown on the drawings. These shall also include surface irregularities. Tolerances to the extent
set forth here may be permitted but the same may be reduced by the Engineer if such tolerances impair the
structural action or operational function of a structure or item. Where tolerances are not stated in the
specification or shown on the drawing permissible deviations shown here shall be considered. The
Contractor shall be responsible for setting and maintaining concrete forms sufficiently within the tolerance
limits and shall ensure that the works is completed within tolerances specified in this clause. Concrete work
exceeding tolerance limits specified here, shall be remedied or removed and replaced at the expense of the
Contractor.
ii.) In-situ concrete
Unless otherwise specified or reduced by the Engineer, the tolerances for reinforced concrete structures
shall be as follows:
- Variation in level or horizontal position of any point from its level or horizontal position indicated or
computed ± 12 mm.

- Notwithstanding above, variation from the vertical in any 3 metres ± 3 mm and in any 12 metres ±
12 mm. Unless otherwise specified, the tolerances for precast concrete construction in the
completed work shall be:
o Length
Up to 2 m ± 6 mm
2 m to 6 m ± 9 mm
Over 6 m ± 12 mm
o Cross section with or height
Up to 250 mm ± 4 mm
250 mm to 1250 mm ± 6 mm
Above 1250 mm ± 8 mm
o Cross section thickness or depth
Up to 0.5 m ± 6 mm
Above 0.5 m ± 8 mm
o Straightness or bow (deviation from intended line)
Up to 3 m ± 6 mm
3 m to 6 m ± 8 mm
o Squareness
Up to 1.2 m ± 6mm
1.2 m to 1.8 m ± 9 mm
Over 1.8 m ± 12 mm

9. STEEL REINFORCEMENT FOR STRUCTURES
9.1. Materials
9.1.1. Bar reinforcement and fabric reinforcement
Bar reinforcement and fabric reinforcement shall comply with the following:
Hot rolled steel bars : BS 4449.
Cold reduced steel wire : BS 4482 (size up to 12mm, grade 250 MPa)
Dowel bar > 12mm: BS EN 10025-1
Dowel bars for payment: BS EN 13877-3
Steel fabric : BS 4483.
Classification of steel bar reinforcement:
 Class 1 – reinforcement from quality assured manufacturers, handled by a QA Stockist and

retaining manufacturer's lot traceability.
 Class 2 – reinforcement from quality assured manufacturers, handled by a QA Stockist without
manufacturer’s lot traceability.
 Class 3 – reinforcement not included in classes 1 and 2.
9.1.2.Epoxy coatings to reinforcement
Epoxy coating to reinforcement is not used in this contract. Clauses 6. 1. 2 is not applicable.
Epoxy coatings to reinforcement and patching material for epoxy coatings shall comply with BS ISO 14654.
The coatings shall be applied by the electrostatic spray method in accordance with BS ISO 14654 at a
factory approved by the Engineer.
The film thickness of the coating after curing shall be at least 0.15 mm and shall not exceed 0.28 mm over
the complete periphery including deformations and ribs. The bond classification of coated bars determined
in bond performance tests shall not be less than that of uncoated bars.
9.1.3. Hop dip Galvanizing to reinforcement
Hop dip Galvanizing to reinforcement shall comply with BS 729. Galvanized reinforcement shall be
chromate passivated as part of the galvanizing process by quenching the bars immediately after
galvanizing in a solution containing at least 0.2% sodium dichromate in water. The galvanizing shall be
applied after cutting and bending of the reinforcement.

Metallic zinc-rich priming paint for repairs to galvanized reinforcement shall comply with BS 4652.
9.1.4. Reinforcement connectors
Reinforcement connectors shall be a proprietary type approved by the Engineer.
Reinforcement connectors for tension joints shall be a cold swaged or threaded type. The connectors shall
be capable of developing the full tensile strength of the parent bar and shall comprise high tensile steel
studs and seamless steel tubes fitted with protective plastic caps.
Reinforcement connectors for compression joints shall be a wedge locking or bolted sleeve type.
Torque wrench or approved device shall be used for tightening the reinforcement connectors with the
joining reinforcements. Hand-tightening methods shall not be approved unless permitted by the Engineer.
When a test is made on a representative gauge length assembly comprising reinforcement of the size,
grade and profile to be used and a coupler of the precise type to be used, the permanent elongation after
loading to 0.6fy should not exceed 0.1mm.
The tensile strength of reinforcement connector shall not be less than the specified requirements for the
parent bars.
Reinforcement connectors should be positioned in a manner that they are staggered when connected to
the joining reinforcement. Spacing of staggering should refer to manufacturer‘s recommendation and must
be approved by the Engineer.
The following reinforcement fixing rules shall be adhered to when stainless steel reinforcement and carbon
steel reinforcement are in contact or in close contact.
- Where stainless steel rebar is used all link steel and tying wire must be of stainless steel,
- No carbon steel shall be used in the cover zone of the concrete,
- Carbon steel and stainless steel rebar should be joined by lapping or couplers.
9.1.5. Cover spacers
Cover spacers for reinforcement shall be concrete blocks or a proprietary plastic or concrete type.
Proprietary plastic and concrete cover spacers shall be a type approved by the Engineer.
Cover spacers for Class F3, F4 and F5 finishes shall be a proprietary plastic or concrete type. Cover spacers
for epoxy coated reinforcement and galvanized reinforcement shall be a proprietary plastic type.
Cover spacers shall be as small as practicable consistent with their purpose and shall be designed to
maintain the specified cover to reinforcement. Cover spacers shall be capable of supporting the weight of
reinforcement and construction loads without breaking, deforming or overturning.

The strength and durability of concrete blocks and proprietary concrete cover spacers shall not be less than
that of the surrounding concrete.
Cover spacers for Class F3, F4 and ES finishes shall be of a colour similar to that of the surrounding
concrete and shall not cause indentations in the formwork.
9.1.6. Chairs, supports and spacers
Chairs, supports and spacers other than cover spacers for reinforcement shall be steel. The steel shall be
coated with nylon, epoxy, plastic or other dielectric material for epoxy coated reinforcement and shall be
galvanized for galvanized reinforcement.
For reinforcement cages constructed for piles, the Contractor shall make provision for stiffening and
strengthening the reinforcement cages to allow for installation without damage or deformation to their
specified form. The Contractor shall make provision for suspending the reinforcement cage within the pile
excavation.
9.1.7. Tying wire
Tying wire for reinforcement adjacent to and above Class F4 and F5 finishes shall be 1.2 mm diameter
stainless steel wire. Tying wire for epoxy coated reinforcement shall be 1.6 mm diameter soft annealed steel
wire coated with nylon, epoxy, plastic or other dielectric material. Tying wire for galvanized reinforcement
shall be 1.6 mm diameter galvanized soft annealed steel wire. Tying wire for other reinforcement shall be
1.6 mm diameter soft annealed steel wire.
9.1.8. Tying devices and clips
Tying devices and clips for reinforcement shall be a proprietary steel type approved by the Engineer. Tying
devices and clips for reinforcement adjacent to and above Class F4 and F5 finishes shall be stainless steel.
Tying devices and clips for epoxy coated reinforcement shall be coated with nylon, epoxy, plastic or other
dielectric material. Tying devices and clips for galvanized reinforcement shall be galvanized.
9.2. Submission
9.2.1. Particulars of bar reinforcement and fabric reinforcement
The following particulars of the proposed bar reinforcement and fabric reinforcement shall be submitted to
the Engineer:
i.) for 1 bar reinforcement. a certificate from the quality assured stockist which shall include the
following:
 The QA Stockist's name and address
 The date of dispatch
 The customer's order number or other reference
 Product description and quantity supplied

 The QA Stockist's and manufacturer's ISO 9002 certification number and the approval
 number issued by the certifying authority
 Cast number. batch number or lot number
 Certificate serial number and date
 Manufacturer’s certificate reference number
 The following statement, authorized by a designated means to indicate that the
requirements of the QA Scheme are satisfied:
"Certified that the steel reinforcement bars supplied hereon are covered by the manufacturer's Certificate of
Conformity or Test Certificate referenced hereon and have been subjected to the lot traceable part of
Certification to BSl QA System for Registered Stockists ISO 9002."
 and a copy of the manufacturer's third party certificate

ii.) for Class 2 bar reinforcement. a certificate from the quality assured stockist which shall include:
 The QA Stockist's name and address
 The QA Stockist's and manufacturer's ISO 9002 certification number and the approval
 number issued by the certifying authority
 Cast number, batch number or lot number
 Certificate serial number and date
 Manufacturer's certificate reference number
 Classification of reinforcement i.e. Class 2
 and a copy of the manufacturer’s third party certificate
iii.) for Class 3 bar reinforcement, a certificate from the supplier which shall state:
 The Supplier’s name and address
 Name of manufacturer
 Cast number. batch number or lot number
 Copy of manufacturer's certificate
 Classification of reinforcement i.e. Class 3
iv.) Upon delivery of bar reinforcement the Contractor shall submit a test report. The following
properties shall be tested:
Inspection by Variables
 Tensile strength (Rm)

 Yield point (Re)
 Elongation after fracture (As)

 Inspection by Attributes
 Behaviour in bend test
 Behaviour in rebend test
 Deviations from nominal cross—section
 Bond test
Chemical Composition
 The chemical composition of the steel based on cast analysis shall be in accordance
BS 4449.
v.) for fabric reinforcement, a certificate from the manufacturer showing the manufacturer's name, the
date and place of manufacture and showing that the reinforcement complies with the requirements
stated in the Contract and including details of:
 bond classification
 cast analysis
 carbon equivalent value
 results of tensile, bend and rebend tests, including the effective cross-sectional area for
tensile tests
 results of bond performance tests
 results of weld tests
The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer for information for each batch of bar reinforcement and
fabric reinforcement delivered to the Site and at least 14 days before fixing of the reinforcement starts.
9.2.2.Particulars of epoxy coatings to reinforcement
The following particulars of the proposed epoxy coatings to reinforcement shall be submitted to the
Engineer:
i.) name and location of the coating factory.

ii.) mill sheets of the steel reinforcement,
iii.) date and place of the coating application. and
iv.) certificate of the coating materials in compliance with BS ISO 14656, including:
 corrosion resistance
 chemical resistance
 cathodic disbonding of coating
 adhesion of coating
 abrasion resistance
 impact strength
 hardness
The above tests shall be carried out once every 5 years or when there are changes in the composition of
the coating materials whichever is the earlier.

The particulars, including certificates and test results, shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 14 days
before the first delivery of epoxy coated reinforcement to the Site. Certificates shall be submitted for each
batch of epoxy coated reinforcement delivered to the Site and at least 14 days before fixing of the
reinforcement starts.
9.2.3. Particulars of galvanized coatings to reinforcement
The following particulars of the proposed galvanized coatings to reinforcement shall be submitted to the
Engineer:
i.) name and location of the coating factory, and

ii.) a certificate from the manufacturer showing the date and place of application of the coating and
showing that the galvanized coatings comply with the requirements stated in the Contract and
including results of tests for:
 weight of coating
 uniformity of coating.
The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer for each batch of galvanized reinforcement delivered to
the Site and at least 14 days before fixing of the reinforcement starts.
9.2.4. Particulars of reinforcement connectors
Particulars of the proposed materials and methods of installation for reinforcement connectors. including
the manufacturer's literature, shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 28 days before fixing of
reinforcement connectors starts.
9.2.5. Bending schedules
The Contractor shall prepare all bending schedules from the details shown on the Drawings and in the
form specified in BS8666, Clause 5. The Contractor shall submit the bending schedules to the Engineer for
approval not less than 14 days prior to any cutting or bending of the relevant reinforcement. The lapping
and anchorage of stainless steel reinforcement shall be similar to those of carbon steel reinforcement; with
the ultimate anchorage bond stress based on BS EN 1992-2 for high yield deformed bars, type 2, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
9.2.6. Samples of materials
Samples of the following proposed materials shall be submitted to the Engineer at the same time as
particulars of the material are submitted:
i.) bar and fabric reinforcement,

ii.) epoxy coated bar and fabric reinforcement,
iii.) galvanized bar and fabric reinforcement,
iv.) reinforcement connectors for tension joints and compression joints,
v.) cover spacers, and

vi.) tying wire, tying devices and clips.
9.3. Handling and Storage of Materials
9.3.1. Handling of reinforcement
Reinforcement shall not be subjected to rough handling, shock loading or dropping from a height.
Nylon, rope or padded slings shall be used for lifting epoxy coated reinforcement and galvanized
reinforcement; bundles shall be lifted with a strongback or with multiple supports to prevent abrasion.
9.3.2. Storage of reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be stored off a levelled, well drained and maintained hard-standing ground on level
supports and in a manner which will not result in damage or deformation to the reinforcement or in
contamination of the reinforcement. Measures to protect the reinforcement from wetting and rusting
caused by weather shall be proposed for the Engineer's approval.
Fabric reinforcement shall be stored horizontally.
Different types and sizes of reinforcement shall be stored separately.
Reinforcement shall not be stored on or adjacent to concrete surfaces which form part of the permanent
work.
Epoxy coated reinforcement and galvanized reinforcement shall be stored on wooden or padded cribbing.
9.4. Cutting and Bending Reinforcement
9.4.1. Cutting and bending reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be cut and bent in accordance with BS 4466 to the specified shapes and dimensions
and shall be bent at temperatures of at least 5°C and not exceeding 100°C.
Epoxy coated reinforcement shall be bent cold. Bar cutting and bar bending equipment for epoxy coated
reinforcement shall have padded supports and contact areas shall be fitted with nylon or plastic mandrels.
B500B or C reinforcement shall not be re-bent or straightened after bending.
The ends of bars to be used with reinforcement connectors for compression joints shall be sawn square
with all buffs removed.
No reinforcement shall be allowed to be flame cut.

9.5. Surface Condition of Reinforcement
9.5.1. Surface condition of reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be clean at the time of fixing and shall be free from loose mill scale. loose rust or any
substance which in the opinion of the Engineer is likely to reduce the bond or affect the reinforcement or
concrete chemically; the reinforcement shall be maintained in this condition until concrete is placed around
it.
If the surface condition of the reinforcement deteriorates such that it does not comply with the requirements
stated above, the reinforcement shall be cleaned or dealt with by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
9.5.2. Repairs to epoxy coating and galvanized coatings
If the coating to epoxy coated reinforcement is delaminated or split at any point or if the coating to epoxy
coated reinforcement or galvanized reinforcement is damaged:
i.) at any point by an amount exceeding 25 mm2 in area or 50 mm in length, or

ii.) at more than three points in a 1 in length by amounts each even not exceeding 25 mm2 in area or
50 mm in length,
that part of the reinforcement shall not be used in the permanent work. If the coating to epoxy coated
reinforcement or galvanized reinforcement is damaged at more than six points in the cut and bent length of
a bar by amounts each not exceeding 25 mm2 in area or 50 mm in length, that length of bar shall not be
used in the permanent work.
All damaged areas not exceeding 25 mm2 in area or 50 mm in length and cut ends of epoxy coated
reinforcement shall be repaired using patching material applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Damaged areas not exceeding 25 mm2 in area or 50 mm in length and cut ends of galvanized
reinforcement shall be repaired by applying two coats of metallic zinc-rich priming paint. Sufficient paint
shall be applied to provide a zinc coating of at least the same thickness as the galvanized coating. The
contractor shall refer to Section 6.3 of BS EN ISO 1461 for advice on repair of damaged areas.
Repairs to epoxy coatings and galvanized coatings shall be carried out within 8 hours of cutting or damage.
Traces of rust shall be removed from the surface of the reinforcement before the repair is carried out.
9.6. Fixing Reinforcement
9.6.1. Fixing reinforcement
Bar reinforcement, fabric reinforcement and reinforcement connectors for tension joints from each batch
shall not be fixed until testing of the batch has been completed.
Reinforcement shall be fixed rigidly in position and secured against displacement.

A sufficient number of intersecting and lapping bars shall be tied using tying wire, tying devices or clips to
prevent movement of the reinforcement. The ends of tying wire, tying devices and clips shall not encroach
into the cover to reinforcement.
Laps and joints in reinforcement shall be made only at the specified positions and by the specified method.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the minimum lap lengths and effective anchorage lengths for
bars under stress shall be full tension lap lengths in accordance with BS EN 1992-2.
Sufficient numbers of cover spacers, chairs, supports and spacers other than cover spacers shall be
provided to maintain the reinforcement in the correct location and to maintain the specified cover at all
positions. Cover spacers, chairs, supports and spacers other than cover spacers shall be placed at a
maximum spacing of 1.5 m. Chairs, supports and spacers other than cover spacers shall be positioned
adjacent to or above cover spacers and shall have at least the same cover as that specified for the
reinforcement.
Prefabricated reinforcement cages shall be adequately supported and braced before lifting.
Reinforcement which is free-standing shall be secured in position and braced to prevent movement due to
wind and other loads.
9.6.2. Fixing reinforcement connectors
Reinforcement connectors shall be fixed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation and
using equipment recommended by the manufacturer.
9.6.3. Welding of reinforcement
Reinforcement shall not be welded unless approved by the Engineer.
9.6.4. Exposed reinforcement
Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings, reinforcement which is to be left exposed shall be protected
by coating with Denso tap or similar methods, subject to Engineer’s approval.
9.6.5. Access over reinforcement
Reinforcement shall not be contaminated or displaced as a result of access over the reinforcement; access
shall be obtained by using planks and ladders or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
9.7. Tolerances
9.7.1. Tolerances: reinforcement
Tolerances on cutting and bending reinforcement shall comply with BS 4466, Table 2.

The cover to the outmost layer of reinforcement shall not be less than the minimum cover shown on the
drawings plus a tolerance of 5mm for fixing precision.
Templates, if available, shall be used to minimize the cover tolerance.
9.8. Inspection of Reinforcement
9.8.1. Inspection of reinforcement
The Contractor shall allow the Engineer to inspect the completed reinforcement before carrying out any
work, including erecting formwork adjacent to reinforcement, which will make access to the reinforcement
difficult. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer 24 hours, or such shorter period agreed by the Engineer,
before carrying out such work.
9.9. Testing : Reinforcement
9.9.1. Batch: reinforcement
For the purpose of testing. the steel bar reinforcement arriving on site is to be subdivided into batches. Each
batch shall consist of reinforcement of the same steel grade, the same nominal diameter, same cast
number, batch number or lot number.
A batch of fabric reinforcement or reinforcement connectors for tension joints is any quantity of fabric
reinforcement or reinforcement connectors for tension joints of the same type, size and grade.
manufactured by the same mill, covered by the same mill and testing certificates and delivered to the Site
at any one time. In addition, for epoxy coated reinforcement and galvanized reinforcement, the coatings
shall have been applied at the same coating factory and shall be covered by the same original test
certificates with original signatures and official authorization chop.
9.9.2. Samples: reinforcement
Samples of bar reinforcement, fabric reinforcement and reinforcement connectors for tension joints, except
for epoxy coated reinforcement, shall be provided from each batch of the material delivered to the Site and
at least 14 days before fixing of the reinforcement starts. The number of samples to be provided from each
batch shall be as stated in Table 6.2. For epoxy coated reinforcement, samples shall be provided at least 20
working days before fixing of the reinforcement starts.
The number of specimens in each sample shall be as follows:
i.) bar reinforcement (without epoxy coating : In accordance with Table 6.1
or galvanized coating)
ii.) epoxy coated bar reinforcement and : 2 additional specimen to those
galvanized bar reinforcement specified in Table 6.1 for bar
reinforcement
iii.) fabric reinforcement (without epoxy :3

coating or galvanized coating)

iv.) epoxy coated fabric reinforcement and :4
galvanized fabric reinforcement
v.) reinforcement connectors for tension joints :3
Table 9- 13: Rate of Purchaser’s Tests
Description Size of Batch Tensile Bend Rebend

Class 1
Bar reinforcement
0 – 60 tonnes 3 1 1
nominal size 6 - 16 mm
Each additional 60t or
1 0 0
pat of 60t
Bar reinforcement
0 – 80 tonnes 3 1 1
1 0 0
part of 80t
Bar reinforcement
nominal size Exceeding 0 – 100 tonnes 3 1 1
32 mm
Each additional 100t
1 0 0
or part of 100t
Class 2
Bar reinforcement
0 – 35 tonnes 3 1 1
nominal size 6 – 16 mm
3 0 0
pat of 35t
Bar reinforcement
0 – 45 tonnes 3 1 1
3 0 0
part of 45t
Bar reinforcement
32 mm
3 0 0
part of 55t
Class 3
Bar reinforcement
0 – 35 tonnes 10 1 1


3 0 0
pat of 10t
Bar reinforcement
0 – 45 tonnes 10 1 1
3 0 0
part of º5t
Bar reinforcement
32 mm
3 1 1
part of 20t
Each specimen of bar reinforcement shall be 1 m long. Each specimen of fabric reinforcement shall be 1.2
m long by 1,2 m wide and shall contain at least three wires in each direction. Each specimen of
reinforcement connectors shall consist of one reinforcement connector joined to two lengths of bar each
500 mm long; the bars shall be the same type, size and grade as the bars to which the reinforcement
connector will be fixed in the permanent work.
Each specimen of bar reinforcement and fabric reinforcement shall be taken from different bars or sheets in
the batch. The ends of specimens shall be cut square before delivery to the laboratory.
Epoxy coating to reinforcement is not used in this contract, so the following is not applicable.
For epoxy coated bar reinforcement, two additional specimens shall be selected by the Engineer from each
batch of reinforcement for epoxy coating tests on thickness, adhesion and continuity in addition to the
requirements of tensile tests bend tests and rebend tests. Each specimen shall be a 2 m length piece cut at
least 1 m from the ends of a 12 m length bar. Specimens shall be selected from different bundles of the
reinforcement batch.
Table 9- 14: Rate of sampling of reinforcement
Description Size of Batch No. of samples per batch

Bar reinforcement All sizes
0 – 30 tonnes 3
Exceeding 30 tonnes 1 for each 30 tonnes or part thereof
Fabric reinforcement 0 – 50 tonnes 3
Exceeding 50 tonnes 1 for each 50 tonnes or part thereof
Reinforcement connectors for Less than 100 No. 1
tension joints 100 – 500 No. 2
Exceeding 500 No. 3

9.9.3. Testing: Reinforcement:
Each sample of bar reinforcement and fabric reinforcement shall be tested to determine the yield stress,
elongation, tensile strength, bending and rebending properties and unit mass. Each sample of fabric
reinforcement shall also be tested to determine the weld shear strength. Each sample of epoxy coated
reinforcement shall also be tested to determine the thickness. adhesion and continuity of the coating. Each
sample of galvanized reinforcement shall also be tested to determine the thickness of coating.
Each sample of reinforcement connectors for tension joints shall be tested to determine the tensile strength
and the permanent elongation in accordance with Section 9.9.5..
The number of tests on each sample shall be as stated in Table 6.3.
The method of testing shall be in accordance with the following:
Hot rolled steel bars : BS 4449
Cold reduced steel wire : BS 4482
Steel fabric : BS 4483
Hot dip Galvanized coating : BS EN ISO 1461
Epoxy coating to reinforcement is not used in this contract, the following is not applicable.
Thickness, adhesion and continuity tests on epoxy coatings shall be performed on each additional test
specimen as selected in accordance with Section 9.9.2.. The thickness test shall be in accordance with
Method No. 6 of BS 3900: Part C5. For thickness test, 15 pairs of readings shall be taken along two opposite
sides of each specimen. The adhesion and continuity tests shall be in accordance with BS 7295: Part 1.
Bend tests for adhesion shall be performed at a uniform rate within 15 seconds.
Tests shall be carried out on specimens having a temperature of between 5°C and 30°C.
9.9.4. Compliance criteria: epoxy coatings to reinforcement:
Epoxy coating reinforcement is not used in this contract, sub clauses 6.9.4 a), (b) and (c) not applicable
The results of tests for thickness. adhesion and continuity of epoxy coatings to reinforcement shall
comply with the following requirements:
At least 90% of all the recorded thickness measurements of coating shall be within the range of 0.18 mm to
0.30 mm. Thickness measurements below 0.13 mm shall be 5 considered cause for rejection.
The adhesion test shall comply with BS ISO 14654:1999 and BS ISO 1465621999. The surface of the bent
test piece shall not exhibit cracking or ductile tearing when viewed under well-lit conditions using normal or

corrected vision. There shall be no de-bonding of the coating from the surface of the bar and the coating
shall not contain more than 5 Holidays per meter of bar.
The continuity test shall comply with BS ISO 14654:1999 and BS ISO 14656:1999. The continuity of the
coating shall contain no more than 5 holidays per linear metre of bar length, when tested in accordance
with BS ISO 14654:1999 and shall be free of holes, voids, cracks and damaged areas discernible to a
person with normal or corrected vision. Holiday is defined as a discontinuity in a coating that is not
discernible to a person with normal or corrected vision and detected by a discharge from a holiday
detector.
9.9.5. Compliance criteria: reinforcement connectors for tension joints:
The results of tensile tests on specimens of reinforcement connectors for tension joints shall comply with
the following requirements:
i.) The tensile strength shall not be less than the specified requirements for the parent bar.
i.) When a test is made of a representative gauge length assembly comprising reinforcement of the
size, grade and profile to be used and a reinforcement connector for tension joints of the precise
type to be used, the permanent elongation after loading to 0.6 times of the specified characteristic
strength and unloading shall not exceed 0.1 mm. The gauge length shall span over the
reinforcement connector.
Table 9- 15: Number of tests on each sample of reinforcement
Description Type and number of tests

Tensile Bend Rebend Unit Weld Thickness, Weight and Pitch,
Mass Shear adhesion Uniformity of Dimension
Stress and galvanised
continuity coating
Bar No. of tensile, bend and rebend test in
reinforcement accordance with table 6.1 and one unit mass - - - -
test accompanied with each tensile test.
Steel fabric
Fabric sheet - - - 3 1 - - -
Longitude
3 - 1 - - - - 1
wire
Transverse
3 - 1 - - - - 1
wire
Epoxy coating - - - - - 2 - -
Galvanised
- - - - - - 2 -
coating
Reinforcement
connectors for 3 - - - - - - -
tension joints

9.9.6.Non-compliance: characteristic strength
A batch of bar reinforcement shall be considered as not complying with the speci fied requirements for
characteristic strength if the tensile tests results cannot meet the requirements stated in BS4449.
A batch of fabric reinforcement shall be considered as not complying with the specified requirements for
characteristic strength if the yield stress in any tensile test carried out on any sample taken from the batch
is less than 100% of the specified characteristic strength.
If the yield stress of fabric reinforcement in any tensile test is less than the specified characteristic strength
but equal to or greater than 93% of the specified characteristic strength, additional samples shall be
provided from the same batch and additional tests for yield stress shall be carried out. The number of
additional samples shall be as stated in Table 6.2. The number of fabric reinforcement specimens in each
additional sample shall be seven. The number of tests on the longitudinal wires and on the transverse wires
of each additional sample of fabric reinforcement shall be seven each if wires are of different sizes. The
batch shall be considered as not complying with the specified requirements for characteristic strength if the
yield stress in any additional test is less than 100% of the specified characteristic strength.
9.9.7. Non-compliance: elongation, tensile strength, bending, rebending. unit mass, weld shear
strength
If the result of any test for elongation, tensile strength, bending, rebending. unit mass or weld shear strength
of bar reinforcement, fabric reinforcement or reinforcement connectors for tension joints does not comply
with the specified requirements for the property, additional samples shall be provided from the same batch
and additional tests for the property shall be carried out. The number of additional samples shall be as
stated in Table 6.1.
The number of specimens in each additional sample shall be as follows:
i.) bar reinforcement (test to determine : 2 additional test specimens for each test
the elongation, tensile strength or failed
mass)
ii.) bar reinforcement (test to determine : 2 additional test specimens for each test
the bending or rebending failed
properties)
iii.) fabric reinforcement :6
iv.) reinforcement connectors :6
for tension joints
The number of tests on each additional sample shall be as follows:
i.) tensile test

bar reinforcement :1 for each specimen

reinforcement connectors for :6
tension joints
fabric reinforcement
a. longitudinal wires :6
b. transverse wires :6
ii.) bend test :2
iii.) rebend test :2
iv.) unit mass : 1 for each specimen
v.) weld shear strength :2
The batch shall be considered as not complying with the specified requirements for the property if the
result of any additional test does not comply with the specified requirements for the property.
9.9.8. Non-compliance: thickness, adhesion and continuity of epoxy coatings
In testing the two specimens selected in accordance with Section 9.9.5., if one test specimen fails to meet
the coating thickness, coating adhesion or coating continuity requirements, retests of specimens of the
same batch are permitted, and two further specimens from the same batch shall be subjected to the test or
tests in which the original specimen failed. If both additional specimens pass the retest, the batch from
which they were taken shall be deemed to comply with the specification. If either or both of them fail in the
retests, the batch shall be deemed not to comply with the specification. and this batch shall be rejected and
removed from Site.
9.9.9. Non-compliance: weight and uniformity of galvanized coatings
If the result of any test for weight or uniformity of galvanized coatings to reinforcement does not comply
with the specified requirements for the property. additional samples shall be provided from the same batch
and additional tests for the property shall be carried out. The number of additional samples shall be as
stated in Section 9.9.5..
The number of specimens in each additional sample shall be as follows:
i.) galvanized bar reinforcement :4

ii.) galvanized fabric reinforcement :2
iii.) Galvanized reinforcement connectors :4
for tension joints
The batch shall be considered as not complying with the specified requirements for the property if the result
of any additional test does not comply with the specified requirements for the property.

9.9.10. Non-compliance: permanent elongation of reinforcement connectors
If the result of any test for permanent elongation of reinforcement connectors for tension joints does not
comply with the specified requirements as stated in Section 9.9.5., additional samples shall be provided
from the same batch and additional tests for permanent elongation as stated in Section 9.9.5. shall be
carried out.
The number of additional samples shall be as stated in Table 6.2. The number of specimens in each
additional sample shall be six.
The batch shall be considered as not complying with the specified requirements for permanent elongation
if the result of any additional test does not comply with the specified requirements as stated in Section 9.9.5.

10. PRESTRESSING FOR STRUCTURES
FROM PADMA

11. CABLE-STAYS
11.1. Scope
This part of the Specification shall apply to the supply, fabrication, delivery, testing, installation, stressing
and permanent protection of the stay cables.
It includes the stay components which are part of the structure, such as the formwork tubes/pipes, the
anchorage bearing plates, erection devices and incidental materials and labor necessary to form a
complete stay cable system to support the bridge structure in accordance with the design, the applicable
standards, specifications and/or special provisions.
The stay cable system shall comply with the requirements of the fib bulletin 89 [6] and in addition, the
system shall comply with the excerpts listed below, taken from the CIP Recommendations [1] where
bulletin 89 is either not applicable to the project specific design or local reference.
11.2. Free length
The stay cables shall consist of the Parallel Strand System (PSS) made up of parallel, individually
polyethylene coated seven-wire strands, placed inside an external polyethylene stay pipe.
11.2.1. General
The stay cable free length shall provide redundant protection against corrosion of the strands, by means of
two complementary, nested barriers:
The first barrier (or internal barrier) shall be a hot dip galvanic coating applied directly to the strand, and
must cover the full length of the cable without a break.
The second barrier (or external barrier) consists of an outer envelope and an intermediate medium
between the outer envelope and the internal barrier. To prevent the internal barrier being consumed, the
external barrier must be completely airtight, watertight and qualified as a corrosion barrier and shall remain
intact between the end anchorages, or throughout the free length transition areas. In addition, the
intermediate medium must prevent any water or moisture that might get inside the external barrier from
reaching the internal barrier.
The aerodynamic stability of the stay cable shall in particular be ensured by the stay pipe surfacing with as
per section 11.7.1..
The resistance of the stay pipe to environmental aggression (thermal variation, mechanical attack, UV
radiation and stress cracking) shall be ensured by a stay pipe with a thermal expansion range and an
adequate formulation, as well as a transition and/or anti-vandalism tube in the bottom anchorage zone.

11.2.2. Strand
The main tensile elements of PSS stays are coated strands to the requirements of [2], with the following
characteristics:
 nominal diameter: 15.7 mm (T15.7 strands);

 nominal resisting section: 150 mm2;
 nominal linear mass of the bare strand: 1.172 kg/m;
 protective metallic coating according to section 11.2.3.. of the present specifications;
 strength class :
 fGUTS = 1860 MPa (maximal load Fm = 279 kN, 0.1% proof load Fp0,1 = 248 kN);
 fGUTS = 1960 MPa (maximal load Fm = 294 kN, 0.1% proof load Fp0,1 = 264 kN);
 strain under maximum load Agt at least 3.5%;
 modulus of elasticity of the bundle of parallel strands of 195 GPa ±± 5%;
 very low relaxation: no more than 2.5% at 1000 hours at 0.7 Fm ( at 20°);
The strands shall comply with category B of [2], i.e. MTEs with special capacities meeting the following test
conditions:
 fatigue strength: 2 million cycles with maximum stress of 0.45 fGUTS and stress variation of
300 MPa. After fatigue loading the strand shall develop a minimum 95% of the minimum specified
tensile strength.
 deflected tensile strength coefficient of no more than 20% or a “One Pin Test” with a minimum
tensile force of 80% of the actual ultimate tensile strength.
The curvature of strand shall be as follows: when a length of strand is lying free on a flat surface, the
maximum bow height from a base line of 1 meter length, measured inside the curve, shall not exceed 25
mm.
The strand lengths may have welds made on individual rods before drawing, but may not be welded during
or after drawing.
11.2.3. Internal Corrosion Barrier Enhancement by Galvanic Coating
The internal barrier of the stay cable shall be enhanced with a hot-dip coating of the seven-wire strands.
The coated strand shall be in accordance with [2].
To prevent the galvanization process from resulting in the reduction of the elastic limit, and to ensure a
smooth outer surface of the wires, the coating shall be applied on the wires before the final drawing
operation. The coating of the constituent wires of the strand shall be done before stranding.
The coating shall be applied through the galvanization of pure zinc grade Z2 with a minimum of 99.95%
purity, as defined in [7]. The mass of zinc coating per area shall be between 190 and 350 g/m2 as per [3]

(average thickness between 26 m and 49 m). The coating thickness shall be uniform (without drops or
local thickenings).
The adhesive strength of the coating shall be verified by winding at last 6 whorls of one of the constituents
of the coated strand, on a cylindrical mandrel, according to §9.7 of [3]. After the winding test, the whorls
shall not present exfoliations or cracks.
The continuity of the coating shall be such that, after the test described in §9.8 of [3], the test sample shall
not exhibit, at any point located farther than 25 mm of the immersed end, a bright and adhesive layer of
salmon-colored copper which indicates bare steel at this location.
11.2.4. External Corrosion Barrier
The external barrier shall consist of a high-density polyethylene (HDPE) sheath extruded directly onto the
strand, previously coated and filled with petroleum wax.
11.2.4.1.Individual HDPE sheath
The individual HDPE sheaths shall be made of high density black polyethylene classified PE 80 or more.
The material used shall be free of recycled materials. The extruded sheath shall comply with the following
physical and mechanical specifications:
Table 11- 16 specifications for individual HDPE sheath
Characteristics guaranteed by the strand Test method Acceptance criteria

supplier
Density ISO 1183 ≥ 0.94g/cm3
Melt index (190°C, 5kg, per 10 min) ISO 1133 to be declared
Carbon black content ISO 6964 2.3 +/- 0.3% (mass)
Dispersion of carbon black ISO 18553 Max. index 3
Maximum index of carbon black distribution ISO 18553 Max. index C2
Antioxidant content 1000ppm mini
Tensile strength at yield (23+/-2°C, ISO 527-1&2 ≥ 22MPa

50mm/minute)
Elongation at break (23+/-2°C, 50mm/minute) ISO 527-1&2 ≥ 600%
Elongation at break (-20+/-2°C, 50mm/minute) ISO 527-1&2 ≥ 150%
Thermal stability under O2 ISO 11357-6 ≥ 30 minutes at 210°C

Environmental stress cracking resistance ASTM D1693 (cond. B) 1000h
The thickness of the individual HDPE sheaths shall be greater than 1.5 mm, and the outer diameter of
sheathed seven-wire strands shall be less than 19.5 mm.
The use of thinner HDPE (not lower than 1.2mm) is permitted solely if special installation procedures are
implemented to mitigate the risk of mechanical aggression on the HDPE sheath. Experience of previous
successful implementation of such procedures shall be provided.
11.2.4.2.Petroleum Wax Filler
For standard PSS monostrand stay strand, the intermediate space among the wires and between the wires
and the individual sheath of each strands, shall be filled with microcrystalline wax, i.e. a malleable
crystallized solid consisting of saturated hydrocarbons which are injected in a liquid state.
In any case, the void filler shall not comprise grease, to prevent problems of thermal stability and bleed.
Due to the cracking hazard and the potential fretting fatigue, cement grout shall not be used as a void filler
material.
The void filler material shall be injected in the workshop of the strand extrusion facility. The manufacturing
process must completely fill the internal voids between the constituent wires of the strand and the voids
between the wires and the individual sheath. Moreover, this process shall ensure that no voids will appear
in the intermediate medium, due to thermal shrinkage, creep, setting or ageing of the void filler.
The filling material shall be continuous and durably stable. The weight of filler per unit length shall be
between 5 and 12 g/m. For individually sheathed strands, the weighting procedure consists of comparing
weights of a factory-made strand length before and after cleaning and de-waxing the wires and the HPDE
sheath which has been cut longitudinally to allow the operations.
Wax filling material shall comply with the following specifications:
Table 11- 17 - petroleum wax characteristics
Characteristics guaranteed by the Test method Acceptance criteria

strand supplier
Congealing point ISO 2207 80°C
Drop point ISO 2176 80°C
Heat resistance, flash point ISO 2592 >250°C
Penetration (1/10mm) at 25°C° ISO 2137 <125 (in 1/10 min)

Characteristics guaranteed by the Test method Acceptance criteria

strand supplier
BS 2000 : Part 121 (1982

Bleeding at 40°C ≤ 0.5%
modified)
Resistance to oxidation 100 hours

ASTM D 942 ≤ 0.03MPa
at 100°C
Copper-strip corrosion 100 hours

ISO 2160 Class 1a
at 100°C
EN ISO 6270-2 (AHT test) or

168 hours at
ISO 9227 (distilled water No corrosion
35°C
Corrosion instead of NSS)
protection
168 hours at ISO 11007, solution of
No corrosion
35°C sodium chloride
Content of Cl-, S2-, NO-3 NFM 07-023 ≤ 50ppm (0.005%)

aggressive
elements S042- NFM 07-023 ≤ 100ppm (0.010%)
11.2.4.3.Performance of the Sheathed Strand
The bond of the sheath shall ensure a continuous protection of the steel despite the extreme thermal
loading to which it might be subject throughout the lifetime of the project.
The minimum bond, measured according to §D.3.3 of [2] over a length of 300 mm at a temperature of 23°C,
shall be 1000 N.
The sheath shall have an impact resistance as determined by the falling weight test as per §D.3.7 of [2].
Specifically, no shattering or cracking of the sheathing shall occur except at the impact area.
To ensure durability the sheathed strand shall pass 1 million cycles of the rotative flexion test as per §D.8 of
[2] without any crack in the sheath.
11.2.5. Outer Stay Pipe
The outer casing shall consist of a one-piece stay pipe through which the strands are threaded. The void
within this outer casing shall not be filled.

The characteristics of the outer casing, especially its thickness and chemical composition, must ensure
good ageing performance against environmental degradation including satisfactory resistance to ultraviolet
radiation.
The outer casing must withstand the mechanical actions that might be exerted on it, and notably:
 the bending and axial force caused by the installation;

 the buckling force that could be caused by compression of the pipe under its self weight, when it
rests on the bottom anchorage of the stay cable.
The surface of the outer casing shall be patterned or carry other relief according to the provisions of section
11.7.1..
The color of the outer casing shall be as per the Engineer requirements provided the impact on durability is
evaluated and proven satisfactory.
11.2.5.1.Drag Force
The drag force coefficient shall not exceed 0.60 on the stay at 50m/s. Proper testing made with the
supplier’s proposed product and details shall be provided at tender stage to demonstrate this performance.
11.2.5.2.Outer Duct Diameter
The project specifications shall state the type of duct required for the project out of the three available duct
diameters: Standard, Compact or Super Compact.
Depending on the selected option, the outer duct diameter shall not exceed the value stated here below.

*Supercompact stay cables require the use of compact strand
**Verification required due to low compacity (depending on project)
Tolerance shall be +/- 3.5% on OD. The stay supplier shall demonstrate prior experience of stay installation
and strand removal with proposed cable and corresponding duct diameters.
11.2.5.3.Outer Casing Made of High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe
HDPE stay pipe shall consist of a co-extruded high-density polyethylene, with a colored external layer and a
black internal layer.
Stay pipe shall be made of high density polyethylene classified PE 80 or more.. It shall comply with the
following physical and mechanical specifications:
Table 11- 18 - Specifications for HDPE stay pipe

ISO Test ASTM Test

Properties Tests Acceptance criteria
method Method
Specific weight ISO 1183 D 1505 ≥ 0.94g/cm3
Carbon black content (1) ISO 6964 D 1603-14 2.3+/-0.3%
Carbon black dispersion

(1)
ISO 18553 D 5596 index max is 3
Formulation
quality
Carbon black distribution
(1)
ISO 18553 D 3849 - 14a index max is C2
Thermal coefficient of
ISO 11359-2 D 696 – 16 To be declared
dilatation
Formability Melt index ISO 1133 D 1238 To be declared
Tensile strength @23°C * ISO 527-2 D 638 ≥22 Mpa
Elongation @ break @
ISO 527-2 D 638 ≥600%
23°C *
Elongation @ break @ - ISO 527-2

D 638 ≥150%
Mechanical 20°C* @50mm/min
strength of raw
material Bending modulus @ 23°C ISO 178 D 790 ≥ 750 Mpa
ASTM: >600 hours, Cond

Environmental stress C F20
cracking resistance at ISO 22088 D 1693
100°C ISO: no cracks after
600hrs
Pipe ≥ 30min @ 210°C without

Oxidation induction time ISO 11357-6 D 3895-19
performance degradation
ISO/CIE 11664-
Colorimetry - ΔE≤1,13
6ss
ISO 6259-3, @
Tensile strength @ 23°C * D 2290-19a ≥ 18MPa
50mm/min
Elongation @ break @ ISO 6259-3, @

D 2290-19a ≥ 350%
23°C * 50mm/min
Elongation @ break @ - ISO 6259-3 D 2290-19a ≥ 100%

20°C *
Bending modulus @ 23°C ISO 178 D 790 ≥ 600MPa
The use of recycled polyethylene is prohibited. The stay pipe supplier must have a quality management
organization in accordance with the NF EN ISO 9001 standard.
In addition to the above requirements, the stay pipe thickness must be at least Øext/32 (SDR 32) or 5.5 mm,
whichever is greater, where Øext is the stay pipe outside diameter.
11.2.5.4.Durability of the High Density Polyethylene Pipe
Resistance to the environment of the outer casing shall be demonstrated scientifically: the outer casing
shall be formulated for a pre-defined lifetime, that shall be backed by results of accelerated aging tests in
SEPAP 12.24 cells.
This lifetime under a climate equivalent to a solar intensity of 5 GJoule/m²/year (120kLy/year) and 22oC
average temperature, shall be the following depending on the colour.
Table 11- 19 – Lifetime depending on colour
color Chemical stability (durability) Ultimate durability (design

[years] lifetime) [years]
White 30 100
Light grey 30 100
Pale green 30 100
Light Green 26 75
Red 23 70
Light blue 20 60
Mediterranean blue 13 35
Aluminium grey 26 75
Sunset yellow 15 45
Silky whitish orange 15 45
Flourish orange 15 45
Yellow 15 45

Ivory 15 45
Orange 15 45
White-grey 18 50
The above lifetime can be revised based on the actual solar intensity of the geographic area of the project
to achieve the desired pre-defined lifetime.
11.3. Anchorage
11.3.1. General
The two ends of a stay cable are called the anchorage zones. An anchorage zone consists of:
 the anchorage head, i.e. the systems consisting chiefly of an intermediary mechanical part
designed to secure the strands of the cable and transmit their force to the attaching parts of the
structure (deck crossbeam, gussets, anchor box, etc.);
 the transition zone, which extends from the anchorage head to the start of the free length of the
stay cable (cable and protective barriers); the transition zone is where the strands fan out, and may
comprise deviators, transverse guide systems, internal/external dampers, and sealing systems.
At tender stage, the stay cable supplier shall submit to the Engineer the assembly drawings for the sizes
and types of anchorages used in the project, showing all dimensions and materials of the main
components.
The proposed stay cable system shall be a proven solution, with a record of successful full-scale system
test program(s) and in use for several years on at least 10 bridges with spans exceeding 300 meters.
All tests required by this specification whether performed for previous projects or performed for this project
must be carried out or witnessed and approved by third parties.
11.3.2. Requirements for Cable Stay Anchorages
11.3.2.1.Transfer of Stay Force
Stay cable anchorages shall be designed to individually anchor each strand by a reversible means. Hard
material (resin) filling or cement grouting shall not be allowed in the anchorage area.
The anchorage device shall be capable of transmitting the full ultimate tensile force of the cable. All other
components such as bearing plates, recess tubes, steel flanges and deviators shown on the drawings shall
be of suitable type and sufficient strength for the intended use.

The stay cable supplier shall submit to the Engineer, upon his request results of full-scale fatigue, static and
water tightness tests.
11.3.2.2.Filtering Out Angular Deviations
The anchorage shall comprise cable guide systems in order to prevent significant bending stresses due to
angular deviations of the strand to extend to the anchorage device or wedges.
The design of the cable guide system must take account of transverse and flexural forces resulting from:
 cable deformations caused by catenary effects and wind oscillations at service and maximum wind
speed;
 deck and pylon anchorage rotation under live loads;
 inaccuracy of anchorage placing and shuttering tube misalignment;
 permanent angles due to the fanning out of the strands;
 bending of strand in the anchorage head due to manufacturing tolerances of anchorage parts.
Guide deviators placed in the transition area to provide a fixed point to avoid deviation induced bending
stresses from reaching the anchorage and imposing a transverse force on the structure ahead of the stay
anchorage in the above cases, are not allowed. Any device placed to dampen the cable shall not be a
substitute for the deviator.
The anchorage shall be capable of handling by itself the following combination of deviation angles, as a
minimum, without damaging the cable:
 +/- 35 milliradians static angle to allow for:

o compaction of strand bundle,
o installation tolerances,
o deformation of structure and catenary changes due to live loads,
 +/- 10 milliradians dynamic angle for vibrations.
The stay cable supplier shall document the efficiency of such means to reach the following criteria:
 the bending stresses in each strand shall be less than 250 MPa in the transition zone at the
entrance of the anchorage under a deviation of 50Mrad and a load of 45% GUTS.
The bending stress calculations shall be carried out with the maximum service tension in the cable.
11.3.2.3.Possibility of Tension Adjustment
All stays cables shall have the capability for force adjustments achieved by re-positioning the anchorage
with respect to the structure.

This tension adjustment shall be made by means of a threaded tube and ring nut assembly. The use of
shims to provide for stay tension adjustments is not permitted.
The adjustment amplitude shall be sufficient to account for the following:
 uncertainty regarding the “neutral” position of the anchorages;

 uncertainty of the construction loadings and of the stiffness of the structure (deck & tower);
 uncertainty of the unstressed length, tension, and temperature of the stay cable;
 extension of the stay cable to attain the required preloading;
 provision for future increase in dead load (overlay/ resurfacing, widening), etc.;
 provision for future increase in the live load;
 deformation of the structure resulting from concrete creep and shrinkage or constructional
inaccuracies, corresponding to mid-span deck deflection of L/1000 where L is the length of the
relevant stay;
 a safety factor to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
In any case the minimum adjustment length provided shall not be less than 100 mm for cables shorter than
100 m and 0.01% of the cable length with a minimum of 200 mm for longer cables.
11.3.2.4.Possibility of Directional Adjustment
The orientation of connecting parts and anchorage heads must take account of the ideal cable-stay
alignment (catenary) under the service conditions of the unloaded structure.
The anchorages must be capable of accepting static angular deviations in excess of the installation
tolerances of the connecting parts: see section 11.3.2.2..
11.3.2.5.Protection Against Corrosion
The two complementary corrosion-protection barriers defined in sections 11.2.3. and 11.2.4. must extend
continuously through the free length and entire transition zones.
If the external anti-corrosion barrier is replaced by a local casing in the anchorage, it must be injected with
an appropriate blocking medium. This blocking medium shall be a flexible material.
At the end of the stay cable, the outer casing shall be closed with a watertight cap attached to the
anchorage head and covering at least the entire area of the strand terminations. This cap shall be
removable for inspection of the strand terminations.
This integrity and continuity of the waterproofing must be consistent with the other functions of the
anchorage and maintained under all service conditions (vibration, movement, ageing, temperature
variations, etc.). This shall be demonstrated by the water-tightness test defined in section 11.4.3.3..

The anchorage shall include a tightening system enabling adjustment or re-instatement of the
waterproofing of the seals during the service life of the bridge.
The water-tightness at the entrance of the strand into the anchorage is a key factor. If the water-tightness is
provided by an O-ring seal or neoprene sleeve, the waterproofing test shall be done with material which
has been pre-aged with exposure to relevant ozone, oxygen, stress, IR and UV simulating the design life of
the stay.
The sealing of the anchorage should not rely only on the elastic performance of rubber or elastomeric or
plastic sealings or gaskets which can lose their elasticity over the year and hence lose their performance,
but rather on the on active pressure in the sealing material.
11.3.2.6.Protection Against Wear
To prevent fretting corrosion and fatigue, no steel to steel contact between the strand and the parts of the
transition zone shall be allowed.
Steps must be taken to prevent fretting corrosion and fatigue at critical points: at each deviation of the
strand, where the strand enters the anchorage head, etc.
In order to avoid an accumulation of causes of fatigue (axial and flexural action effects) at the anchorage
head, steps must be taken to guide lateral displacement of strands: see Section 11.3.2.2..
Cement grout filling or resin filling of any part of the anchorage is not permitted.
11.3.2.7. Removability
Anchorage design must allow for cable replacement with limited impact on traffic: see Section 11.6.3..
11.4. Qualification and testing
11.4.1. Strand
The conformity of the strand to the specifications of sections 11.2.2., 11.2.3. and 11.2.4. is submitted to
acceptance testing, carried out:
 before selection of the product;

 during production, at the factory before delivery;
 before the extrusion process
Inspection unit for sampling: the unit of production composed of coated products (wires or seven-wire
strands) coming from the same factory and of the same grade and nominal diameter, manufactured
according to the same process. This unit is defined either by cast or by batch, the mass of each inspection
unit being no more than 100 tons. When the number of coils in an inspection unit is lower than 3, three
samples are taken. When the number of coils in an inspection unit is greater than 3, one sample is taken
per coil, and the maximum number of samples is limited to 12.

11.4.1.1.Standard Properties
On each sample, one series of tests is carried out as follows:
 one tensile test;

 one determination of the mass per unit length;
 one control of the metallic coating (mass of coating per unit area, adhesive strength and
continuity), applicable for galvanized strand only;
 one control of straightness.
11.4.1.2.Particular Properties
Unless otherwise agreed, the following tests shall be carried out on one sample per inspection unit or
fraction thereof:
 one fatigue test;

 one deflected tensile test.
For each test, 3 samples shall be selected. If the test on the first sample fails, two more tests shall be carried
out. If either of the two additional tests fails, the quantity of strands represented by the three samples shall
be rejected.
11.4.2. HDPE Coating and Stay Pipe
The conformity of the HDPE sheath and stay pipe to the specifications of sections 11.2.4. and 11.2.5. is
subject to acceptance testing, carried out:
 before selection of the product;

 during production, at the factory before delivery.
Inspection unit for sampling: the unit of HDPE production by the same batch is one production process,
with a maximum of 30 tons of HDPE.
For each production unit, at least three samples are taken: one sample shall be taken at the beginning of
the production, another one close to the middle and a last one at the end.
11.4.2.1.Standard Properties
On each sample, one series of tests is carried out to determine:
 density of finished product

 melt index;
 flexural modulus;
 tensile strength at yield;

 carbon black content.
A certificate of analysis shall be given with each shipment, stating that the material meets the specification
and showing the test results.
Additional tests such as the resistance to shock depend on the finished product. They shall be proposed by
the stay cable supplier.
11.4.2.2.Particular Properties
Unless otherwise agreed prior to starting the production, one accelerated artificial ageing test shall confirm
the durability calculation made (as per section 11.2.5.4.). Test results on similar HDPE formulations shall be
supplied by the stay cable supplier at tender stage.
11.4.2.3.Drag Force
The drag force coefficient shall not exceed 0.60 on the stay at 50m/s. Proper testing, made with the supplier
details shall be provided at tender stage to demonstrate this performance.
11.4.3. Fully Assembled Stay Cable
Qualification of the stay cable system is based on the following tests on the fully assembled cable:
 three fatigue and ultimate strength tests, on representative units of the bridge, unless evidence of
previous tests is submitted and accepted by the Engineer;
 one water-tightness test, on a reduced unit, unless evidence of previous test is submitted and
accepted by the Engineer.
The specimen assemblies shall be tested by a recognized independent testing laboratory approved by the
Engineer. The Engineer shall be notified a minimum of 30 days in advance of any fabrication or testing so
that a representative of the Engineer may be present when the respective work is being performed.
All test data and results shall be submitted to the Engineer. Fabrication of anchors and cables shall not
begin until the required tests (or previous test reports) are successfully completed (submitted) and written
approval is given by the Engineer.
11.4.3.1.Fatigue and Ultimate Strength Tests of Anchorages
Test parameters and acceptance criteria shall be as detailed in Article 6.2.1 of [6] for category cables stays,
except where otherwise stated below.
Unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer, three complete fully assembled stay cable specimens shall be
fabricated for testing, one specimen shall be made representing the smallest stay cable, a mid-range stay
cable and a large (the largest when the laboratory testing machine is of sufficient capacity) stay cable in the
bridge. Each specimen shall be fully representative of all details and procedures for production
anchorages.

Stay cables shall be tested with all load bearing appurtenances. They shall include an active anchorage
and a passive anchorage. Strand deviations shall be representative of the most severe installed stay cable
deviations. At the discretion of the Engineer, the anchorages of the test specimens may not be injected with
wax (or the relevant injection material) for the tests.
The specimen shall undergo two million cycles of the following loading: the axial stress varies sinusoidally
between 0.45 fGUTSand 0.45 fGUTS200 MPa and the test set up shall be as per §6.2.1 of reference [6].
In addition to this initial qualification, at least one test reference shall be provided with a test set up where
the cable deviates sinusoidally (e.g. alternatively) from the anchorage centerline, between 0 and 10
milliradians.
The test bed shall synchronize the maximum and minimum stresses with the maximum and minimum
angles of deviation. The test shall be carried out with the straight set-up outlined below (at least for one
test): h
d


connection
free gathering collar collar
+5 mrad

-5 mrad
h
Figure 11- 3 - fatigue test set-up
For all the above mentioned testing, either as per [6] and [1]:
The fatigue test reference can be considered as positive if:
 the specimen goes through two million cycles of fatigue loading without detected breakage of
more than 2% of the wires of which the stay cable is made;
The ultimate tensile-strength test, subsequent to the fatigue test, is positive if:

 the specimen withstands a force greater than the larger of the following:
o 95% of the guaranteed ultimate tensile strength FGUTS of the cable, defined from the
nominal characteristics of the strands;
o 92% of the actual ultimate tensile strength FAUTS of the cable, calculated from the actual
strength of the strands;
 the strain of the specimen under the maximum load is greater than 1.5%, allowing for deformation
inherent to the operation of the anchorages (working-in of jaws, etc.).
11.4.3.2.Bending fatigue and Ultimate Strength Tests of Anchorages
Test parameters and acceptance criteria shall be as detailed in Article 6.2.2 of [6] for category cables stays,
except where otherwise stated below.
Stay cables shall be tested with all load bearing appurtenances. They shall include an active anchorage
and a passive anchorage. Strand deviations shall be representative of the most severe installed stay cable
deviations. At the discretion of the Engineer, the anchorages of the test specimens may not be injected with
wax (or the relevant injection material) for the tests.
The fatigue test reference can be considered as positive if:
 the specimen goes through two million cycles of fatigue loading without detected breakage of
more than 2% of the wires of which the stay cable is made;
The ultimate tensile-strength test, subsequent to the fatigue test, is positive if:
 the specimen withstands a force greater than the larger of the following:
o 95% of the guaranteed ultimate tensile strength FGUTS of the cable, defined from the
nominal characteristics of the strands;
o 92% of the actual ultimate tensile strength FAUTS of the cable, calculated from the actual
strength of the strands;
 the strain of the specimen under the maximum load is greater than 1.5%, allowing for deformation
inherent to the operation of the anchorages (working-in of jaws, etc.).
11.4.3.3.Water-tightness Test
Test parameters and acceptance criteria shall be as detailed in Article 11.3 of [1] except where otherwise
stated below.
The water-tightness at the entrance of the strand into the anchorage is a key factor. If the water-tightness is
provided by an O ring seal or by a neoprene sleeve, the waterproofing test shall be done with material
which has been pre-aged with a relevant ozone, oxygen, stress, IR and UV exposition simulating the design
life of the stay.

The sample is set up in a steel tube, inclined at a typical stay cable angle. As shown on the drawing below,
this tube serves as a tank for water head of 2 meters on the sample, as well as a structural member to
stress the stay cable and bend it. The sample shall not be injected with void filler to carry out the test.
Figure 11- 4 - water-tightness test set-up
After installation of the sample, the cable is stressed up to 0.20 FGUTS, and the tube is filled with dyed
water. The top anchorage shall allow the cable to be stressed. In case of stay cable with a void filler over
the full length or when the stay pipe is attached at both end of the cable the connection of the stay pipe
shall reproduce the reality of the connection and shall also be stressed,. If thermal variations create stresses
in stay pipes connected at both ends, the sample shall be set in a manner that this phenomenon shall be
tested.
The sample is then submitted to the following loading sequence, defined by Figure 46 of [1]:
 10 loading cycles between 0.2 and 0.5 FGUTS, using an appropriate jack at the top anchorage. The
force in the cable is then permanently set to 0.3 FGUTS;
 8 thermal cycles, obtained through a central heating device, heating the water in the steel tube
from 20°C up to 70°C. Two cycles are applied each week;

 Simultaneously, the stay cable specimen will be bent, using a transverse jack and a sliding bearing
plate under the top anchorage, with a stroke of +/-100 mm (angle of deviation of +/-25 milliradians).
250 cycles are applied per week, alternatively cold and hot.
After this loading sequence, the sample is dismantled carefully; then opened to check that no traces of
water are present on the strands. The test is deemed to be positive if no trace of coloring is found inside the
anchorage or anchorage cap.
Only stay cable systems having previously passed such testing witnessed by a third party can be qualified.
11.4.3.4.Acceptance of Prior Tests of Stay Cables
A reference of a fatigue test and a water-tightness test passed successfully as per above specifications
shall be submitted to the Engineer at the tender stage.
Any previous test, conducted for a previous project as per the present specifications based on Chapter 11
of [1] on specimens similar to those recommended for this project, may be proposed to the Engineer as the
basis for stay cable approval in lieu of the tests specified in sections 11.4.3.1. and 11.4.3.2..
Anchorage tests conducted for previous projects according to the specifications of Chapter 6.2.1 of [6] are
not acceptable unless if previous tests conducted of the same anchorage units have demonstrated that the
system behaves similarly under the specifications of Chapter 6.2.1 of [6] and the present specification
based Chapter 11.2.2 of [1]
However, the quality control tests outlined in sections 11.4.1. and 11.4.2. must establish that the strands
supplied for this project have geometrical, mechanical and fatigue characteristics equal to the ones used in
the fatigue tests for the previous projects. Further, it must be demonstrated with shop drawings that the stay
anchorage hardware proposed is the same as in the previous tests.
11.5. Installation
Stay cables shall be installed in accordance with the procedures prescribed by the stay cable supplier. The
stay cable supplier shall submit to the Engineer, for review and approval, a method statement which
describes the installation operations, including a description of the main items of the equipment required,
as well as an engineered cable installation program that prescribes the cable force and elongation of each
stay cable.
The stay cable procedure shall be compatible with the bridge construction sequence and are generally
erected in-situ. When cables are very short (<30m) and/or insufficient deck space is available for in-situ
fabrication (i.e. erection of pier table cables) prefabrication may be considered provided specific
procedures are developed to ensure the strands remain parallel, equally stressed and that no damage to
any elements of the system is permitted.

Unless otherwise agreed, the Main Contractor will be responsible for the determination and monitoring of
forces and deflections in the permanent structure at all erection stages, as caused by the proposed
erection process.
11.5.1. Handling
The stay cable supplier shall develop procedures to assure that stay cable components will not be
damaged during handling.
Stay cable components shall be protected from corrosion, heat, abrasion and other harmful effects
throughout the fabrication, shipping, delivery, storage and installation.
The minimum bending diameter for the HDPE outer casing shall be, during fabrication, transport, storage or
erection of stay cables, 50 times its outside diameter.
All damage to stay cables or components thereof shall be evaluated by the Engineer and remedied prior to
installation of the stays. Any damaged strand shall be replaced. Damage to non load-carrying components
shall be repaired to the Engineer's satisfaction prior to the installation of the stays.
11.5.2. Stay Pipe Assembly
When the stay pipe is made up of sections assembled end-to-end, the sections are assembled by butt
fusion welding (hot-plate welding in accordance with ASTM D2657). The cut ends of sections of pipe to be
joined must be perpendicular to the pipe axis. The strength of a joint must be more than 90% of that of the
intact pipe.
The stay cable supplier shall submit samples to qualify the fusion welding procedure. These samples shall
consist of three 2 meter long pipes per pipe size.
11.5.3. Strand-by-Strand Erection
The stay cable supplier shall take appropriate measures to prevent the leading end of the strand damaging
the stay pipe or the sheaths of the strands installed previously.
All the special features of the stay cable (anchorages, guidance systems, etc.) shall be fitted with protection
to avoid damaging the individual protection of strands.
The stay cable supplier shall take appropriate measures to ensure that the strands are parallel throughout
their length and that they pass through matching holes in the two anchorage heads.
The sheath of the strand shall not be damaged during uncoiling operations (a frame dispenser or any
dispenser for which the strands are unreeled from the inner layer of the coil is not allowed).

11.5.4. Stressing
Jacks and gauges for stay cable installation shall be calibrated with reference to a standard pressure
gauge or load cell within one month prior to the beginning of the cable installation, and every 6 months
thereafter, or for 500 strands, for the duration of cable installation.
The standard gauge should have a relative accuracy of at least 0.5% and should itself be gauged by an
appropriate laboratory at least once per year.
In-situ erected PSS stay cables may be tensioned one-by-one provided that it can be demonstrated, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, that the final tension and elongation of each strand is equalized within a range
of +/-1.25% GUTS. An accuracy calculation shall be provided by the stay cable supplier at tender stage.
It is not permitted to stress the strands one by one by applying strand forces generated from calculations
based on the deformation of the structure. The preferred method is the so-called "Isotension" method. All
stressing must be recorded automatically with a computer system connected to load cells. The use of
pressure gauges is not allowed for stressing.
In case of length measurement of all the strands before erection, they shall be placed in a straight, confined
and covered area, at a controlled temperature and protected from any damage.
Stay cables shall be capable of being tensioned, de-tensioned and re-tensioned more than once during the
construction of the structure. These operations may be carried out either by full jacking of the live
anchorage and adjusting the ring nut setting, or strand by strand. If de-tensioning PSS cables strand by
strand in such way that the "gripping" zone is incorporated in the stressed portion of the stay, no "gripped"
zone shall permanently be left on the stressed portion of the stay.
11.5.5. Corrosion Protection During Erection
If the strand corrosion protection system is not put in place at the time the cable is installed on the structure,
the stay cable supplier should have an appropriate temporary corrosion-protection system applied.
11.5.6. Finishing
After the final cable tension adjustment has been completed, and subjected to the Engineer's approval, the
finishing of the anchorage and transition zones (permanent corrosion protection, installation of dampers,
etc.) may be carried out.
A detailed procedure for these operations shall be submitted by the stay cable supplier to the approval of
the Engineer.
11.6. Maintenance and replacement
A maintenance manual, detailing the inspection program, the monitoring and maintenance procedures of
stay cables shall be submitted by the stay cable supplier at tender stage.

11.6.1. Inspections
The inspection program shall comprise at least:
 routine inspection operations at a frequency proposed by the stay cable supplier to the Engineer;
 replacement of one representative strand on 2 stay cables (one in the main span and one in a back
span) to check corrosion protection every 10 years;
11.6.2. Monitoring
The monitoring equipment of stay cables may include:
 load cells on 10% of the stay cables defined by the Engineer, to permanently monitor cable tension;
 bi-directional accelerometers on the free length of 10% of the stay cables defined by the Engineer
to permanently monitor the oscillation amplitude of the cable.
11.6.3. Maintenance Procedures
The maintenance procedures shall include at least:
 procedures for minor and major maintenance operations foreseen during the 100 year design
lifetime of the stay cables;
 frequencies of minor and major inspection and maintenance operations
 the replacement procedure for a single strand and a full cable.
The water-tightness of the anchorages shall be inspectable during the maintenance program and shall be
easily reinstated without dismantling any major components.
The anchorage design shall enable the de-tensioning of the cable to a force of 0.10 FGUTS or less, without
any auxiliary means, to facilitate replacement.
The stay cable design shall be such that the replacement of any cable can be done in compliance with the
site safety regulations and with minimum traffic disruption. The replacement of a full cable shall be possible
with the closure of only the one traffic lane adjacent to the stay.
11.7. AERODYNAMIC REQUIREMENTS
11.7.1. Outer Casing Profile
Due to structural issues, the drag force on stay cables shall be minimized and outer casing aerodynamic
stability under project wind conditions shall be demonstrated.
Moreover, the risk of rain and wind induced vibration shall be prevented by adequate outer casing
surfacing.

The stay cable supplier shall propose an outer casing surface carrying relief, such as spiral ridges for
example, with a demonstrated efficiency against rain and wind induced vibration. At least two laboratory
testing reports shall be submitted at tender stage to demonstrate the rain and wind stability of the stay pipe
against rain & wind induced vibration.
11.7.2. Stay Cable Damping
The stay cable supplier shall perform a vibration analysis at tender stage. The dampers shall have a stroke
able to accommodate a vibration amplitude of +/- L/500 of the cable.
Stay cables >80m in length shall be provided damping systems to obtain a logarithmic decrement greater
than 4% on any cable, whatever the cable vibration amplitude. Damping shall be provided by viscous
means, to obtain a smooth damping independent on the stay vibration amplitude. The supplier shall
design the damping system based on actual damping curves, which shall be available for Engineer's
review.
Friction dampers do not damp small and high vibrations and create shocks when the friction force is
reached and so are not permitted.
Damper shall work from very low vibrations (L/5000 amplitude of stay movement) to large vibrations.
The dampers shall have a durability proven by dynamic tests, with a cumulated stroke of 20,000 meters
without major alteration of the damping curve.
The proposed damping system shall be fully integrated in the anchorage zone so as to minimize
aesthetical impact. It shall be easily accessed for inspection and maintenance during the life of the bridge.
The proposed damping system and associated calculation software shall be a proven solution with a
record of satisfactory use on major projects. The damping system(s) shall be qualified by:
 more than 1000 viscous dampers installed,

 references for cables longer than 200m for internal dampers and 400m for external dampers and
 more than 5 years of in-place operation.
11.8. References
[1] Stay cables Recommendations of French Interministerial Commission on Prestressing (Edition

November 2001 in French, June 2002 in English)
[2] NF XPA 35-037-1 et 3 (2002): Torons en acier à haute résistance protégés gainés. Partie 1: Prescriptions
générales et Partie 3: Torons protégés gainés adhérents (Type SC).
[3] NF A 35-035 (Edition 2001): Hot Dip Zinc or Zinc-Aluminum Coated Prestressing Smooth Wires and 7-
Wire Strands

[4] ASTM D 3350 (Edition 2002): Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipes and Fittings
Materials
[5] EN 1993-1-11: Design of structures with tension components made of steel (Eurocode)
[6] Fib bulletin 89, Recommendation, Acceptance of stay cable systems using prestressing steels.
[7] BS EN 1179 Zinc and zinc alloys. Primary zinc

12. FORMWORK AND FINISHES TO CONCRETE
12.1. Materials
Formwork materials shall be selected by the Contractor to provide the required finish and to meet the
standards specified herein. Details of formwork and temporary works details of all fittings, features, etc. shall
be submitted to the Engineer for acceptance.
Formwork shall not have any splits, cracks or other defects. The faces and edges of formwork shall be
cleaned and the formwork face shall be free of projecting nails.
Formwork shall be firmly supported and individual panels shall be rigid. Joints between formwork panels,
stop ends and adjoining concrete shall be tight and shall not permit grout loss.
For formwork where special shapes are required, provide suitable moulds to match the main formwork.
Moulds shall be designed to allow visible faces to be as consistent as possible.
Formwork shall be obtained from one source and different types of formworks shall not be mixed unless
agreed by the Engineer. Steel formwork shall not be used without acceptance.
Permanent formwork for the insitu concrete deck slab construction shall be as shown on the individual
structure drawings and in accordance with the following:
i.) Permanent formwork must be safe for use and capable of resisting all load effects arising during
construction, operation or maintenance, without detrimental deflection or risk of uncontrolled
displacement. Where provided, temporary seals must be suitable for the proposed use.
ii.) The adequacy of proposals for permanent formwork should be demonstrated through the use of
certified manufacturer’s data or through site testing.
iii.) Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP)
a. The panels shall be Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP), grey in colour, consisting of a resin
mortar filling between two thin sheets of glass reinforced plastic. Details shall be submitted
to the Engineer for Approval.
b. The top surface of the panel shall have projecting steel reinforcing ribs on edge encased
within the GRP. There should be no filler materials such as expanded polystyrene placed
between the ribs, which would prevent full contact between the deck concrete and the
surface of the ribbed panels.
c. The panels shall be bedded on an approved preformed flexible strip sealant, making due
allowance for any crossfall. The gaps between adjacent panels are to be sealed to prevent
the loss of grout during construction of the reinforced concrete deck slab to ensure a
smooth and dense finish. Details shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
d. In calculating the required length of the panels, due allowance shall be made for the
permitted bow in the beams to ensure that the minimum bearing length of the panels is
maintained.

Specification for the Cantilever Form Traveller is included in Section 8.
12.1.1. Formwork
Formwork shall be timber, metal, plastic or other material which will produce the specified finish. Materials
used as formers for profiled formwork, chamfers, splays, rebates and other features shall be such that they
produce the same finish as the main formwork.
Plywood for formwork shall have a close. uniform grain and the edges shall be sealed with barrier paint,
polyurethane varnish or other impermeable material.
The faces of formwork for Class F4 and F5 finishes shall have a uniform texture and a matt, not a shiny or
polished, surface. The edges of the formwork shall be straight and square.
12.1.2. Formwork Class of finish
The characteristics of each class of finish shall be as stated in Tables 8.1. 8.2 and 8.3.
Formwork of the type stated in Table 8.1 will normally produce a concrete surface which complies with the
characteristics of finish stated in Table 8.1 but other types of formwork may be used to produce the
specified finish.
The Class of formed and unformed finish required for different concrete surfaces shall be as stated in Table
8.4 unless otherwise stated in the Contract. The higher Class of finish shall start at least 150 mm below the
finished ground level for concrete surfaces which are partly buried.
12.1.3. Release agents
Release agents shall be a proprietary type approved by the Engineer. Release agents containing mineral
oils shall not be used. Barrier paint, polyurethane varnish, wax or other materials shall not be used instead
of a release agent.
Release agents shall be a type which will not stain or colour the concrete and which will not affect the bond
between the concrete and subsequent coverings. Release agents other than those which incorporate a
surface retarder to produce a Class T1 finish shall be a type which will not affect the hardening of the
concrete.
Release agents used on formwork for water retaining structures for potable and fresh water shall be non-
toxic and shall not impart a taste to the water.
Release agents used on steel formwork shall contain a rust-inhibiting agent.
Release agents used on formwork for Class F4 and F5 finishes shall be a chemical release agent.

On areas of formwork which in the opinion of the Engineer are likely to be affected by pedestrian traffic. rain
or dust, release agents for Class F4 and F5 finishes shall be a type which evaporates to leave a dry film on
the formwork, unless protection from such effects is provided.
Table 8.1: Formed finishes
Table 8.2: Uniformed finishes
Table 8.3: Treated finishes
Table 8.4: Class of finish
12.1.4. Formwork ties
Formwork ties and components shall be a type such that any removable part can be removed without
damaging the concrete; any part left in the concrete shall be at least 40 mm or the specified nominal cover
to the reinforcement, whichever is greater, from the concrete surface.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. formwork ties and components used with profiled formwork
shall be a type such that holes left by the ties and components are small enough to be located completely
within the recesses in the concrete surface.
12.1.5. Cement mortar for concrete surfaces
Cement mortar for filling blowholes shall consist of cement and fine aggregate together with the minimum
amount of water necessary to achieve a consistency suitable for completely filling the blowholes.
Cement mortar for filling holes left by formwork ties and components shall consist of 1 part of cement to 3
parts of fine aggregate together with the minimum amount of water necessary to achieve a consistency
suitable for compacting the mortar into the holes; the mix shall contain a non-shrink admixture.
Cement mortar for filling blowholes and holes left by formwork ties and components in concrete surfaces
with Class F4 and F5 finishes shall be the same colour as the hardened concrete; light-coloured sand or
white cement may be used for this purpose.
Materials for cement mortar shall comply with this Specification.
12.1.6. Surface retarders
Surface retarders shall be a proprietary type approved by the Engineer and shall be a type which will not
stain or colour the concrete.

12.1.7. Abrasives
Abrasives for blasting shall be grit or other materials approved by the Engineer and shall not contain any
iron, clay or other materials which will stain or colour the concrete.
12.2. Finishes
The surface finishes are to be in accordance with Clause 1708.4 of SHW.
Concrete finishes for abutments / wingwalls / piers unless described otherwise on the Drawings shall be as
follows:
i.) Buried surfaces – Class F1 / U1

ii.) Bearing plinths – Class F3 / U3
iii.) Exposed unformed surfaces – Class U3
iv.) Exposed formed faces of width < 500mm – Class F4
v.) Exposed formed faces of width ≥ 500mm – Class F6
Concrete finished for the deck slab unless described otherwise on the Drawings shall be as follows:
i.) Edge cantilever soffit – Class F3

ii.) Top of deck (to be waterproofed) – Class U4
Concrete finishes for parapet stringcourse unless described otherwise on the Drawings shall be as follows:
i.) Formed external face – Class F3

ii.) Unformed external surface – Class U3
iii.) Hidden surfaces – Class U1
Concrete finishes for gantries unless described otherwise on the Drawings shall be as follows:
i.) Exposed surfaces – Class F4 / U3
Concrete finishes for minor structures unless described otherwise on the Drawings shall be as follows:
i.) Buried surfaces – Class F1 / U1
The requirements for Class F6 are as for Class F4 except that a patterned profile finish shall be provided as
described on the Drawings. The pattern shall extend a minimum of 300mm below finished ground level.
12.3. Submissions
Particulars of formwork and finishes to concrete and samples of materials.
Particulars and samples of the proposed materials and methods of construction for Class F4. F5, U5 and T
finishes shall be submitted to the Engineer as marked 'X' in Table 8.5. The same particulars shall be
submitted for other Classes of finish if required by the Engineer.

The particulars and samples for formed finishes shall be submitted at least 14 days before the relevant
formwork, including formwork for trial panels, is fabricated. The particulars and samples for unformed and
treated finishes shall be submitted at least 14 days before the relevant element. including trial panels, is
concreted.
Table 8.5
12.4. Trial panels
12.4.1. General
Trial panels shall be constructed to demonstrate the standard of materials and workmanship to be
achieved for each distinct structure. Where precast elements are used in the structures, a trial panel for
each type of element shall be construction. The number and form of each are to be agree with the
Engineer.
These panels shall be a trial and the panel deemed to display an acceptable finish shall be identified by all
parties in writing.
The trial panels shall be retained for future compliance checking and shall not be disposed of until
confirmation has been received in writing from the Engineer.
A trial panel shall be constructed for each Class F4, F5, U5 and T finish to demonstrate that the proposed
materials, mix design, methods of production and methods of construction, including curing and removal of
formwork, will produce the specified finish.
Trial panels for Class F4 and F5 finishes shall be constructed before the relevant formwork for the
permanent work is erected, and trial panels for Class U5 and T finishes shall be constructed before the
relevant permanent work is concreted. The trial panels shall be constructed at least 4 weeks before the
relevant permanent work is carried out.
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer at least 24 hours, or such shorter period agreed by the Engineer,
before constructing trial panels.
Trial panels shall be constructed using the materials, mix design, methods of production and methods of
construction, including curing and removal of formwork, submitted to the Engineer Trial panels shall be
horizontal, vertical or inclined as appropriate and shall be constructed at locations agreed by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract each trial panel shall be not less than 2 m by 2 m by 300 mm thick,
and shall contain reinforcement representative of the most congested reinforcement which will be used in
the permanent work.
Trial panels shall incorporate formwork ties and components, horizontal joints, vertical joints, chamfers,
splays, rebates and other features representative of those which will be used in the permanent work.

Trial panels shall be protected from damage and shall be left in position until the Engineer instructs their
removal.
12.4.2. Non-compliance: trial panels
If in the opinion of the Engineer the specified finish has not been produced in the trial panel, particulars of
proposed changes to the materials, mix design, methods of production or methods of construction shall be
submitted to the Engineer; further trial panels shall be constructed until the specified finish is produced in
the trial panel. Further trial mixes shall be made unless in the opinion of the Engineer non-compliance of
the trial panel was not due to the concrete mix.
12.4.3. Commencement of formwork and concreting
Formwork for Class F4 and F5 finishes shall not be erected and elements with Class U5 and T finishes shall
not be concreted until in the opinion of the Engineer the specified finish has been produced in the trial
panel.
12.4.4. Changes in materials and methods of construction
Unless permitted by the Engineer, the materials, mix design, methods of production or methods of
construction. including curing and removal of formwork, used to produce the specified finish in trial panels
shall not be changed.
12.5. Storage of Materials
12.5.1. Storage of formwork
Formwork shall be stored off the ground on level supports and in a manner which will not result in damage
or deformation to the formwork or in contamination of the formwork.
Formwork for Class F4 and F5 finishes shall be covered and protected from exposure to conditions which
may affect the formwork.
12.5.2. Storage of release agents and surface retarders
Release agents and surface retarders shall be stored in sealed containers marked to identify the contents
and protected from exposure to conditions which may affect the material. The materials shall be stored in
accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations and shall not be used after the recommended shelf
life has been exceeded.
12.6. Design and Construction of Falsework and Formwork
12.6.1. Design and construction of falsework and formwork
Falsework and formwork shall be designed and constructed to maintain the position and shape of the
formwork such that the hardened concrete surface complies with the characteristics of finish stated in

Table 8.1 and with any more stringent tolerances stated in the Contract; allowance shall be made for
cambers.
Falsework and formwork shall be capable of being dismantled and removed without shock, disturbance,
damage or loading to the concrete and in such a manner that the specified requirements for removing or
leaving in position side formwork, soffit formwork and props will be achieved without disturbing other
formwork or props.
Formwork shall be used to form the top surface of concrete inclined at a slope exceeding 150 to the
horizontal unless it can be demonstrated that the specified finish will be produced without the use of
formwork.
Formwork to top surfaces shall be anchored to prevent flotation.
12.6.2. Construction of formwork
Formwork shall not have any splits, cracks or other defects. The faces and edges of formwork shall be
clean and formwork faces shall be free of projecting nails.
Formwork which has been previously used shall be repaired and the edges resealed before it is erected.
Formwork which in the opinion of the Engineer has deteriorated to an extent such that it will not produce
the specified finish shall not be used for that Class or a higher Class of finish.
Formwork shall be firmly supported and individual panels shall be rigid. Joints between formwork panels,
stop ends and adjoining concrete shall be tight and shall not permit grout loss. Gaps shall be sealed with
gaskets, filler, sealant or tape before the application of release agents.
Formwork shall be cut in such a manner that reinforcement and built-in components passing through the
formwork are maintained in position; the joints shall be tight and shall not permit grout loss.
Formers for profiled formwork, chamfers. splays, rebates and other features shall be rigidly and evenly fixed
to the formwork along the complete length and shall not permit grout loss.
Formwork ties and components shall be fixed in such a manner that they do not touch reinforcement or
built-in components. Formwork ties and components shall fit tightly against formwork faces and shall not
permit grout loss.
If required for cleaning or inspection, temporary openings shall be provided in the formwork.
12.6.3. Construction of formwork for Class F2, F3, F4 and F5 finishes
Formwork panels for Class F2, F3, F4 and F5 finishes shall be the same size and shall form a regular pattern
approved by the Engineer. The lines of joints between panels shall be straight and continuous horizontal
and vertical, or inclined to suit the pattern of profiled formwork, and shall be coincident with construction

joints and other joints and with recesses in the concrete surface. The number of make-up pieces shall be
kept to a minimum.
Holes left by formwork ties and components in concrete surfaces with Class F2. F3, F4 and F5 finishes shall
be in line horizontally and vertically and shall form a regular pattern approved by the Engineer. Unless
otherwise permitted by the Engineer, holes in profiled formwork shall be located in such a manner that the
holes are completely within recesses in the concrete surface.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract or permitted by the Engineer, chamfers shall be provided for all
external angles of 90° or less in concrete surfaces with Class F2. F3, F4 and F5 finishes.
Formwork for curved concrete surfaces with Class F2, F3, F4 and F5 finishes shall not be made up of a
series of flats unless permitted by the Engineer.
12.6.4. Construction of formwork for Class F4 and F5 finishes
Each type of formwork for Class F4 and F5 finishes shall be obtained from one source and different types of
formwork shall not be mixed unless permitted by the Engineer. Damaged formwork shall not be used
unless permitted by the Engineer. Parts of steel formwork which will be in contact with concrete shall be
free from rust.
For concrete Surfaces with Class F4 and F5 finishes. joints between formwork panels shall be sealed with
foamed rubber strips. The foamed rubber strips shall be sufficiently compressible to form a grout-tight joint.
The width of the resulting gap between the panels shall not be greater than 1 mm and the sealing strips
shall not protrude proud of the surface of the formwork panels. Alternatively, subject to the approval of the
Engineer, joints between formwork panels may be sealed with an approved filler provided the butting
edges of the panels are smooth and the resulting gap between the panels is not wider than 1 mm. Joints
between formwork panels shall not be sealed by tape fixed to the formwork faces.
Formwork for Class F4 and F5 finishes shall be protected from spillages, rust marks and stains.
12.6.5. Built-in components
Built-in components void formers and box-outs shall be fixed in position before concreting. Unless
permitted by the Engineer. void formers and box-outs shall not be used instead of built-in components.
Polystyrene shall not be used for void formers and box-outs unless permitted by the Engineer.
12.7. Application of Release Agents
12.7.1. Application of release agents
A release agent shall be used on all formwork other than permanent formwork and formwork on which a
surface retarder is used to produce a Class T1 finish. The release agent shall be applied by the method and
at the rate of application recommended by the manufacturer or as demonstrated to be satisfactory by use
in the trial panel.

Formwork faces shall be cleaned before release agents are applied.
Concrete. reinforcement and built-in components shall not be contaminated by release agents.
Each type of release agent used on formwork for Class F4 and F5 finishes shall be obtained from one
manufacturer and different types of release agent shall not be used on formwork for the same element.
Release agents shall be applied to formwork for Class F4 and F5 finishes after the formwork has been
erected and before the reinforcement is fixed or, if this is not practicable. immediately before the formwork
is erected. The release agent covering shall be complete and uniform.
12.8. Inspection of Formwork and Reinforcement
12.8.1. Inspection of formwork and reinforcement
The Contractor shall allow the Engineer to inspect the completed formwork and reinforcement, including
trial panels, before carrying out any work, including fixing reinforcement adjacent to formwork and erecting
formwork adjacent to reinforcement, which will make access to the formwork faces or reinforcement
difficult. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer 24 hours, or such shorter period agreed by the Engineer,
before carry out such work.
The Contractor shall allow the Engineer to inspect formwork for Class F4 and F5 finishes before it is erected
and shall inform the Engineer 24 hours, or such shorter period agreed by the Engineer, before erecting the
formwork.
12.9. Removal of Falsework and Formwork
12.9.1. Times for removal of falsework and formwork
Except as stated below, falsework and formwork shall not be loosened or removed before the minimum
times stated in Table 8.6 have elapsed. The times stated are for a minimum ambient temperature of 15°C,
for elements without superimposed loads and for concrete containing OPC, PPFAC or both OPC and PFA
not exceeding the OPC replacement level as specified in Section 8.. If other conditions apply, particulars of
proposed changes to the minimum times shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Falsework and formwork supporting concrete in flexure may be loosened or removed when the strength of
the concrete in that element is 10 MPa or twice the stress to which it will be subjected, whichever is greater,
provided that deflection which in the opinion of the Engineer is unacceptable will not result and that
superimposed loads will not be applied. The strength of the concrete shall be determined from tests on test
cubes which have been made with concrete from the same pour and which have been cured by the same
method and under similar conditions as the concrete in the element.
Table 8.6

12.9.2. Removal of falsework and formwork
Formwork shall be removed without hammering or levering to the concrete and in such a manner that
there is no shock, disturbance, damage or loading to the concrete. Side formwork shall be removed without
disturbing soffit formwork and soffit formwork shall be removed without disturbing props except as stated
below.
Individual props may be removed to allow the removal of soffit formwork provided that the formwork, has
been designed accordingly and that each prop is replaced as soon as the formwork has been removed.
Falsework and formwork for Class F5 finishes shall be loosened and removed in a continuous operation
and in accordance with a consistent programme agreed by the Engineer. All formwork shall be loosened
before individual panels are removed and all formwork shall be removed within the programmed period.
Individual panels or make-up pieces shall not be left in position.
After removal, formwork which is intended for re-use shall be cleaned and stored as stated in Section 12.5..
12.10. Unformed Finishes
12.10.1. Unformed finishes
Unformed finishes shall be produced by the methods stated in Table 8.2.
Brushing to produce a Class U4 finish shall be carried out in straight lines in a direction agreed by the
Engineer; brushing shall be carried out when the concrete has hardened sufficiently for the float marks to
be removed and for the ridges to be formed without displacing the aggregate.
Floating and trowelling shall not be carried out until the concrete has hardened sufficiently to allow the
specified finish to be produced with the minimum amount of floating and trowelling such that excess
laitance is not produced.
12.11. Treated Finishes
12.11.1. Treated finishes
Treated finishes shall be produced by constructing a concrete surface with a Class F3 or U3 finish as
appropriate and applying the treatment to the surface by the methods stated in Table 8.3.
The treatment shall be applied in a continuous operation in accordance with a consistent programme
agreed by the Engineer.
12.11.2. Class T1 finish
Washing and brushing to produce a Class T1 finish shall not be carried out until the concrete has hardened
sufficiently for the cement matrix to be removed without disturbing the coarse aggregate. After washing and
brushing have been completed and the concrete surface has hardened, the surface shall be cleaned.

The cement matrix shall not be removed or the aggregate exposed by mechanical methods unless
permitted by the Engineer.
Class T1 finishes may be produced by using a surface retarder applied to the formwork or to the concrete
surface. The surface retarder shall be applied by the method and at the rate of application recommended
by the manufacturer. or as demonstrated to be satisfactory by use on the trial panel.
Plywood to which a surface retarder is to be applied shall be sealed with barrier paint, polyurethane varnish
or other impermeable material agreed by the Engineer. The formwork shall be removed in small sections
and the coarse aggregate exposed by washing and brushing the concrete surface.
Unless permitted by the Engineer, formwork to which a surface retarder has been applied shall not be re-
used unless a surface retarder is to be used again on the formwork. Formwork to which a surface retarder
has been applied and which is to be re-used shall be cleaned before the retarder is applied.
12.11.3. Class T2 and T3 finishes
Point tooling to produce Class T2 finishes and bush hammering to produce Class T3 finishes shall be
carried out evenly in small areas and not in distinct lines. Tooling and hammering shall not start until at
least 7 days after concreting.
12.11.4. Class T4 finish
Hammering or chiselling to produce a Class T4 finish shall be applied from only one direction, and only
either hammering or chiselling shall be applied, on any one face. Hammering and chiselling shall not start
until at least 14 days after concreting.
12.11.5. Class T5 and T6 finishes
Blasting to produce Class T5 and T6 finishes shall not be carried out until the concrete has hardened
sufficiently for the cement matrix to be removed without disturbing the coarse aggregate. Adjacent surfaces
shall be protected from blasting and dust shall be controlled by screens and by water-spraying.
12.12. Compliance of Finishes
12.12.1. Inspection of finishes
Before any subsequent work is carried out on a concrete surface, the surface shall be inspected by the
Engineer to determine if the specified finish has been produced. Formed finishes shall be inspected as
soon as the formwork has been removed.
Blowholes or holes left by formwork ties and components shall not be filled and spatterdash or other
coverings shall not be applied before the inspection; any such filling or covering carried out before the
inspection may be rejected.

12.12.2. Compliance of finishes
Concrete surfaces shall have the characteristics stated in Tables 8.1 and 8.2 for the different Classes of
formed and unforrned finish before any subsequent work is carried out on the concrete surface and shall
have the characteristics stated in Table 8.3 for the different Classes of treated finish.
The Engineer shall determine if the specified finish has been produced and may use the trial panels as a
means of comparison.
Abrupt irregularities shall be measured by direct measurement.
Gradual irregularities shall be measured using a 2 m long straight edge on surfaces intended to be flat and
by a method agreed by the Engineer on other surfaces.
12.13. Work on Concrete Surfaces
12.13.1. Remedial and repair work on concrete surfaces
Remedial or repair work shall not be carried out on concrete surfaces unless permitted by the Engineer; any
such work carried out without permission may be rejected.
12.13.2. Filling blowholes and formwork tie holes
Blowholes exceeding 10 mm in size shall be filled with cement mortar. The size of blowholes shall be the
maximum dimension measured across the hole on the concrete surface.
If the number and size of blowholes in concrete surfaces with Class F3, F4 and F5 finishes is in the opinion
of the Engineer greater than in the trial panel the blowholes shall be filled, unless in the opinion of the
Engineer filling is not required.
Holes left by formwork ties and components shall be cleaned and filled by ramming cement mortar into the
holes in layers. Holes in concrete surfaces with a Class F5 finish shall be filled to a level slightly below the
concrete surface; the holes shall not be overfilled and rubbed down.
Filling of blowholes and holes left by formwork ties and components shall be carried out as soon as
practicable after the Engineer named the finish and with the minimum interruption to curing.
12.13.3. Spatterdash
Spatterdash shall consist of cement and coarse sand or granite fines in the proportions 1:2 by volume
mixed with the minimum amount of water necessary to achieve the consistency of a thick slurry.
Spatterdash shall be thrown with a hand trowel onto the surface to a thickness not exceeding 6 mm and
shall cover at least 60% of the area which is to be plastered or rendered. Spatterdash shall be wetted one
hour after application and shall be allowed to cure and harden before under coats are applied.

Spatterdash shall be applied as soon as practicable after the Engineer has inspected the finish and after
the concrete surface has been cleaned and wetted.
12.14. Protection of Finishes
12.14.1. Protection of finishes
Materials, Constructional Plant or other vehicles shall not use or be placed on or against concrete surfaces
Concrete surfaces with Class F4. F5. U5 and T finishes shall be protected from running water, spillages,
rust-marks and stains by covering the surface with polyethylene sheeting or timber or by other methods
agreed by the Engineer. Protection from rust-marks caused by reinforcement bars shall be by polyethylene
sleeves tied to the bars or by coating the bars with cement slurry; the bars shall not be coated with oil or
grease.
Concrete surfaces with Class F4. F5. U5 and T finishes shall be protected from damage by securing timber
battens to the surface. by erecting barriers or fences or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
Concrete surfaces with a Class F5 finish shall be protected from exposure to extreme variations in weather
conditions for at least 14 days after the formwork has been removed.

13. CANTILEVER FORM TRAVELLER
FROM RUBRICA

14. METHOD FOR PRECAST CONCRETE SEGMENTAL WORK
1. Description
1.1. General
This Specification Section consists of preparation, fabrication, transportation and erection of precast
segment concrete for the approach bridges, prepared and constructed in accordance with this
Specification Section and Drawings.
Bridges constructed for segmentally placed superstructures shall conform to the requirements specified in
these Specification Section, based on the concrete placement method and the erection method to be used
as follows:
(a) Span-by-span construction
• Span-by-span (SBS) construction is defined as construction where the precast segments are assembled
using a steel erection girder on the entire span between permanent piers. The erection girder is removed
after application of post tensioning to make the span capable of supporting its own weight and any
construction loads.
2. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1. REFERENCE STANDARDS
The following Standard in its latest edition shall be applied to Works covered by this Specification Section.
Prestressed Concrete Technical Standards.
•“Specification for Design and Construction of Precast Segmental & External Cable Construction Method”
by Prestressed Concrete Institute.
Besides the above, in general, all materials shall comply with the requirements of the relevant Standard of
the Eurocodes in their latest editions, or other local and/or international standard specifications approved
by the Engineer.
2.2. MATERIALS FOR SEGMENT
2.2.1. CONCRETE
The concrete class to be used for pre-cast segments shall be as indicated in the Drawings, and shall
comply with the requirements of Specification Section “Structural Concrete”.
2.2.2. PRESTRESSING STEEL AND GROUTING
Material requirements of prestressing steel strands / bars, duct and grouting to be used for pre-cast
segments shall be referred to Subsection “Material Requirements” of Specification Section “Prestressed

Concrete” or indicated by the Engineer. Prestressing steel strands / bars shall be of the size indicated in the
Drawings.
2.2.3. REINFORCEMENT BAR
Material requirements of reinforcement bar to be used for pre-cast segments shall be referred to
Subsection “Material Requirements” of Specification Section “Reinforcement Bar”. Reinforcement bar shall
be of the size indicated in the Drawings.
2.2.4. SUPPLY OF MATERIALS
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for approval, samples of the materials to be provided, and the
names of the respective manufacturers and suppliers from whom he proposes to provide the materials
required for precast construction. The quality of the provided material shall be certified by the suppliers, and
by testing of the submitted samples under the supervision of the Engineer, at the Contractor’s expense.
3. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
3.1. GENERAL
All precast segments shall be constructed by short-line match-casting method at a fabrication yard in the
presence of the Engineer or his representative.
The segments shall be fabricated at the bed for the short-line match-casting method. In order to secure the
proper fabrication procedure, the existing ground condition shall be adequately improved. After the
completion of the fabrication, the segments shall be shifted to the temporary storage area by a transfer
crane of sufficient capacity. All segments shall be carefully stocked to the lines and spacing and shall be
transported to the erection site.
3.2. DESIGN CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE OF APPROACH BRIDGES
The design sequence of a phased construction of a bridge superstructure is hereby specified. The
Contractor shall design, execute and complete the work in accordance with the relevant Specification
Sections and the Engineer’s instructions. The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the adequacy,
stability and safety of all site operations and a method of construction which is developed by the
Contractor. Any failure of the Contractor to adopt the method described and acknowledged in this
Specification Section shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for executing the work.
The Contractor shall consider the requirements for erection of girders as described below based on the
Project conditions. However, the Contractor shall be responsible in making his own plan to implement the
works. Such plan shall not relieve the Contractor’s responsibility to accomplish the work, when it is adopted.
• The PC box girders will be erected from abutment side toward river side . The construction schedule of
the PC box girders shall be considered the construction schedule of adjacent Steel Box Girders.

• The longitudinal tendons (external and internal) will be stressed in accordance with the order shown in
the design drawings.
• The transverse tendons for deck slab of standard segments will be stressed in the construction yard prior
to transportation to the site, while those for deck slab of pier table segments will be stressed on site.
• The outline of erection girder shall be designed as indicated in the Drawings.
3.3. SUBMITTALS
Prior to the commencement of segment operations, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for
approval, a method statement giving details of proposed segment casting methods, including, but not
limited to,:
• Plan of fabrication yard including casting bed for short line match casting method, soil improvement plan,
lifting facility and temporary storage yard;
• Fabrication procedure for segments, including the segment fabrication flow, rebar work, prestressed
concrete tendons works, formworks, concrete works, removal of the forms and separation of the segments,
prestressing works for deck slab, and transportation for segment;
• Geometry control plan for segment production including the principle of manufacturing segment,
geometry control methodology flow for segment, and survey method;
• Method of support for segments during storage (including method of stacking of segments, if necessary)
with study and necessary countermeasures for bearing capacity of soil and safety of members (both
precast segments and temporary works).
• Summary of all design load assumptions for erection of girders;
• Step-by-step confirmation of the strength and serviceability of the structure at each stage of construction;
• Calculation of required cambers taking into account the effects of creep, shrinkage of concrete and
temperature;
• Full design details of temporary structures such as erection girder and temporary bracing;
• Proposed type of epoxy resin adhesive and construction plan;
• Proposed methods for calculation of the jacking forces and extensions for the external cables, if
necessary, including stressing of tendons for segment connection;
• Sufficient details to allow a review of effects of the proposed erection procedure for the structure.
3.4. FORMWORK

Formworks for precast segment shall conform to the general requirements for concrete formworks as
described under Specification Section for structural concrete. Such forms shall consist of edge forms, side
forms, inner forms and bottom forms.
The edge forms will be equipped with a sliding mechanism in order to satisfy the change in length of
segments. The side forms will be equipped with the open and close mechanism. The inner forms will be
equipped with a shifting mechanism. The side forms will be supported by the temporary platform arranged
under the slab of the cantilever and opened or closed using a jack equipment as the supporting points are
of pinned mechanism. The inner forms will be set on the main beams of the temporary platform equipped
with the sliding mechanism. During the placing of concrete, the main beam will be supported by a
suspension system from the top slab of the old segment. The side and inner forms will be connected with
the tie bar in order to resist concrete pressure.
The bottom forms of the old segment will be adjusted by putting on and taking off in order to satisfy the
change in length of segments. The bottom forms of new segment will be supported by the beam of bottom
slab and the vertical jack. The old segment will be supported by the mobile platform equipped with a
vertical hydraulic jack.
3.5. CASTING OF CONCRETE
The sheaths for prestressing tendons shall be supported at the interval of 1.0m or shorter, in order to avoid
unfavorable displacement of the sheaths due to casting of concrete. Drop or adverse deviation of sheaths
at joints shall be avoided by countermeasures such as use of sheaths with sufficient stiffness, insertion of
flexible pipes into sheaths across the joints etc.
To obtain match-cast joint, the new segment shall be cast against the previously cast segment before
transverse presstressing of the deck slab, in order to avoid adverse deformation of the new segment due to
the transverse prestressing of old segment.
3.6. CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
The construction tolerance shall be as specified in Specification Sections unless a particular requirement is
stipulated below:

3.7. LIFTING FACILITY
The Contractor shall allocate a fabrication yard which will consist of a facility for a transfer crane to shift and
move segments, and a gantry crane of sufficient capacity to install rebar and form of segments. The
proposed details at the lifting points of the segments and the proposed method of lifting and supporting the
segment shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 7 days prior to manufacture of segments.
3.8. HANDLING AND TEMPORARY STORAGE YARD
The position and mode of attachment of slings or other tackle for guiding and controlling the movement of
the segments during lifting and transport shall be approved by the Engineer. Special care shall be taken to
protect the segments from damage due to slings and other tackle.
No superimposed loads or secondary load components resulting from handling, storage or transport shall
be placed on any segment.
At all means all segments shall be secured in an upright position by suitable means.
During storage of segments, the tip of tendon sheaths at the joints of segments shall be covered by caps
etc. against penetration of rainwater and other fluids, in order to protect the sheaths from corrosion.
The types of temporary supports, position of supports at box girder soffits, method of supporting of
segments etc. shall be described in the method statements The segment shall be kept in stockyard until the
erection period. The structure of temporary stock yard, improvement of soft soil (if necessary) etc. shall also
be described in the method statement.
3.9. TRANSPORTATION
Segment shall not be transported to the bridge site until concrete test cylinders representing the concrete in
the segments have reached strength of not less than the specified 28 days strength as indicated
Specification Section.
During transportation, segments shall be handled and supported properly to avoid damage. Segments
shall be securely fixed to the transporter to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.10. ERECTION OF SEGMENTS
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, a detailed proposal outlining the proposed construction
sequence. The submission shall incorporate detailed methodology, shop and erection drawings based on
the proposed construction sequence, together with the corresponding complete and checked erection

design calculations. The package shall be submitted at least 12 weeks prior to the commencement of
construction of the SBS segments.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed design of the erection plant, equipment and temporary
works, as well as for ensuring the structural adequacy and stability of all such items when used based on
proposed construction sequence or the construction sequence shown in the Drawings.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the static and dynamic stability of the structure during all stages of
construction. In the development of the Design, detailed computation for construction stage had been
conducted. However, the Contractor shall conduct its own assessment of the data and materials contained
therein. The Contractor shall confirm with their erection method statement and ensure that their erection
scheme will adequately provide stability of the structure at all stages of the construction.
The Contractor shall take account of all loads and material effects. It shall prescribe theoretical vertical deck
profiles for all stages of construction, and the application of superimposed dead loads such as bridge
furniture and deck wearing surfaces. Vertical profiles beyond completion shall also be predicted, and at
which time, all time-dependent rheological effects can be assumed to have taken place.
The bridge geometry given in the Drawings is based on a mean deck temperature described in the detailed
design report/calculations. The Contractor shall achieve this bridge geometry in accordance with the
contract documents. The Contractor shall be aware of the fact that direct exposure to the sun on the sides
or parts of the bridge will have a significant effect on the deflections, which might be far greater than the
specified construction tolerances. The Contractor shall therefore in general conduct global profile surveys
and associated measurements at times when solar irradiation has negligible effects, and also provide
values of the influence coefficients for critical deflections due to the temperature gradients, which might be
anticipated.
3.11. PASTING MATERIAL FOR JOINTING
Epoxy resin adhesives to be used for jointing precast segments shall meet the requirements of American
Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) “Specification for Epoxy Resin Adhesive for Precast Concrete (for Bridge
Beam)”. According to type of material, mixing types of two liquids or one liquid type, as required, shall be
adopted.
Epoxy resin adhesives shall be applied to the whole area of joint surface.
During re-matching period, proper control of adhesive shall be conducted so that there will be no adhesive
leaking into the sheath.
3.12. JOINTING SEGMENT
Jointing segment shall be conducted during available usage time of epoxy resin adhesive.
For the joint surfaces, all necessary plans for temporary prestressed concrete tendons shall be prepared in
advance and submitted to the Engineer for approval.

Any uneven surface at the deck between each segment may cause obstruction for smooth waterproof
construction. In such cases, proper remedy shall be provided by the Contractor.
Treatment of epoxy resin adhesive after re-matching segment shall be carefully conducted.
During jointing work, the joint surfaces of segments shall be kept in uniform compression of 0.3 N/mm2 or
greater by temporary PC bars until epoxy resin adhesive at joint surfaces is hardened to develops required
strength. The time required for hardening of epoxy resin adhesive shall be confirmed by the study and
testing prior to the jointing work.
During jointing work, leakage of epoxy resin adhesive into tendon sheaths shall be avoided by appropriate
countermeasures such as placing sponge sealing around the tip of sheath etc. The thickness of sealing
shall be determined so as not to disturb jointing work or required adhesion area.
4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.1. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
The quantity of precast segments to be paid shall be the actual number of segments in place of the
completed and accepted work. Measurements shall be made in accordance with the Drawings.
4.2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment for Precast Segment Concrete approved by the Engineer shall be conducted in accordance with
applicable Unit Prices as indicated on the Bid Price Schedule, wherein payment shall be considered as full
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and performing all work to complete the
fabrication, transportation and erection of segments. The item includes, but not limited to, the following:
1) Fabrication and transportation
• All costs of construction of the segment(s) including all materials, fabrication, prestressing work in the
fabrication yard, transportation to the stock yard at site, assembling and any kind of incidental work
2) Erection
• Erection of segments includes transportation from stock yard at site to the designated location
(construction), lifting, applying epoxy resin adhesive, erection, dismantling the all tools and equipment for
erection, and excluding prestressing works at construction site. All fees and expenses for the works of the
prestressing work at construction site shall be deemed to be included in pay items described in the Section
Prestressed Concrete.
• The price and payment shall be full compensation for all labor, tools, equipment, safety measures,
incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed.
The pay item for concrete and any related activities for segmental concrete are covered under other
sections. This section covers only items mentioned in paragraph (a) above.

Payment for fabrication and transportation of Precast Concrete Segment shall include the work of materials
and installation of concrete, reinforcement bars. Payment for erection of Precast Concrete
Segment shall include hauling to construction site and erection.

15. METHOD FOR INSITU CONCRETE SEGMENTAL WORK
FROM PAIRA

16. BRIDGE BEARINGS
FROM PADMA

17. SEISMIC ISOLATION DEVICES
FROM PADMA

18. EXPANSION AND FILLER JOINTS
FROM PADMA

19. DECK AND BURIED STRUCTURE WATERPROOFING
FROM PADMA

20. DECK SURFACING
XX

21. ACCESS EQUIPMENT
FROM PADMA

22. RIVER WORKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE BRIDGE
FROM PADMA

23. HANDRAILING, LADDERS, STAIRS AND FLOORING
FROM PADMA

24. GUIDELINES FOR SAFETY IN CONSTRUCTION PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
FROM PAIRA

25. CONCRETE PARAPET
FROM PAIRA

26. FILL BEHIND STRUCTURES AND BEDDING IN FOUNDATIONS OF BOX

CULVERTS
FROM PAIRA

27. RAIN WATER PIPES AND WEEP HOLES
FROM PAIRA

28. ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING
XX

29. ROADWAY LIGHTING
XX

30. ROAD MARKINGS
XX

31. TRAFFIC SIGNS
XX



Annexure 1: xxxxx

Annexure 2: yyyyy


TR8138 JV DD G002 TS SE 000001 Technical Specifications D01V01a

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TR8138 JV DD G002 TS SE 000001 Technical Specifications D01V01a

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INTERIM

VARIATION ORDER NO.01

Government of the People’s Republic of Bangladesh

Quality Control sheet

Recipient Bangladesh Bridge Authority (BBA)

Notes Document created by the Joint Venture formed by TYPSA-DOHWA-NIPPON KOEI-DDC-

Master Plan Project. Phase 2: Feasibility Study 679955359.docx

PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION.................................................................................................................................................. 23

0.1. Scope and General Information......................................................................................................................................... 25

0.1.1.Location and description of the Project......................................................................................................................... 25

0.1.2.Extent of the Works.................................................................................................................................................................. 25

0.2. Site Areas, Access and Use.................................................................................................................................................. 31

0.2.1.Boundaries of the Site............................................................................................................................................................ 31

0.2.3.Contractor’s Working Areas................................................................................................................................................. 33

0.2.7.Cleanliness and reinstatement.......................................................................................................................................... 34

0.2.8.Disposal and pollution........................................................................................................................................................... 35

0.2.9.Health and Safety on Site..................................................................................................................................................... 35

0.2.10. Temporary Works........................................................................................................................................................... 36

0.2.11. Works off Site.................................................................................................................................................................... 37

0.2.12. Notice to Mariners & Civil Aviation Authority..................................................................................................... 37

0.2.13. Contractor’s Programme and Method Statements........................................................................................ 37

0.3. General and Sundry obligations........................................................................................................................................ 41

0.3.1.Surveys and setting out......................................................................................................................................................... 41

0.3.3.Progress Photographs and Video Record.................................................................................................................... 42

0.3.4.Water Level Gauges and Meteorological Station..................................................................................................... 42

Master Plan Project. Phase 2: Feasibility Study 679955359.docx

0.4. Special Requirements............................................................................................................................................................. 52

0.4.2.Visiting Dignitaries, Seminars, Training, Educational and other Brochures................................................53

0.4.3.Operation and Maintenance Manual............................................................................................................................. 53

0.5. Programme and Progress Reports and Returns........................................................................................................ 54

0.5.3.Daily Records and Weekly Returns.................................................................................................................................. 55

0.5.5.Submission of Returns '......................................................................................................................................................... 56

0.6. Quality Assurance, Standards and Materials Testing.............................................................................................. 56

0.6.3.Tests and Inspection Records............................................................................................................................................ 56

0.6.4.Contractor’s Testing and Inspection............................................................................................................................... 57

0.6.5.Engineer’s Testing and Inspection................................................................................................................................... 57

0.6.6.Notice of Works Off Site........................................................................................................................................................ 57

0.6.10. Orders for Materials....................................................................................................................................................... 59

0.7. Engineer’s and Employer’s Requirements.................................................................................................................... 59

0.7.4.Removal of Facilities on Completion.............................................................................................................................. 61

0.7.5.Communications, Internet and IT Services.................................................................................................................. 61

Master Plan Project. Phase 2: Feasibility Study 679955359.docx

0.8. Engineer’s and Employer’s Site Office............................................................................................................................ 62

0.8.2.Prefabricated Office Accommodation............................................................................................................................ 62

0.9. Engineer’s Laboratory............................................................................................................................................................. 65

0.9.3.Building and Utilities............................................................................................................................................................... 66

0.9.6.Maintenance of Engineer’s Laboratories...................................................................................................................... 68

0.10. Engineer’s and Employer’s Accommodation.................................................................................................... 69

0.10.2. Prefabricated Residential Accommodation....................................................................................................... 69

0.10.4. Meals for Residents of Engineer’s and Employer’s Accommodation....................................................71

0.11. Communications and IT Facilities.......................................................................................................................... 72

0.12. Engineer’s and Employer’s Transport................................................................................................................... 73

0.12.4. Berthing Facilities for Boats....................................................................................................................................... 76

0.13. Survey Equipment Supplied to the Engineer and Employer.....................................................................76

0.13.2. Survey Equipment.......................................................................................................................................................... 77

0.13.3. GPS Reference Station................................................................................................................................................. 79

Master Plan Project. Phase 2: Feasibility Study 679955359.docx

0.14. Removal and/or relocation of Existing Utilities................................................................................................. 80

0.15. Provisional Visitor Centre............................................................................................................................................ 80

1.3. Dust and Drainage Control................................................................................................................................................... 85

2.1. Glossary of Terms..................................................................................................................................................................... 86

2.1.2.Earthworks final surface........................................................................................................................................................ 86

2.1.5.Intermediate areas of fill........................................................................................................................................................ 86